Home

2711E-6.14, PanelBuilder 1400e Software for Windows User Manual

1. Key Character Key Character ALT 0187 ALT 0194 ALT 0188 ALT 0195 ALT 0189 ALT 0196 BEES ALT 0190 ALT 0197 ALT 0198 ALT 0205 ears ALT 0199 ALT 0206 ii ALT 0200 ALT 0207 EGER ALT 0201 ALT 0208 Jl Jl ALT 0202 a ALT 0209 Publication 2711 6 14 November 1998 The Extended Character Set B 7
2. Key Character Key Character ALT 0242 ALT 0250 oO ALT 0243 ALT 0251 ALT 0244 ALT 0252 ALT 0245 ALT 0253 ALT 0246 ALT 0254 E ALT 0247 m ALT 0255 ml Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PLC Addressing Syntax Appendix C Addressing Syntax This appendix describes the addressing syntax for PLCs SLCs Remote I O ControlNet Scheduled mode For more information specific to your PLC refer to your PLC s user documentation The following section provides addressing syntax for the following types of programmable controllers e PLC 2 e PLC 3 PLC 5 which includes the PLC 5 10 PLC 5 12 PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 e PLC 5 Enhanced which includes the PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 20C PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 40C PLC 5 60 PLC 5 80 Logix55xx in PLC 5 Legacy mode communications PLC 2 aaaa bb aaaa Address 0 7777 octal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 17 octal Example of digital address 11 17 Example of analog and string addr
3. Key Character Key Character ALT 01 ALT 02 ALT 04 d ALT 05 L ALT 06 ALT 07 ALT 010 ALT 011 ALT 012 ALT 014 ALT 015 J ALT 016 ALT 017 ALT 018 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 B 2 The Extended Character Set Key Character Key Character ALT 019 ALT 020 EN ALT 021 ALT 023 ALT 024 ALT 025 ALT 026 ALT 029 ALT 030 ALT 031 ALT 0128 ALT 0135 LI ii ALT 0129 ALT 0136 ALT 0130 ALT 0137 ALT 0131 ALT 0138 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998
4. conveyrl bmp di Network Save file as type Drives Windows Bitmaps bmi 3 In the Save As dialog box choose a path and file name for the image file and click OK Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Drawing Objects Creating Objects 9 33 The following table shows the tools you use to draw shapes to illustrate your screens To create perfect circles or squares hold down SHIFT while dragging the ellipse or rectangle tool s pointer The table also illustrates the elements you can format for each drawing object Use this tool To draw Hold down sHiFT to draw Line Foreground Background Fill Border iine Tool Straight lines in any Lines that are horizontal in i meres direction vertical or at a 45 angle E Rectangle Tool A rectangle or square A square i I An ellipse or circle A circle w i w Ellipse Tool f An open segment of an An open segment of a circle w Arc Tool ellipse or circle A closed segment of an A closed segment of a circle w w w a Wedge Tool ellipse or circle Panel Tool A rectangular object to use square panel i as a background for other objects To draw a line rectangle ellipse or panel 1 Choose the object tool from the Objects menu or toolbox 2 Position the pointer where you want to begin drawing 3 If you are
5. Programmable Controller Scanner Type Rack Address Type Ranges PLC 2 1772 SD SD2 1 7 Octal PLC 3 1775 5 4A B 0 76 Octal PLC 3 1775 S5 0 76 Octal PLC 3 10 1775 SR5 0 17 Octal PLC 5 11 Built in 3 Only PLC 5 15 Built in 1 3 Octal PLC 5 20 Built in 1 3 Octal PLC 5 20C Built in 1 3 Octal PLC 5 25 Built in 1 7 Octal PLC 5 30 Built in 1 7 Octal PLC 5 40 Built in 1 17 Octal PLC 5 40C Built in 1 17 Octal PLC 5 60 Built in 1 27 Octal PLC 5 80 Built in 1 27 Octal PLC 5 250 5150 RS 0 37 Octal SLC 5 02 5 03 5 04 1747 SN SerA 0 3 Decimal SLC 5 02 5 03 5 04 1747 SN SerB 0 3 Decimal IBM PC 6008 51 0 7 Octal VME Bus 6008 S V 0 7 Octal DEC Q Bus 6008 50 0 7 Octal Other 1771 SN Sub Scanner 1 7 Octal Logix55 xx DHRIO Module 76 Octal For more information about each type of programmable controller refer to Chapter 1 Introducing PanelView Terminals in the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual The terminal appears as one or more I O racks to a programmable controller It has the same configurability as and more than a standard I O rack Refer to the Allen Bradley Programmable Controller and Remote I O Scanner user s manuals for connection and Remote I O configuration limitations You can connect the PanelView terminal to a DH network The terminal can then communicate with all the controllers o
6. Cla Back Membre Access Full Lassen elg em Data Entry F lt Module Groups Q1 4 Lest Chasis NE nem last Grai access 0 1 SpreadsheetViewer lt 2 3 4 I Far Help press F1 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To define network file transfer controls 1 In the Network File Transfer tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog box select one of the controls and click Assign Tag to choose a tag You can assign a digital or analog tag although a digital tag is recommended The Tag Browser dialog box appears 2 Select a tag from the Tags list or choose New Tag to create a new tag For more detailed information about the Tag Editor dialog box refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the other two controls Before you can define tags for objects windows or PLC I O Control options you need to define the device type and racks that these tags will address This is done in the RIO Racks editor using the Rack Assignments worksheet you prepared in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Important When you change the rack number of a rack assignment already used by a tag block transfer file or Pass Through control byte all references to the rack are updated to reflect the new number To open the Rack Editor dialog box Open the PLC Communications folder Choose RIO Racks or in the toolbar T
7. D 3 Appendix E What Is Version Control E 1 Version Control and Application Validation E 1 Target Firmware Version vs Actual Firmware Version E 1 Version 1 03 Firmware Features E 2 Version 2 Firmware E 2 Version 3 Firmware Features E 3 Version 4 Firmware Features E 3 Version 5 Firmware Features E 3 Version Control and Downloading Applications E 4 Version Control at the PanelView E 5 Appendix F Index Welcome to PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Preface Preface Welcome to Allen Bradley s PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 5 With this software you can create applications in the Microsoft Windows 3 1 or later Windows 95 and Windows NT 4 0 operating systems You can use the PanelBuilder applications in PanelView M 1000e 1200e or 1400e terminals or PanelView 1200 Series F and later terminals that have been enhanced to MC catalog numbers PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 provides expanded hardware support to allow you to create applications for a wider variety of environments terminals and networks ControlNet 1 5 Scheduled Mode Operation PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 allo
8. e manare kl Legea zal VERI BE apu LED cui copy amp Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Expressions 7 21 The left hand side of the Expression Editor window shows the list of components which can be used to construct an expression You can double click any of the headings to collapse or expand the list The list is categorized as follows Construct List Constructs which are used to create an expression Constructs are used to create a set of alternative courses of action when a particular value is found in the object Dimension List Data types which are used when you create variables for use in expressions If you want to create a variable for use in an expression you must declare its name but declaring a data type for the variable is optional Miscellaneous Commands which may be used each on their own line anywhere in an expression Comparison List Comparison operators which are used for comparing values Logical List Logical operators which are used to include or exclude values based on Boolean logic Arithmetic List Operators for performing arithmetic The right hand side of the Expression Editor window is divided into two parts The Expression section consists of a drop down list containing all the controls for the dialog from which the Expression editor was launched Below the control name is a text area
9. 2 28 The Discrete 1 0 Usage Worksheet 2 29 The Block Transfer File 1 0 Usage Worksheet 2 30 The Rack Assignments Worksheet 2 32 Recording the PLC Scanner Type 2 33 Selecting the Baud 2 34 Assigning Racks 2 34 The Block Transfer File Worksheet 2 35 Assigning Pass Through 2 36 Dur Your Plan artes s xcd repee aka vr EET 2 36 Planning ControlNet Communications 2 37 Using Worksheets to Plan Communications 2 37 The Communications 5 2 38 Defining s srs se stant ote needle do mre agde e 2 39 Recording Node Information 2 39 ControlNet Addressing 2 40 DHFAddressing 2 3249 die Aet E bp ERO 2 41 DH Networks Bridged by 1785 KA 2 41 Multiple DH Networks Connected by a Pyramid Integrator 2 42 Defining Scan Classes ii siete ed tr bled epee te 2 44 Guidelines for Configuring Scan Classes 2 44 Recording Scan Class Information 2 45 Defining Scheduled Files 2 46 Recording Scheduled File Information 2 46 Planning
10. This number of binary states Requires this many bits 1 2 1 3 4 2 5 8 3 9 16 4 17 32 5 33 64 6 65 128 7 129 256 8 257 512 9 513 1024 10 1025 2048 11 2049 4096 12 4097 8192 13 8193 16384 14 16385 32768 15 32769 65536 16 e Bit Position This data type is a contiguous bit string The position of the least significant on bit in the bit string determines the value of the tag The number of bits required depends on the maximum number of states Use this formula to determine the number of bits an object requires Number of bits Maximum State Value Minimum State Value This data type can also be used for objects controlled by PLC outputs For example you could configure a Multistate Indicator to have 12 states with state values O to 11 each with unique text and attributes The PLC output address would then be an 11 bit string The bit set by the PLC would determine the state displayed by the terminal Important If more than one bit is set at a time the terminal considers only the lowest bit set Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 26 Planning Applications e BCD Binary Coded Decimal If you assign one of the BCD data types the object s PLC control word will be a contiguous bit string of one of these numbers of bits This number of BCD digits Requires this many bits 1 BCD digit 4 2 BCD digits 8 3 BCD digits 12 4 BCD digits 16 5 BCD digits 20 6 BCD digits
11. Key Character Key Character E NN ALT 0148 ALT 0155 NN ALT 0156 ALT 0163 uu ALT 0157 ALT 0164 n emm ALT 0158 ALT 0165 H ALT 0159 ALT 0166 NN m ALT 0160 a ALT 0167 i ALT 0161 ALT 0168 M ALT 0162 ALT 0169 ALT 0170 ALT 0177 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Extended Character Set B 5 Key Character Key Character ALT 0171 ALT 0178 ALT 0172 l ALT 0179 ALT 0173 i ALT 0180 ALT 0174 TE ALT 0181 3 ALT 0175 ALT 0182 1 ALT 0176 ALT 0183 T ALT 0184 ALT 0191 ALT 0185 ALT 0192 L ALT 0186 ALT 0193 ub Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 B 6 The Extended Character Set
12. Key Character Key Character ALT 0203 ALT 0210 T T ALT 0204 ALT 0211 ll ALT 0212 L ALT 0219 ALT 0213 F ALT 0220 ALT 0214 n ALT 0221 ALT 0215 T ALT 0222 ALT 0216 ALT 0223 II ALT 0217 J ALT 0224 ALT 0218 ALT 0225 F Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 B 8 The Extended Character Set Key Character Key Character ALT 0226 L ALT 0233 ALT 0227 ALT 0234 ALT 0228 ALT 0235 ALT 0229 ALT 0236 ALT 0230 p ALT 0237 i ALT 0231 ALT 0238 ALT 0232 4 ALT 0239 imn ALT 0240 m ALT 0248 MEN ALT 0241 ALT 0249 EN Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Extended Character Set B 9
13. 9 37 Copying Graphic Images 9 37 Deleting Objects 9 37 Diph aung dorsi cuit wed wees ad wns 9 37 SND O DJECI 9 38 MOVING O DJECI i Loses Sd cit bu RA duos 9 40 Converting Static Objects to Wallpaper 9 42 Arranging Objects 9 42 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects 9 42 Editing Overlapping Objects 9 44 Aligning Objects 9 45 Spacing Objects 9 47 d dee 9 47 Arranging Labels 9 48 Changing Object Appearance 9 49 Setting the Object s Foreground and Background Colors 9 49 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 toc x Table of Contents How Colors Appear at Runtime 9 50 Setting an Objects Fill Type 9 50 Changing the Border and Line 5 9 51 Making Objects BINK v uae rack ea drach rar ta 9 5 Changing Text 9 52 Changing Touch Margin Width or Height Touch Screen Only 9 52 Working with Multi ComponentObjects 9 54 Setting DISCE Defaults dior dachte saw
14. 11 20 Silence Alarms to PLC 11 23 PLC Controlled Silence Alarms 11 23 PLC Controlled Audio uu dug a te sop bes FORE DR ra dd 11 24 PLC Controlled 11 24 Massaga to PLC daas RA tated ea RA EE RAE 11 25 5 11 26 Partial 11 27 No Handshaking 11 28 Massage Control 11 29 Message Handshake 11 29 About the Alarm Message Window 11 30 About Background Alarms 11 30 Using the Alarm Message Window in the Terminal 11 31 Single line Alarm Message 11 31 Multi line Alarm Message 11 33 Using Buttons in the Multi line Alarm Message Window 11 34 Alarm Message Panel 11 35 Configuring the Alarm Message Window 11 37 About the Alarm Status 5 11 41 Working with the Alarm Status Screen in the Terminal 11 42 Calling up the Alarm Status Screen from the Terminal 11 43 Viewing the Alarm Messages 11 43 Working in Display Active Alarms Mode 1
15. 6 4 The Tag Database Editor 6 5 Opening the Tag Database Editor 6 5 Using the Editor 6 5 tS POUR Eua Eas Pw E Doe 6 6 Using the Buttons in the 6 6 Using me Quen BOX d acere Soda obiectu anco t 6 7 Using the Folder Hierarchy 6 7 CGMS Folde ise bt b Ces ead 6 8 Nesting uuu zs aisi CIUS meee 6 8 Opening a 6 9 Adding Tags 6 9 Duplicating a 6 10 Deleting a 6 10 Using the Spreadsheet Viewer 6 11 Moving Through the Spreadsheet 6 11 Resizing Columns and ROWS 6 11 Adding A TAG P baud yo 6 11 Duplicating a 6 12 share 6 12 Renaming a Tag 6 12 Tag 6 12 Working in Multiple Editors 6 13 Config nng ar Pra 6 13 Configuring an Analog Tag 6 14 Configuring a Digital Tag spaced eee E Sd 6 17 Connganig a Sting Tag
16. Update Messages Ctrl U Close Ctrl F 4 Import Message File 2 Click Yes or No depending on whether you want to update the changes If you choose Yes PanelBuilder automatically checks your messages for errors If there are any errors PanelBuilder informs you of these Follow the steps outlined in the previous section and correct the messages If no errors exist the messages are updated and the editor closes Important If you choose No PanelBuilder closes the editor without updating the messages You will lose any changes you made If you change your mind and do not want to close the editor choose Cancel Important Updating your messages stores the changes only temporarily If you exit the application without saving it these updates will be lost To ensure that you save all changes save your application frequently For details on saving the application see Chapter 3 Working with Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Chapter 1 1 Configuring Alarms This chapter tells you about e the interaction between the terminal and the PLC program that generates alarms e the global controls used to report alarms and how to configure them e the Alarm Message window and how to configure it e the Alarm Status screen and how to configure it e the Alarm History screen and how to configure it arms indicate to an operator that a priority condition has What Are Alarms Al indi p hat a
17. euir E wae aot S 3 15 Solving Printing 3 15 Saving the Reportas an ASCII TextFile 3 15 Using Help in Applications 3 16 Closing 5 3 17 Deleting Applications 3 17 Chapter 4 Dialog BOX ECON ius v4 0 Gan rbd oo ER 4 1 Form Spreadsheet Editors 4 3 Using the Spreadsheet and Form 4 3 Moving between the Spreadsheet and the Form 4 4 Using Multiple Editors 4 5 Working Spreadsheet 4 6 Using the Undo and Redo Commands Messages Only 4 Selecting Cells Rows and Columns 4 7 Cutting or Copying and Pasting Selections Messages Only 4 9 Copying and Pasting into Differently Sized Areas 4 9 Sorting Entries inthe Spreadsheet 4 10 Sorting Portions of the Spreadsheet 4 10 Duplicating 5 4 11 Filling Portions ofthe Spreadsheet Messages Only 4 11 Defining Communications Table of Contents toc v Inserting a Row in the 5 4 12 Deleting Data the Spreadsheet 4 12 Editing Selections Messages Only
18. 2 46 Guidelines for Organizing Tags to Optimize DH and ControlNet Unscheduled Communications Performance 2 46 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 toc iv Table of Contents Working with Applications Working with Editors Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Recording ObjectInformation 2 48 Recording Tag and Expression Information 2 49 Recording the 55 2 53 Earn Y r PAIN s aote ax trie orat obs 2 53 Chapter 3 Creating a New 3 2 Opening ApDIIEBHODS focal ede tur b Rh dete d 3 4 Converting Applications Created in PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelByilder T DOS 1 adea modo C V dc m ad 3 5 The Conversion Process 3 6 Specifying Target Firmware 3 7 Saving Applications 3 8 Saving an Application in Another File Format 3 9 Copying ABDICHIDRS aa a 3 10 Renaming 5 3 10 Validating Applications 3 10 Determining the Application 51 3 11 Creating Application Reports 3 12 Report On 5 3 13 Report On Screens Options 3 14 Prnt UC D
19. dE en meee RA Ace Ed 6 18 Tag aod deed tes uo onte ed 6 19 Specifying a Data Source 6 21 Device Data SOUrC Eia Adasan edhe 6 21 Remote 1 0 DataSource 6 22 Scheduled Data Source 6 22 Relaxed 6 22 Specifying Device as the Data Source 6 22 Specifying Remote I O as the DataSource 6 24 Creating Expressions Table of Contents toc vii Specifying Scheduled as the Data Source 6 24 Other Methods of Creating Tags 6 25 Creating Tags as Needed 6 25 Using the Tag Usage 6 27 ee IT 6 28 TORS iis oi ona iad 6 29 Rene MING Tag serres erener eranen o taae ae ya eevee 6 31 Private and Shared Tag Databases 6 32 The Private Database 6 32 The Shared Database 6 33 Using Shared Tag Databases 6 33 Converting a Private Database to Shared 6 34 Selecting a Shared Database 6 35 Repairing a Shared Database 6 36 Tag Database Importand 6 37 CSV File Column Ord
20. 3 8 Working with Applications Saving Applications New Application Ctrl N Open Application Ctrl O Save Application Ctrl S Save Application As Close Ctrl F4 Download Upload Alt F4 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 In the Target Firmware Version field select a version from the drop down list 3 Click OK When you save an application you save all work that you created in the editors Tip To avoid losing work due to a system failure save your application immediately after you have made important or extensive changes There are two ways to save an application e Save Application overwrites the originally opened version of the application e Save Application As saves an open application with a new name in a new directory or in another file format To save changes to an open application Choose Save Application from the File menu or from the toolbar or press Ctrl S PanelBuilder replaces the previous version of the application with the new version Tip You can reclaim the disk space occupied by deleted parts of your application by compressing your application file When you make extensive edits to an application especially if you delete existing screens or remove bitmaps from the library PanelBuilder does not free the space those objects or screens occupy in your application This makes your files quicker to save but requires more disk space in which to save them T
21. 2 Press and hold the first key while you press the second key For example press Ctrl A means press the Ctrl key and while pressing it press the A key Then release both keys Shift click Press and hold the Shift key while you click an object with the pointer Command Conventions There are different ways to carry out commands in PanelBuilder 1400e Often you can execute the same command in three ways by choosing a menu command choosing an icon from the toolbar using a key combination For example use any of the following methods to open an application choose Open Application from the File menu choose from the toolbar press Ctrl O Note Instructions in this manual do not always outline all three methods Unless otherwise stated all dialog boxes and windows are captured in Windows NT Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 P 12 Preface Before You Begin Technical Support Services Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 You need the following before you begin apersonal computer with at least a 486 25 MHz microprocessor at least 8 MB Random Access Memory RAM for Windows 3 1 95 although 16 MB RAM is recommended for Windows 95 at least 32 MB RAM for Windows NT and a SVGA monitor with 256 colors recommended For users working with imported dxf files at least 16 MB RAM is required e if you want to resize graphic images in PanelBuilder set your display adapter to
22. Click Accept to save the editing changes or Discard to cancel the changes Renaming a Tag For information on renaming a tag see Renaming a Tag later in this chapter Deleting a Tag 1 Select the tag you want to delete 2 Choose Delete on the Edit menu or the Delete button on the toolbar Note If you delete a tag that is assigned to an object you will get a validation error Use the Tag Usage Viewer to see which tags have been assigned to objects See Using the Tag Usage Viewer later in this chapter for more information Working in Multiple Editors Configuring Tag Type Defining Tags 6 13 As you work in the Tag Database editor you can open other editors to work in multiple editors simultaneously For example as you are creating tags for a DH or ControlNet application you can add or edit a node in the Node editor As well when creating ControlNet Scheduled tags you can open the Scheduled File editor and edit Scheduled Files To open another editor 1 Click or choose Application Window from the View menu The PanelBuilder window appears lt 4 PanelBuilder 1400e BE E Fie Screen Database Tools 81 Application TUTORK 1200e Keypad 640x480 Remote 1 0 Private Tags PLC Communications E gt System m Terminal Setup 4 Tag Database Alarms AY PLC 1 0 Control 5 Information Message Window Messages Screens 2 Click the name of the editor you want to open in the
23. Cut Ctrlex Copy Ctrl C Paste Etri v Copy with Controls v Join Line Ends Select All Etre Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Del Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Obje Position Ctrl 0 Convert to Wallpaper ck W allpaper Import E port Graphic Arranging Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Converting Static Objects to Wallpaper Wallpaper objects are part of the screen background and cannot be selected or edited You can convert any static drawing or text object to wallpaper Converting all static objects to wallpaper can significantly improve performance of screens at runtime For example imagine you have imported a bitmap of your company logo for a screen background The logo would work well as wallpaper You might also select the screen s title text and other drawing objects and turn them into wallpaper Changing objects to wallpaper is also useful when creating screens You cannot accidentally select objects that are wallpaper and the drawing grid is displayed over wallpaper objects so you can easily position other objects in relation to the wallpaper objects To convert static objects to wallpaper Choose the objects and choose Convert to Wallpaper from the Edit menu To convert wallpaper back to static objects Choose Unlock Wallpaper from the Edit menu All objects that have been converted to wallpaper will be unlocked After you create objects you can a
24. Using Buttons on the Alarm History Screen This button Does this Acknowl Alarm Acknowledges the highlighted alarm The operator can acknowledge alarms that have not been acknowledged in the Alarm Message Window If the alarm message has an audio or relay option enabled the alarm beeper is silenced or the relay is deactivated If the alarm message has the print option enabled the alarm is printed again with the acknowledgment time and date stamp Pressing the Acknowl Alarm button has no effect on the audio beeper if the PLC Controlled Audio value is non zero or on the alarm relay if the PLC Controlled Alarm Relay value is non zero Acknowl All Acknowledges all unacknowledged alarms in the Alarm History when the operator presses the button It will only acknowledge alarms present when the button is pressed Any new alarms generated after the button is pressed will not be acknowledged This button can be enabled or disabled in the Terminal Response screen while in Configure mode Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 54 Configuring Alarms amp dH Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 This button Does this Silence Alarms Silences the audio indicator and unlatches the alarm relay if either was triggered by an alarm message It performs the same function as the Silence button in the Alarm Message Window Clear All Clears all the alarms in the Alarm History when the operator presses the b
25. V nea Rey wiped trt ea 28 ee Creating Expressions 7 25 2 Choose Assign Exprn The Expression Editor dialog box appears i E drins Dosbieeichon Exrwxsn Ear Gohe ez EMT MEE o0 40 T TS lusit dh regani Bonaire ce B Hen ar py ici se rr eq to Lisi Eth ede ral Le j em m ieee Lk eum s Me amp Gin 4 3 Enter the expression the Expression editor Use User Entry Character to indicate the position of the value entered by the operator 4 Click OK 5 Assign the Keypad Numeric Input write tag The numeric result of the write expression will be written to this tag canliquri MHumuric Estry Kirpan x _ E r ry Kappad umm Decent Peet Panne kapad hiirest epai Cita rri b e Ermm Key Costes nasa Pree EK ey bun ks P ase trt Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 26 Creating Expressions Validating Expressions More Expression Examples Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 You can perform a syntax check on your expressions as you create them as described in Using the Expression Editor earlier in this chapter Expressions are also validated when you perform a screen
26. 4095 decimal Example B3 3999 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Fnnn eee MNE bb F File type T Timer C Counter R Control nnn optional eee MNE bb optional File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Member mnemonic see Timer Mnemonics Counter Mnemonics and Control Mnemonics under Mnemonic Tables later in this appendix Bit number 0 15 decimal Applies to analog members only Example R67 123 EN Addressing Syntax C 11 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing Optional Syntax Fnnn eee MNE F nnn optional eee MNE File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Member mnemonic see Timer Mnemonics Counter Mnemonics and Control Mnemonics under Mnemonic Tables later in this appendix Example C77 99 0V SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Ti
27. Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 18 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 When you set up a DH or ControlNet download the Network File Transfer s Panel View Location Routing Address is used This ensures that the download does not go to the wrong station by mistake To set the Terminal Network Address p Inthe Terminal Network Address field type the Panel View terminal s address on the network For DH networks valid entries are 0 to 77 octal For ControlNet networks valid entries are to 99 decimal Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 Setting Up Network File Transfers You establish the PanelView Location Routing Address and define network download control tags in the Network File Transfer tab L nadupurn Communication Setup Oman UM Pme Pautre Tranche Fipqunri Ue erred Transler Sintow nsa 7 ControlLogix Gateway bridge addressing ControlLogix Gateway bridge addressing allow transfers using the ControlLogix Gateway modules You can download and upload applications and retrieve alarm history information over networks such as DH and ControlNet Note See DH Network Transfers and ControlNet Network Transfers in Chapter 2 of the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Numbe
28. Station Address Valid Entries 14 14 21 7 310 21 or 7 321 Multiple DH Networks Connected by a Pyramid Integrator The format of the station address for nodes on a remote DH network is Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 42 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Station Address Valid Entries Il rrrrr ss Il local bridge address 0 77 octal rrrrr PI Link number 0 65535 decimal SS station address on remote DH 0 77 octal The Pyramid Integrator PI Link number for each DH network must be unique Use the A B 6200 Series Programming Software to configure link numbers A PI chassis contains one RM module with two network channels It can also contain up to four KA modules each with two network channels Using the RM and four KA modules a PanelView terminal can communicate with programmable controllers on any or all of 10 DH networks The figure on the following page shows a PanelView 1400e terminal connected to a DH network The PI routes requests among four DH networks The valid station entries for the various nodes in the figure are Station Address Valid Entries 12 12 3 6 2 3 23 6 3 23 10 6 4 10 2 43 Planning Applications P Chassis PLC 5 e a PLC 5 e 5 DH PI Link 3 DH PI Link 2 DH PI Link 1 PanelView 1400e Termi
29. To open the Tag Usage Viewer Choose Tag Usage Viewer from the Tools menu or press F5 The system validates the screens and tags before it brings up the Tag Usage Viewer Transfer Utility display To use the Tag Usage Viewer for Screens p When editing screens choose Screen Tag Usage Viewer from the Screen menu or press F5 PanelBuilder displays only the tags used on the current screen gt Note Because the Tag Usage Viewer uses the Windows default printer setup use the Windows Print Manager to change the printer settings for example to set it to Landscape mode so that all the columns will be printed brp Tias te PLE 030 3D 0 D7 Tag DIDI D D 7 Bin T 036 90 0 0 Tag D 0 0 7 Eis Zerena LD SETUP ere Ie bi Sc PRT LD SETUTaFHIETINEC 5 ED AXETUPZSHEMTIEG SETUPSPHENTLIEG B Inrzemant Value Ten EnbDerpewenr Vabue Boy pP Interlcck PusbhBtr Central ii H 3 Puablicn Corel P BHamenrers MAT Bun Indicates Screen SETUPZZPIETIEG Hzmantary Pushin Contrat Weopeenas 00 SETUPCFBIMTING 1552 160 Mawmenrary Mig Pabiro Indicator Screg SETUTaZzBIHTIEC 178 Cael Liszt Selecter Pomel ED DET cra TEG Corl Liar slegte Compal Eeceeng SETUP amp TPEZHTING CEL List Conical Screen ED SETUPEZRIEMTIEG fii ZO Curl List Selector Ecarral beta EU BETUPEPRIBT LA Ro Hamentarg Bed
30. essage 2 essage 3 essage 4 essage 5 essage 6 essage 7 essage 8 CO Ss DD HT BY Ww N e essage 9 m essage 10 mn m essage 11 I M2 essage 12 Configuring Alarms 11 13 Block Tag Name Address Length Starting Trigger Messages Triggered Alarm 1 0 010 00 4 1 Messages 1 to 4 Alarm_tag2 0 010 04 5 5 Messages 5 to 9 Alarm tag3 0 011 00 3 10 Messages 10 to 12 Block Tags 15 14 13 0 010 0 0 0 If the bits indicated the following data table are turned On Messages 1 2 6 8 and 12 will be triggered 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DL T T SS gt E quee To assign tags to Bit triggered Alarm Triggers 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box select the Global Controls tab 2 Goto Control and double click Alarm Triggers or click Alarm Triggers and the Assign Tag button Bit Position Triggered Alarming x Alarm value range 1 16 3 5 EN Led 7 us Assign Tag The Bit Position Triggered Alarming dialog box appears with a table of tags and their starting triggers Click on a row to enter the tag Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 14 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 Click Assign Tag and the Tag Browser dialog box appears From this dialog box
31. Clear Window to PLC unassigned PLC Controlled Clear Window unassigned Assign Tag Assign Expm Unassign 2 in the following Message Window information State Choose Enabled or Disabled in the State drop down list The Alarm Message Window is an optional feature in your application You can enable the Alarm Message Window if you want it to appear or disable it if you do not Note that alarms will occur even if the window is disabled They will not be reported in the Alarm Message Window but will be displayed in the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens and logged in the Alarm History file Type Choose Single line Multi line or Panel in the Type drop down list Location If you specified a Single line or Alarm Message Panel choose its location at the top or bottom of the screen Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 39 Number of Lines For a Multi line or Alarm Message Panel choose the number of lines The number of lines you choose determines the size of the window on the terminal For a Multi line Alarm Message Window e Ifthe window will be using the Small font you can display from 1 to 20 lines 1 line per message in the Alarm Message Window e Ifthe window will be using the Double High font you can display from 1 to 10 lines 1 line per message of alarms in the Alarm Message Window For an Alarm Message Panel e Ifthe window will be usin
32. Configure Communication Setup Configure Terminal Setup Configure Alarms PLC I O Control Configure Information Message Window Note Many of the PanelBuilder screen objects have Configuration dialog boxes The instructions here also apply to the object Configuration dialog boxes For more information see Configuring Objects in Chapter 9 Creating Objects The Configure Communication Setup dialog box shown next contains many of the features of these editors For more information on how to navigate through a dialog box see your Windows documentation Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 2 Working with Editors Click to close the dialog box without saving changes Click to save changes and close the dialog box Click to cancel changes and close the dialog box Click to open online help for this dialog box 0 Configure Terminal Setup Timing Parameters Object Setup Application Startup Screen 1 INITIAL SCREEN Screen Click the arrow to open a drop down list of options Application Type Type 12006 640x480 Keypad Application File Comment Keypad Color Tutorial Target Firmware Version Version 05 00 and up 4 Press ALT and underlined letter to select the option Press ALT and the down arrow J to open the drop down list Configure Communication Setup x Terminal Communications Click the pointer to select the desired t
33. DDE Memory Remote 1 0 C Scheduled Node Name Unsolicited Msos Scan Class Address 3 The screen defaults to Unsolicited Msgs for Node Name and for Scan Class Make the changes as outlined in the next step Defining Tags 6 23 2 The node is the programmable controller this tag addresses In the Node Name field do one of the following e Type a node name Double click in the Node Name field to open the Add Edit Nodes dialog box rE EEE If the field is empty you can create a new node definition If the field contains the name of an existing node you can edit that node s definition Choose to open a selection list and select a node name For information about configuring nodes see Chapter 5 Defining Communications 3 Select a scan class For information about configuring scan classes see Chapter 5 Defining Communications 4 In the Address field type the tag s physical memory location in the PLC Note For Device block tags the address is the starting address for the block The address must start on an element boundary sub element starting addresses are not supported The address cannot cross PLC data file boundaries The address syntax depends on the programmable controller s addressing convention For detailed information about address syntax see Appendix C Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 24 Defining Tags Publication 2711E
34. Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Objects 9 21 The following table shows the object tools and their menu commands This tool Corresponds to this command This tool Corresponds to this command Select Vertical Bar Graph You can change it to Horizontal in the Configure dialog box Text Time Display Bitmap Image Date Display DXF Image a Small ASCII Input omentary N O Push Button Large ASCII Input omentary N C Push Button Symbol Latched Push Button Local Message Display aintained Push Button Scale Trend ASCII Display B E 89 9 e 80 02 Multistate Push Button Goto Screen Button i Interlocked Push Button JJ Return to Previous Screen Button Control List Selector with Enter Key Screen List Selector Control List Selector without Enter Key ni 9 Screen Keypad Enable Button Keypad applications only Small Screen Select Keypad Touch applications only Set Bit Cursor Point Screen Print Button Keypad applications only ultistate Indicator Line qus List Indicator E Rectangle ncrement Value Button Ellipse You can change itto with Display in the Configure dialog box Decrement Value Button Arc co You can change it to with Display in the Configure dialog box Numeric Data Displa Wedge aj Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 2
35. Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Index Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Device Tags Worksheet A 1 recording object information 2 48 recording tag information 2 49 recording the address 2 53 using 2 46 Device type assigning 5 8 specifying 5 9 DH addressing local station 2 41 Logix55xx 2 41 remote station address bridged by 1785 KA 2 41 bridged by Pyramid Integrator 2 42 and PanelView 1 6 choosing device as data source 6 3 Nodes editor 5 21 scan classes 5 24 Scan Classes editor 5 15 setting up terminal communications 5 17 station number 5 17 DH Communications Worksheet A 1 defining the nodes 2 36 2 37 2 39 2 53 using 2 38 DH RIO Pass Through assigning 2 36 block transfer control byte 5 13 ialog box editors about 4 1 navigating 4 1 Dialog boxes about 1 1 selection conventions P 10 igital tags 6 2 configuring 6 17 isabling nodes 5 23 iscrete 1 0 addresses 2 16 iscrete 1 0 Usage Worksheet 1 using 2 29 isplaying alarms 11 3 active alarms mode 11 44 all alarms mode 11 45 past alarms mode 11 45 Downloading applications 2 2 15 1 version control and E 4 Drawing arcs 9 34 graphic images 9 29 lines 9 33 objects 9 20 panels 9 33 i j J wedges 9 34 Duplicating folders 6 10 objects 9 37 rows in spreadsheets 4 11 tags 6 12 DXF Image 9 21 Dynamic objects 9 2 read 9 2 write 9 2 Editing message
36. Scheduled File Worksheet Tags worksheet Device Tags Worksheet ControlNet Scheduled Tags Worksheet Appendix A contains a blank copy of each worksheet These points summarize the process of planning your DH or ControlNet communications using the worksheets Identify each programmable controller the application will communicate with by defining nodes on the application specific Communications worksheet Define the foreground and background rates for the 11 scan classes Define the programmable controller addresses for each object on your screen using the Device Tags worksheet For each object on a screen enter the object reference number object type and screen number as well as the tag definition Use a new Device Tags worksheet for each screen Record the addresses for your windows and PLC controlled options on a different worksheet Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 38 Planning Applications The Communications Worksheet For DH or ControlNet record node and scan class information on the application specific communications worksheet Following is an example of the DH Communications Worksheet DH Communications Worksheet Application File Name PanelView Station Number Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft Node Definitions PLC Type Station Address lUnsolicited Msgs DH PLC 2 Pa The Unsolicited Messages Node is the Panel View terminal By default the terminal s Station Add
37. To create a new screen for your application your Application Window must be open and active 1 Open the Screens folder The list of available screens appears 2 Choose the desired screen The screen is displayed in a separate window on your workspace You can have multiple screens open at a time For more information on working with multiple screens see Chapter 5 A Brief Tour of PanelBuilder 1400e in the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Getting Starting Manual Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 8 4 Creating Screens Copying Application You can copy an existing application screen and make it into a new Screens within the Same screen within the same application This is an efficient way to create Application several similar screens quickly gt Tip An easy way to ensure consistency between screens is to create a screen and make it into a screen template Copy this template for each screen in the application and add to it as required To create a new screen by copying an existing screen 1 Open the Screens folder and select the screen you want to copy Screen New Copy 2 Choose Copy from the Application Window s Screen menu Rename The Copy Screen dialog box appears with the name and number Delete Del of the screen you are copying From Number 1 Name CONFIG Close To Number E Name CONFIG 3 Type a new screen number in the Number
38. go ES gical Color P alette cx Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Objects 9 15 Selecting Objects Before you can work with an object you must select it When the Select tool is active the pointer appears as an arrow When another tool is active a symbol appears below the arrow to indicate which tool is active If the text tool is active the pointer appears as an I beam Active Select tool Active graphic tool Text beam cursor To choose the Select tool do one of the following choose Select from the Objects menu choose from the toolbox press Esc click the right mouse button Selection Handles When you select an object handles appear around the edge of the object to show it is selected N Object handles When you select an object that is inside of or grouped with another object such as a grouped object or multi component object hollow handles appear around the edge of the object to show it is selected m o 0 bject handles Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 16 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Selection Methods To select this Do this An object Click the object or Use the arrow keys to move the selection arrow to the object then press S pacebar Several objects Click the first object S hift click additional objects or Use the arrow keys to move to the object the
39. mum EI EIIEIITIZIEI A To copy messages into the spreadsheet using the clipboard 1 In the text editor select the message or messages to be copied 2 Choose Copy 3 In the message editor select the field where you are going to begin pasting To overwrite existing messages select the rows you want to overwrite To paste the messages into a larger or smaller area select that area 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu from the toolbar or press Ctrl V 5 The first message appears in the row whose cell you selected Any other messages are pasted into the cells below If you selected an area in the spreadsheet the messages are pasted into that area bein pe IRALE 1 Jam Finisher Jan Pomc bis a Parse low Paper Bim E Pager Pam Jam Toran bou m mui mf cial Nragiser LE BREEREREESX 4 H Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Messages 10 11 You can also export messages by copying them from the message editors and pasting them into other Windows text editors as described in Exporting Messages later in this chapter Importing Existing Message Files You can also import existing message text for example from a text editor or old application files and convert the text into alarm information or local messages by using the Import Message File command
40. priority condition h occurred which requires immediate attention An alarm can be indicated in a number of ways including e Displaying alarm message text on the PanelView terminal s screen e Triggering PanelView s alarm relay to energize e Triggering PanelView s audio beeper to sound e Sending alarm message text to a printer e Sending alarm message text to the PLC for use by a supervisory computer ha elg bar aushep LE A 1 19 open Safety bar number iB h is open EFTIUB ETT du Hoter H 1z B is Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 2 Configuring Alarms How Are Alarms Triggered Alarm Destinations Ke KK KKK ATTENTION Do not rely on your terminal as a primary warning device or as an indicator of a critical or dangerous situation Critical means any situation that could result in physical injury product damage or significant process down time An operator s response to a critical or dangerous situation must never depend on software or solid state electronics All critical alarm indications and any critical host controller responses must use redundant and hard wired or mechanical interlocks Before the Panel View terminal can report alarms you must define the alarm conditions in the application file and program the PLC to trigger the alarms In PanelBuilder you create a list of alarm messages For each message you specify text and a unique trigger value The PLC must be programmed to
41. 4 13 Changing Column Width and Row Height 4 13 Chapter 5 What Are Communications 5 1 Defining Communications for a Remote 1 0 Application 5 2 Communication Setup 5 2 Setting up Terminal Communications 5 3 Setting the Baud Rate 5 3 Setting Up Network File Transfers 5 4 Specifying the Pass Through Network Type 5 4 Specifying the PanelView Location Routing Address 5 5 Defining the Network File Transfer Controls 5 7 Assigning Device Type and Racks for the PanelView Terminal 5 8 Specifying the Device 5 9 Assigning Racks 5 9 Setting Up Block Transfer Files 5 11 Creating a Block Transfer File 5 12 Defining the Pass Through File Control Byte 5 13 Changing Rack or Block Transfer File Assignments 5 14 Defining Communications fora DH or ControlNet Application 5 15 Communication SUD s va ves ed dod dee 5 16 Setting Up Terminal Communications 5 17 Specifying the Network 5 17 Setting the Terminal Network Address 5 17 Setting Up Network File Transfers 5 18 Specifying t
42. Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control later in this chapter Use Word Alarm Acknowledge to PLC if you are short on address space or are concerned about scan time performance It will take less address space and less time to transfer one word of data than to transfer several blocks of data The Operator or Operator and Remote selection defines when to activate the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option This selection is only required if you want to use that option If not it can be ignored If you choose this option Configuring Alarms 11 11 The Acknowledge Control will be set and the acknowledged alarm trigger value will be sent to the PLC when Operator The operator presses the acknowledge button on the Multi line Alarm Message Window or on the Alarm History screen Operator and Remote The operator presses the acknowledge button on the Multi line Alarm Message Window or on the Alarm History screen and or when an alarm is acknowledged remotely by the PLC Note If you set the Acknowledge to PLC option to Operator and Remote the application will be compatible with PanelBuilder Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Control You must assign the Alarm Triggers before any alarms can be reported to the PanelView terminal The remaining Global Controls are optional Alarm Triggers Alarm Triggers are tags or expressions used by the Panel View terminal to monitor alarm conditions
43. Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet to help you keep track of the block transfer addresses Use one worksheet for each block transfer file Rack Assignments Worksheet Use this worksheet to record your exact rack assignments Block Transfer File Worksheet Use this worksheet to record your block transfer file assignments Remote I O Tags Worksheet Use this worksheet to help you assign programmable controller addresses to each object on a screen Communications Worksheet e DH Communications Worksheet ControlNet Communications Worksheet Scheduled File Worksheet Use these worksheets to record details of the programmable controllers the terminal will be communicating with Tags Worksheet Device Tags Worksheet ControlNet Scheduled Tags Worksheet Use these worksheets to help you assign programmable controller addresses to each object on a screen Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals 640 by 480 Use this worksheet to plan the object positions for each screen you want to create for PanelView 1200e keypad or touch screen terminal applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 A 2 Sample Worksheets Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminal 640 by 480 Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminal 800 by 600 Use this worksheet to plan the object positions for each screen you want to create for PanelView 1400e keypad or touch screen terminal applicat
44. Information Messages E Local Messages Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating a New Message You can create messages in both the form area and the spreadsheet To create a message in the spreadsheet 1 Open the message editor by choosing the appropriate editor in the Messages folder or tool from the toolbar foralarm messages choose forinformation messages choose for local messages choose The message spreadsheet appears by default The following illustration shows the Information Messages spreadsheet Note For details on using the spreadsheet form style editor see Chapter 4 Working with Editors Hien EDITT TUTORE Triage ake Darmi Heiisga Jasi Beton ia running 2 Position the mouse pointer in the first available Trigger Value field and click or use the down arrow to move to the field 3 Type a trigger value and press Enter Note The trigger value cannot be 0 It must be unique for that editor 4 Move to the Message field Use Tab to move to the field press the right arrow or move the mouse pointer to the field and click 5 Type the message text in the Message field next to the trigger value and press Enter Creating Messages 10 7 To edit a message in the spreadsheet 1 Open the spreadsheet 2 Choose the trigger value or message text you want to edit 3 Double click to activate the text insert bar or simply begin typing 4 Edit the
45. November 1998 12 10 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To keep the Cursor Point character visible Click the Retain Cursor On Cancel checkbox to enable it The Cursor Point character will remain visible even after you click to Cancel Configure Terminal Setup Note If you enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel option the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 3 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions For more information about the operation of Set Bit Cursor Points and Numeric Input Cursor Points at the terminal see Cursor Point Default Operation in the Control Selectors chapter of the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Configuring PLC I O Control Options Chapter 1 3 Configuring PLC I O Control Options This chapter explains the PLC I O Control Options It provides information about e what each PLC I O Control Option is how the PLC I O Control Options are used how to define controls for each PLC I O Control Option You can instruct the programmable controller to control and monitor certain functions in the terminal by assigning PLC I O Control Options For example to have the programmable controller manage which screen is displayed on the terminal you must assign a control tag or expression to the PLC Controlled Screen Number option Alternatively the operator at the
46. November 1998 9 8 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Control Selectors Control List Selector with Enter Key contains a vertical list of choices An operator can use the object s Up Cursor and Down Cursor buttons to move an arrow through the available selections The selection is sent to the programmable controller when the Enter button is pressed Control List Selector without Enter Key contains a vertical list of choices The operator uses the object s Up Cursor and Down Cursor buttons to move through the available selections The current selection s state value is automatically sent to the programmable controller via the object s Selector Control Tag Set Bit Cursor Point consists of a tag a cursor character and text This object is used to point to any screen location Several Set Bit Cursor Points can be in the same screen Each one can have a different user defined cursor character At runtime only the current Set Bit Cursor Point cursor character is visible and blinking Only the current Set Bit Cursor Point s Control Tag is on that is 1 all other Set Bit Cursor Points Control Tags are off that is 0 The programmable controller thus always knows the current selection This object is available only on keypad applications Use an external keyboard as well as the terminal keypad to activate the Set Bit Cursor Point Note By default when the Cancel button is pressed at th
47. November 1998 Who Should Read This Manual This manual is for users who have a basic knowledge of PanelBuilder and a good knowledge of Microsoft Windows Users who are unfamiliar with PanelBuilder should first read Getting Started Users who are not familiar with Microsoft Windows should read their Microsoft Windows User s Guide for users of Windows 3 1 Introducing Microsoft Windows 95 for users of Windows 95 or Introducing Microsoft Windows NT Workstation for users of Windows NT Related Publications The following table lists Allen Bradley remote I O scanner module user manuals Publication Number 1772 SD SD2 Remote 1 0 Scanner Distribution Panel 1772 2 18 1775 S4A 1 0 Scanner Programmer Interface Module User s Manual 1775 6 5 1 1715 S5 1775 SR5 1 0 Scanner Communication Adapter Module 1775 6 5 5 User s Manual 5150 RS PI Start up and Integration Manual 5000 6 5 1 6008 SI IBM PC 1 0 Scanner User s Manual 6008 6 5 3 6008 SV VME 1 0 Scanner User s Manual 6008 6 5 2 6008 SQ Q Bus 1 0 Scanner Utility Software User s Manual 6008 6 4 1 1771 SN Sub 1 0 Scanner Module Data Sheet 1771 2 91 1747 SN RIO Scanner User s Manual 1747 NM005 The following table lists Allen Bradley programmable controller user manuals Publication Number 1772 LP2 PLC 2 20 Programming and Operations Manual 1772 6 8 1 1772 LP3 PLC 2 30 Controller P rogramming and Operations Manual 1772 6 8 3 PLC 3 Fa
48. Planning Applications 2 9 Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals 640 by 480 Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 0 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 1 F10 Fil F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 Notes 1 The grid shows the location of the touch cells on a PanelView 1200e Touch Screen terminal PanelBuilder sizes buttons in multiples of touch cells The smallest size for a 1200e touch screen application input object is 64 by 40 pixels 2 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys To complete each PanelView 1200e screen worksheet 1 Draw all objects that will be displayed on each screen Most objects can be any size p gt Note The smallest size for a PanelView 1200e touch object is 64 by 40 pixels PanelBuilder sizes 1200e touch objects only in multiples of touch cells 2 Make a note of the button labels on the worksheet This will help you remember where you are locating common objects such as GoTo Screen buttons and Exit buttons Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 10 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Screen Worksheets for PanelView 1000e or 1400e Terminals Use these worksheets to plan application screens for PanelView 1000e or 1400e keypad and touch screen applications A PanelView 1000e terminal runs at a resolution of 640 by 480 while the PanelView 14
49. Rw Allen Bradley PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Cat No 2711E ND1 Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or in part without written permission of Allen Bradley Company Inc is prohibited Throu
50. The pointer changes to the active pointer gt 2 Position the pointer approximately where you want to place the object Creating Objects 9 23 3 If you are using the mouse press the mouse button and drag the pointer until you see the object outline If you are using the keyboard press Ctrl arrow until you see the button s outline Screens Untitled 1 Demo el E Position the outline where you would like the object and release the button Screens Untitled 1 Demo R LJ ai s The small square remains at the base of the pointer because the object tool is still selected You can continue to place additional copies of the same object If you are finished creating this type of object deselect the tool To deselect a tool do one of the following e click in an empty area of the screen press Esc choose Select from the Objects menu to return to select mode choose from the toolbox to return to select mode click the right mouse button click another object Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 24 Creating Objects Creating Text Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To configure an object Double click or right click on the object or choose from the toolbar A configuration dialog box opens If you are creating an application for a keypad terminal you assign the function keys for the object here For detailed information about configuring
51. When the spreadsheet and the form are open at the same time you can move from one to the other e If you using the mouse click in any field of the spreadsheet or the form The cursor will appear and you will be able to enter text e If you using only the keyboard choose Go to Spreadsheet or Go to Form from the View menu or press Ctrl PgDn or Ctrl PgUp Working with Editors 4 5 Using Multiple Editors You can have multiple Messages editors open at one time to copy text from one editor to another or to view messages in different editors at the same time LM Help To open multiple Messages editors v Spreadsheet v Form With one Messages editor open double click another Messages editor in the Application window Go to Tag Spreadsheet Ctri PgDn Go to Query Box Ctrl Q Go to Folder Hierarchy Ctrl H Go to Tag Form Ctrl PgUp Refresh Spreadsheet Font You can also open the Tag Database and Node editors at the same time for DH and ControlNet applications For Remote I O applications you can open the Tag Database Rack and Block editors at the same time To do this use the Application Window Restore Default Settings Toolbar Status Bar To use the Application Window Application Window With one of the editors open choose in the toolbar or Application Window from the Window menu The Application Window dialog box appears 29 PanelBuilder 140
52. creating 5 12 deleting file assignments 5 15 file number 5 12 file size 5 12 requirements 2 18 setting up 5 11 Block transfer mnemonics C 15 C 16 Borders 9 51 Boxes 9 6 9 21 Bridge addressing ControlLogix Gateway Bridged DH networks remote station address 5 6 with 1785 KA 2 41 5 6 5 19 with Pyramid Integrator 2 42 5 6 5 19 Buttons alarm history screen 11 53 acknowl alarm 11 53 alarm status 11 53 cursor up cursor down 11 53 exit 11 53 page up page down 11 53 print 11 53 silence alarms 11 53 alarm message window 11 34 acknowl alarm 11 34 alarm history 11 34 alarm status 11 34 cursor up down 11 34 S vs vs xit 11 34 ilence alarms 11 34 alarm status screen 11 47 alarm history 11 47 cursor up cursor down 11 47 display mode 11 47 exit 11 47 page up page down 11 47 print 11 47 reset Qty Time 11 47 silence alarms 11 47 auto repeat functions 12 8 Byte data type 2 24 2 51 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Index Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C Cable upload download 1 7 Changing block transfer file assignments 5 14 network type 5 28 5 33 rack assignments 5 14 Channel number 5 23 Checking syntax in expressions 7 22 Clarity and screen design 2 6 Clear All 11 6 See also Alarm history screen no unacknowledged alarms 11 6 PLC tag is assigned 11 7 PLC tag is not assigned 11 6 Closing appl
53. 11 44 display all messages mode 11 45 display past alarms mode 11 45 resetting 11 48 screen security 8 8 using buttons 11 47 using in the terminal 11 42 viewing alarm messages 11 43 modes 11 43 Alarm triggers about 11 11 bit 11 8 word 11 8 Alarms about 11 1 acknowledging 11 5 individual 11 5 multiple 11 5 background 11 30 clearing 11 6 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 configuring 11 7 displaying 11 3 global controls configuring 11 8 message control 11 29 message handshake 11 29 message to PLC 11 25 methods of indicating 11 1 PLC controlled audio 11 24 PLC controlled relay 11 24 PLC controlled silence alarms 11 23 quantity and time 11 46 silence alarms to PLC 11 23 triggering 11 2 Aligning objects 9 45 Allen Bradley 1771 Remote I O Link 1 5 6200 Series Programming Software 2 42 technical support P 12 web site P 12 Analog tags 6 2 address length 6 24 configuring 6 14 data types 2 24 2 50 AND in expressions 7 16 Application file comment 12 4 Application startup screen assigning 8 16 changing 8 16 security 8 8 selecting 12 2 Applications building 2 1 closing 3 17 compressing 3 8 3 10 configuring 2 1 converting from PanelBuilder 1200 3 5 from PanelBuilder for DOS 3 5 screen resolutions 12 3 copying 3 10 creating 2 1 3 2 defining communications 5 1 ControlNet 5 15 DH 5 15 Remote 1 0 5 2 deleting 3 17 desc
54. 2 Listen Planning Applications 2 33 Recording the PLC Scanner Type In the PLC Scanner Type field record the programmable controller or scanner type that you will be using The following table lists the available programmable controllers and scanners Programmable Controller Scanner PLC 2 20 or PLC 2 30 1772 SD SD2 PLC 3 1775 S4A B PLC 3 1775 55 PLC 3 10 1775 SR5 PLC 5 11 ntegral PLC 5 15 ntegral PLC 5 20 ntegral PLC 5 25 ntegral PLC 5 30 ntegral PLC 5 40 ntegral PLC 5 60 ntegral PLC 5 80 ntegral PLC 5 250 5150 RS SLC 5 02 5 03 or 5 04 1747 SN Series A or Series B IBM PC 6008 51 VME Bus 6008 SV DEC Q Bus 6008 SQ Logix55 xx 1756 DHRIO Other 1771 SN Sub Scanner Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 34 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Selecting the Baud Rate The baud rate determines the speed at which the terminal communicates with the programmable controller The baud rate depends on the cable length and on the baud rate supported by other devices on the Remote I O network Select this baud rate For distances up to 230 4K 2 500 feet 115 2K 5 000 feet 57 6K 10 000 feet Note The PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 support only 57 6K baud Assigning Racks For each assignment in the Remote I O Tags Worksheet define the following e Rack Number Specify the number of the rack y
55. 386 Enhanced Settings to reconfigure the size and type of the swap file We recommend using Permanent if 32 bit access is supported by your hardware Windows 95 Choose the Performance tab from the System folder in the Control Panel and set the minimum size of the virtual memory swap file to 5 MB and the maximum size to 16 MB Windows NT Choose the Performance tab from the S ystem folder in the Control Panel Click Change and set the Virtual Memory swap file to the Recommended number under Total Paging File Size for All Drives PanelBuilder Validation Errors Consult the following table to identify and respond to PanelBuilder Validation Errors Validation Error Message Cause What to Do Tag type must be Analog Digital or Block Incorrect tag type Use the correct tag type Tag name must be Analog or Digital Incorrect tag type Use the correct tag type Baud rate of rate is not valid for PLC device type device type Some PLC types can only have a baud rate of 57 6K Consult your PLC User Documentation Object object name at position on screen overlaps a button Static element is on top of an input object i e an indicator is placed over a push button Move one of these objects so they do not overlap Tag tag name does not exist You have entered an invalid tag name orthe Check the tag definition in the database or add tag may have been deleted the tag to the databas
56. Be sure to choose Duplicate Folder rather than Duplicate Duplicate only duplicates individual tags Duplicate Fallar 3 Type a name for the new folder 4 Click OK Deleting a Folder To delete a folder 1 Select one or more folders in the hierarchy 2 Choose Delete Folder from the Edit menu The folder and all folders and tags within it will be deleted Using the Spreadsheet Viewer Insert Row Defining Tags 6 11 Use the spreadsheet viewer to view tags or to select a tag to edit Use the query box or folder hierarchy to select the tags you want to view Note The Address column in the spreadsheet viewer contains node and scan class information for Device tags The node name scan class name and address are separated by commas Moving Through the Spreadsheet To scroll through the spreadsheet rows either use the Prev or Next buttons in the form area or e use the Up and Down arrow keys or use the scroll bars in the spreadsheet viewers To select a row click anywhere in the row or click the row number Resizing Columns and Rows 1 Place the cursor over the division between the column or row until the cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Drag the column or row to the desired size Adding a Tag To insert a new row above the highlighted row use one of these methods choose the New button in the forms area or choose Insert Row on the Edit menu or choose the Insert Row butt
57. DDE Memory C Remote 1 0 C Scheduled F iLog Date Node Name 70 PLC5 m Scan Class Cont Scan LJ E Address N10 7170 Query Box Alrm Clr Digital Device NODE 7t Alrm cntl Analog Device NODE 7 ami Analog Device NODE 7 Folder mik am2 Analog Device NODE 70 Hierarchy E am3 Analog Device NODE 70 amp enl ASCIIIN String Device NODE 70 uto man Analog Device NODE 70 For Help press F1 INUM Spreadsheet Viewer Using the Form Use the form to create a tag In the upper part of the form define the basic tag characteristics such as tag name type and specifics related to the tag type In the lower part of the form define the data source where the tag s values will come from Using the Buttons in the Form When you go into the Tag Database editor the buttons in the form are Close Prev Next and New Close closes the editor Prev displays the previous tag in the form section Next displays the next tag New clears the form input fields so you can define a new tag When you enter information the Prev and Next buttons change to Accept and Discard Choose Accept to save tag information and Discard to cancel changes to a tag Important For shared databases see Using Shared Tag Databases later in this chapter Accepted changes are saved permanently to disk For private databases changes are only saved temporarily You must save the PanelBuilder application to save the tag changes permanently Publication
58. In a DH or ControlNet application the terminal remains in the Active Node Table but does not respond to communications and cannot be accessed by other stations on the network To clear the fault switch the terminal to Configure mode and then back to Run mode or cycle power to the terminal To ensure a safe recovery program the controller to return any machine or process to a safe state monitor the rack fault bit associated with the PanelView terminal s rack assignment For information on the rack fault bit table refer to your programmable controller documentation For additional information on programming the programmable controller for safety refer to your programmable controller documentation Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 4 Planning Applications Tips for Optimizing the Application DH and ControlNet Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 As you carry out the planning steps in the remainder of this chapter keep these tips in mind They can help you optimize your application s performance when it is running on the terminal Convert all static objects that is text lines rectangles ellipses wedges arcs and graphic images to wallpaper This will speed up the screen refresh rate on the active screen Use bitmaps sparingly If you use the same bitmap more than once ensure that each copy is the same size as the original This means that the same bitmap is read each time it is used in the ap
59. It will not be compatible with earlier versions Important Block tags are used only for the Alarm Control and the Alarm Ack Value control when multiple simultaneous alarms need to be monitored For more information see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash Y 3 For Type select Block Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 20 Defining Tags 2 Tag Database Untitled BEE File Edit View Help Tag Hames Tutorials 2290008 Security Description Number of Bits 16 Initial Yalue 0 Data Source C Device C DDE Memor Remote 1 0 C Scheduled Address 1 Log Data Alarm For Help press F1 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RSView databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Number of Bits Enter a number from 1 to 1024 to define the length of the block RIO For Remote I O tags discrete addresses can accommodate 128 bits 8 words at 16 bits word Use a block transfer file address for longer block lengths DH and ControlNet For Device tags the number of
60. November 1998 8 10 Creating Screens Validating Screens Before closing your application screen you should ensure that there are no errors such as overlapped input objects or objects that are off screen gt Note Although you can close and save screens that contain validation errors you cannot download the application file if the screens contain errors If you try to download with errors present the application s Validation Results window appears Screen New Ctrl N Close Ctrl F4 To validate a screen Screen Settings Screen Security Screen Yalidate F9 Screen Tag Usage Viewer F5 Exit 1 Choose Screen Validate from the Screen menu or press F9 PanelBuilder checks your screen for errors When the validation is finished a Validation Results for Screens window appears The window lists any errors in the screen and provides the pixel coordinates for the object causing the error If there are no errors the Validation Results window has a check mark lt 4 Yalidation Results for Screens SAMPLE 1 MAIN iof x Total number of errors 2 Update Screens a total of 2 errors were found Tag Usage Viewer MAIN 2 errors present 1 Normally Open Momentary Push Button at 357 24 part of th Pri 2 Time Display at 257 184 overlaps a button or a trend panel Print Tags no errors found Print Setup Help You can print the error report by cl
61. Perhaps it has had some of its files deleted If so you will have to use a back up copy of the database Tag Database Import and Export Defining Tags 6 37 You can export a tag database created in PanelBuilder to a comma separated variable csv file that can be used by third party software such as Microsoft Excel You can also create a database in Excel save it as a csv file and then import it into PanelBuilder Tip An exported PanelBuilder 1400e database can also be imported back into the application This means you can use the Database Export feature to backup or update the database When you import a database the tag definitions are copied into your current database If the database is private it remains private A shared database remains shared PanelBuilder supports the following import file formats e PanelBuilder csv exported by RS View and PanelBuilder e A L Series csv exported by the A I Series software Logic 5 csv exported from a Logic 5 database see note below PanelBuilder Tag Database an independent tag database e Taylor ProWORXPLUSQ database e MODSOFT database in flat text format Note To import information from an A I Series database you must first export the database in text format using the A I software PanelBuilder imports this text file To import a Logic 5 database export it to a text file and import this into A I software You can then export the text file from A I as you
62. Tag The Tag Editor dialog box appears for you to define the tag Create a new folder by clicking the New Folder button then typing the folder name in the New Folder dialog box The Tag Browser dialog box also has a button labeled Other DB This button is dimmed because this feature is not active It is there for compatibility with RSView databases For details on how to define tags see Configuring Tag Type earlier in this chapter Note If the Tag Database editor and Tag editor dialog boxes are open at the same time when you add a tag in the Tag editor it automatically appears in the Tag Database editor When you add a tag in the Tag Database editor you can see the change in the Tag editor by double clicking the folder to which the tag was added In the Tag Database editor you can also click the Refresh icon or choose Refresh from the View menu to update the display and sort the tags Using the Tag Usage Viewer Reports Validate F9 Change Network Type Application Size Replace Tag Name Defining Tags 6 27 The Tag Usage Viewer window provides you with a cross reference listing of all the tags in an application sorted according to their address and shows where each tag is used This listing is similar to the Tag Address Cross Reference Report For tags in a DH or ControlNet application it also shows the node name and scan class Use the Tag Usage Viewer to help locate tag validation errors
63. can specify another path by selecting another directory subdirectory or drive or use the default 4 Click OK to complete the conversion Selecting a Shared Database You can select another PanelBuilder 1400e database or an RSView database If you select another PanelBuilder 1400e database the network type must be the same in both applications The selected application s communication profile information nodes and scan classes for DH and ControlNet applications or racks and block transfer files for Remote I O applications is copied into the destination pvc file This overwrites the current application s communication profile and ensures that it will be ready to use tags in the shared database If you select an RSView database only the tag definitions in the database are shared You will have to configure node and scan class information for the current application Note An RSView database can only be selected if RSView is installed on the same development computer as PanelBuilder 1400e Sharing across a network is not supported Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 36 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To select a shared database 1 Open the application for which you want to select a shared database 2 Choose Select Shared from the Database menu 3 Fill in the fields as outlined below File Name Type the name of the application whose database file you want to share or select the
64. eight characters or change the default drive or directory If you are saving the application as a different type of file type the appropriate file extension The application will be saved as the specified file type Important The pvc and pvd file extensions determine the file type the application will be saved as If you do not type a file extension the application will be saved according to the file type currently selected in the List Files of Type field Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 10 Working with Applications gt Note PanelBuilder does not support long file and directory names Ensure that the file and directory names you use conform to the DOS naming standard If you enter an invalid file or directory name an error message will appear and you will be prompted to re enter the file name 3 To minimize the file size select the Compress check box option The file size does not shrink when you edit and save the file even if you have deleted screens or removed bitmap images from the library Compressing saves fragmented pvc files in as small a size as possible Compress has no effect on pvd files p gt Note For large applications with many screens compressing the file can take a few minutes 4 Click OK Copying Applications To copy an application you can use the Save As command and save the application under another name See the previous section for more information You can also use the Window
65. grids 8 11 opening 8 3 planning 2 5 PLC controlled screen number tag 13 3 renaming 8 6 resolution high resolution 12 3 low resolution 12 3 saving See updating screen number to PLC controller tag 13 6 setting background color 8 8 templates 8 4 toolboxes 9 14 updating 8 7 validating 8 10 viewing tags used 8 11 Scrolling list 9 7 9 12 cursor list 9 61 object lists 9 61 defining number of states 9 61 Searching for text in the tag usage viewer 6 29 Security assigning to screens 8 8 Select command 9 21 tool 9 21 SELECT CASE in expressions 7 14 Selecting object components 9 17 objects 9 15 shared database 6 35 tags 6 7 terminal type 12 2 Selection conventions P 9 dialog boxes P 10 shortcut keys P 11 Serial upload download cable 1 7 Set bit cursor point 9 7 9 8 9 21 retain cursor on cancel 12 10 Setting auto repeat functions 12 8 baud rate remote 1 0 5 3 ControlNet station number 5 17 DH station number 5 17 push button hold time 12 6 remote alarm parameters 12 7 target firmware version 12 4 Setting up block transfer files 5 11 network file transfers ControlNet 5 18 DH 5 18 Remote 1 0 5 4 terminal communications ControlNet 5 17 DH 5 17 Remote I O 5 3 SFC status mnemonics C 16 Shared racks 2 15 Shared tag databases about 6 33 repairing 6 36 selecting 6 35 using 6 33 with RS View 6 34 6 35 Shortcut keys P 11 Signed in
66. pvc file 3 4 pvd file 3 4 user entry character 7 6 in write expressions 7 23 Numbers 1771 Remote I O Link 1 5 5 11 1785 KA 2 41 bridging DH networks 2 41 5 6 5 19 6200 Series Programming S oftware 2 42 A A l Series software importing a database 6 37 Acknowledge All 11 5 See also Alarm history screen PLC tag is assigned 11 5 PLC tag is not assigned 11 5 Acknowledge button hold time 12 7 Acknowledge hold time 12 8 Acknowledge to PLC controller tag 14 5 Acknowledging alarms 11 5 individual alarms 11 5 multiple alarms 11 5 Actual firmware version defined E 1 Addresses See also Offlink address and tags 2 13 2 16 2 19 2 46 assigning 2 46 5 21 block transfer file 2 16 5 11 discrete 1 0 2 16 planning 2 19 using worksheets 2 19 Index recording on worksheets 2 28 2 53 reducing requirements 2 19 retentive objects 9 5 station 2 40 local 2 41 remote 2 41 Addressing syntax ControlNet Scheduled mode C 20 PLC 2 C 1 PLC 3 data table sections C 2 timers and counters C 2 PLC 5 binary files optional syntax C 3 data files C 3 1 0 and status files C 4 timers counters and control files C 4 PLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax C 6 binary integer BCD ASCII float and string files C 5 1 0 and status files C 5 timer counter control SFC status message PID block transfer and token data files C 6 Remote 1 0 block transfer C 18 discr
67. record any block transfer control bytes in the Output section of the image table e Use anew Remote I O Tags Worksheet for each screen Use one Discrete I O Usage Worksheet for each full or partial rack assignment and two Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheets for each block transfer file Record the addresses for your windows and PLC controlled options on a different worksheet and map these addresses onto the Discrete I O Usage Worksheets Finish assigning addresses to your objects windows and PLC controlled options so you know how many racks to assign to your PanelView terminal Enter this information on the Rack Assignments and Block Transfer File Worksheets Important Before you use the worksheets determine the rack numbers you can use for your PanelView terminal You will not know your exact PLC I O address requirements until you have defined all the objects windows and PLC I O Controlled Options However you do need to know the rack numbers available so you can plan the PLC addresses Planning Applications 2 21 The Remote I O Tags Worksheet For each application screen use one or more Remote I O Tags Worksheets to record tag information for each dynamic object The Remote I O Tags Worksheet is available in Appendix A of this manual Only a few objects require that you fill in all the columns Also use Remote I O Tags Worksheets to record information about Alarm and Information Message windows and PLC I O Co
68. terminal sends the message text to the PLC at the location of this control The maximum length of an alarm message is 80 characters The maximum length of a string tag for DH ControlNet or Remote I O applications is 82 characters The message will be sent to the PLC in the following format Bit 15 8 7 0 1st word 151 character 2nd character 2nd word 3rd character 4th character The flow of messages through this tag is controlled using the Message Control and the Message Handshake controls The Message to PLC control uses string tags only Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 26 Configuring Alarms Full Handshaking When the message text is sent to the PLC after the Alarm Control Delay interval the terminal sets the Message Control to 1 and waits for a handshake response from the PLC When the Message Handshake makes a 0 to non zero transition the Message Control tag is reset to 0 If you want to use message handshaking you must assign both the Message Control and Message Handshake controls and you must program the PLC to reset the Message Handshake to 0 State Transition Diagram for Alarm Message to PLC Complete Handshaking Offline Mode Switch or Power Up Enter Run Mode Reset Control Tag Wait for Alarm with Msg to PLC Flag Alarm with Msg to PLC Handshake Expression non zero Write message to PLC Reset Control Tag Start Control Display Clear Handshake Condition Mode Switch or Power Off Offli
69. transfer request 5 7 5 20 transfer status 5 7 5 21 Transferring applications about 15 1 from within PanelBuilder 15 2 using the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility 15 3 Trend 9 7 9 21 Trigger value and messages 10 2 simplifying PLC programming 10 2 Triggering alarms 11 2 Troubleshooting D 1 problems D 1 validation errors D 3 Type 2 48 U Undo 9 19 Ungrouping nested groups 9 42 objects 9 42 9 43 Unsigned integer data type 2 24 2 51 Unsolicited messages about 5 24 Updating messages 10 14 screens 8 7 Upload download cable 1 7 Uploading applications 15 1 Usability and screen design 2 6 User entry character in expressions 7 6 in write expressions 7 23 Index 1 17 Validating applications 3 10 relaxed validation 6 22 expressions 7 26 messages 10 14 problems with D 3 screens 8 10 tag definitions 6 22 Validation errors See Troubleshooting Validation results window 3 11 8 10 10 14 Variables local evaluation of 7 7 in expressions 7 6 naming 7 6 Version compatibility 1 3 Version 1 03 firmware features E 2 Version 2 firmware features E 2 Version 3 firmware features E 3 Version 4 firmware features E 3 Version 5 firmware features E 3 Version control and downloading applications E 4 at the PanelView terminal E 5 defined E 1 resolution E 5 target firmware version 12 4 Viewing forms 4 4 spreadsheet 4 4 tags in a fol
70. 1 0 6 3 6 24 remote 1 0 6 22 Specifying 6 22 6 24 Data types 2 24 2 50 BCD 2 26 2 52 binary 2 24 2 51 bit position 2 25 2 51 byte 2 24 2 51 default 2 24 2 51 Index 1 5 floating point 2 24 2 51 in expressions 7 3 long integer 2 24 2 51 signed integer 2 24 2 51 unsigned integer 2 24 2 51 Dataliner about 10 8 models P 1 Date and time in PanelView terminal date and time to PLC controller data tags 13 6 PLC controlled date and time control tag 13 4 Date display 9 5 9 13 9 21 Declaring local variables 7 6 Decrement value button 9 5 9 9 9 21 Default data type 2 24 2 51 Defaults assigning 9 54 file deleting 9 55 object defaults 12 9 Defining communications 5 1 for ControlNet applications 5 15 for DH applications 5 15 for Remote 1 0 applications 5 2 DH RIO Pass Through control byte 5 13 Ethernet Pass Through 5 13 network download controls 5 21 PanelView Terminal Address 5 20 PLC station address 5 7 Deleting applications 3 17 block transfer file assignments 5 15 data in spreadsheets 4 12 folders 6 10 module group from a rack 5 15 objects 9 37 rack assignments 5 15 screens 8 7 Designing screen templates 2 7 screens 2 6 2 8 Determining application size 3 11 Device choosing as data source 6 22 data source for ControlNet applications 6 3 for DH applications 6 3 for Remote 1 0 applications 6 3 Device data source and scan classes 5 24
71. 1998 To fill a series of cells with identical data 1 Select a group of cells in a column 2 Choose Fill Forward from the Edit menu or in the toolbar or press Ctrl F The contents of the first cell or cells is copied down each column into the successive cells Existing data is overwritten Note You cannot use Fill Forward in the Node Rack Block and Scheduled editors Inserting a Row in the Spreadsheet You can insert new rows anywhere in the spreadsheet 1 Select a row in the spreadsheet 2 Choose Insert from the Edit menu or in the toolbar A blank row is inserted just above the selected row The existing rows are shifted down Deleting Data in the Spreadsheet You can delete rows columns or blocks of data in the Message editors You can delete rows of data in the Node Rack Block and Scheduled editors Unlike the Cut operation when you delete the data is not copied to a clipboard 1 Select the row column or block of data you want to delete 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu or in the toolbar Or press the Delete key The data is deleted Important In the Messages editors use the Undo command to reverse any action since the last update except sorting Working with Editors 4 13 Editing Selections Messages Only In the Messages editors you can edit a group of records or block of cells in one operation You must have both the form and spreadsheet views open to do this 1 Select the group
72. 2 and Later Applications When you do this The message appears like this Type the code in PanelBuilder The conveyor has stopped nClear feeder and Version 2 or later notify supervisor Display the message on the The conveyor has stopped PanelView terminal Version 2 or Clear feeder and notify supervisor later Upload the application from The conveyor has stopped nClear feeder and PanelView into PanelBuilder Version Wnotify supervisor 2 or later Example 2 Using n in Pre Version 2 Applications When you do this The message appears like this Type the backslash in PanelBuilder rapet jam Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for signal Display the message on the Paper jam Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for PanelView terminal signal Upload the application from Paper jam Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for PanelView into PanelBuilder signal pre Version 2 or PanelBuilder Version 3 Upload the application from Paper jam Clear feeder notify supervisor wait for PanelView into PanelBuilder Version signal 2 02 Note Messages in pre Version 2 applications remain unchanged Note When a pre Version 2 application is uploaded and the user changes the target firmware version to Version 2 or later the messages will not be automatically converted or updated from n to Wn Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 10 6 Creating Messages f Messages Alarm Messages
73. 22 SAVING EXPIESSIONS uid ox cider d e oh ipit dae 1 22 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 toc viii Table of Contents Creating Screens Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Assigning Write 5510 5 1 23 User Entry 7 23 Validating Expressions 7 26 More Expression Examples 7 26 Chapter 8 Creating a New Application Screen 8 2 Opening SCIOENG suarga tarante tr ER RA 8 3 Copying Application Screens within the Same Application 8 4 Copying Application Screen Contents into Another Application 8 5 Renaming Screens 8 6 Updating Screens 8 7 Closing Screens 8 7 Deleting Screens 8 7 Setting a New Screen Background 8 8 Assigning Security Access to 5 8 8 Validating Screens 8 10 Viewing the Tags Used in a Screen 8 11 Working with 5 8 11 Using Screen Grid 8 11 Using the Touch Cell Grid for PanelView 1200e Applications Only 8 14 Displaying Function Keys Keypad Applications Only
74. 24 7 BCD digits 28 8 BCD digits 32 Each group of four bits represents the equivalent of one decimal digit to 9 in the tag value The number of bits required depends on the maximum value required for the object This depends on the application You can align the BCD bit string on any PLC word bit Most of the time you ll want to start at bit 0 The BCD bit string can extend into the next word but cannot extend past the end of a rack assignment or block transfer file Example BCD Values or States 1 If you configured a BCD data value to have a maximum of 16 states 2 digits the assigned address would be an 8 bit contiguous string with 4 bits for each digit 2 digits 4 bits each 8 bits 2 If a numeric value display was configured to have a range from 00000 to 99999 5 digits the assigned address would be a 20 bit contiguous string with 4 bits for each of the 5 digits 5 digits 9 4 bits each 20 bits A PLC word can support only 16 bits so an additional word is required for the additional 4 bits Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Planning Applications 2 27 3 When more than one PLC word is needed to support the required number of digits all remaining digits extend into the next word For example BCD value 123456 would be represented in two PLC words as follows Bit Numbers 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7654 3210 octal Word X 3 4 5 6 Word X 1 1 2 Note The BIN3 BIN4 BIN6 and BINS data
75. 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Using the Query Box Using the Folder Hierarchy Defining Tags 6 7 Use the query box to select the tags you want displayed in the spreadsheet You have two options e Select a single tag by typing the tag name e Select multiple tags by typing wildcards There are two wildcards This character Does this Matches any single character Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Use this wildcard by itself to display all the tags in the tag database Press Enter to display the results of your query in the spreadsheet viewer The first tag that matches the query is displayed in the form The hierarchy and spreadsheet work together The hierarchy shows the tag folders and the spreadsheet shows the tags within the folders A folder icon called root is always present in the hierarchy window It is at the top of the folder hierarchy Initially the root folder is empty You can add other folders to the hierarchy or you can nest folders within another If a folder icon has a plus sign it contains one or more folders If a folder icon is blank it does not contain any other folders This folder contains one or more folders 27 This folder does not contain another folder To view a series of nested folders or long tag names resize the query and hierarchy boxes Place the cursor over the right border of the box surrounding them When the cursor changes
76. 4 Test the application See the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual for information about testing the application on the PanelView terminal Planning Steps Before you can begin creating an application you need to follow these planning steps 1 Document the process you will be automating 2 Design the application screens and objects 3 Plan how the application will communicate with the PLC This step includes several tasks Define nodes and scan classes for DH and ControlNet Unscheduled applications Define read and write files for ControlNet Scheduled applications Identify all the PLC addresses needed for the screen objects Alarm and Information windows and PLC I O Control options then plan the tags and expressions that will link them to the PLC Define the rack assignments for discrete I O and block transfer files for Remote I O applications These steps are discussed in the remainder of this chapter Planning for Safety At each stage of the planning process keep safety considerations in mind ATTENTION Do not rely on your PanelView terminal for emergency stops or any other controls that are critical to the safety of workers or equipment To ensure that the operation can be controlled safely use separate hard wired operator interface devices that do not depend on solid state electronics For more details about safety standards refer to the inside cover of this manual Publi
77. 57 6K ControlNet DH Defining Communications 5 17 Configure Communication Setup x s Network File Transfer Network ControlNet Address E Driver Setting Up Terminal Communications In the Terminal Communications tab you can set the PanelView terminal network address Specifying the Network Type The Network Type input field displays the network type selected for the current application when you created it This refers to the network through which the terminal and the programmable controllers will communicate You can change this by selecting another type from the drop down list See Changing the Network Type later in this chapter Setting the Terminal Network Address The Terminal Network Address lets you specify the PanelView terminal s DH or ControlNet address when it is running this application By default the Terminal Network Address is assigned to the PanelView Location Routing Address field in the Network File Transfer tab For ControlNet applications because no ControlNet bridge devices are available the PanelView Location Routing Address can only be a local network address For DH applications if you change the Terminal Network Address PanelBuilder will update the PanelView Location Routing Address to match and vice versa A message will be displayed informing you of the change Any bridged DH addresses in the Panel View Terminal Address will not be affected
78. 6 14 November 1998 Specifying Remote I O as the Data Source Use the information on the Remote I O Tags worksheets to fill in the tag addresses 1 Choose Remote I O Data Source Type C Device C DDE C Memory Address i C Scheduled 2 In the Address field type the address Note For analog tags the address length depends on the data type assigned The default data type is Unsigned Integer with an address length of 16 bits When assigning a Binary or Bit Position data type unless an address length is specified the address length defaults to 1 bit Byte defaults to 8 bits Long Integer defaults to 32 bits and 1 to 8 BCD defaults to 4 to 32 bits When assigning a Floating Point data type you must use a block transfer address The address syntax depends on the type of address you are defining discrete or block transfer For detailed information about address syntax see Appendix C Addressing Syntax Specifying Scheduled as the Data Source Use the information on the Scheduled File worksheet to fill in the tag addresses 1 Choose Scheduled Source Device C DDE Memory C Remote 170 amp 6 Address 2 In the Address field type the address Note For analog tags the address length depends on the data type assigned The default data type is Unsigned Integer with an address length of 16 bits The address syntax depends on whether the type
79. 8 15 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Index Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 G Global controls message control 11 29 message handshake 11 29 message to PLC 11 25 PLC controlled audio 11 24 PLC controlled relay 11 24 PLC controlled silence alarm 11 23 Silence alarms to PLC 11 23 Goto Configure Mode 9 8 Goto screen button 9 6 9 12 9 21 for calling up the Alarm History screen 11 31 11 35 Graphic images 9 6 9 9 9 29 as labels 9 35 exporting 9 31 importing 9 28 9 30 9 32 library 9 29 removing 9 28 9 31 Graphic objects See objects Grids changing default settings 8 13 screen 8 11 touch cell 8 14 using 8 11 Grouping See also Outer text nested groups 9 42 objects 9 42 performance of PanelBuilder 9 42 tags 6 4 ungrouping nested groups 9 42 ungrouping objects 9 42 H Hardware requirements 1 4 Help P 5 Allen Bradley P 12 online Help 3 16 online Manuals 3 16 Hotkeys See Shortcut keys 1 0 image table 2 13 2 29 racks 2 13 IF THEN ELSE in expressions 7 12 Image bitmap 9 21 DXf 9 21 Importing graphic images 9 28 9 30 9 32 messages 10 9 file extensions 10 11 guidelines 10 11 using clipboard 10 10 tag database 6 37 from A l Series database 6 37 from Logic 5 database 6 37 from MODSOFT database 6 37 from PanelBuilder 900 database 6 37 from Taylor ProWORXPLUS database 6 37 Increment value button 9 6 9 10 9 21 Indenting i
80. 8 H P Laser et 1 8 PanelView 1 7 memory requirements 1 8 setting up 3 15 solving problems 3 15 Printing screen reports options 3 14 Private tag databases about 6 32 converting to shared 6 34 Problems See Troubleshooting Programmable controllers and PanelView terminals 2 13 for DH applications 2 39 1 0 image table 2 29 PLC addressing syntax C 1 reducing addressing requirements 2 19 safety considerations 2 3 SLC addressing syntax C 7 software requirements 1 7 types supported 1 5 PLC types 1 6 scanners 1 6 user manuals P 8 Publications related P 8 Push buttons 9 11 changing touch margins 9 52 hold time setting 12 6 Pyramid Integrator bridging DH networks 2 42 Q QTY Time reset button 11 50 enabling 11 51 QTY TIME resetto PLC 11 50 R Rack Assignments Worksheet A 1 using 2 32 Racks access full 2 16 5 9 listen only 2 16 5 9 assigning 5 8 5 9 assigning on worksheets 2 34 changing 5 14 defining 5 9 deleting 5 15 full 2 13 Last chassis 2 16 5 10 minimizing scan time 2 15 2 16 minimum size 2 18 module groups 2 14 partial 2 13 2 34 planning 2 16 shared 2 15 size requirements 2 18 Read objects 9 2 README TXT file P 5 Rectangles 9 6 9 13 Redo 9 19 RefNo 2 48 Regeneration of expressions 7 19 Registering PanelBuilder 1400e P 4 Related publications 1 0 scanner modules P 8 programmable controllers P 8 Relaxe
81. Application window or choose its icon from the toolbar 3 Press Alt Tab to move between the open editors Note If you make a change in the Scan Class editor while the Tag Database editor is open when you return to the Tag Database editor the list of scan classes is updated automatically This section describes how to fill in the fields for analog digital string and block tag types Use the information you entered on the Device Tags and Remote I O Tags Worksheets Note The Log Data and Alarm check boxes in the Tag Database editor are present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot use them in PanelBuilder Tip For information about assigning tag addresses that optimize DH highway traffic see Guidelines For Organizing Tags to Optimize DH Network Performance in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 14 Defining Tags Configuring an Analog Tag 1 If the tag is part of a folder select that folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash Tag Database Untitled BE E Fie Edit View Help sies psu Tag Name Tutorials Type Analog J Security J Description Minimum fi Units Maximum 100 Offset 0 Data Defan zl new New Initial Value 0 Data Source Type C D
82. Bargraph Control 1 137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 193 Nuneric Data Dsp Disp Value 1137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 377 Numeric Data Dsp Disp Value 1137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 113 Vertical Bargraph Control 23 aml NODE Cont Screens 28 Multistate Indicato Indicator EN Close Update Print Help To open the Tag Usage Viewer for Screens do one of the following choose Screen Tag Usage Viewer from the Screen menu press e press F5 5 Note You can also view all the tags in an application using the Tag Usage Viewer for Applications For details see Chapter 6 Defining Tags Chapter 6 also provides information on how to search for strings and how to filter update and print the spreadsheet Working with Grids These grids are available as guides for positioning sizing and aligning objects screen grid touch screen grid if your application will run on a PanelView 1200 or 1200e terminal Using the Screen Grid How you will use the screen grid depends on the application type Forkeypad applications use the grid to align objects and design screen layout Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 8 12 Creating Screens Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 e For touch screen applications use the grid to align text graphic and display objects For a PanelView 1200 or 1200e application all input objects such as push buttons automatically align to the touch cells even if the touc
83. Bip nice E Tag Dambais BC jariau Marci semper m v Ain E Lopai An E Serena 7 1 255 Ta E Screen imaa E Object Bunnan E Fali Waipapa Ajdina FPripnor ri Tag Adds mes Fisterenre AVCSW on NoD E graphie lagers PWD Pie Sige nad Weed Tag Count Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Working with Applications 3 13 Report On Options Because a full application report can be quite large you may want to document only certain features of the application Choose the application features you want to document in the Report Selection dialog box The options are described in the table below Note Some ASCII symbols may appear as their numeric equivalents on the report For example the ALT 009 symbol appears as V009 on the report The symbols will appear as expected when the text is displayed on the PanelView terminal Note The features you select are saved in the PB1400E INI file in the Windows directory for the next time you create a report This report option Does this PLC Communications e fora DH or ControlNet application shows the communications setup network type the terminal s network address and PanelView Location Routing Address and network download control tags node scan class definitions and Scheduled files e fora Remote 1 0 application shows the communications setup network type baud rate
84. C produces an analog input of 0 and a temperature of 500 C produces an analog input of 4 095 The mathematical relationship between the two temperature scales is linear Create an expression to convert the analog input temperature reading to Celsius To display the temperature using a Numeric Data Display object at the PanelView terminal assign this expression to the Displayed Value control Tag For Temperature Probe 400 4095 100 The expression uses integer division 1 The result will be truncated to an integer with no decimal places For higher accuracy when converting the analog value into a temperature use floating point division Tag For Temperature Probe 400 4095 100 This expression will produce a result that contains decimal places If you have configured the Numeric Data Display to use the Implicit or Fixed Position decimal point option the appropriate number of decimal places will be displayed However floating point math is much slower than integer math You must weigh the trade off between speed and accuracy when considering which type of division to use Comparison Operations Comparison operators have equal precedence They are evaluated in sequence from left to right Operands can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number All comparison operations produce a result of the data type Boolean True if the comparison is true and False i
85. Chapter 9 Creating Objects Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet for discrete file addresses Fill it in as you fill in the Remote I O Tags worksheet to keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet for block transfer file addresses Fill it in as you fill in the Remote I O Tags worksheet to keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 20 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Once you have filled in the previous three worksheets use the next two worksheets to complete your address planning e Rack Assignments Worksheet Use this worksheet to keep track of your rack assignments Block Transfer File Worksheet Use this worksheet to define block transfer file addresses and the Pass Through control byte address These points summarize the process of planning your Remote I O communications using the worksheets Define the discrete or block transfer PLC addresses and tag names for each object on your screen using the Remote I O Tags Worksheet Enter the object reference number and screen number on the I O Usage worksheets to map your PLC memory usage Use the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet for discrete addresses Use both the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet and the Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet for block transfer files and addresses In the Discrete I O Worksheet
86. Configure Terminal Setup dialog box you define timing parameters that affect the operation of the terminal and control the flow of information to and from the PLC Configure Terminal Setup Eg Object Setup Push Button oK Hold Time Cancel Remote Alarm Help Operation Hold Time 3 seconds Ack Control Hold Time 250 msec Alarm Control Delay 200 msec Enter Key Auto Repeat Start Delay Control Delay 400 msec Rate 0 disabled gt Handshake Time 4 seconds Information Window Ack Hold Time Setting the Push Button Hold Time If an operator presses a button very quickly the programmable controller may miss that press between I O scans By setting the Push Button Hold Time you can set the minimum time that a push button is held on by the terminal so that the programmable controller can sense it To set the Push Button Hold Time Inthe Push Button Hold Time list choose the minimum time you want to assign By default this is 250 milliseconds By increasing the On time you ensure that the PLC controller does not miss a button press For example if an operator presses and releases a button very quickly the programmable controller is more likely to register the press if the Push Button Hold Time is set to one second Note If you have set the hold time for one second operators must wait one second before they can press the same button again If they press the same butt
87. DH ControlNet or Ethernet network using the Remote I O Pass Through you must define the Pass Through File Control Byte You configure this byte in the RIO Block Transfer Files editor Note If the PLC specified as the device in the RIO Racks editor does not support Pass Through you will not be able to define a Pass Through File control byte If this happens go into the RIO Racks editor and select another device type In addition to the 64 available block transfer files there is a dedicated block transfer file called Pass Through The file size for this block transfer is fixed at 64 words and cannot be changed Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 14 Defining Communications Changing Rack or Block Transfer File Assignments Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To define the Pass Through File Control Byte Fill in the information from the Block Transfer File Assignments worksheet 1 Choose Pass Through File from the Block editor s menu The Pass Through File dialog box appears Poss Through File Beck tumbar M woe Fm 2 Choose the rack number word and byte for the Pass Through File s control byte The rack must have full access A control byte is allocated in the output file You cannot use this byte for a tag address or for the control byte of any other block transfer files 3 Click OK As you develop the application you may find that you need to change the rack or block transfer file
88. FIFO DN Position 0 23157 Comments Rung 1 N7 8 contains the trigger value of the alarm to be remotely acknowledged Rung 2 The FIFO is loaded as alarm trigger values to be remotely acknowledged are copied from N7 8 to N7 11 Rung 3 The FIFO is unloaded resulting in alarms being remotely acknowledged Configuring Alarms 11 23 N7 1 is the Acknowledge to PLC address It contains the trigger value of the alarm that was last acknowledged and is sent from the P anelView terminal to the PLC N7 9 1 disables this rung for the time duration set in the Acknowledge Control Hold Time parameter This allows control of the flow of remote alarm acknowledges N7 12 contains the trigger value of the alarm to be remotely acknowledged from the PLC and is unloaded to the Remote Acknowledge tag address N7 2 Note If you use Remote Acknowledge your application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Silence Alarms to PLC When the operator presses the Silence button in the Alarm Message Window or the Alarm History screen the terminal sets the assigned tag to 1 for the Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time and then resets it to 0 This control uses tags only Use a digital or analog tag Note Hold times are configured in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box For more information about these parameters see Timing Parameters
89. Guidelines for Importing Message Files If you want to use the Import Message File command to import messages follow these guidelines in preparing your message file e The trigger value can be any signed long integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 except 0 The values do not have to be created in any order but no two messages in the same file can have the same trigger value The message text must be surrounded by quotation marks e To include a quotation mark in your message preface it with a second quotation mark e PanelBuilder will ignore any spaces found outside the quotation marks Acharacter with an ASCII code below 32 is not valid and will not be imported For details of the ASCII character set see the ASCII Displays chapter in the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Also see Appendix B The Extended Character Set in this manual Use the comment character as the first character in the line of a comment PanelBuilder will ignore lines that begin with The number of characters in each message should be e 80 characters or less for alarm messages 144 characters or less for information messages e 256 characters or less for local messages When you name your file use one of the following extensions e img for information messages e Img for local messages e for alarm messages Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 10 12 Creating Me
90. History When the operator presses the Clear All button in the Alarm History screen and the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC tag is not assigned the terminal does the following depending on how alarms are configured clears the Alarm History after stating that some alarms are not acknowledged Configuring Alarms Use the System Terminal Setup editor to set up Remote Alarm Timing parameters For more information see Chapter 12 Use the System Alarms editor to configure the Alarm Global Controls the Alarm History screen the Alarm Message Window and the Alarm Status screen Use the Messages Alarm Messages editor to define all the alarm messages their corresponding trigger values and Audio Print Display Relay and Message to PLC options See Chapter 10 for more etails Configuring Alarms 11 7 When the operator presses the Clear All button in the Alarm History screen and the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC tag is assigned the terminal does the following depending on how alarms are configured sorts all alarms by time acknowledges the oldest unacknowledged alarm first at the time the button is pressed writes the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the Alarm Acknowledged to PLC tag e starts timing the Alarm Control Delay tag when the Alarm Control Delay time has been reached sets the Acknowledge Control tag if assigned to 1 and starts the Acknowledge Control Hold timing when the Acknowledge Contol Ho
91. I O To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags check box If you do not want to convert tags in the application clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Ifyou do not convert the tags to Remote I O format the tags data source remains Device for Unscheduled tags and Scheduled for Scheduled tags and the address is unchanged You will have to change the data source to Remote I O manually for any of these tags that you want to use and give them each a Remote I O address Ifyou convert the tags to Remote I O the data source for all Unscheduled and Scheduled tags is changed to Remote I O but you will still have to give them valid Remote I O addresses manually Note Converting shared tags may invalidate them for other applications that use them Any unused tags will remain unconverted Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Click OK The following messages appear Configure Communication Setup ix an Scheduled File Settings will be lost after lt the network type is converted from ControlNet Continue Converting from ControlNet to DH Defining Communications 5 37 Configure Communication Setup x Nodes and Scan classes will be lost after the network type is converted to RIO
92. If you copy graphic images across applications the images are automatically added to the target application If an image is already in the target application it will be overwritten with the new one Deleting Objects You can delete one or more objects on a screen 1 Choose one or more objects 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu or press Delete This deletes the object If you change your mind you can always undo your changes before closing the screen Duplicating Objects The Duplicate Command is a quick way to create identical objects Unlike the Cut and Copy commands the Duplicate command does not use the clipboard This command duplicates any tag names and expression definitions associated with the object Note There can be only one ASCII Input object and Cursor List object per screen so you cannot duplicate either of these objects Note There can only be four Trends per screen so you cannot duplicate or paste the Trend more than three times Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 38 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To duplicate an object 1 Choose the object 2 Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press Ctrl D The duplicated object appears slightly offset from the original object 3 Move the new object to another position on the screen Tip Duplicate also duplicates actions For example if you duplicate an object move it and then duplicate it agai
93. Information Window Control to 0 If you select this option the Information Message window will not contain a Clear or Acknowledge button Operator Cleared the operator clicks the window s Clear button and the terminal removes the window Operator Acknowledged the operator clicks the window s Ack button The terminal then sets the Acknowledge to PLC control to a value of 1 The programmable controller must be programmed to monitor this tag When the tag is set to 1 the programmable controller sets the Information Window Control to 0 This removes the window The Acknowledge to PLC control is set to 1 for the Information Window Ack Hold Time Font Type You can choose from four different font sizes Small Double High Double Wide and Large If you are creating a Version 2 application each message can contain up to 144 characters For earlier versions the font size you choose determines the maximum length of the messages Ifyou choose Small or Double High the messages can be up to 70 characters e Ifyou choose Double Wide or Large the message can be up to 35 characters Blink Click the check box to choose Yes if the messages are to blink Leave it unchecked to choose No Underline Click the check box to choose Yes if the messages are to be underlined Leave it unchecked to choose No Foreground Color Choose the foreground color for the text in the Information Message Window Background Color Choose the backgro
94. Large Font 9 Grey about viewing the defaults see Configuring Object States later in Button Margin 10 Bright Blue this chapter Border Style 11 Bright Green Line Styl E zu ta You can set an object s colors by using the Foreground Color and Blink 14 Bright Magenta Background Color options in the Format menu or by using the color Underline Text 15 Bright Yellow palette 16 White The color palette consists of two identical color bars The colors in the upper bar are the foreground colors The colors in the lower bar are the background colors Indicates object foreground color Foreground colors Background colors 22 Indicates object background color If multiple objects are selected whose foreground colors differ the foreground color indicator in the color palette will be displayed as a dotted rectangle Likewise the background color indicator will appear as a dotted rectangle if the background color of the selected objects differ The color menu will show these conditions by not displaying a check 7 beside any color Foreground colors are used for text monochrome graphic images lines arcs wedges ellipses rectangles bar graph fill scale lines and for button and list highlight colors Background colors are used for the filled part of the rest of the object Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 50 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998
95. Local Messages e Embedded Newline control characters n in Information Messages Embedded Newline control characters 1 in Alarm Messages e Remote I O Floating Point analog tags Numeric Input Objects configured with the Implicit Decimal Option Extra large fonts e Skipped states used in Scrolling Lists Use of the Retain Last List State feature in Scrolling Lists Cursor List Preview States of the value to Number of Visible States 1 2 1 In terminal firmware versions earlier than version 2 the range was 0 to Number of Visible States 2 1 e SLC slot number configured to a value other than 0 The PLC Controlled Alarm Acknowledge Control Version 3 Firmware Features Version 4 Firmware Features Version 5 Firmware Features Version Control E 3 Multiple Alarm Controls The two Alarm Message to PLC Controls the Message Handshake Expression and the Message Control Tag Device block tags Trend objects Scale objects Alarm window configured as a panel Increment Decrement buttons with floating point increments decrements PanelView Firmware Version 3 includes support for the following PanelBuilder features Goto Configure Mode button PanelView 1000e applications Retain Cursor On Cancel feature Modbus communications with the Modbus Communications Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E UMOD PanelView Firmware Version 4 includes support for the following features Ethernet Pass T
96. More than one cursor list objectis on the screen Remove all but one cursor list objects The textis longer than the maximum allowed The user specified LARGE or double wide font size of the Information Window does not permit a message thatis greater than 35 characters long Reduce the font size using the Information Window Configurator to allow messages up to 70 characters long Tag entry not found The tag is notin the tag database Add the tag to the tag database or use another tag Nota device tag There is a problem with the tag Check the tag data source definition Nota RIO tag There is a problem with the tag Check the tag data source definition Cannot create tag There is a problem with the tag Check the tag definition Tag tag name does not exist The tag is not in the tag database Add the tag to the tag database Error creating configuration There is a problem with the PLC Communication setup Close the application and re open it Cannot create channel There is a problem with the PLC Communication setup Close the application and re open it Cannot create scan class There is a problem with the PLC Communication setup Close the application and re open it There are more than 5000 used tags You have reached the maximum of 5000 assigned tags The PanelView terminal only supports a maximum of 5000 tags Rev
97. Name Type Analog Tag only Initial Range Scale Offset Data Type value 2 Values Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Recording Object Information For each object fill in the following information e RefNo The object s unique identification number Usually you can start with 1 and increase by 1 for each object Start from 1 again for each screen so that adding an object to the first screen does not require that all other numbers change Type The type of object such as Interlocked Push Button Some objects use several tags or expressions See online help or the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual or look at the PanelBuilder objects themselves to plan which tags or expressions to use for each object Use one line in the Remote I O Tags worksheet for each tag and use the Type column to describe the function of the additional tags Expressions are optionally used to read and manipulate the PLC output at the tag addresses You can also use a line for each expression to plan which ones you will need to define when you create the object For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run Recording Tag and Expression Information
98. November 1998 Tag Data Types in Expressions You can use only an analog or digital tag in an expression The tag s data type affects how the tag s value is represented in an expression Digital tags are represented with the Long data type and their value is unaffected For analog tags if the data type is Float the tag is represented with the Single data type All other analog tag data types are represented as the Long data type Note PanelView ensures expressions have floating point accuracy of at least 7 decimal digits The PanelBuilder expression language is modeled after the Microsoft Visual Basic programming language and uses many of the same conventions This section describes the syntax to use for the various components of your expressions Line breaks are meaningful in the PanelBuilder expression language A line break can indicate a particular construct or the end of a statement Follow the syntax rules described in this section to ensure that your expressions perform as expected Keywords tag names and local variable names are not case sensitive That means you can enter them as upper case lower case or as a mixture When expressions are compiled on pvd file creation PanelBuilder converts all keywords tag names and local variables to upper case Types of Operations Expressions Can Perform You can use expressions to perform these types of operations on tag values arithmetic operations comparison operation
99. Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously The following illustration shows the configuration dialog box for the Local Message Display object This object uses only one control named Message Control Configure Local Message Display xi Cancel Control Message Control unassigned Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign 2 Toassign a tag double click the control name or choose the control name and click Assign Tag The Tag Browser dialog box appears From this dialog box you can choose an existing tag by double clicking it or create a new one by choosing New Tag If you choose New Tag the Tag editor appears For details on using the Tag editor see Other Methods of Creating Tags in Chapter 6 Defining Tags 3 To assign an expression choose the control name and click Assign Exprn Expression This button is dimmed if you select a control to which only tags can be assigned The Expression editor appears For details on using the Expression editor see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Creating Objects 9 65 To unassign a tag or expression 1 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously 2 Choose the control name and click Unassign If you unassign a tag the tag remains in the database but is no longer assigned to the option If you unassign an expression the expression is lost Viewin
100. Out commands to draw edit or position objects more easily When you first open a screen it is in normal view Use Zoom In to see objects in more detail Use Zoom Out to see an overview of the entire screen including the function keys on a keypad application Zoom Out Y Show Color Palette v Show Toolbox To zoom in do one of the following choose Zoom In from the View menu choose from the toolbar To zoom out do one of the following choose Zoom Out from the View menu choose from the toolbar If you are at full magnification you can reduce the view twice Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Objects 9 19 Using the Undo and Redo Commands Use the Undo and Redo commands any time you draw or edit objects and decide you want to reverse your actions iedo Cut Cte Copy Ctrl C aste Ctr uae When you move the pointer over the Undo or Redo icons the status v Copy with Controls Join Line Ends bar displays the undo or redo action that will be performed Select All CtrleA Duplicate Eust Important You can undo all the operations performed in a screen Pn since you opened the screen or since you last saved the application This includes configuring objects and assigning tags and expressions One Undo resets all work done in a single session of configuring an object in the Configure dialog box but does not undo a tag creation or edit To
101. PanelView Location Routing Address and network file transfer information and rack and block transfer file definitions Terminal Setup Shows the Application Startup screen number application file comment application type Target Firmware Version the timing parameters and whether the Retain Cursor on Cancel option is enabled or disabled Tag Database Lists alphabetically all the tags in the database that are used in the application and shows each tag s definition Alarms Shows the configuration of the Alarm Window Alarm History and Alarm Status screens and their associated tags or expressions PLC 1 0 Control Lists all the PLC 1 0 Control options and identifies the tags or expressions that have been assigned to these options Information Message Shows the configuration settings for the Information Window essage Window and its tags or expressions Alarm Messages Lists all the messages including trigger values created in the Alarm Message editor and their options Information Messages Lists all the messages including trigger values created in the Information Message editor Local Messages Lists all the messages including trigger values created in the Local Message editor Tag Address Cross Lists all the places in the application where tags are Reference assigned sorted by tag address Graphic Images Lists the bitmap bmp and AutoCAD graphics dxf files imported into the a
102. Rack column The Block editor is sorted numerically by the File Number column You cannot use the Sort command in the Node editor entries are automatically sorted by Node Name when you open the editor The Scheduled File editor is sorted alphabetically and numerically by the File Number column Important You cannot undo a Sort operation To sort all the entries in the spreadsheet 1 If working in a Messages editor select the column to sort by clicking on the column heading You do not need to select a column to sort the Rack Block and Scheduled editors 2 Choose Sort or Sort Messages from the Edit menu or in the toolbar For messages data is sorted numerically if the data in the column is numeric or alphabetically if the data is text Entries in the Rack Block and Scheduled editors are sorted as described above Sorting Portions of the Spreadsheet You can sort portions of a spreadsheet in the Messages editors only The data is sorted according to primary and secondary sort keys The left most selected column is the primary sort key Each successive selected column is a secondary sort key That is the data is first sorted according to the items within the left most selected column If there are any duplicate items they are arranged according to the contents of the next column For example you could sort local messages using the trigger value as the primary sort key The message text column could be the secondary sort k
103. Setting the Information Message Window Acknowledge Hold Time When you configure the Information Message Window you specify how the window is to be removed One option is Operator Acknowledged If you choose this option you can define the Acknowledge to PLC Controller tag The Acknowledge Hold Time determines how long the address at the Acknowledge to PLC Controller tag will be held on when the operator presses the Acknowledge button To set the Acknowledge Hold Time Inthe Ack Hold Time list choose the time you want to assign Setting the Auto Repeat Functions When the operator presses and holds down a button with auto repeat capability the button goes into auto repeat mode That is the terminal acts as if the operator were repeatedly pressing and releasing the button instead of just holding it You can set both the delay before the auto repeat mode begins and the number of times per second the press release action is repeated Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 9 For some objects you configure the auto repeat delay and rate when you define the button These are objects that directly write to a tag without any user confirmation for example the Increment Decrement Value Button and the Control List Selector without Enter Key Configuring auto repeat allows more precise control for each object to prevent overshooting target values When you set the Auto Repeat values in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure
104. Static Both Not N A applicable Screen Select Keypad Static Touch Not N A Screen applicable Objects Available in PanelBuilder Creating Objects 9 7 Object Type Keypad or Read or Retentive Touch Write Screen Scrolling List object Dynamic Retentive Cursor List Both if so Multistate Indicator Object List Read configured Local Message Object List Read Numeric Data Display Object Read List Set Bit Cursor Point Dynamic Keypad Write Yes Symbol Dynamic Both Read Non retentive Text Static Both Not N A applicable Time Display Dynamic Not N A applicable Trend Dynamic Both Read Non retentive Wedge Static Both Not N A applicable The following sections provide an overview of the different objects and lists all the objects that are available in PanelBuilder ASCII Display ASCII Display object displays a character string sent from the programmable controller The display is updated whenever the string changes ASCII Input ASCII Input object is an on screen keyboard that allows the operator to create a text string This text string is sent to the programmable controller Data can be entered and sent to the PLC by the touch screen the terminal keypad an external keyboard or a barcode reader Bar Graphs Bar graphs display changing conditions in the process such as temperature or fluid levels Both horizontal and vertical bar graphs are supported Publication 2711E 6 14
105. The Extended Character Set B 3 Key Character Key Character i NM ALT 0132 1 ALT 0139 ALT 0133 ALT 0140 M ALT 0134 ALT 0141 N ALT 0142 ALT 0143 H ROM il NN ALT 0144 ALT 0151 NN ALT 0145 L ALT 0152 ALT 0146 ALT 0153 n bi ALT 0147 ALT 0154 u Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 B 4 The Extended Character Set
106. This chapter provides an overview of PanelBuilder 1400e objects It tells you about what objects are and do different types of objects working with objects creating objects adding labels to objects editing objects arranging objects configuring object states assigning tags and expressions to objects This chapter does not provide details about individual application screen objects For information on specific objects see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Tip Before you begin creating objects and screens use worksheets to plan your application For details see Chapter 2 Planning Applications Objects are the components that make up each application screen appearing on the terminal Objects represent the components of traditional control panels such as push buttons indicators or bar graphs Objects also have different properties that allow them to perform the functions required for an automated process Objects allow the operator to monitor and control the operations of the process when the application is running Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 2 Creating Objects Types of Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Some objects are available only for touch screen applications Others are available only for keypad applications Most are available for both PanelBuilder automatically makes the appropriate objects available for your applicat
107. This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1400e terminals Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals 800 by 600 Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 20 80 120 180 220 280 320 380 420 480 520 580 620 680 720 780 Notes 1 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys 2 The PanelView 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1400e terminals Screen Worksheet for 1000e Terminals 640 by 480 Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 8 72 88 152 168 232 248 312 328 392 408 472 488 552 568 632 20 65 105 385 425 465 Notes 1 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw
108. Transfer Files lS Scheduled Files To change the application s network type see Changing the Network Type later in this chapter E PLC Communications Communication Setup Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Communications 5 3 The information you define in the Network File Transfer tab is used only for DH and Remote I O ControlNet and Remote I O or Ethernet and Remote I O Pass Through file downloads If you are going to transfer applications between the development computer and the PanelView terminal using a serial Upload Download cable you do not have to specify anything in the Network File Transfer tab To open the Configure Communication Setup dialog box gt Open the PLC Communications folder and choose Communication Setup or in the toolbar wr ITE Communication Sebup Teresa Fils Teenie Setting Terminal Communications In the Terminal Communications tab you can set the baud rate and the terminal network address Setting the Baud Rate The length of the Remote I O cable between the terminal and programmable controller dictates the maximum baud rate For maximum speed select the highest baud rate that supports your cable length For a cable up to Select this baud rate 2 500 feet 230 4K 5 000 feet 115 2K 10 000 feet 57 6K Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 4 Defining Communications P
109. Uses default file number 3 if the file number 1s absent bbbbb Bit offset from start of file 0 15999 decimal Example B27 248 PLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter Control SFC Status Message PID Block Transfer and Token Data Files FFnnn eee MNE ss bb FF File type T Timer C Counter R Control SC SFC status MG Message PD PID control BT Block transfer TD Token data nnn File number 3 999 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control eee Element number 0 999 decimal SLC Addressing Syntax Addressing Syntax C 7 MNE Member mnemonic see Timer Mnemonics Counter Mnemonics Control Mnemonics SFC Status Mnemonics Message Mnemonics PID Mnemonics Block Transfer Mnemonics and Token Data Mnemonics under Mnemonic Tables later in this appendix SS Submember Only applies to ADDR and DATA members of PID structure and DATA member of MSG structure bb optional Bit number 0 15 decimal Only applies to analog word members Example MG59 33 DATA 0 15 Note For ControlNet device tags the Tag Database editor supports the full addressing syntax and range supported for the PLC 5C programmable controllers The following section provides addressing syntax for the SLC 5 Enhanced programmable controllers which include the SLC 5 03 05301 and SLC 5 04
110. Validate from the Tools menu or press F9 A progress bar is displayed then the Validation Results for Application window appears It lists and describes the errors If there are no errors a check mark appears 4 alidation Results for Application Untitled1 OL x Total number of errors 0 Update Communication Setup no errors found Tag Usage Viewer Terminal Setup no errors found Alarms no errors found z PLC VO Control no errors found Print Info Msg Window no errors found Alarm Messages no errors found Print Setup Information Messages no errors found Local Messages no errors found Help Screens no errors found Tags no errors found 2 If there are errors listed go back to the dialog box screen or message editor and correct the errors Tip Use the Tag Usage Viewer to help understand any tag related errors PanelBuilder calculates the size of the application the size of the pvd file The application s maximum allowable size depends on the type of terminal it will run on and whether the application will be stored on the terminal s memory or on the PCMCIA memory card To ensure your application will fit on its destination determine the capacity of the space where it will be stored and check the application s size before downloading The maximum allowable application size regardless of the file s destination is 8 MB e Ona PanelView 1200 Series F or G
111. WWW bb optional Addressing Syntax C 9 File number Binary 3 9 255 decimal Integer 7 9 255 decimal Floating Point 8 9 255 decimal ASCII 9 255 decimal String 9 255 decimal Binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Word address 0 255 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Bit offset is not supported for floating point and string file types Example F8 129 2 SLC 5 Binary and Integer Files This addressing syntax applies to Fixed I O SLC SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 OS300 Fnnn www bb F nnn optional WWW bb optional File type B Binary N Integer File number Binary 3 9 255 decimal Integer 7 9 255 decimal Binary and Integer file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary and 7 integer Word address 0 255 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Example N17 129 2 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 10 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax Fnnn bbbb F nnn optional bbbb File type B Binary File number 3 9 255 decimal Uses default file number 3 if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file 0
112. a ControlNet network the terminal network address must be between 1 and 99 decimal Ensure the value is correct for your application Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 In the Network File Transfer tab the PanelView Location Routing Address will be set to the Terminal Network Address For more information about configuring an application for ControlNet networks see Defining Communications for a DH or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Converting from DH to Remote 1 0 Defining Communications 5 33 If you change an application from DH to Remote I O you will have to define the necessary Racks specify the Block Transfer File and Pass Through control bytes if needed and change any tag addresses that are not valid for Remote I O To change the network type from DH to Remote 1 0 1 2 3 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu In the Target Network field choose Remote I O To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags check box If you do not want to convert tags in the application clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Ifyou do not convert the tags to Remote I O format the tags data source remains Device and the address is unchanged You will have to change the data source to Remote I O manually for any of these tags that you want
113. a Remote I O application select Remote I O as the data source For each tag you must identify the address within the controller s Remote I O racks by specifying a rack or block transfer file address For information about rack and block transfer file configuration see Chapter 2 Planning Applications For informatin about addressing see Appendix C Addressing Syntax Scheduled When you create Scheduled tags for a ControlNet Scheduled application select Scheduled as the data source When you create Scheduled tags for a ControlNet Scheduled application also specify the address within the Scheduled read or write file Because Scheduled files are meant for time critical data only use them for important operations that require guaranteed update times For information about configuring Scheduled files see Chapter 5 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 4 Defining Tags Organizing Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Organizing tags makes database creation and maintenance faster and simpler and helps optimize PanelView performance To organize tags Establish naming conventions Naming conventions enable you to use wildcards most effectively when searching for and displaying tags during development and runtime Use folders to group related tags Avoid defining more than one tag for a particular address Each tag used in the application requires memory when the application is run wi
114. address is located at an integer file element the length must be a multiple of 16 the bit length of an integer Note For the ControlNet Scheduled Tags Worksheet you will need to record the Number of Bits End Address or string tag only Number of Characters e Tag Start Value The tag start value is the initial value or the object s initial state value if one exists For block tags the initial value can be 0 or 1 After you complete the planning steps in this chapter your worksheets contain all the information you need to create your application To create your application work through the remaining chapters in this manual as described in Steps for Building an Application at the beginning of this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Chapter 3 Working with Applications This chapter introduces you to the basics of working with applications It shows you how to create new applications open existing applications convert applications created in PanelBuilder for DOS or PanelBuilder 1200 to PanelBuilder 1400e format save applications copy applications change the application name create application reports use help in applications close applications delete applications Important This chapter assumes you have a good working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows operating system For detailed information refer to your Microsoft Windows User s Guide if you use Windows 3 1
115. addresses to ensure they are valid for the new network type Note For information about converting applications to and from Modbus see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 When you change an application from Remote I O to DH you will have to define the necessary DH nodes and scan classes and change any tag addresses that are not valid for DH device tags For more information see Defining Communications for a DH or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter To change the network type from Remote 1 0 to DH 1 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu 2 In the Target Network field choose DH 3 To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags check box If you do not want to convert tags in the application clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Defining Communications 5 29 Ifyou do not convert the tags to DH format the tags data source remains Remote I O For any tags to be used in the DH application you will have to change the data source to Device and give them valid DH addresses If you do convert the tags to DH format all the tags in the database that are used by your application will be converted to Device tags Analog Tags using the binary data type will be switched to unsigned integer because binary is not supported for DH applications Note If your application s Target Firmware ve
116. and Schedule editors The View menu option with a check mark is the selected view If both Spreadsheet and Form have check marks both views are selected If only one view is selected the displayed view is dimmed so that it cannot be deselected Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 4 Working with Editors View Y Spreadsheet Form Go to Spreadsheet Ctrl PgDn Go to Form Ctrl PgUp Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To view both the spreadsheet and the form p gt Ensure both the Form and Spreadsheet options in the View menu have check marks If an option does not have a check mark choose it Both the spreadsheet and the form appear To view only the spreadsheet If Form has a check mark and Spreadsheet does not you cannot deselect Form Choose Spreadsheet from the View menu Then choose Form to deselect it If both have check marks choose Form so that its check mark disappears The spreadsheet appears You can create or edit records in this area when you use the Messages editors To view only the form Ifthe Spreadsheet option has a check mark and Form does not you cannot deselect Spreadsheet Choose Form from the View menu Then choose Spreadsheet to deselect it If both have check marks choose Spreadsheet so that its check mark disappears The form for the currently selected record appears You can create or edit records in this area Moving between the Spreadsheet and the Form
117. application is configured for this the terminal to which you are downloading is this any Touch Screen terminal any Keypad terminal any Keypad terminal any Touch Screen terminal 1400e Touch Screen terminal 1200e Touch Screen terminal any Keypad terminal 1400e Keypad terminal 1200e Keypad terminal any Touch Screen terminal A 1784 KTCX or 1784 KTCS network communication card is not installed in a terminal to which you are downloading a ControlNet application If you have not selected the Make Application Current option in the Download Options dialog box before downloading an application to a PanelView terminal PanelBuilder downloads the application but warns you if any of the three conditions mentioned above exist Version Control at the PanelView Terminal Version Control E 5 Because you can use PanelView terminals as PCMCIA card writers for other terminals you can download applications to terminals which cannot run them Version Control does ensure however that you do not attempt to Make Current any application which will not run on the terminal to which you are downloading The PanelView terminal will not allow you to select the Make Application Current option for an application under these circumstances The firmware version required by the features used in the application the Actual Firmware Version exceeds the firmware version installed in the PanelView terminal The terminal
118. application type how to assign a comment to the application file how to specify the target PanelView firmware version how to select timing parameters such as Push Button hold time and Remote Alarm hold times and delay how to specify default behavior of objects in the application The System folder contains the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box where you can specify general and timing parameters for the application file and terminal An example of a parameter would be the push button time required for the PLC to register button presses You can also specify the default behavior of objects in the application To open the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box 1 Open the application you want to edit 2 Open the System folder Choose Terminal Setup or from the toolbar The Configure Terminal Setup dialog box appears with two tabs General and Timing Parameters For keypad applications the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box has a third tab the Object Setup tab Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 12 2 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Configure Terminal Setup Lx General Object Setup Application Startup Screen Screen 255 Alarm History Application Type 1000 640x480 Keypad Application File Comment SS Target Firmware Version Version 05 00 and up General The General tab is where you specify the Applicatio
119. are using only the keyboard press Ctrl arrow to size the object To size objects more precisely press the or keys on the numeric keypad before you press the arrow key This allows you to size the object in increments The amount of the increment varies according to how many times you press the or key before you begin pressing the arrow key The outline of the object stretches or contracts from the anchor point to the pointer position as you move the mouse or press the keys Drag a side handle to change the width or height Drag a corner handle to change both the width and height 4 When the object is the correct size release the mouse button or the Ctrl arrow keys Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 40 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To change the size of an object with the Position dialog box 1 Select an on screen object and press Ctrl O or choose Position from the Edit menu The Position dialog box appears Note The top text line Position of the Position dialog box shows the current x y coordinates of the object or grouped object The bottom text line Size shows the current size of the object or grouped object You can resize the object or grouped object by changing the width and height Some objects have a minimum or fixed size and cannot be changed 2 Enter the desired resize changes 3 Click OK To change the position and size of a line object with the Positio
120. at least 65 536 colors Microsoft Windows 3 1 or later Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 operating system the applicable programmable controller documentation e Getting Started with PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows e if installing the Transfer Utility see the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 for detailed instructions If you have questions about PanelBuilder please consult the manuals or the online help first If you cannot find the answer take advantage of our Technical Support Fax Back system available 24 hours a day 7 days a week at 1 440 646 6701 or browse through our technical support document library on the World Wide Web at http www ab com mem technotes kbhome html Alternatively contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support 1 Allen Bradley Drive Mayfield Heights Ohio 44124 6118 or call 1 440 646 6800 or fax 1 440 646 7801 for technical support between 8 AM and 5 PM EST Monday to Friday Please have the serial number for your software ready when you call or include it on your fax You can find this number in three places onthe Software Registration card that was shipped with your software onthe screen that appears when you start PanelBuilder e inthe main Help menu when you choose About Chapter 1 Introduction to PanelBuilder PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows is a configuration environment based on Microsof
121. can also choose Underline Text to have the text underlined 1 Choose the text object 2 Choose a text size or choose Underline from the Format menu The text will change according to your selection Note Text labels cannot exceed an object s boundaries To change to a larger font that would exceed the boundaries choose the object first then increase the text size The object will automatically resize to accommodate the larger text Tip To change the size of several text objects at once choose them all and apply the new size Changing Touch Margin Width or Height Touch Screen Only In a touch screen application you can change the touch margin width or height for buttons Using a large touch margin prevents users from accidentally pressing an adjacent button Creating Objects 9 53 The margin width or height increases the size of a button so the ormat H button overlaps adjacent touch cells When the application is Foreground Color gt R running only the middle area of the button is touch sensitive the Background Color a touch cells covered by the margin are not touch sensitive T T iny Font 5 iall Font Important Do not allow the button margin to overlap other buttons Double Wide Fan or button margins or to be positioned off the screen An Uso application cannot be downloaded if any buttons Large Font overlap or are off the screen m REINES To specify th
122. can be up to 240 words and do not have to be the same size When the Scheduled File Editor opens the default read size and write size is zero A zero means that the file has not been defined You can create only one Scheduled read file and one scheduled write file Enter your information using the drop down menu or by typing a number into the read size or write size field Use the Scheduled File Worksheet in Appendix A of this manual 2 Click Accept to save your changes 3 Close the editor Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 28 Defining Communications Changing the Network Type Converting from Remote to DH Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 When you create an application specify the type of network it is to run on and set up the communication parameters You can change the network type of an existing application to run it on another network Do this using the Change Network Type dialog box When you change the network type all communication specifications including node definitions and scan classes are lost You will have to reconfigure communications for your application This section describes how to convert e from Remote I O to DH from Remote I O to ControlNet e from DH to Remote I O e from DH to ControlNet from ControlNet to Remote I O e from ControlNet to DH Note You can either convert the application only or the application and its tags If you convert the tags edit their
123. can change the border style of most objects The following panel objects show four possible border styles Raised 4 Raised Inset Raised 12 Inset 4 For line ellipse arc wedge and rectangle objects you can choose a variety of line styles The following illustration shows four possible styles Solid 1 es 560108 c Dash 1 Dash Dot Dot 1 To change an object s border or a line s style 1 Choose the object or line 2 Choose a border or line style from the Format menu Making Objects Blink One way to add emphasis to objects is to make them blink Blinking alternates between the object s foreground or background color and the background screen For example a panel blinks between its background colors and the screen color A text object blinks between its foreground color and the screen color Do not make too many objects blink because blinking objects can be distracting 1 Choose the object 2 Fora multistate object choose the desired state 3 Choose Blink from the Format menu The object will not blink on your screen but will blink when the application is running in the PanelView terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 52 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Changing Text Appearance You can change the font size to one of these options Very Tiny Font Tiny Font Small Font Double Wide Font Double High Font Large Font Extra Large Font You
124. cannot be assigned to a node by the user PLC Type The type of programmable controller For DH applications specify one of the following PLC 2 via DH DH Bridge PLC 3 via DH DH Bridge e PLC 5 which includes the PLC 5 10 PLC 5 12 PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 e PLC 5 Enhanced which includes the PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 60 and PLC 5 80 Logix55xx via the 1756 DHRIO module e SLC 5 which includes the fixed I O SLC 5 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 05300 DH Direct e SLC 5 Enhanced which includes the SLC 5 03 OS301 and SLC 5 04 DH Direct For ControlNet applications specify one of the following e PLC 5 Enhanced to use the PLC 5 20C and PLC 5 40C Logix55xx via the 1756 DHRIO module Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 40 Planning Applications DH ControlNet DH and ControlNet DH and ControlNet Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 e Station Address The address that identifies the programmable controller s location on the network For DH applications if the node is on the same highway as the PanelView terminal it is a local node If the node is on a bridged highway it is a remote node For details on determining the station address see DH Addressing below For ControlNet applications valid station addresses are between 1 and 99 decimal Note The Panel View terminal communicates with local ControlNet stations only No ControlNet bridg
125. change the height of a row 1 Place the cursor on the line dividing the row numbers The cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor to stretch or shrink the row height to its desired size You can hide a row completely by shrinking it until it disappears To retrieve the row click between the two row numbers of the rows above and below the hidden row and drag downwards If you forget where the hidden row is close the editor and reopen it to restore all the rows Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 What Are Communications Chapter 5 Defining Communications This chapter describes how to define communications for these network types e Remote I O e Data Highway Plus ControlNet It also describes how to change your application from one network type to another Note For information about defining communications for a Modbus Application see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711 6 12 The term communications refers to the process of exchanging information between the programmable controller and the application on the PanelView terminal In addition to installing the physical equipment that connects the PanelView terminal to the PLC you must define communications in PanelBuilder so that the application can send and receive information in the appropriate form when it is running on the PanelView termina
126. configured as the primary mouse button Procedures that require you to click a secondary button refer to it as the right mouse button Selection Conventions This word or phrase Means Choose Execute a command from a menu or from a button in a dialog box or Help window Choose also means to double click an icon Choose OK Either click the OK button with the mouse or press Enter on the keyboard Select Either highlight the object or piece of text you want your next action to affect or select a specific dialog box option Click Position the mouse pointer on the object area or field and Click the left button once Double click Position the mouse pointer on the object area or field and click the left button twice quickly Right click Click the right mouse button Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 P 10 Preface Selection Conventions in Dialog Boxes Dialog boxes contain various features that require different selection conventions In the following Windows NT example the Configure Communication Setup dialog box is used to illustrate common dialog box features and selection conventions All screen captures in this manual reflect the Windows NT user interface Significant differences are highlighted wherever they occur Click to close the dialog box without saving changes Click to save changes and close the dialog box Click to cancel changes and close the dialog box Click to open onlin
127. configuring 6 18 Support services P 12 Symbols 9 7 9 13 creating 9 26 exporting 9 29 Syntax in expressions checking 7 22 errors 7 22 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 16 Index Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 T Tag data specifying source 6 22 6 24 Tag database and RSView 6 1 defined 6 1 editing tags 6 12 importing and exporting 6 37 organizing 6 4 private 6 32 converting to shared 6 34 selecting tags 6 7 shared 6 32 repairing 6 36 selecting 6 35 Tag Database editor 6 5 Tag Database editor about 6 5 editing tags 6 12 using 6 5 using the spreadsheet 6 11 wildcards 6 7 Tag folder creating 6 4 Tag spreadsheet viewer 6 11 Tag start value 2 53 Tag Usage Viewer 3 11 described 2 19 digital 6 2 configuring 6 17 in expressions 7 4 duplicating 6 12 editing 6 12 grouping with folders 6 4 initial value 2 27 2 28 9 4 naming conventions 6 4 PanelBuilder 1400e 6 4 6 7 nesting folders 6 4 6 8 opening multiple folders 6 9 organizing 6 4 planning 2 19 read tags 6 2 recording the address 2 28 2 53 renaming 6 31 scanning 2 44 selecting in the tag database 6 7 string 6 2 configuring 6 18 types 2 23 2 49 6 2 updating values of 5 24 using the Tag Usage Viewer 6 27 viewing in a folder 6 9 write tags 6 2 Target firmware version 12 4 defined E 1 filtering data 6 28 for screens 8 11 removing filters 6 29 searching f
128. convert a 1000e or 1400e touch screen application 640 by 480 to a 1200e touch screen application 640 by 480 or vice versa If you do check your screens carefully as the size and placement of objects may change You can convert a 1400e touch screen application 800 by 600 to a 1000e 1200e and 1400e touch screen application 640 by 480 or vice versa You can also convert a 1400e keypad application 800 by 600 to a 1000e 1200e and 1400e keypad application 640 by 480 or vice versa To change the application type Choose the application type from the Application Type list Configure Terminal Setup x General Object Setup Application Startup Screen Screen 255 Alarm History Application 1000 640x480 Keypad 1000 640x480 Keypad 1200e 640x480 Keypad Application 1 1400e 640x480 Keypad 1400e 800x600 Keypad Target Firmware Yersion Version 05 00 and up zl Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 12 4 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Describing the Application In addition to naming your application by giving it a file name when you first save it you can enter a brief description of the application This description is useful for explaining the function of the application For example the description appears on the PanelView Terminal Information and Select Application screens This helps the oper
129. converted tags will have a blank node and scan class name You will have to create the nodes and scan classes that your tags will use then update each tag with the node and scan class names that you have created For details see Defining Communications for a DH or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter Click OK The following message appears Configure Communication Setup x Scheduled File Settings will be lost after 9 2 the network type is converted from ControlNet Continue Choose Yes to change your ControlNet application to DH Choose No if you do not wish to continue with the conversion The following message appears Configure Communication Setup x 9 Change to new DH device type All Unscheduled ControlNet tags become DH tags and no conversion is required Scheduled ControlNet tags must be manually converted to DH tags PanelBuilder checks that the station numbers of all ControlNet nodes will still be valid when the network type is converted to DH A message appears if invalid station numbers are detected For example station number 8 is an invalid octal number The following message will appear prompting you to convert invalid station numbers There is al leas ona moie which ii curently iecormpedihie wills the naw types e Continue and carreri inisempibha redes f Ear Pad eer Lu w PLC Com
130. creating tags in the Tag Database editor using the Tag Usage Viewer e sharing a tag database importing and exporting a tag database Important Plan the tag database before creating tags Using naming conventions and organizing tags with folders reduces the time required to build the tag database and edit it later See Chapter 2 Planning Applications What Are Tags Tags offer these advantages They let you associate a symbolic name that is the tag s name with a PLC address Tag names eliminate the need to duplicate PLC addresses Once you define a tag you can specify that tag anywhere you want to reference the address Youcan easily change all instances of an address by just editing the tag e If you are creating more than one application that will be using the same PLC addresses you can create one tag database and share it between the different applications Youcan share tag information with other PanelBuilder 1400e and RSView applications and import tags from other Allen Bradley and Rockwell Software programs A tag database can be directly shared by PanelBuilder 1400e and RSView However since each product has different feature sets product specific information is stored with each tag This product specific tag information does not affect how the other product functions but will show up as disabled options and fields in the Tag Database editor Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 2 Defining Tag
131. from the toolbar choose the object and right click the mouse button place the pointer over the object and double click place the pointer over the object and press Enter The options you can configure differ from object to object The following illustration shows the Configure Control List Selector dialog box Here you can choose between the two different types of Control List Selectors define different state values configure the object s buttons assign function keys to them and assign tags and expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 56 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Configure Control List Selector x Name Control List Type RAAR M Cancel Initial State it Edit States Help Up Cursor IV Enabled Function Key Down Cursor Enabled Function Key Enter Function Key Control unassigned unassigned Selector Control Enter Key Control Enter Key Handshake unassigned Assign Tag Assign Expm Unassign Assigning Function Keys Keypad Applications Only Operators use the function keys on PanelView keypad terminals to control keypad applications Instead of pushing a button on the screen to carry out a command the operator pushes the function key that has been assigned to that button The best way to ensure that the operator presses the correct function key is to create a label for the button and then l
132. from up to 50 different sources on one or more PLCs since up to 50 tags or expressions can be assigned Bit triggered alarms allow the Panel View terminal to capture simultaneous alarms within the same tag reference you cannot define expressions for Bit triggered alarms That is more than one alarm within a tag can be triggered at a time Here is how it works Example 1 Bit Triggered Alarms Assume the following alarm messages and Alarm Trigger block tag starting at N7 0 are defined in the application The tag s starting trigger value is 1 1 0 Wesmel Wege Wesue3 p i i 4 15 14 13 2 dH 109 8 7 6 5 4 Bits 0 1 and 2 on would trigger alarms Message 1 Message 2 and Message 3 Word triggered alarms can capture only one alarm at a time in a single tag or expression In the example above for Bit trigger assume the same alarm messages are defined and the tag is defined as an analog tag In this case only the alarm with trigger value 7 Binary 7 bits 0 1 2 On would be displayed Message 7 Refer to the Control section below for more information on Bit and Word triggered alarms and for details on using multiple alarm tags or expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 10 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Alarm Acknowledge to PLC Depending on the options configured for an alarm once it is triggered it will continue to b
133. generated at the PLC Assignment of Alarm Trigger s is required for alarms to function Up to 50 different alarm tags or expressions can be assigned to monitor alarms from multiple sources The tag type or expression allowed depends on your selection for Alarm Trigger type as follows Invalid tag types will not be reported until validation If you selected this Expressions Max no of alarm tags You must use this tag type Valid Starting Alarm Trigger type allowed expressions Trigger Bit No 50 tags only Block 1 to 65 535 Word Yes 50 tags or expressions Digital and or Analog N A Note For DH and ControlNet applications if you assign block tags to the Alarm Triggers control or Acknowledge to PLC control the application will be compatible with Panel View Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Note For all applications if you assign expressions to any control the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Note For all applications if you assign more than one Alarm Trigger tag the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 12 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Bit Trigger Operation For a block tag each bit in the tag that makes a 0 to 1 t
134. initial values Retentive objects can either revert to their Initial State values or depending on the application type do this retain the values of their last active states use the current programmable controller values Note Scrolling Lists can be configured to retain the values of their last active states for all application types The objects runtime behavior depends on how you configure the Application Startup screen on the PanelView terminal For more information on configuring this screen refer to the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Note If the terminal is switched from Run to Configure mode and back again or if the operator changes screens retentive objects always retain their last values in Remote I O applications DH and ControlNet objects do not retain their last values except for the Scrolling List object if it has been configured to retain its last state Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 4 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Initial Tag Values and Initial State Values All tags have initial values If a tag is used as a write tag its initial value is used to initialize the programmable controller when the application is first downloaded It can also be used to initialize the programmable controller after a power cycle Certain objects have an initial state value For some it is predefined and cannot be changed For others you can optional
135. input variable is assigned to the tag that reads the analog input The conditional expression wraps to the next line Note the use of the line continuation character o IF analog input 0 AND analog input 1000 THEN temperature analog input 100 _ 1000 100 Use this calculation if analog value is between 0 amp 1000 ELSE IF analog input 1000 AND analog input 4000 THEN temperature analog input 1000 200 3000 200 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 1000 amp 4000 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 14 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 ELSE temperature analog input 4000 100 95 400 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 4000 amp 4095 ENDIF ENDIF Note that the expression uses nested If Then Else constructs Nested constructs can be hard to read Nested If Then Else constructs can often be replaced by a Select Case construct Example 3 Using the Select Case Construct in Expressions This example restructures the expression in the previous example using the Select Case construct This expression converts the analog input temperature probe value to degrees Celsius The temperature probe produces the following output Analog Celsius 0 100 0 1000 200 0 f 4000 400 0 f 4095 500 0 DIM analog input AS INTEGER analog input is the variable name fo
136. is of the wrong type You can select the Make Application Current option for these configurations The application is configured for this And the terminal is this 1000e Touch Screen terminal 640 by 480 1200e Touch Screen terminal 640 by 480 1000e Touch Screen terminal 640 by 480 1400e Touch Screen terminal 640 by 480 1400e Touch Screen terminal 800 by 600 1400e Touch Screen terminal 800 by 600 1400e Touch Screen terminal 640 by 480 1200e Touch Screen terminal 640 by 480 1200e Touch Screen terminal 640 by 480 1000e Keypad terminal 640 by 480 1200e Keypad terminal 640 by 480 1000e Keypad terminal 640 by 480 1200e Keypad terminal 640 by 480 1400e Keypad terminal 640 by 480 1400e Keypad terminal 800 by 600 1400e Keypad terminal 640 by 480 1400e Keypad terminal 800 by 600 The required communication hardware or firmware driver has not been installed in the PanelView terminal For example for ControlNet a 1784 KTCX network communications card and the correct communication driver must be installed in the terminal For more information about determining the correct configuration of the terminal see the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 17 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Version Control This list indicates the firmware drivers that are installed This list indicates the
137. its Actual Firmware Version is 2 and it will not run on terminals equipped with firmware versions lower than 2 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 E 2 Version Control Version 1 03 Firmware Features Version 2 Firmware Features Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 A PanelBuilder DH application s Target Firmware Version is set to 1 and later If the application makes use of features which require Version 2 firmware its Actual Firmware Version is 2 Validation fails because the features used in the application exceed the application s Target Firmware Version The Target Firmware Version is therefore an upper threshold for the features used in an application and causes a validation error if that threshold is exceeded This helps ensure that the applications you develop with PanelBuilder will run on the terminals to which they are downloaded PanelView Firmware Version 1 03 includes support for all the features of Version 1 firmware plus ControlNet communications Using ControlNet for a Pass Through download PanelView Firmware Version 2 includes support for the following PanelBuilder features Expressions Local Messages longer than 72 characters Alarm Messages longer than 50 characters Information Messages longer than 35 characters with a double wide or large font Information Messages longer than 70 characters with a small or double high font Embedded Newline control characters n in
138. message text or trigger value as you wish and press Enter when you are finished To create a message in the form 1 Open the message editor by selecting the appropriate editor in the Messages folder or the tool from the toolbar 2 Open the form by checking Form in the View menu 3 If there are existing messages click Next until you arrive at the first blank record CCLEC TUTOR 4 Select the Trigger Value field and enter a unique trigger value Note If you do not enter a trigger value the row number is the default trigger value 5 Select the Message Text field and enter the message text 6 Click Accept 7 Click Next if you want to create another message To edit a message in the form 1 Open the form 2 Use the Prev or Next button to move to the message you want to edit Cad Edit the message text or trigger value 4 Click Accept or press Enter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 10 8 Creating Messages Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Adding Audio Print Display Alarm Relay and Message to PLC Options to Alarm Messages Creating and editing alarm messages is identical to the procedure described previously except that you can enable one or more of these options for each alarm message Audio sounds a continuous alarm when the alarm is triggered Print sends the alarm message text to a printer when the alarm is triggered The printer prints each alarm message w
139. monitor alarm conditions and when an alarm is to be generated send the trigger value that corresponds to that alarm to the PanelView terminal An alarm trigger tag or expression defined in PanelBuilder is required to send the trigger value from the PLC to the PanelView terminal Up to 50 different tags or expressions can be configured to trigger alarms from multiple locations Each alarm message can be configured to sound PanelView s Audio alarm Print the message on a printer or send the alarm message to a Dataliner display device Display the alarm in the Alarm Message Window energize PanelView s built in Relay e send the triggered alarm Message to the PLC where it can be sent to other devices such as a supervisory computer Document Feeder Paper misteca Top Exit Jam Finisher Jam Paper Bin A Paper low Paper Bin B Paper low Copier Paper Jam Copier Toner Low ZZZZZZ Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Displaying Alarms Configuring Alarms 11 3 Alarms can be displayed in an e Alarm Message window e Alarm History screen e Alarm Status screen The Alarm Message window displays unacknowledged alarms It appears over any user configured screen and the information it displays is not retained across power cycles of the PanelView terminal The user can silence and acknowledge alarms from the multi line Alarm Message Window AN DEL NETTE TUB HG ML 15 Salel
140. network file transfer controls They allow you to control and monitor the download process and to communicate the status of the PanelView terminal to other devices Important You must assign all three controls for the mechanism to work properly There are three network download controls You can assign tags only to these controls Transfer Inhibit When this control is set to non zero the terminal will not permit a download We recommend you assign a digital tag type The tag s PLC address will be read by the terminal Typically it will be set and cleared by the PLC Transfer Request This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives a download request The control is reset to 0 when the download starts If a file download is prevented by the Transfer Inhibit control this control will be set to 1 You can program the PLC to clear the Transfer Inhibit control when this control is set to 1 This will allow subsequent file transfers to proceed We recommend you assign a digital tag type The terminal will write to the tag s PLC address Defining Communications 5 21 Configuring Nodes e Transfer Status This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives the first download block transfer It remains set throughout the transfer and is cleared reset to 0 when the download is completed successfully The Transfer Request control is cleared when the Transfer Status control 1s set We recommend you assign a
141. object When you click on the text or graphic image its handles are hollow if it is a label Note For multistate objects when you change text or a graphic image into an object label the label is linked to the object state You can add a different label for each object state When the application is running and the state changes the label changes too See Configuring Object States later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 36 Creating Objects Editing Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To remove an object label 1 Select the text or graphic image 2 Cut the text or graphic image Cutting and pasting are described in the next section 3 To keep the text or graphic image paste it outside of the object s boundaries This operation converts the text or graphic image back to a separate background screen object Once you have drawn an object you can choose the object and edit it The kinds of changes you can make depend on the type of object You can cut copy and paste all objects delete all objects duplicate all objects move all objects resize certain objects Cutting Copying and Pasting You can cut or copy and paste objects between screens and applications Note You cannot copy keypad specific objects to touch screen applications or vice versa Neither can you copy button objects or objects containing buttons between touch and keypad applications T
142. objects see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual You can create background text for your screen You can also add text to objects You can choose the text s attributes font color and so on before you create it or you can create the text first and assign attributes later You can also center left justify or right justify multiple lines of text Note Text lines do not wrap around To create a second text line press Enter press or click the I beam in a new position When you create text inside an object as its label it will not go beyond the boundaries of the object If the text does not fit resize the object or use a smaller font To create text 1 Choose the Text tool by doing one of the following choose Text from the Objects menu choose from the toolbox press Ctrl T The pointer changes to an I beam 2 Position the I beam on an empty part of the screen or inside an object and click To move the I beam using the keyboard use the arrow keys When the I beam is in the desired position press any key Note If you start typing inside an object the text automatically becomes a label See Adding Labels later in this chapter 3 Type the text While the text tool is selected you can continue creating text Move the I beam to another spot in the drawing area click and type If you are using the keyboard press Esc and use the arrow keys to move the I beam Pr
143. objects this value is written to the programmable controller when the object s state changes For example with a Multistate button each time the operator presses a button the state changes to the next state and the state value is written to the Button Control tag For output objects this value determines which state appears on the screen Important To minimize the size of the application file use state values that increment by one for each state Do not configure more states than you need Note For analog tags the values are descaled before they are written to the PLC and are scaled when they are read from the PLC The following formulas are used Descaled Value Value Offset Scale Scaled Value Value x Scale Offset If the state values are to be read from or written to an analog tag they must be scaled values For details see Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 7 Creating Expressions To remove a state value Choose the state value and click Clear To renumber state values 1 Click the first state value and drag the mouse to highlight all the state values to renumber Tip To quickly select all state values select the State Value column heading or select the first state value and then press Ctrl Shift End 2 Click Renumber PanelBuilder sequentially assigns state values to all selected states using the first highlighted state as the starting value State values are assigned in increasing o
144. octal PLC 5 60 1 27 octal PLC 5 80 1 27 octal PLC 5 250 0 37 octal SLCS 0 3 octal 1771 SB 1 7 octal Logix5530 0 76 octal Logix5550 0 76 octal Ww Start word 0 7 octal bb optional Start bit 0 17 octal If none is specified 0 is assumed gt Note The address can also be specified as a length or a range For length use the format F rrw bb ll where II is the bit length For range use the format F rrw bb w bb Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 18 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Examples I 070 is an input address pointing to word 0 on rack 07 I 61 03 is an input address pointing to rack 6 word 1 bit 3 O 011 01 is an output address pointing to bit 1 of word 1 in rack 1 I 010 0 14 is an input address with a length specified I 010 0 0 17 is an input address with a range specified Block Transfer Address Fff ww bb F File type B Block ff File number 1 64 decimal The file number must be followed by a space to separate it from the word number ww Start word 0 63 decimal Note The actual PLC data table addresses will be determined by the block transfer instruction in the PLC program bb optional Start bit 0 15 decimal If none is specified 0 is assumed Note The address can also be specified as a length or a range For length use the format Fff ww bb ll where ll is the bit length For rang
145. of addresses you are defining are for read or write files For detailed information about address syntax see Appendix C Addressing Syntax Other Methods of Creating Tags Defining Tags 6 25 If you need to create a large number of tags you can use third party spreadsheet such as Microsoft Excel to do so Then you can import the tags to the application using PanelBuilder s Database Import function You can also create tags as you need them in other PanelBuilder editors Creating Tags as Needed You can add tags in any editor that can assign tags such as the PLC I O Control editor Select the Assign Tag button to bring up the Tag Browser dialog box which lets you browse the tag database add a new folder or bring up the Tag Editor dialog box to add a new tag or edit an existing tag Highlight the tag field and click the Assign Tag button The Tag Browser dialog box opens Edit Tay In the Tag Browser dialog box you can perform these actions e Select a tag by double clicking it or by highlighting the desired tag and clicking OK The tag is assigned to the input field in the original dialog box e Edit a tag by highlighting it and then choosing Edit Tag The Tag Editor dialog box appears for you to edit the tag s definition Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 26 Defining Tags New Folder Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Create a new tag by opening the desired folder and choosing New
146. of records or block of cells to be edited The first record of the group is displayed in the form section 2 Edit in the form section the field or fields to be changed Then click Accept The change is applied to all the selected records not only to the one displayed in the form Note All selected cells change to match the corresponding cells in the first selected record Select only cells you want to change Changing Column Width and Row Height Each time you open a Messages editor the default column and row settings appear However while you are working in the spreadsheet you can customize it by stretching or shrinking both the width of the columns and the height of the rows The Node Rack Block and Scheduled editors retain your changes to columns when you close them For example hidden columns remain hidden On the other hand rows are restored to their default height and position when you reopen the editor To change the width of a column 1 Place the cursor on the line dividing the column headers The cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor to stretch or shrink the column width to its desired size You can hide a column completely by shrinking it until it disappears To retrieve the column click between the two columns that surround the hidden column in the header and drag to the right Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 14 Working with Editors To
147. or move them To edit a component of a multi component object 1 Choose the main object by clicking it 2 Click again on the component For details on how to select the various components of a multi component object see Selecting Objects earlier in this chapter Hollow handles appear around the component You can edit it according to the options available from the Format menu n _ An easy way to create similar dynamic objects is to use the Set Object Defaults command You create one object edit it as you want and then use the Set Object Defaults command to designate this object s attributes as the default attributes for all new objects of that type Note Static drawing objects labels function keys and tags cannot be defaults 1 Create the object whose defaults you want to assign 2 Edit the object as you want You can change the line or border colors and size If the object can have several states you can configure the different states as defaults However you cannot add text as a default Configuring Objects Undo Etrlez Redo Cle Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V v Copy with Controls v Join Line Ends Select All CtrleA Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Del Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Object Position mvert t allpaper JET Unlock wallpap Ctri 0 Import Export Graphic Creating Objects 9 55 3 Choose Set Object Defaults fr
148. original source text with the following exceptions the changes made during compilation remain in effect see the list of changes above e all tag names that contain ambiguous characters are surrounded by braces expressions contain parentheses to indicate precedence order e local variables that were not declared with a data type are now declared AS VARIANT Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 20 Creating Expressions Using the Expression The Expression editor contains a text entry area where you type the Editor expression It also contains a list of components that you can use to create the expression You cannot open the Expression editor until you have created an object to which an expression can be assigned For more information about which objects can be assigned expressions see Types of Expressions earlier in this chapter To open the Expression editor 1 Choose Configure Screen Object from the Edit menu or double click the object 2 Choose one of the object s controls and choose Assign Exprn gt Note The Assign Exprn button is enabled for controls which read values from the PLC It is disabled for controls which write values to the PLC with the exception of the following three objects which support an optional write expression e Numeric Entry Keypad e Numeric Input Cursor Point e Numeric Keypad Enable Button About the Expression Editor Window eb gana
149. s QTY TIME Reset to PLC tag is set to 1 any subsequent Alarm Status QTY TIME resets from the PLC or via the Reset QTY TIME button will not affect the state of this tag Important Make sure the Reset QTY TIME button is enabled or the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset control is assigned If both are disabled the alarm count cannot be reset Last Qty Time Reset Stamp Configuring Alarms 11 49 When a reset occurs the Alarm Status screen updates the Alarm Status Last Qty Time Reset stamp The Last Qty Time Reset stamp is always retained between power cycles What Happens when the Terminal is Off Line The terminal stops incrementing the accumulated alarm time and quantity when it is offline to the programmable controller In this case offline means one or more of the following conditions exists the terminal is disconnected from the controller the terminal is in Configure mode the controller is not in Run mode the controller has the terminal Remote I O racks disabled When the terminal goes back online the alarm counts are increased by one for those alarms currently in alarm and accumulation of the times resumes Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 50 Configuring Alarms Configuring the Alarm You can configure the Alarm Status screen as follows Status Screen e Assign the screen number Enable or disable the QTY Time Reset Button Set the colors e Assign the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset
150. statements and Else statements can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number When using a range of constants separate them with To for example 1To5 Note Once PanelView has finished evaluating the construct the terminal evaluates the statements following the EndIf or EndSelect keyword if any Example 2 Using If Then Else Constructs in Expressions The analog input temperature probe from the previous example does not produce linear results The probe has three linear sections each with a different slope Analog Input Temperature in C 0 100 1000 200 4000 400 4095 500 Creating Expressions 7 13 Use the If Then Else construct to create a new expression to convert the analog input temperature reading to Celsius This example also uses variables and comments described later in this chapter This expression converts the analog input temperature probe value to degrees Celsius The temperature probe produces the following output Analog Celsius 0 100 0 f 1000 200 0 4000 400 0 4095 500 0 DIM analog_input AS INTEGER analog input is the variable name for the analog input from the probe DIM temperature AS SINGLE Temperature is the variable name for the temperature in degrees Celsius The Single data type yields a floating point decimal result analog input Tag For Temperature Probe The analog
151. tag and use the Type column to describe the function of the additional tags Expressions are optionally used to read and manipulate the PLC output at the tag addresses You can also use a line for each expression to plan which ones you will need to define when you create the object For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run Planning Applications 2 49 Tag Recording Tag and Expression Information Analog Tag only Initial Range ame Scale Offset Data Value 9 The tag database records all the addresses used throughout an Values application It may also contain addresses the application does not use for example if the database is shared by another application Instead of assigning an address directly to an object you enter the address as a tag definition in the database and then assign the tag or an expression that uses one or more tags to an object If the same address is used by more than one object you need only define it once in the database For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Some objects require more than one control tag or expression For example a Maintained Push Button needs a Button Control tag a
152. the audio is controlled in both alarm messages and by the PLC Controlled Audio the beeper will not be reset unless both the trigger points are reset PLC Controlled Relay The PLC Controlled Relay option allows the programmable controller to trigger the alarm relay Whenever the value associated with this tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero the alarm relay turns on When the value is reset to zero the alarm relay turns off You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression for this control The programmable controller can turn on the relay by setting the associated control value or you can allow the operator to control the relay from the terminal by assigning this control to a push button on a screen ATTENTION Do not use the alarm relay for control purposes All critical controls must be hard wired for safety Configuring Alarms 11 25 Note The PLC Controlled Relay does not affect any alarm messages you may have configured to trigger the alarm relay These alarms will energize the relay regardless of whether you have enabled or disabled the PLC Controlled Relay or whether this control value is 0 or non zero However if the relay is controlled in both alarm messages and by the PLC Controlled Relay the relay will not be reset unless both the trigger points are reset Message to PLC When an alarm is triggered if the Message to PLC option is enabled for the alarm message and the control is assigned the PanelView
153. they will be used in all the tags that are converted In addition the node and scan class will be created for you with the default settings You can change the settings to suit your application later If you leave the Node Name and Scan Class fields blank the converted tags will have a blank node and scan class name You will have to create the nodes and scan classes that your tags will use then update each tag with the node and scan class names that you have created For details see Defining Communications for a DH or ControINet Application earlier in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 32 Defining Communications 5 Click OK The following message appears Lenhge Cionmemunicatsnn See bu ph Rack and Transfer File definitions wil be F ost the network type is convurtud to ContralNet Continue Lum s 6 Choose Yes to confirm that you want to continue 7 After converting the application to ControlNet you need to E PLC Communications change the Terminal Network Address on the Terminal L ommunication Setup d Communications tab of the Configure Communication Setup d IM Scan Classes dialog lL RIO Racks L RIO Block Transfer Files lS Scheduled Files Communication Sebup Since Remote I O does not make use of a terminal network address this field contains the default terminal address which is 2 For
154. this option the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Importing Messages Creating Messages 10 9 The default for the Audio Print Relay and Message to PLC options is N for No For Display the default is Y for Yes You can change these options when you are creating a new message or when editing an existing message Slimi Meet TL TORE LI incur Ves ae Tap Enid Jam Fisisher dae Paper Gin Paper low Ban Bo bm Copier Paper Copier Taare Lau ia sur of im jamri z 123231313 TrZIZZIXIJ EREPRR LAE a foster tor tcl To change an alarm message option in the spreadsheet Choose the cell of the option that you want to change Double click to change the N to a Y or the Y to an N or press Tab Shift Tab or the arrow keys to move through the options Press the Backspace key twice to delete the existing option and type Y or N to change the option as desired then press Enter To change an alarm message option in the form Click in the field of the option that you want to change or use Tab or Alt the key for the underlined letter to move to the box and press Spacebar You can copy messages from other Windows spreadsheets text editors or word processors and paste them into the message editors Or you can use the Import Message File comman
155. to Ensure Consistency Using Worksheets to Design Screens Screen Worksheet for PanelView 1200e Terminals 640 Dy 480 nice dark RR RR Ea ER Screen Worksheets for PanelView 1000e or 1400 Table of Contents toc iii Step 3 Plan Communications with the PLC 2 12 Planning Remote 1 0 Communications 2 12 Identifying Inputs and 2 12 Understanding Addressing 2 12 Understanding Rack 2 13 Understanding Module Groups 2 14 Understanding Shared Racks 2 15 Understanding Full and Listen Only Access 2 16 Planning Rack Assignments 2 16 Discrete WO Addresses 2 17 Block Transfer File 2 17 Determining Rack Size and Block Transfer File Requirements 2 18 Reducing PLC Addressing Requirements 2 19 Planning Addresses oieee cr do zip we e opor tob dee 2 19 Using Worksheets to Plan Addresses 2 19 The Remote 1 0 Tags 2 21 Recording Object Information 2 22 Recording Tag and Expression Information 2 22 Recording the 55
156. to identify the racks that are assigned to the terminal The PanelView terminal supports Full and Listen Only access racks Racks can be defined as full or partial RIO Block Transfer Files Editor to define block transfer files and the DH and Remote I O ControlNet and Remote I O or Ethernet and Remote I O Pass Through control byte When assigning addresses in PanelBuilder you can use either a discrete I O address or a block transfer file address Using block transfer files increases the amount of address space available to you for the application Block transfer files can be defined as PLC input or PLC output files With the other editors in the PLC Communications folder the Scan Classes and Nodes are used exclusively for defining DH and ControlNet communications while the Schedule File editor is used exclusively for ControlNet Scheduled communications See Defining Communications for a Data Highway Plus or ControlNet Application later in this chapter Communication Setup The Configure Communication Setup dialog box has two tabs Terminal Communications and Network File Transfer In the Terminal Communications tab you specify the baud rate used to communicate between the terminal and the PLC or the terminal dum Nodes network address depending on the application s network type The ji Scan Classes network type is a static field that indicates the network specified for RIO Racks the current application jm RIO Block
157. to the number of words in the block transfer file The default is 64 You can assign any number up to 64 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Communications 5 13 Defining the Pass Through File Control Byte gt e Access The access Full or Listen Only is determined by the access of the file s control byte This field is updated automatically when you define the control byte s address Note The terminal can only write to a Full Access Input block transfer file 2 Foreach block transfer file you must define a control byte This byte uses space in the discrete output table only In the Control Byte area of the editor choose the rack number word and byte for the control byte and specify whether it will be used for a read or a write block transfer Important You cannot enter the same control byte for tags or for the Pass Through File control byte e Rack Number The rack numbers available for each file depend on the racks you assigned earlier Specify which rack will contain the control byte Word Specify which word between 0 and 7 in the specified rack will contain the control byte Byte Specify which byte of the word to use for the control byte the high byte or low byte e Usage Specify whether the block transfer byte is a block transfer read or a block transfer write 3 Click Accept 4 Define any other files you will need Before you can transfer an application file over the
158. to use and give them each a Remote I O address Ifyou convert the tags to Remote I O the data source for all the tags is changed to Remote I O but you will still have to give them valid Remote I O addresses manually Note Converting tags that are shared may make them invalid for the other applications that are using them Unused tags that are not converted will stay as DH tags Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Click OK The following message appears Configure Communication Setup _ Hodes and Scan classes will be last after the network type iS converted to RIO Continue Choose Yes to confirm that you want to continue Once you have changed the network type you will have to configure the programmable logic controller type rack assignments block transfer files and Pass Through File control byte if needed in the Rack and Block Transfer File editors Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 34 Defining Communications Converting from DH to ControlNet Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 For more information about configuring an application for Remote I O see Defining Communications for a Remote I O Application earlier in this chapter To change the network type from DH to ControlNet 1 Choos
159. types are reserved for use in Modbus applications For more information see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 which is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E UMOD Initial Value The value to be placed in the input address of a tag on power up As with any value sent from the terminal to the PLC this value will have the offset subtracted and then be divided by the scale Assign Initial Values to tags with PLC input addresses Note For any multistate object you draw in the Screens editor you can define an Initial State If you define an Initial State for the object and an Initial Value for the object s control tag the object s Initial State takes precedence The tag s initial value is used only if an initial state is not defined Note A tag can have only a single initial value If more than one object is configured to write its initial state value to a single tag a validation error will occur if the initial state values are different Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 28 Planning Applications Range of Values Start Address No of Bits End Address or string tag only No of characters Tag Start Value Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 e Range of Values If an object has a range of state values record the values
160. undo an operation do of the following choose Undo from the Edit menu choose from the toolbar press Ctrl Z When you undo an operation and then change your mind you can reverse your action using the Redo command You can use the Redo command as many times as you used the Undo command To redo an operation do one of the following choose Redo from the Edit menu choose from the toolbar press Ctrl Y Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 20 Creating Objects Object Tools and You can create dynamic and static objects by choosing tools from the Commands toolbox or by choosing commands from the Objects menu Touch Screen Toolbox Pe ARTE TR E cea i ai fs miei i Cov Et e en tj t C a rioris Keypad Toolbox Pm ST Lad I EN Ate E p gt Note The toolbox includes icons for the objects which are more frequently used It does not include icons for all objects found on the Objects menu Objects Menu Objects y Select Push Buttons Control Selectors Indicators Numerics Trend Bar Graphs Time and Date ASCII Input Scrolling List Symbol Local Message Display ASCII Display Goto Configure Mode vow v v Dynamic Objects vv ow v Screen Selectors gt Static Objects Screen Print Button Text and Graphic Image Drawing Objects 34 Drawings Text
161. use the Repair Shared command on the Database menu to point to the RSView db file When you share a database between PanelBuilder 1400e and RSView PanelBuilder 1400e cannot edit tags that it cannot use such as RSView tags with Memory System or DDE as their data source When you work with a shared database your changes are saved permanently each time you click the Accept button Converting a Private Database to Shared Convert a private database in either of these situations You want the application to share tags created by another PanelBuilder 1400e application or by an RSView database You want other PanelBuilder 1400e applications to share the current application s tags Note When you move an application that is using a shared database to another machine you must also move the database and use the same directory structure If the database is not in its original location use Repair Shared on the Database menu to reconnect the application to the tag database Defining Tags 6 35 To convert a private database to shared 1 Open the application that contains the database you want to convert to shared 2 Choose Convert To Shared from the Database menu 3 Fill in the fields as follows Tag Database Name Displays the name of the current application if it has been named You can use this as the tag database name or type a new name Tag Database Path Displays the path where the shared database will be placed You
162. validation or application validation Both these types of validation check expression syntax and verify that all tag references are valid If expression syntax errors in screen objects are discovered PanelBuilder reports the screen object and expression that contains the error For expression syntax errors in global functions PanelBuilder identifies the function and expression that contains the error Tag error messages identify the tag name nature of the error expression and line of the expression containing the error A validation error also occurs if an optional write expression is assigned but the associated numeric input write tag is not assigned Use the following examples to help create your own expressions Example 6 Arithmetic Operations Provide Numeric Display Calculations within PanelView Numeric Display Object 56 GOOD PART YIELD Expression GOODPART_TAG TOTALPART_TAG 100 Creating Expressions 7 27 Example 7 Logical Operators Provide Indicator Logic within PanelView Multistate Indicator Object State 0 State 1 un Expression MTR1 tag AND NOT MTR1 OL tag OR MTR2 tag AND NOT MTR2 OL tag AND PRESS SW tag Example 8 Comparative Operators Allow Threshold Logic within PanelView Multistate Indicator Object State 0 State 1 State 2 Expression IF TEMP tag 100 THEN ELSE IF TEMP tag gt 100 AND TEMP tag 200 THEN ELSE IF TEMP tag gt 200 THEN END IF Publication 2711E 6 1
163. when the application first executes For a PanelBuilder object with an initial state and a main control tag the object s initial state value supersedes the tag s initial value so that the initial state value is written to the programmable controller instead of the tag s initial value On application upload the object s initial state value is used as the tag s initial value Defining Tags 6 17 5 To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source later in this chapter Configuring a Digital Tag A digital tag has two possible values at runtime 0 or 1 Use a digital tag wherever a toggle or Boolean function is needed 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash V 3 For Type select Digital 2 Tag Database Untitled BE File Edit View Help Tag Name Tutorial DIEM Secu Description Off Label p On Label 55 Initial Value o Data Source Type Device C DDE C Memory Remote 1 0 C Scheduled Address HM 1 og Data For Help press F1 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RSView databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Descriptio
164. where you enter and edit the expression The Results section consists of a message area where the results of Check Syntax are displayed The Go To button is active only when a syntax error is displayed and is used to go to the line in the expression at which the syntax error is found At the bottom of the Expression Editor dialog box is a status line which displays messages about any selections you make Entering and Formatting Expressions The Expression Editor is a free form text edit area where you can enter expressions The number of the current line is displayed beneath the text area with a percentage indicator which displays the available memory space for the current expression You can create expressions of up to 2 048 characters with a maximum of 1 024 characters on a single line To select an expression component from the list double click an entry in the list If the component requires arguments the cursor flashes at the position where the first of the arguments is required Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 22 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 You can indent lines of text by preceding the first character on the line with any number of spaces When you press Enter to start a new line the cursor is automatically moved to the position at which the first character of the previous line began To revert to the margin press the Backspace key until the cursor is at the left hand margin o
165. would any other A I database and import it to PanelBuilder You can also import a PanelBuilder 900 database by exporting it in an text format and then importing this into PanelBuilder as an A I database Note To import or export a Taylor PoWORXPLUS database or a MODSOFT database see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 This manual is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E UMOD To import a database or csv tag file 1 Open the application to which you want to import a tag database 2 Choose Import Export from the Database menu 3 From the list that is displayed choose the type of database to import Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 38 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 If desired choose one of these options To make the import faster click the Skip Existing Tags button e To update existing tags from the tags being imported click the Update Existing Tags button Choose Next A If you are importing a tag database as opposed to a csv format file choose a Tag Database Source or use the Down Arrow to display the list of sources and choose one from it If you are importing a csv tag file or a text database choose the file or click the button and choose the file from the Select File dialog box 7 Click Next 8 Click Finish T
166. you run your application The Target Firmware Version you choose allows your application to run on the listed version as well as later versions of the firmware Version 1 and up Version 1 03 and up allows your application to run on a PanelView terminal connected to the ControlNet communication network Version 2 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 2 e Version 3 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 3 Important For PanelView terminals using Firmware Version 4 select Target Firmware Version 3 and up Version 5 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 5 When you validate your application PanelBuilder warns you if a feature you have used will make the application incompatible with the Target Firmware Version For a list of features that make applications incompatible with earlier versions of the Panel View firmware see Appendix E Version Control To specify the Target Firmware Version 1 Open the System folder and choose Terminal Setup or choose from the toolbar The Configure Terminal Setup dialog box appears Configure Terminal Setup x Application Startup Screen Screen Application 1000e 640x480 Keypad Application File Comment Target Firmware Version Version Soap 14 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998
167. 00 F then the alarm message with a trigger value of 2 will be triggered The alarm message with a trigger value of 3 will be triggered if the temperature rises above 150 F Configuring Alarms 11 15 Expression E ditor x Double click on an entry or hit return Construct List IF THEN ELSE SELECT CASE Dimension List DIM AS BOOLEAN DIM AS BYTE DIM AS INTEGER DIM AS LONG DIM AS SINGLE DIM AS VARIANT Miscellaneous EXIT REM Comparison List equality lt gt inequality lt less than gt greater than lt ls than or eq to gt than or eq tc Logical List Arithmetic List Tags Expression Alarm Control Expression 2 M lt 100 THEN 2 IF cntl gt 150 THEN 3 END IF END IF Current Line 1 6 Select All Clear Al Percent Full 4 Check Syntax BoTo OK Cancel Help Enter an expression Ctrl is cut Ctrl c is copy amp Ctrl v is paste Using Multiple Alarm Tags for Word Trigger Operation If multiple alarm tags or expressions are defined and more than one alarm is triggered at the same time the alarms are logged to the Alarm History file according to the order in which they were configured in the Alarm Messages dialog box However they will be stamped with the same time and date Any Word triggered alarm can be triggered by any of the a
168. 00e terminal runs at either a low resolution of 640 by 480 or a high resolution of 800 by 600 The position of the terminal function keys is marked on the worksheet for you to use as a guide in positioning your application screen function key input objects The screen area for PanelView 1000e and 1400e low resolution screens is 640 by 480 pixels The screen area for the PanelView 1400e high resolution screen is 800 by 600 The PanelView 1000e and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The high resolution screen of 800 by 600 runs at the same display size as the 640 by 480 screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1000e and 1400e terminals Important Non input objects can overlap but cannot be positioned off screen Planning Applications 2 11 Screen Workshee
169. 0e BEE File Screen Database Tools Window Help 1400 Touch Screen 640x480 Remote 1 0 Private Tags PLC Communications gt System m Terminal Setup 4 Tag Database Alarms BBY PLC 1 0 Control amp Information Message Window Messages Screens Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 6 Working with Editors Working in the Spreadsheet Duplicate Message Ctrl D Delete Message Del Insert Message Select All Ctri A Fill Forward Ctrl F Sort Messages Validate F9 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 In Form view you can edit only one record at a time using the Prev Previous and Next buttons to scroll through the records In Spreadsheet view in the Messages editors you can edit many records at once as described in Editing Selections later in this chapter In the Node Rack Block and Scheduled editors you can click on a row in the spreadsheet to edit the record in the form For the Node Rack Block and Scheduled editors you cannot type entries directly into the spreadsheet Note The editors do not all operate in the same way The three Messages editors can do all the editing described in the remainder of this chapter The commands with an asterisk in the table below are commands you can use in the Node Rack Block or Schedule Editors Note that the Scheduled File editor cannot Duplicate or Insert You can edit records using the tools i
170. 1 44 Working in Display All Alarms Mode 11 45 Working in PastAlarms 11 45 About Alarm Quantity and Accumulated Time 11 46 Using the Alarm Status Screen Buttons 11 47 Resetting the Alarm Status Screen s QTY TIME 11 48 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 toc xii Table of Contents Configuring Terminal Setup Options Configuring PLC I O Control Options Working with the Information Message Window Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 What Happens when the Operator Resets the QTY TIME 11 48 What Happens when the Terminal is Off Line 11 49 Configuring the Alarm Status 5 11 50 Aboutthe Alarm History Screen 11 52 Working with the Alarm History Screen in the Terminal 11 52 Calling up the Alarm History Screen from the Terminal 11 52 Using Buttons on the Alarm History Screen 11 53 Configuring the Alarm History Screen 11 55 Chapter 12 About Terminal Setup Options 12 1 General saca sa a x aAA E A AR Kad 12 2 The Application Startup 5 12 2 Changing the Application Type 12 2 Describing the Application 12 4 Target Firmware 12 4 Specifying
171. 12C6 2711E T12C4 PanelView 1200e Keypad Terminals A B Catalog Number 2711E K12C6 Stainless steel model A B Catalog Number K12C6L2 PanelView 1400e Touch Screen Terminals A B Catalog Numbers 2711E T14C6 2711E T14C7 2711E T14C15 PanelView 1400e Keypad Terminals A B Catalog Numbers 2711E K14C6 2711E K14C7 2711E K14C15 Panel View 1200 Color Keypad Terminal Series F and G A B Catalog Number 2711 KC1MC when upgraded with the PanelView 1200 Enhancement Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E U1B12C and running Version 1 or later firmware PanelView 1200 Color Touch Screen Terminal Series F and G A B Catalog Numbers 2711 TC1MC 2711 TC4MC when upgraded with the Panel View 1200 Enhancement Kit Catalog Number 2711E U1B12C and running Version 1 or later firmware RIO Introduction to PanelBuilder 1 5 Transferring or Installing the Application To run an application you must first transfer it from the development computer to the Panel View terminal using one of the following methods e Serial download using the RS 232 port and cable for a Remote I O DH or ControlNet application e DH Remote I O Pass Through download over DH for a Remote I O application ControlNet Remote I O Pass Through download over ControlNet for a Remote I O application Remote I O Ethernet Pass Through download over an Ethernet for a Remote I O application e DH network download over DH for a DH application ControlNet network down
172. 16 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PanelView uses the Last Chassis designation to optimize PLC scanning When you specify a partial rack definition as the last chassis the programmable controller will not scan beyond the specified module group on the rack Understanding Full and Listen Only Access Full access means that the PanelView terminal has full read and write access to the rack s I O space Listen Only access means that the PanelView terminal can read from the rack s I O space but cannot write to it Listen Only is useful when one PanelView application wants to monitor the I O activity on another I O rack without having the programmable controller handle or re route the information Planning Rack Assignments To plan your application fully you need to determine the racks and partial racks you will use The method for planning your racks depends on these factors type of programmable controller size of application you will create rack space available When you create an application you assign tags to dynamic objects windows and PLC I O Control options These tags define the programmable controller addresses to use You can assign two kinds of addresses for a tag discrete I O addresses block transfer file addresses To maximize the efficiency of your application plan the addresses before you begin creating the application Note You can also assign read tags to expressions
173. 1998 10 4 Creating Messages Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Note If you use a message length that is above the range listed in the Message length earlier versions row the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions The maximum message lengths described above are independent of the font and size of the message window If the message is too long to fit in the message window it will be truncated The character gt indicating there is more text in the message appears at the end of the displayed message if the message is truncated If the message is too long to fit on a single line and the window can display more than one line for the message the message will wrap to the next line after a break between words Or you can use the Newline code to specify where you want the line to break See Using Formatting Codes in Your Messages next Using Formatting Codes in Your Messages Formatting codes give the PanelView terminal instructions on how to display your message For a Version 2 or later application you can use these formatting codes in your messages This code Does this n Displays the text following the code on the next line n Displays the text following the code without a carriage return See Example 1 on the next page For Version 2 or later applications the Newline code n counts as one character
174. 2 Creating Objects This tool Corresponds to this command This tool Corresponds to this command Numeric Keypad Enable Button Keypad applications Panel only Numeric Entry Keypad Touch applications only Numeric Input Cursor Point Keypad applications only Creating Dynamic and Static Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The method for creating all dynamic and static objects is basically the same The illustrations for the following procedure show how to create a Return to Previous Screen Button To create an object 1 Choose the object tool by doing one of the following choose from the toolbar open the Objects menu and choose the type of object to create v Select Push Buttons Control Selectors Indicators Numerics Trend Bar Graphs Time and Date ASCII Input Scrolling List Symbol Local Message Display ASCII Display Goto Configure Mode ow Yo v vvv v Goto Screen Button Return to Previous Screen Button Screen List Selector Screen Keypad Enable Button Screen Selectors Screen Print Button Graphic Image Drawings Text Ctrl T Note Most object types have a submenu indicated by an arrow at the right side of the Object menu If there is a submenu when you select the type of object the submenu appears Then you choose the particular object For example choose Return to Previous Screen Button from the Screen Selectors submenu
175. 2 Integer no decimal places Long odulo Mod Mod Operand2 Remainder of an integer Long divide Addition Operand2 f either operand is data type Single the result is Single If neither operand is Single the result is Long Subtraction Operand2 f either operand is data type Single the result is Single If neither operand is Single the result is Long There is no space between the negation symbol and the operand while there are spaces before and after all the other arithmetic symbols gt Note Some arithmetic operations take precedence over others Operations with the highest precedence are evaluated first However addition and subtraction have equal precedence and multiplication and floating point division have equal precedence over integer division Operations with equal precedence are evaluated in sequence from left to right Operands can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 10 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Example 1 Using Arithmetic Operations in Expressions A temperature probe used to monitor the temperature of an oven is connected to a 12 bit analog input card in the PLC but you want the PanelView terminal to display the temperature in degrees Celsius The temperature probe has a range of 100 C to 500 C A temperature of 100
176. 3 Click the Filter button All the tags associated with the Alarm window will be listed To remove a filter 1 Click the Filter In Column button 2 Click the Remove Filter button This removes not only the most recent filter but all the filters that have been applied to the list of tags Searching for Text You can search for any specific text in the Tag Usage Viewer To search for text in the Tag Usage Viewer 1 Click the Search button 2 In the Find String field specify the text you are searching for The search is not case sensitive 3 Specify whether you want to search down a particular column or across all rows by choosing Down Column or Across All Rows in the Search Direction field The Down Column option searches only in the currently selected column The Across All Rows option searches the entire list starting at the top left corner working its way across the row before moving on to the next row Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 30 Defining Tags T ag Usage rom for Application TUTOKE Parmeter z Tua Find Sring E List Salnotor e RN T Tag DIB3 15 Bit Tag DLES rH iT Tag DIES 0 1 L B Tag DEES L D l L Pin LABS Tag DEBS Lei Mn Tag D Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Bir 4 Click the Search button amp Drm Colenn TT Annes All Digital Pull Digital Full Tull Tull Tu
177. 4 November 1998 7 28 Creating Expressions Example 9 Numeric Write Expressions Allow Input to PLC Numeric Input Object Maintained P anelBuilder O bject State 0 State 1 32 deg F B 0 deg C m PLC DEG C DEG F Numeric Write Expression IF PB tag O THEN ELSE IF PB tag 1 THEN 5 9 32 END IF Example 10 Local Variables Improve Performance on Complex Expressions Expression DIM Varl AS INTEGER Var 1 PRESS tag 3 tag 5 6 Varl gt 3095 AND Varl lt 6000 THEN IF Varl gt 6000 THEN END IF Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Chapter 8 Creating Screens Application screens are the screens that appear on the PanelView terminal when the application is running You create and design them in the Screens editor This chapter shows you how to create new screens open copy and rename screens update and close screens delete screens set the background color assign screen security validate screens view the tags used in a screen use grids zoom out to display function keys assign the Application Startup screen Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 8 2 Creating Screens Creating a New To create a new screen for your application your Application Application Screen Window must be open and active To create a new screen 1 Choose New in the Screen menu or choose on the toolbar Screen New If the Screens folder is empty you can double click it to
178. 8 15 Assigning the Application Startup 5 8 16 Chapter 9 Mnatis an Object 9 1 Types of Objects 9 2 Dynamic and Static 9 2 Display and Input 9 2 About Retentive 9 3 Initial Tag Values and Initial State Values 9 4 Safety Considerations for Retentive Objects 9 4 Retentive Objects and Tags 9 5 Objects Available in PanelBuilder 9 7 ASCII Display utsaneceand snap ted eg Eri 9 7 PS CHM S o prre RS 9 7 Bar Graphs 9 7 Control SECC 9 8 Goto Configure 9 8 Graphit IMAGES obs 9 9 ku cu dod eria detainees wea wales sua we ew qua RR 9 9 Local Message Display 9 9 aa a ARR a e ceeds 9 9 a o ed 9 11 Mcr 9 11 Table of Contents toc ix Screen Print Button 9 11 Screen 5 9 12 Scrolling DIS caeca SE RR RON GER CR OR CR POR RCR p c vn 9 12 Shapes Drawing Objects 9 12 S
179. Assembly 1200 1200e 1400e Terminals Only All terminals have a Mode Select Keyswitch and RS 232 port on the back If this 1s difficult to access for PanelView 1200 1200e and 1400e terminals you can install the Remote Keyswitch and RS 232 Port Assembly A B Catalog Number 2711 NC2 in a more convenient location For more information refer to the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Printer You can use any standard printer supported by Microsoft Windows to print reports from the development computer To print graphics screen reports from PanelBuilder your printer must support graphics printing Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 8 Introduction to PanelBuilder Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The PanelView terminal supports Epson FX 80 and Hewlett Packard LaserJet compatible printers for printing screens and alarm reports Install additional memory to meet the increased memory requirements for high resolution 800 x 600 screens For PanelView 1400e terminals use the System Memory Upgrade Kit for 1400e terminals A B Catalog Number 2711E URAM2 Important We recommend you only use the Epson FX 80 for printing alarms Uploads and Downloads over DH PanelView terminals support DH Direct or RIO DH Pass Through file transfers To upload or download your applications over you must connect your development computer to the DH network Uploads and Downloads over ControlNet
180. CE ALARMS button has no effect on the audio beeper if the PLC Controlled Audio control value is non zero or on the alarm relay if the PLC Controlled Alarm Relay control value is non zero Alarm History Displays the Alarm History screen Alarm Status Displays the Alarm Status screen Cursor Up Down Moves the cursor bar up or down the list of alarms so the operator can acknowledge a specific message Exit Clears the Alarm Message Window If the Clear Window to PLC option is enabled pressing EXIT sets the Clear Window to PLC tag to 1 for the duration defined as the Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time If the audio indicator or alarm relay is active they will be silenced if they are not being activated by PLC Controlled Audio or Alarm Relay functions Configuring Alarms 11 35 Alarm Message Panel The Alarm Message Panel displays the most recent alarm message only Unlike the Single line Alarm Message Window the Alarm Message Panel can display a single message including the Alarm Trigger value that is up to 6 lines long Messages are left aligned in the panel and may be configured with different font sizes If the message is longer than a single line PanelView automatically breaks the message after the last word that will fit on the line and continues the message on the next line You can also use the Newline code to specify where you want lines to break as described in Chapter 10 Creating Messages The Alarm Mess
181. Classes 6 After converting the application to ControlNet you need to L gt Racks change the Terminal Network Address on the Terminal jm RIO Block Transfer Files Communications tab of the Configure Communication Setup 00 Scheduled Files dialog Comiqern Communication Setup The Terminal Network Address remains unchanged by the conversion Ensure this value is still correct for your application or change it The range is 1 to 99 decimal Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 For example if the Terminal Network Address for your DH application was 25 octal it will be 25 decimal for your ControlNet application In the Network File Transfer tab the PanelView Location Routing Address will be set to the Terminal Network Address Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 36 Defining Communications Converting from ControlNet to Remote I O Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To change the network type from ControlNet to Remote 1 0 If you change an application from ControlNet to Remote I O you must define the necessary racks block transfer files and Pass Through File control byte 1f needed as well as change any tag addresses that are not valid for Remote I O You will also lose your defined nodes and scan classes 1 2 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu In the Target Network field choose Remote
182. Close all other programs You may need to run the MS DOS memmaker utility to free up memory below 1 MB Program crashed or terminated abnormally previously Restart Windows Out of environment space Add the following line to your AUTOEXEC BAT file shell e 4096 Windows 95 NT Not enough memory Close down other applications to increase your virtual memory Unable to open shared database Database cannot be located Use Repair Shared command to repair the link between the data file and application Database is damaged missing or cannot be repaired Use New Database command to remove the bad database Then use Import Export or Select Shared to re populate the database tags Current application is already using the database Choose a different database Out of memory Close all Windows applications or other PanelBuilder applications to free up memory 8 databases are already open Close one or more PanelBuilder applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Problem Troubleshooting Cause What to Do Unable to Open a New Application or Tag Database Not enough disk space Delete all unnecessary files on the hard disk Exit Windows and delete any temporary files in the temporary directory Not enough memory Increase virtual memory swap size Windows 3 1 Use Control Panel 386 Enhanced Settings to reconfigure th
183. Continue 9 5 Choose Yes to both to confirm that you want to continue 6 Once you have changed the network type you will have to configure the programmable controller type rack assignments block transfer files and Pass Through File control byte in the Rack and Block Transfer File editors You may also have to re specify the PanelView Location Routing Address on the Network File Transfer tab in the Configure Communication Setup dialog box For more information about configuring an application for Remote I O see Defining Communications for a Remote I O Application earlier in this chapter To change the network type from ControlNet to DH 1 Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu 2 In the Target Network field choose DH Current Network ControlNet Target Network DH X Convert Scheduled Tags Node Scan Class If you convert Scheduled Tags specify a node name and scan class You can specify a node name and scan class when you do the conversion or you can leave them blank If you enter a node name and scan class they will be used in all the tags that are converted In addition the node and scan class will be created for you with the default settings You can change the settings to suit your application later Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 38 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 If you leave the Node Name and Scan Class fields blank the
184. Creating Expressions 4 To assign multiple tags or expressions up to 50 click on the next available row and enter the new Tag or Expression repeating step 3 If additional rows are needed click Insert Row To delete a row click Delete Row 5 Click OK to return to the Global Controls dialog box Configuring Alarms 11 17 Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control The Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control controls are used together to inform the PLC when an alarm has been acknowledged and to send the acknowledged alarm s trigger value to the PLC These controls are optional When these controls are activated depends on your choice for the Operator versus Operator and Remote selection refer to the earlier section Alarm Acknowledge to PLC for more details To enable the Acknowledge to PLC option you must assign a tag to that control The tag allowed for the Acknowledge to PLC control depends on your selection for Alarm Acknowledge to PLC type Bit or Word Invalid tag types will not be reported until validation For more information about making these selections see Alarm Acknowledge to PLC earlier in this chapter If you selected this Expressions Maximum number of Use this tag type for the Valid Starting Alarm Acknowledge allowed Acknowledge to PLC Acknowledge to PLC control Trigger to PLC type tags Bit No 50 Block 1 to 65 535 Word No 1 Digital or Analog N A If the Acknowledge to PLC con
185. E Reset tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero Alarm monitoring continues even though the tag value is non zero The operator can also reset the Alarm Status screen s QTY TIME depending on how the screen is configured Important When the Alarm Status screen is reset all the Alarm Quantity and Accumulated Time fields in the Alarm Status screen are reset to 0 The programmable controller can reset the Alarm Status screen only if the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset control is assigned The operator can reset the Alarm Status screen by pressing and confirming the Reset Qty Time button if enabled downloading or selecting a new application in the terminal The Last Qty Time Reset stamp is retentive When an application is first run it will be set to the time the terminal is switched to Run Mode What Happens when the Operator Resets the QTY TIME When a reset occurs the terminal automatically sets the Alarm Status screen s QTY TIME Reset to PLC tag if assigned It sets this tag for the Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time after detecting the Alarm Status reset whether or not the Reset QTY TIME button is still being pressed or the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset tag or expression is still active The Reset QTY TIME button or the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset tag or expression must make another 0 to non zero transition before the Alarm Status screen s QTY TIME Reset to PLC tag is set Important While the Alarm Status screen
186. FACER loe e Required Equipment PanelBuilder Software PanelView Transfer PanelView Terminal Transferring or Installing the Programmable Controllers Programmable Controller Software andLogic Optional Equipment Serial Upload Download Cable RS 232 Remote Keyswitch and RS 232 Port Assembly 1200 1200e 1400e Terminals Uploads and Downloads over DH Uploads and Downloads PCMCIA Memory Chapter 2 Steps for Building an Application Planning Steps TERT Planning for Sally ua isto X Eo ER RR H Programming the Tips for Optimizing the Application Using Worksheets to Help Plan Your Application Step 1 Documentthe Process Step 2 Design Application Screens and Objects Tips for Planning Application Screen Designs CONSISINCY wc a ae Re Merc Use a Screen Template
187. How Colors Appear at Runtime For buttons and button objects the foreground color of the button s panel determines the color of the button border highlight when the button is pressed For list objects the foreground color of the list s panel is the highlight color when a state in the list is selected To apply colors before drawing 1 Choose a drawing tool or the text tool 2 Choose the colors from the color palette or from the Format menu Tip If you are drawing static objects and want to use the attributes of an existing object select that object first Then choose the object tool you want and begin drawing or typing The new object will have the same attributes as the selected object To apply colors to an object 1 Choose one or more objects 2 Choose the colors from the color palette or from the Format menu Setting an Object s Fill Type Many objects can be hollow or solid If you make an object hollow any object that it covers will show through The following illustration shows the difference between hollow and solid fill when applied to text This tex llow fill This text has solid fill Inm Foreground Color Background Color gt Very Tiny Font Tiny Font v Small Font Double Wide Font Double High Font Large Font Extra Large Font Button Marains Border Style Line Style Fill Style Underline Text Creating Objects 9 51 Changing the Border and Line Styles You
188. Introducing Microsoft Windows 95 if you use Windows 95 or Introducing Microsoft Windows NT Workstation if you use Windows NT Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 2 Working with Applications Creating a New Application New Application Ctrl N Open Application Ctrl O Download Upload Exit Alt F4 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To create a new application 1 Choose New Application from the File menu or from the toolbar or press Ctrl N The New Application dialog box appears Application Type 1000 640x480 1200e 640x480 1400e 640x480 1400e 800x600 Keypad Touch Screen Network Type Remote 170 2 Select the type of terminal you will be using to create this application Choose one of the following terminal types PanelView 1000e Keypad 640 by 480 PanelView 1000e Touch Screen 640 by 480 PanelView 1200e Keypad 640 by 480 PanelView 1200e Touch Screen 640 by 480 PanelView 1400e Keypad 640 by 480 PanelView 1400e Touch Screen 640 by 480 PanelView 1400e Keypad 800 by 600 PanelView 1400e Touch Screen 800 by 600 Important You cannot convert a keypad application to a touch screen application or vice versa However you can switch between 1000e 1200e and 1400e application types See Changing the Application Type in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Working with Applications 3 3 3 Select the network yo
189. MP 1 will be treated as the value of tag PUMP minus 1 PUMP 1 will be treated as the value of tag PUMP 1 Comments apostrophe or REM Use comments to describe the expression A comment can start atthe beginning of the line or you can place comments to the right of executable code You cannot place comments to the left of executable code You can use up to 100 comments in each expression Comments are removed when the expression is compiled We recommend that you begin each expression with a comment the first line of the expression is displayed in the Control list Multi line comments must include the comment indicator on each line For samples of how to use comments see Examples 2 and 3 later in this chapter Constants any number Constants are simply numbers that you use in expressions Exit statements Exit Exit statements allow you to explicitly terminate the evaluation of the expression PanelView uses the value it calculated immediately before reading the Exit statement Use of Exit statements is entirely optional The Exit statement may follow any line of executable code The Exit statement must be written on its own line although it may be followed by a comment Line continuations _ underscore Use the line continuation character when a line of code is too long to read easily in the Expression editor When used the line continuation character must be the last executable character on the line The
190. ONOLPICS u acci soc re DOCE T FER acd C 10 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing Optional Syntax 11 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing by Bit Address Optional Syntax 11 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Analog Member Addressing Optional Syntax C 12 Mnemonic 13 TimerMnemonicS 13 Counter 5 13 ControlMnemonicS 13 ccc ccc n C 14 Message Mnemonics C 15 Block Transfer C 15 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 toc xiv Table of Contents Troubleshooting Version Control Reserved Keywords Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Token Data Mnemonics C 16 SFC Status Mnemonics C 16 Remo O REC C 17 Discrete PLC Address C 17 Block Transfer Address C 18 Discrete SLC Address C 19 ControlNet Scheduled C 20 Appendix D 5 D 1 PanelBuilder Validation
191. PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls Important You must also configure the individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls described in the next section for the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control to function Individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time Controls The individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls work with the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control The PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls define the programmable controller addresses from which the terminal gets the time and date There are six controls Control Accepted Range of Data Year 2 digit form 80 99 1980 1999 and 00 43 2000 2043 4 digit form 1980 2043 Month 1 12 Day ofthe Month 1 31 Hour 0 23 24 hour format Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 These controls are all individually assignable independent of the others Only the date and time components for which tags or expressions are assigned will be updated For example if only the Year control is assigned then the programmable controller will only be asked to update the year not the month day of the month or time The way these controls display the date and time on the PanelView terminal depends on the terminal s Configure Mode settings for the date and time display For information about configuring the PanelView terminal to display the date and time see Setting Time and Date in Chapter 5 Configuring PanelView Operator Terminals in the PanelVie
192. Panel View terminal can control these options and send the option status to the PLC The options are then referred to as the Notify PLC options Using the same example you would assign a tag to the Screen Number to PLC control These three options can be controlled by either the PLC or the operator at the Panel View terminal Screen Number e Screen Print e Date and Time You configure all these PLC I O Control options in the PLC I O Control dialog box Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 13 2 Configuring PLC I O Control Options E gt System To open the PLC 1 0 Control dialog box Terminal Set g Tag Das Piu p gt Open the System folder Choose PLC I O Control or from Alarms the toolbar The following dialog box appears LCI L Fil Information Message Window PLC 1 0 Control x PLC Controlled Control Screen Number to PLC unassigned Screen Print Active to PLC unassigned Date amp Time to PLC Year unassigned Day of the Week unassigned Month unassigned Day of the Month unassigned Hour unassigned Minute unassigned Second unassigned Assign Tag Unassign Notify PLC Cancel Help PLC Controlled Screen Number unassigned PLC Controlled Screen Print unassigned PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control unassigned PLC Controlled Date amp Time Year unassigned Month u
193. PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 5 can run on e PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e operator terminals e Series F and G PanelView 1200 terminals that have been enhanced to MC catalog numbers with PanelView 1200e and 1400e Firmware 2 MB SIMM module and 4 MB PCMCIA memory card For information about enhancing your Series F or G terminals contact your Allen Bradley representative You can edit any application created with a previous version of PanelBuilder for example an application created in Version 1 of PanelBuilder DOS However once an application is edited in PanelBuilder 1400e you can save it only as a Version 5 PanelBuilder 1400e format file pvc and you can only edit it using PanelBuilder Version 5 Depending on the features you used in the application you can however download and run it on terminals running PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Firmware Version 1 and later Version compatibility issues are highlighted wherever they occur in this manual and are explained in more detail in Appendix E Version Control Note The pvd files are terminal files that are created automatically when an application is downloaded to a PanelView terminal You can also create a pvd file manually by saving a PanelBuilder application as a terminal file Terminal pvd files can be Version 1 or later depending on the features used in the application You need the following software and equipment to create
194. PanelBuilder and in PanelView terminal firmware which determines the version of PanelView firmware with which a PanelBuilder application is compatible Version Control is imposed at three levels when a PanelBuilder application is validated e when a PanelBuilder application is downloaded to a PanelView terminal before a PanelView terminal application is made current or executed at a PanelView terminal Before a downloadable pvd application file can be created it must be validated by PanelBuilder Part of this validation ensures that the features used in the application the application s Actual Firmware Version do not exceed the application s Target Firmware Version Target Firmware Version vs Actual Firmware Version To understand the difference between an application s Target Firmware Version and its Actual Firmware Version consider the following examples A PanelBuilder ControlNet application s Target Firmware Version is set to 2 and later If the application does not make use of features which require Version 2 firmware the application s Actual Firmware Version is 1 03 and it will run on terminals with firmware Version 1 03 required for ControlNet communications and later The application will not run on terminals with Version 1 firmware however A PanelBuilder ControlNet application s Target Firmware Version is set to 2 and later If the application does make use of features which require Version 2 firmware
195. PanelBuilder applications and run them on a PanelView terminal PanelBuilder Software You need a copy of PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 3 or 5 installed on your personal computer For PC requirements and installation instructions refer to Chapter 2 Installing PanelBuilder 1400e in the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Getting Started Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 13 PanelView Transfer Utility You need a copy of the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility Version 3 or PanelView e Transfer Utility 32 Version 5 installed on your personal computer if you want to transfer files between your computer and a PanelView terminal For PC requirements and installation instructions refer to the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 4 Introduction to PanelBuilder Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PanelView Terminal You must have one or more terminals Applications created or edited in PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Version 3 or 5 can run on many different types of terminals PanelView 1000e Touch Screen Terminals A B Catalog Numbers 2711E T10C6 2711E T10C7 2711E T10C15 PanelView 1000e Keypad Terminals A B Catalog Numbers 2711E K10C6 2711E K10C7 2711E K10C15 PanelView 1200e Touch Screen Terminals clip mount and stud mount A B Catalog Numbers 2711E T
196. PanelView terminals support ControlNet Direct or RIO ControINet Pass Through file transfers To upload or download your applications over ControlNet you must connect your development computer to the ControINet network PCMCIA Memory Card PanelView terminals provide Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA support You can use the PCMCIA memory card A B Catalog Number 2711 NM11 2711 NMI2 2711 NM13 or 2711 NM14 to install firmware directly without having to open the terminal or to store application files For more information see the PanelView Serial Firmware Upgrade Utility Readme file and online help Steps for Building an Application Chapter 2 Planning Applications A well designed application requires careful planning before you start building To help with planning this chapter covers steps for building an application steps in planning an application including documenting the process designing screens and identifying communications planning for safety tips for optimizing the application using worksheets Creating an application is easier if you plan it This chapter discusses planning steps and guidelines in detail The later chapters of this manual provide instructions for creating and downloading the application The chapters are organized in the order you use them to create your application Follow these steps to build your application 1 2 Plan your application as describ
197. Pass Through network type 1 Choose the Network File Transfer tab in the Configure Communication Setup dialog box 2 In the Pass Through Network Type drop down list select the appropriate Pass Through e DH ControlNet e Ethernet nedigurn Communication 5Sintup Tranzisr Hipqunzt uanigxgread Transler nhy mnga 7 Specifying the PanelView Location Routing Address If you are going to download the application to the PanelView terminal using Remote I O Pass Through you should specify the station address of the programmable controller the PanelView terminal is attached to This address allows PanelBuilder to locate the PLC Pass Through device on the Remote I O Pass Through The address you specify depends on the type of network you are using e Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on the same ControlNet network specify the address of the PLC the terminal is connected to It must be a decimal number between 1 and 99 e Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on the same DH network the PanelView Location Routing Address you specify is the PLC s DH station address It will be an octal number between 0 and 77 e Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on the same Ethernet network the PanelView Location Routing Address you specify is the PLC s Ethernet station address It is a number in the form of www xxx yyy zzz where www xxx yyy and zzz are each between 000 and 255
198. Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 6 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 e Ifthe PLC and the development computer are on different bridged DH networks you must specify a remote station address for the programmable controller Specify both the PLC station address and the bridge one or more addresses If you specify a PanelView Location Routing Address on download of the application this address will be used as the default PanelView Location Routing Address in the Setup Download dialog box This saves you from having to specify the terminal s location each time the application is downloaded You can change the default if you wish If you do not specify a PanelView Location Routing Address you will have to specify one in the Setup Download dialog box The following table shows the syntax for a remote station address bridged by a 1785 KA Station Address Valid Entries ll rrr ss Il local bridge address 0 77 octal rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal SS station address on remote DH 0 77 octal or You can shorten the offlink address by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote station address to produce a shorter address that still points to the same node ll rss local bridge address 0 77 octal 55 combined remote bridge address
199. Read tags display output from the PLC You can use expressions to manipulate the value of the read tag and display the result on the PanelView terminal For more information see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Planning Applications 2 17 Discrete I O Addresses Discrete I O addresses communicate directly with the PLC They provide faster updates than block transfer file addresses but require more rack space Therefore keep the following objects in discrete I O all push buttons e all states or values that you want updated immediately Because there is only a limited number of I O points you might not be able to use discrete I O addresses for your entire application If you do not have enough rack space create block transfer files Block Transfer File Addresses A block transfer file transfers information to and from the PLC through a control byte in the discrete output space If you do not have much rack space you can create up to 64 block transfer files Block transfer files give you more input and output space but are not as fast as using discrete I O Each PanelView terminal can have up to 64 block transfer files up to 64 words in length Block transfer files can be defined as either read or write files You can choose the racks and modules that the block transfer control bytes will occupy and specify the size of the file Each block transfer file requires one byte 8 bits or 1 2 word of discrete output on the PLC to con
200. SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced 1 0 Files F ss www bb F File type I Input O Output Ss I O slot number 0 30 decimal www optional I O word number expansion 0 255 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal When input slot is 0 0 23 decimal Example 22 254 13 Important Writing to the output files of a SLC 5 is not recommended However if you do be sure the SLC is not in Run mode If it is in Run mode the write will fail and an error message will be logged to the activity log file Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 8 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 SLC 5 Enhanced Status Files F ww bb F File type S Status WW Word address SLC 5 03 0 68 decimal SLC 5 04 0 96 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Example S 15 6 SLC 5 Status Files This addressing syntax applies to Fixed I O SLC SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 00 F ww bb F File type S Status ww Word address SLC 500 0 15 decimal SLC 5 01 0 15 decimal SLC 5 02 0 32 decimal SLC 5 03 0 68 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Example 8 15 6 SLC 5 Enhanced Binary Integer Float ASCII and String Files This addressing syntax applies to SLC 5 03 OS301 and SLC 5 04 Fnnn www bb F File type B Binary N Integer F Floating Point A ASCII ST String nnn optional
201. Safety considerations 2 2 for retentive objects 9 4 programming the controller 2 3 Sample expressions 7 26 Saving applications 3 7 3 8 in another file format 3 9 messages See Updating messages screens See Updating screens Scale formula 2 23 2 50 Scales 9 6 9 11 Scan Classes configuring 5 25 5 26 for Device data source tags 5 24 data packets 2 44 2 46 editor using 5 25 5 26 staggered tags 2 45 Scanning about 2 44 scan classes 2 44 configuring 2 44 5 24 scan period 2 44 background 2 44 5 25 foreground 2 44 5 25 Scheduled File Worksheet A 1 Scheduled Files See ControlNet Screen keypad enable button 9 6 9 12 9 21 Screen list selector 9 6 9 12 9 21 Screen number to PLC controller tag 13 6 Screen print active to PLC controller tag 13 6 Screen print button 9 6 9 11 9 21 Screen prints from the terminal 13 4 PLC controlled screen print tag 13 4 screen print active to PLC controller tag 13 6 Screen reports options 3 14 Screen select keypad 9 6 9 12 Screen selectors 9 12 Screen worksheets for 1000e Terminals 2 10 A 2 for 1200e Terminals 2 8 A 1 for 1400e Terminals 2 10 high resolution A 2 low resolution A 2 Screens assigning application startup screen 8 16 new screen number 8 2 security 8 8 closing 8 7 color palette 9 14 copying 8 4 controls 8 5 screen contents 8 5 creating 8 2 deleting 8 7 designing 2 6 using templates 2 7 using worksheets 2 8
202. Screen Images report is available only when you print the report to a printer not when you save the report to a file Object Summary Lists screen objects and associated information for the screens you have selected You can choose two options for this report e Full e Include Wallpaper Objects If you do not choose one of these options you get a brief description of all the non wallpaper objects Full Provides detailed configuration information on all objects Include Wallpaper Objects Includes all drawing objects that have been converted to wallpaper Working with Applications 3 15 Print Setup How you can set up the printer depends on how your printer is configured in Microsoft Windows For details on how to set up your printer refer to your Microsoft Windows User s Guide You can use any laser printer supported by Windows to print reports To set up the printer 1 Choose Reports from the Tools menu 2 Click Print Setup in the Report Selection dialog box The Print Setup dialog box appears 3 Select the printer and desired page orientation and size 4 Click OK See online help for information about the Options and Network buttons Solving Printing Problems If you cannot print follow these steps 1 Check your printer s manual to ensure you have assigned the correct printer port setting and that the port is configured correctly 2 Ensure your printer is turned on is online and supplied wit
203. Scrolling List you cannot remove the states by resizing the list You must first unassign the visible state tags Important If a list object has state text defined you cannot resize the list so it is smaller than the number of states with text You must delete the text before you can resize the list Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 62 Creating Objects The objectin this illustration is a Screen List S elector The Selector s list has five states as indicated by the arrows You can add text for each state in the list Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To define the number of states in the list 1 2 Choose the list component of the list object Resize the list component vertically until it shows the desired number of states Note The maximum number of states an object can display depends on the font size If you select this font size The object can display this many states Small or Double Wide 24 Double High or Large 12 You are now ready to configure the states For example if the object is a Screen List Selector you can assign a different screen to each state For more information see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Adding Text to List Object States When you ve defined all the states for your list you can add text to the list This allows the operator to select states from the list To add text to each state 1 2 3 Cho
204. Target Firmware 12 4 Timing Parameters _ 12 6 Setting the Push Button Hold Time 12 6 Setting the Remote Alarm 12 7 Setting the Enter Key Parameters 12 8 Setting the Information Message Window Acknowledge Hold Time 12 8 Setting the Auto RepeatFunctions 12 8 Object Setup Keypad Applications 12 9 Chapter 13 Configuring PLC 1 0 Control 5 13 1 PLC Controlled redes E S UA o dd 13 3 PLC Controlled Screen Number 13 3 PLC Controlled Screen 13 4 About Screen Prints from the 13 4 PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control 13 4 Individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time Controls 13 5 Notify PLC Options 13 6 Screen Number to PLC 13 6 Screen Print Active to PLC 13 6 Date cco Time tP lG mi a er drew 13 6 Chapter 14 About the Information Message Window 14 1 Using the Information Message Window in the Terminal 14 2 Configuring the Information Message Window 14 3 Transferring Applications Sample Worksheets The Extended C
205. Terminal Setup dialog box you set the values for the cursor movement buttons in the following objects Screen List Selector Control List Selector with Enter Key Cursor Point in a keypad application for navigating between cursor points e Scrolling List s Cursor List To change the Auto Repeat Start Delay gt In the Auto Repeat Start Delay list choose the time you want The default rate for auto repeat is 0 which means no repeats The maximum repeat rate you can assign is 20 repeats per second To change the cursor Auto Repeat Rate Inthe Auto Repeat Rate list choose the cursor auto repeat rate you want Object Setup Keypad Applications The Object Setup tab allows you to configure the default behavior of objects in the application There is currently only one object configuration option Retain Cursor On Cancel This option applies to all Numeric Input Cursor Point objects and Set Bit Cursor Point objects in a keypad application Numeric Input Cursor Point objects and Set Bit Cursor Point objects cannot be configured for touch screen applications By default when the operator presses the Cancel button at the terminal the Cursor Point character becomes invisible for the Numeric Input Cursor Point or Set Bit Cursor Point object You may want to keep the character visible to give the operator a visual indication of which Numeric Input Cursor Point or Set Bit Cursor Point is active Publication 2711E 6 14
206. The tag database records all the addresses used throughout an application Instead of assigning an address directly to an object you enter the address as a tag definition in the database and then assign the tag or an expression that uses one or more tags to an object If the same address is used by more than one object you need only define it once in the database For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Some objects require more than one control tag or expression For example a Maintained Push Button needs a Button Control tag and an Indicator State tag or expression Record all necessary tag names and addresses in the worksheet as well as information about the expressions For each expression fill in the name of the expression in the object for example Indicator State the name of the tag or tags the expression will read data from and the manipulation the expression will perform on the tag data For information about the kinds of operations expressions can perform see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Planning Applications 2 23 For each tag fill in the following e Name A symbolic name you assign to the address The tag name can be up to 40 characters long and can include letters numbers the dash and the underscore character _ Spaces and periods are not permitted When you define tags in the Tag Database editor you can also define folders Folders are a convenient way to organiz
207. True True False exclusion on the operands True False True False True True False False False Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Expressions 7 17 Example 4 Using Logical Operations in Expressions With expressions you can pack a large amount of information into a single word of data The bit wise operations AND OR and NOT can be used to extract information out of the packed data and used to set the state of a multi state indicator for example Consider a Symbol object representing a motor that controls a conveyor belt The Symbol representing the motor on the PanelView terminal has four colors each representing a possible state State Value Color 0 Gray not running no alarms present 1 Green running 2 Bright Green starting run contact on and low speed contact off 3 Red not running alarm The 1 0 for each starter has been mapped into file N7 0 Bit Position Description 0 Overload Alarm High Temp Thermistor 2 Run Contact from Starter I3 Low Speed Contact 4 Phase Loss Alarm 5 Under Over Voltage Alarm 6 Low Speed Alarm The following expression uses tag motor1 sts defined as N7 0 and sets the appropriate state atthe PanelView terminal DIM state AS INTEGER current state of the motor DIM result AS INTEGER result decode status info REM All bits 0 means not running REM Only bit 2 value 4 means running REM Bit 2 running am
208. UUS add ve Reli deque ouai ES Rete ue 9 13 o er 9 13 Timeand Date P 9 13 ENGS aea a E e wa seas S 9 13 Working with Objects 9 14 Using the Toolbox and Color Palette 9 14 Selecting tus ad val imate oce top iat caw eee as 9 15 Selection Handles uu bep cs oro ben ieu a 9 15 Selection Methods 9 16 D salecihg D DISCIS winaa de dds 9 18 Zooming In and 9 18 Using the Undo and Redo 9 19 Object Tools and Commands 9 20 Creating Dynamic and Static Objects 9 22 Creating TeXt seres XR ER VEN witan 9 24 Editing Text sodes suae aha a kind Oan RR oe 9 25 Creating Extended 5_ 9 25 Creating Symbols 9 26 Exporting Symbols 9 29 Creating Graphic Images 9 29 Exporting Graphic Images 9 31 Creating Drawing 9 33 Adding Labels E 9 35 Editing ODIBEIS a iine cute maa 53 tenens teach A amat ewe 9 36 Cutting Copying and Pasting Jesu eu rrr tree daten 9 36 Copying Objects with Controls
209. WS esa erre Rex ERR EK E X RR P 1 ControlNet 1 5 Scheduled Mode Operation P 1 Keyboard and Bar Code P 1 RS232 Alarm Message Output to Dataliners P 1 VGA and SVGA Applications P 2 Enhanced PanelView Printer Support P 2 Enhanced 5_ P 2 More Local and Information Messages P 2 LOGINS SXX Processors ea ays Rd dr wee eds sa P 2 ControlLogix Gateway P 3 Enhanced P 3 Online Manuals and Enhanced Online Help P 3 3 SHAS To Line ODJBEIS s ed b suus hohe mre uia dps P 3 Most Recently Used 5 P 3 Uc sampu ETT P 4 Registering Your Copy of PanelBuilder1400e P 4 Available Documentation P 5 Whats inthe User Manual P 6 PEACE cade ed Pack plac P 6 Chapter 1 Introduction to PanelBuilder P 6 Chapter 2 Planning P 6 Chapter 3 Working with P 6 Chapter 4 Working with Editors P 6 Chapter 5 Defining Communicati
210. Window are the information messages you define in the Information Messages editor in PanelBuilder Note You create the information messages in the Information Messages editor not in the Information Message Window For details about creating information messages see Chapter 10 Creating Messages The Information Message Window provides the operator with informative messages about the process prompts or instructions and information about current states When the application is running on the terminal the Information Message Window appears over the currently displayed application screen It is not affected when application screens change Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 14 2 Working with the Information Message Window Using the Information Message Window in the Terminal Terminal screen Information message Information Message Window Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Information Message Window appears at the bottom of the screen on the terminal BEGIN START START STOP CLEAR CHCLE COMMEY COMJEY To trigger an information message the programmable controller places a non zero value in the Information Window Control This value must correspond to the trigger value of a message you created in the Information Messages editor The terminal reads this trigger value and displays the corresponding information message Depending on how you configure the Information Message Window t
211. a PanelBuilder for DOS or PanelBuilder 1200 application see the following section To open an existing application 1 Choose Open Application from the File menu or from the toolbar or press Ctrl O The Open dialog box appears It lists the available applications in the specified drive and directory If no applications appear you may need to change the drive or directory or select a different file type in the List Files of Type drop down list Open 21x File name Folders K gs cXabipb1400e E c 5 e gt PB1400E Help C3 DEMO E3 IMAGES E3 TUTORIAL Cancel Network Listfiles of type Drives PanelBuilder pvc C 2 If you know the path and name of the application you can type this in the File Name field If you do not know the application name select the type of application you want to display by making a selection in the List Files of Type drop down list Your choices are PanelBuilder 1400e configuration files pvc this is a configuration file created in PanelBuilder 1400e PanelBuilder 1400e terminal files pvd this is a download file ready for downloading to a PanelView 1200e or 1400e terminal e PanelBuilder 1200 files pbw this is a configuration file created in PanelBuilder 1200 e PanelBuilder for DOS files cfg this is a configured application file created in PanelBuilder for DOS PanelBuilder 1200 terminal files apl this is a download file
212. ab PanelView Location Routing Address 0 Click in the field and begin typing Control i Transfer Inhibit Transfer Request Transfer Status unassigned unassigned unassigned To assign an address click an option to select it and then click Assign Tag Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Form Spreadsheet Editors Cell or field Rows or Records Working with Editors 4 3 The Nodes RIO Racks RIO Block Transfer Files and Scheduled File editors and the three Messages editors Information Messages Alarm Messages and Local Messages all have a form and a spreadsheet component Using the Spreadsheet and Form A spreadsheet is a grid of rows and columns Each intersection of a row and a column forms a cell iz Information Messages KC TUTOR Trigger Value Message Text L Column Form View S Spreadsheet View Before you begin working in the spreadsheet familiarize yourself with these terms Record Each row in the spreadsheet is called a record A record is one complete entry For example in the Node editor one record is one complete definition of a PLC The form area displays one record at a time Field Each cell in a row constitutes a field You can view information in the form in the spreadsheet or both at once The default view is the spreadsheet for the Messages editors and both for the Node Rack Block
213. able controller You can also configure the terminal to monitor the communication between the programmable controllers and other Remote I O adaptors You can have up to 64 rack assignments Each will give you both input and output address space To assign racks you must define the following for each rack assignment e Rack Number Any rack supported by your programmable controller can be used in a rack assignment You can make several rack assignments with the same rack number until you have assigned all module groups for that rack e Access Access can be Full or Listen Only Specify Full access for racks whose I O space is in the terminal The input section of a Full access rack can be written to by the terminal Listen Only access means that the PanelView terminal can read from the rack s I O space but cannot write to it Listen Only is useful when one PanelView application needs to monitor the I O activity on racks used by other devices or configured with Full access for another PanelView terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 10 Defining Communications gt Note You cannot configure Listen Only for Rack 0 of PLC 2 and PLC 5 programmable controllers gt Note If you select Logix55xx as the Device Type the maximum rack number is 76 Module Groups You can select any or all module groups 0 2 4 or 6 Each of these module groups occupies a 1 4 rack Follow these guidelines when assigning module grou
214. address length depends on the data type assigned The default data type is Unsigned Integer with an address length of 16 bits When assigning a Binary or Bit Position data type unless an address length is specified the address length defaults to 1 bit Byte defaults to 8 bits Long Integer defaults to 32 bits and 1 to 8 BCD defaults to 4 to 32 bits You can also use the Floating Point data type for Remote I O applications Tags that use this data type must use a block transfer file address Note If you use the Floating Point data type for a Remote I O application the application will be compatible with Panel View Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Note The BIN data types are reserved for Modbus applications and cannot be used for DH ControlNet or Remote I O applications For more information about creating applications for Modbus see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 For DH and ControlNet Device tags the number of bits in an address is always determined by the address s data source No address length is required Addressing a float section of the PLC controller allows the terminal to access float values Initial Value This is the default value of the tag at the terminal When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value after descaling is written to the programmable controller
215. advanced technology resources of Rockwell Worldwide representation _ _ 29 Argentina e Australia e Austria e Bahrain e Belgium e Bolivia e Brazil e Bulgaria e Canada Chile e China People s Republic of e Colombia e Costa Rica e Croatia e Cyprus Czech Republic e Denmark e Dominican Republic e Ecuador e Egypt e EI Salvador e Finland e France e Germany e Ghana e Greece e Guatemala e Honduras e Hong Kong Hungary e Iceland e India e Indonesia e Iran e Ireland e Israel e Italy eJ amaica eJ eJ ordan eKorea e Kuwait e Lebanon e Macau e Malaysia e Malta e Mexico e Morocco The Netherlands e New Zealand e Nigeria e Norway e Oman e Pakistan e Panama e Peru ePhilippines e Poland e Portugal e Puerto Rico e Qatar e Romania Russia Saudi Arabia e Singapore e Slovakia e Slovenia e South Africa R epublic of e Spain eS weden e Switzerland e Taiwan e Thailand e Trinidad e Tunisia e Turkey e United Arab Emirates United Kingdom e United States e Uruguay e Venezuela Rockwell Automation Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Rockwell Automation European Headquarters Avenue Hermann Debroux 46 1160 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 06 00 Fax 32 2 663 06 40 Rockwell Automation Asia P acific Headquarters 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 World Wide We
216. age Panel can also display the alarm message trigger value You can configure the appearance of the message trigger value separately from the appearance of the rest of the Alarm Message Panel The trigger value can appear before the message and the allowable number of digits is 1 to 11 The window can appear at the top or bottom of the terminal s screen depending on how you configure it in the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box This window has no buttons and allows the current application screen s buttons to remain active for operator input On PanelView 1200 and 1200e touch screen terminals if the center of a button is obscured by an Alarm Message Panel the button will not respond to presses On PanelView 1400e terminals if any part of a button is not obscured by an Alarm Message Panel it will still respond to presses If you use the Alarm Message Panel the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Tip Because you will not be able to call up the Alarm History screen from the Alarm Message Panel include a Goto Screen button on your screens to call up the Alarm History screen Important If the Alarm Message Panel is used the operator can acknowledge and clear alarms only through the Alarm History screen Alarm Message Panels can also be cleared by the PLC and the PLC can acknowledge the message that appears in the Alarm Message Pa
217. al to receive the upload or download For details see Chapter 3 Uploading 1000e 1200e 1400e Application Files and Alarm History Files and Chapter 4 Downloading 1000e 1200e 1400e Application Files in the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 2 Choose Download from the File menu or from the toolbar 3 PanelView e Transfer Utility 32 Bee File Transfer Method Parameters Options View Help amp ua amp 5 7 system Options Method Parameter amp uto Help About m Source Download Upload Download Destination File Terminal Storage Memory Partition 2 Start Download Specify file to download Specify target partition in terminal to PV terminal Browse Transfer Topology Currently Configured Do Tie im Serial connection Download from your PC to a P terminal via a direct serial connection Serial driver Serial 1 Transfer Method Select download method Serial Configure Method For Help press F1 us 2 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Transferring Applications 15 3 Or choose Upload from the File menu or from the toolbar 9 PanelYiew e Transfer Utility 32 Bee File Transfer Method Parameters Options View Help Eia 1 Method Parameter Auto Help About Upload Source Upload Destination Data to Upload Path DAWINNT systema2 Start Upload Type of information to upload from Directory
218. alarm This field Contains this information Alm Trigger Alarm The alarm trigger value Trigger Qty Alarm Quantity How many times the alarm has gone into the alarm state This field can display a maximum number of 9999 alarms Acc Time Accumulated The total amount of time each alarm has been on or in alarm Time On Alarm State Whether alarms are active ON indicated by an asterisk or inactive OFF indicated by a blank Message The alarm message text associated with the alarm message number The quantity and accumulated time can be reset to 0 either by the operator or programmable controller Configuring Alarms 11 43 Calling up the Alarm Status Screen from the Terminal When the application is running the operator can call up the Alarm Status screen from the Multi line Alarm Message Window the Alarm History screen screen selection objects or the PLC Controlled Screen Change function How the terminal display appears depends on how the Alarm Status screen is invoked When called up from the Multi line Alarm Message Window it overlays the Alarm Message Window and the currently displayed application screen The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up from the Alarm History screen the Alarm Status screen replaces it The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up by a screen selection object or through the PLC Controlled Screen Change it will overlay the applic
219. alog box using one of the methods described previously 2 For variable state objects except Control List Selectors assign the number of states here Number of States B For Control List Selectors assign the number of states by sizing the list as described in Configuring List Object States later in this chapter D Note When you increase the number of states the attributes of the last state are used for all new states You must assign state values for these new states Assigning Values You must assign a value to each of the object s states gt Note For the Scrolling List Object s Cursor List you can also specify whether to skip individual states See the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual for more information To assign state values 1 In the object s configuration dialog box choose Edit States The Configure State Values dialog box opens Configure State Values x Spreadsheet Operations OK Clear Cut cn 2 3 Copy diii Paste State Benumber The state value range is a Enter a unique value from 2147483648 to 2147483647 Help long signed integer value Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 60 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 Click on the state to which you want to assign a value 3 Type the numeric value for the state For input
220. an also print the Validation Results window Updating Messages While you are creating messages you should update save them from time to time When you close your message editor you are prompted to save your messages PanelBuilder automatically validates your messages before updating them Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Messages 10 15 To update messages 1 Choose Update Messages from the File menu from the toolbar or press Ctrl U Update Messages Ctrl U Close Ctrl F4 Import Message File If there are no errors a message informs you that the messages have been updated If there is an error in your messages a dialog box informs you of the error 2 Follow the steps of the previous section for validating your messages 3 Update your messages again A message informs you when the messages are updated Your messages must be error free before you can update them or close the message editor Important If you close your application without saving it the changes you made to your messages will be discarded even though you updated them Save your application frequently For details on saving the application see Chapter 3 Working with Applications Closing the Messages To close the editor Editor 1 Choose Close from the File menu or double click in the control box of the editor If you made any changes and have not updated them a message appears prompting you to save your changes
221. and can automatically scale the on screen application Enhanced PanelView Printer Support PanelView Firmware Version 5 supports HP LaserJet compatible printers in addition to the currently supported Epson compatible printers Additionally Portrait Landscape and 8 5 x 11 inch A4 paper printing is supported Enhanced Alarms PanelView Firmware Version 5 now supports 4 000 alarm messages and 2 500 alarm history records As well the Alarm History screen allows alarm messages to be sorted by time or by trigger value quick scrolling through the alarm messages with the addition of new alarms home and end buttons e acknowledging all alarms with an Acknowledge button clearing all alarms out of the alarm history with a Clear All button or the alarm history upload option The Alarm Status screen also features the new home and end buttons that enable quick scrolling through alarm messages More Local and Information Messages PanelView Firmware Version 5 now supports 10 000 local messages and 10 000 information messages Logix55xx Processors PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 supports creating a PanelView application that communicates with a Logix55xx Processor communicating in ControlLogix Legacy mode A Panel View terminal can communicate to a Logix55xx on DH ControlNet and Remote I O networks PanelView can only communicate to a Logix55xx processor when the processor is in the same chassis as the DHRIO or CNB m
222. and remote station 0 376 octal address The following table shows the syntax for a remote station connected by a Pyramid Integrator Station Address Valid Entries Il rrrrr ss I local bridge address 0 77 octal rrrrr PI Link number 0 65535 decimal SS station address on remote DH 0 77 octal For examples of valid remote station addressing see Addressing in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Though the examples in Chapter 2 show remote station addresses for a PLC the method is the same for the PanelView Location Routing Address Defining Communications 5 7 To define the PanelView Location Routing Address 1 In the Configure Communication Setup dialog box choose the Network File Transfer tab 2 Type the PLC s station address in the PanelView Location Routing Address field Defining the Network File Transfer Controls If you plan to download an application over DH or ControlNet networks using the Pass Through Download feature you can define the network file transfer controls to monitor file download processes Note Although it is optional we strongly recommend that you define and use these controls You must assign all three controls for the mechanism to work properly There are three network download controls You can assign tags only to these controls e Transfer Inhibit The terminal reads this control at the start of a download When this control is set to non zero the terminal wi
223. application from the list of files List Files of Type Shows the type of files that can be shared by the current application Select pvc for PanelBuilder files and rsv for RSView files Directories Choose the directory containing the database you want to select Drives If the directory containing the desired database is not displayed you can select the drive where the directory is located 4 Click OK to share the specified database Repairing a Shared Database You can repair the links to a shared database in these circumstances The application has been moved to another machine where the database is in a different path The database has been deleted and you have to link to another The database has been corrupted and you have to link to another Note The application s communication information is not affected when you repair a shared database To repair a shared database 1 Open the application with the database you want to repair 2 Choose Repair Shared from the Database menu 3 Type the database name and path specification or select the Browse button to search for a tag database A database file will have the extension db 4 Click OK to connect the application to the specified database Note If you get the message The file specified is not a tag database when you try to repair a database either you are pointing to the wrong file or the current version of the database has been damaged beyond repair
224. application to recreate their bmp source files This allows you to reuse the graphic files on other screens in other applications or in non PanelBuilder programs You can export bmp and dxf images from an application pvc or terminal pvd file Both bmp and dxf images are exported as bmp images You can export a Graphic Image to another PanelBuilder application or a non PanelBuilder program using one of the following two methods copy it and paste it into the new PanelBuilder application See Cutting Copying and Pasting later in this chapter export it to a file and import the new image file in the new application or in a non PanelBuilder program Note To use a PanelBuilder Graphic Image in a non PanelBuilder program import the image s file into the program as described in that program s documentation Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 32 Creating Objects To export new graphic images 1 Open the Bitmap Image Library dialog box by choosing Bitmap Image or DXF Image from the Import Export Graphic submenu on the Edit menu Bitmap Image Library x Current bitmap Close AGITATR BMP Import Remove Help Monochrome Bitmap 2 Choose an image and click Export Save As 2 x File name Folders agitau bmp c ab pb1400e images isa Cy c Cy ab CX pb1400e 3 images Cancel agitatr bmp agitatrl bmp blower bmp blowerl_ bmp comprsr bmp
225. are Note dxf images are converted to wmf images when they are imported into PanelBuilder All images are converted to bmp images when the pvd file is written and all images are exported as bmp images To create a graphic image 1 Open the Select Image dialog box by doing one of the following choose Bitmap Image or DXF Image from the Graphic Image submenu on the Objects menu TT choose Or from the toolbar Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 30 Creating Objects Only imported images are available for selection To use an image thatis not in the Current images list import it as described on the next page Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Select Bitmap Image x Current bitmap images AGITATR BMP CYCLONE BMP Help CYCLONEL BMP z Heb Monochrome Bitmap 2 Choose an image and click OK The pointer changes to the active graphic tool 3 Position the pointer where you want to place the graphic image and drag the mouse to create the object s outline 4 When you are finished release the mouse button You can assign different foreground and background colors and fill styles to monochrome graphic images See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter To change a graphic image 1 Double click or right click the graphic image The Select Image dialog box appears 2 Choose a new image To import new graphic images 1 In the Select Bitmap Image or Select DXF Image d
226. ariables see Examples 2 and 3 later in this chapter Evaluation of Local Variables If the value assigned to a variable uses a different data type than the variable s data type the value may be outside the range of the local variable If this occurs the result of the assignment is Unreliable If the value is within the range of the local variable s data type the value is converted to the local variable s data type Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 8 Value Data Type Creating Expressions Local Variable Data Type Byte Integer Long Single Boolean This table lists the resulting value after the value is converted to the local variable s data type Variant Byte Integer Long Value is Unreliable if outside local variable s range otherwise value is unchanged Value is Unreliable if outside local variable s range otherwise value is unchanged If value 0 resulting value is False If value lt gt 0 resulting value is True Value unchanged Single Value is truncated to an integer Value is Unreliable if outside local variable s range otherwise value is the integer value Value unchanged If value 0 resulting value is False If value lt gt 0 resulting value is True Value unchanged Boolean Value is 0 if False 1 if True Value is 0 if False 1 if True Value unchanged Value unchanged Variant See above resulting value depends on
227. arm Status screen screen selection objects or the PLC Controlled Screen Change function How the terminal display appears depends on how the Alarm History screen is invoked When called up from the Multi line Alarm Message Window the Alarm History screen overlays the Alarm Message Window and the currently displayed application screen The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up from the Alarm Status screen the Alarm History screen replaces the Alarm Status screen The Screen Number to PLC is not changed When called up by a screen selection object or via PLC Controlled Screen Change the Alarm History screen overlays the application screen exiting from the Alarm History screen will reveal the application screen beneath The Screen Number to PLC if enabled is set to the Alarm History screen number If the Alarm History screen is invoked by the PLC Controlled Screen Change or a screen selection object this occurs When the Alarm History screen is exited the Screen Number to PLC is set to that of the application screen previously obscured by the Alarm History screen Another PLC Controlled Screen change request will remove the Alarm History screen and the current application screen to display the new screen Configuring Alarms 11 53 The following figure shows an example of the Alarm History screen a rere aM 12 13 96 Ackil Silence Line ums Home e bri ee FAFAFA
228. assignments When you change a rack assignment any assigned tags Block Transfer Files or Pass Through File control bytes are updated You can also add new racks module groups and or block transfer files as required To change an existing rack or block transfer file assignment 1 Open the RIO Racks editor or RIO Block Transfer Files editor 2 Click on the row in the spreadsheet to be changed or choose Next in the form section until the desired row is highlighted in the spreadsheet 3 To change the assignment select or deselect the appropriate fields in the form section 4 Click Accept in the form section to confirm the new rack or block transfer file assignment A message informs you that all tags block transfer files and Pass Through control bytes that reference the original rack will be changed to the new rack number 5 When you are finished changing rack or block transfer file assignments click Close Defining Communications for a DH or ControlNet Application Defining Communications 5 15 You can delete racks or module groups if they have not been used in a tag or block transfer file definition If you try to delete a rack that has tags or block transfer files assigned to it you will see an error message You must reassign the tag addresses and or block transfer files to another rack before you can delete the rack to which they re assigned To delete an existing rack or block transfer file assignment 1 O
229. ata packet or they will both be updated at the frequent scan rate This approach optimizes system performance providing high speed scanning where required and saving on system resources by using less frequent scanning where acceptable e Set the scan period to be faster than the expected rate of change in the tag s data For example if you scan every five seconds for a change of state that might occur once an hour the entire system is needlessly burdened Conversely if you scan too slowly the system cannot monitor value changes that might occur between scans Name Foreground Background Planning Applications 2 45 Ascan period of zero means tags are scanned as quickly as possible every 55 ms You can set foreground scan periods to Zero but never set background scan periods to zero For foreground periods use zero sparingly because this setting can result in so much traffic that overall system communication slows down Set background scan periods slower than foreground scan periods Even if a screen is not displayed the tags associated with the screen are still scanned at the background scan rate So keep the background rates infrequent enough so as not to slow down overall communication on the highway A background period of 60 minutes is not too slow because the necessary tags will be put on scan at the foreground rate when a new screen is displayed Ensure that the tags for the background scan rat
230. ation 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 52 Planning Applications Range of Values Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 e BCD Binary Coded Decimal If you assign one of the BCD data types the object s PLC control word will be a contiguous bit string of one of these numbers of bits This number of BCD digits Requires this many bits 1 BCD digit 4 2 BCD digits 8 3 BCD digits 12 4 BCD digits 16 5 BCD digits 20 6 BCD digits 24 7 BCD digits 28 8 BCD digits 32 Note If you assign 5 to 8 BCD digits the device must support Long Integer data Each group of four bits represents the equivalent of one decimal digit in the tag value The number of bits required depends on the maximum value required for the object This depends on the application Note The BIN3 BIN4 BIN6 and BINS data types are reserved for use in Modbus applications For more information see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 which is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E UMOD Initial Value The value to be placed in the input address of an object upon power up Assign Initial Values to objects with PLC input addresses Note For any multistate object you draw in the Screens editor you can define an Initial State If you define an Initial State for the object and an Initial Value for the
231. ation File Name PanelView Station Number Node Definitions Node Name PLC Type Station Address Timeout sec The Unsolicited Messages Node is the Panel View terminal By default the terminal s Station Address is the station number configured in the current application The Station Address can be changed in the PanelView terminal s Terminal Network Setup screen Note For more node definitions use additional copies of this worksheet Scan Class Definitions Foreground sec Background sec Name Foreground sec Background sec Note The default foreground and background rates are 1 000 seconds and 86400 000 seconds respectively Device Tags Worksheet Application File Name Screen Muncie Object Tag Address iti Analog T Ref Type pa Name Type nalog Tag Only Initial Range Address Number of characters Ecl No Value Scale Offset Data Type Value of Values string tag only Notes Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value which is dependent on the application start up selection A default application at start up writes nothing to the PLC a non default application writes the initial state value This is called the tag s start value Tag Start Value The start value is the tag init
232. ation screen such that exiting from the Alarm Status screen will reveal the application screen beneath The Screen Number to PLC if enabled will be set to the Alarm Status screen number If the Alarm Status screen is invoked by the PLC Controlled Screen Change or a screen selection object this occurs When the Alarm Status screen is exited the Screen Number to PLC will be set to that of the application screen previously obscured by the Alarm Status screen Another PLC Controlled Screen change request will remove the Alarm Status screen and the current application screen to display the new screen Viewing the Alarm Messages The Alarm Status screen can hold up to 4 000 alarm messages but only 14 messages can fit on the screen at a time The first 50 characters of the message appear on screen The operator can use the Page Up and Page Down buttons to scroll through the messages or use the Home and End buttons to go to the beginning or the end of the messages The current page number out of the total number of pages present in the screen is displayed in the title bar There are three different viewing modes Display All Alarms Mode Display Active Alarms Mode Display Past Alarms Mode Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 44 Configuring Alarms To change the viewing mode Press the Display Mode button in the Alarm Status screen Pressing this button changes the display mode The current display mode is i
233. ator ensure that the correct application is being selected and executed The description is also useful for application reports and does not increase the amount of memory used by the application To describe the application 1 Type a description of your application up to 24 characters in length in the Application File Comment field 2 Click OK Target Firmware Version You can select the version of PanelView firmware that you plan to use when you run your application The application will be compatible with the Target Firmware Version you specify as well as with all later versions When you validate your application PanelBuilder warns you if a feature you have used will make the application incompatible with the Target Firmware Version See Appendix E Version Control for a list of features that make applications incompatible with earlier versions of the PanelView firmware Specifying Target Firmware Version You can select the version of PanelView firmware that you plan to use when you run your application The Target Firmware Version you choose allows your application to run on the listed version as well as later versions of the firmware Version 1 and up Version 1 03 and up allows your application to run on a PanelView terminal connected to the ControlNet communication network Version 2 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 2 Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 5
234. b http www ab com Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 41061 079 01 A Supersedes Publication 2711E 819 J anuary 1998 Copyright 1998 Allen Bradley Company Inc Printed in Canada
235. bits must correspond to the element in the address For example if the address is located at an integer data file element the length must be a multiple of 16 the bit length of an integer Initial Value Enter a 1 or 0 to initialize the entire block to 1 or 0 that is all bits 1 or all bits 0 When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value is written to the programmable controller when the application first executes 5 To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source next Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Specifying a Data Source Defining Tags 6 21 The data source determines where a tag s data comes from Tags defined for a Remote I O application must specify the Remote I O data source Tags defined for a DH or ControlNet application must specify the Device data source Tags defined for ControlNet Scheduled communications must specify the Scheduled data source Note DDE and Memory data sources are only used by RSView For a Remote I O application a tag that is going to write to the programmable controller must address an input module in a rack that has Full access If it is only going to read from the programmable controller it can address an input or output module in a rack that has Full or Listen Only access For a DH or ControlNet application the ladder logic program in the programmable controller determines whether or not it is appropriate for the term
236. blication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 12 Planning Applications Step 3 Plan Communications with the PLC Planning Remote 1 0 Communications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The third step in designing an application is to determine the programmable controller addresses relevant to your application Because the tasks involved in planning PLC addresses differ for Remote I O and DH or ControlNet applications the remainder of this chapter is divided into two sections one for each To continue planning DH or ControlNet application go to Planning DH or ControlNet Communications later in this chapter This section describes how to complete Step 3 for a Remote I O application It includes information about these tasks identifying inputs and outputs e planning rack assignments planning addresses using worksheets to help you plan Remote I O communications Identifying Inputs and Outputs The first step in determining which addresses the application will need is to identify the inputs and outputs the process requires Based on that information you can determine the number and size of the PLC racks required To identify inputs and outputs you need to know how addressing works on the programmable controller This section provides information to help you understand addressing rack assignments module groups shared racks Understanding Addressing When you assign tags to objects windows a
237. blication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 If more messages occur than can fit in the window the terminal shifts the oldest messages to the Alarm History screen The archived messages icon is displayed between the Alarm Status and Cursor Up buttons to indicate that messages have been moved to the Alarm History screen Using Buttons in the Multi line Alarm Message Window The buttons in the Multi line Alarm Message Window control the alarm system as follows This button Does this Acknowl Alarm Acknowledges time stamps and date stamps the highlighted alarm message and removes it from the Alarm Message Window If the alarm message has an audio or relay option enabled the alarm beeper is silenced or the relay is de energized If the alarm message has the print option enabled the alarm is printed again with the acknowledgment time and date stamp the print queue can hold up to 128 triggered and acknowledged alarms Pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM button has no effect on the audio beeper if the PLC Controlled Audio control value is non zero or on the alarm relay if the PLC Controlled Alarm Relay control value is non zero Silence Alarms Silences the audio indicator and de energizes the alarm relay if either was triggered by an alarm message If the Silence Alarms to PLC option is enabled this button sets the Silence Alarms to PLC tag value to 1 for the configured Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time Pressing the SILEN
238. box For more information about terminal setup options see Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Note If you enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel option the application will be compatible with Panel View Firmware Version 3 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Numeric Keypad Enable Button pops up the Numeric Entry Scratchpad in which the operator can enter a number The number is then sent to the Numeric Keypad Input control This object is available only for keypad applications Use the terminal keypad an external keyboard or barcode reader to enter and send the value to the PLC Creating Objects 9 11 Push Buttons Interlocked Push Buttons function as a group When one of the buttons in the group is pressed it cancels the other buttons and makes the selection All the buttons in the group are added individually All buttons use the same Button Control Tag but each button has its own control value The value at this tag identifies which button in the group is the currently selected option For example the operator can press an Interlocked Push Button to choose one motor speed out of several possibilities You can also use a single Interlocked Push Button to set a value in the programmable controller Latched Push Button changes state when pressed and remains in the changed state until unlatched by the programmable controller Maintained Push Button changes state when pressed and remains in the cha
239. button in the Alarm History screen They can also be remotely acknowledged by the PLC More information about configuring the different acknowledge options is provided later in this chapter Individual Alarms When an alarm is acknowledged the terminal does the following depending on how alarms are configured removes the alarm from the Alarm Message Window records the acknowledged time and date in the Alarm History screen silences the alarm beeper de energizes the alarm relay prints the acknowledged alarm with its acknowledged time and date stamp sends the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the PLC Multiple Alarms When the Acknowledge button is pressed in the Alarm History screen and the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC tag is not assigned the terminal does the following depending on how alarms are configured sorts all alarms by time acknowleges immediately all unacknowledged alarms with the same date and time stamp prints the acknowledged alarm with its acknowledged time and date stamp Note After the Acknowledge All button is pressed any new alarms that occur will not be acknowledged When the Acknowledge All button is pressed in the Alarm History screen and the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC tag is assigned the terminal does the following depending on how Alarms are configured sorts all alarms by time acknowledges the oldest unacknowledged alarm first at the time the button is press
240. can be assigned to the same tag For example you can assign control selectors from different screens to the same tag When one selector changes the tag value other selectors will reflect the change Important Momentary Push Buttons and Latched Push Buttons have a fixed initial state This forces the buttons control tags to the initial state value Therefore if other objects share the same control tag with these buttons their initial state values cannot be different from those of these buttons ATTENTION Make sure that the initial state values you define are the same values that the programmable controller program considers as the Off or default state The following table lists all the objects and shows whether they are application specific It also lists some of their properties Object Type Keypad or Read or Retentive Touch Write Screen Arc Static Both Not N A applicable ASCII Display Dynamic Both Read Non retentive ASCII Input large or small Dynamic Both Both Yes Bar Graphs vertical or horizontal Dynamic Read Non retentive Control List Selector with Enter Dynamic Both Both Yes Key Control List Selector without Enter Dynamic Write Yes Key Date Display Dynamic Both Not N A applicable Decrement Value Button Dynamic Both Write Yes Ellipse Static Both Not N A applicable Goto Configure Mode Static Both Not N A applicable Publication 2711E 6 14 Nove
241. canned less frequently This helps optimize traffic flow on the DH or ControlNet network You should already have determined the rates for the scan classes when you completed the Communications Worksheet If not see Chapter 2 Planning Applications for tips on assigning foreground and background scan rates To open the Scan Class Editor dialog box Open the PLC Communications folder Choose Scan Classes or in the toolbar Defining Communications 5 25 The Scan Class Editor dialog box appears D Sras are Edim peleci Soan To configure scan classes 1 Fill in the following information for each scan class Use the information you recorded in the Communications Worksheet Name A Through K You can keep the letter for the name of the scan class or you can type a name up to 20 characters long The name can have upper case and lower case letters numbers dashes and underscores Spaces are not permitted If you type a meaningful name it will be easier to keep track of what the scan classes represent For example you might name one scan class TimeCritical another SlowChanging and so on Foreground and Background Period The period specifies in seconds how often the programmable controller address will be scanned A foreground period applies to the data packets which have tags from the current screen the alarm and information window addresses and from the PLC cont
242. cation 2711E 6 14 November 1998 RIO Planning Applications 2 3 The PanelView 1000e and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The high resolution screen of 800 by 600 runs at the same display size as the 640 by 480 screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1000e and 1400e terminals Programming the Controller for Safety The PanelView terminal will shut down its communications under the following conditions terminal is switched to Configure mode terminal loses AC power e terminal has a major fault e Remote I O DH or ControlNet link fails In these situations the PanelView terminal can no longer control or monitor programmable controller functions In a Remote I O application the host controller sees the PanelView terminal as a faulted I O rack
243. cation Number 2711E 6 17 describes how to install configure maintain and troubleshoot the PanelView terminal The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 describes how to create PanelBuilder applications for the Modbus communications network This manual is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E UMOD Context sensitive online help provides a quick reference for procedures or commands you need explained or problems you may encounter To get help press F1 or choose the Help button if you are in a window or dialog box The PanelBuilder 1400e Readme file is a Microsoft Windows Notepad file that is copied to your hard disk when you install PanelBuilder The Readme file informs you of any software changes made after the manuals were printed Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 P 6 Preface What s in the User Manual Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The User Manual builds on the information presented in Getting Started The first part of the User Manual provides detailed information about planning your application as well as information about how to use PanelBuilder The remainder of the manual provides step by step instructions for building configuring and transferring applications Preface An overview of this manual and lists of related publications documentation conventions and prerequisites Cha
244. ce C DDE C Memory Remote 1 0 C Scheduled Address ragione Type Date Source 1 New Log Data Alarm mul Search For amp EXFEZ For Help press F1 Defining Tags 6 19 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RS View databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Length Type a number between 1 and 82 to specify the length of the string tag in bytes The length must be a multiple of the size of the programmable controller data element you are addressing Important For device tags odd lengths are permitted in the string section only For Remote I O and Scheduled tags string lengths must be a multiple of 2 Initial Value Enter an initial value for the tag When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value is written to the programmable controller when the application first executes Note There can be no more than 720 string tags in an application 5 To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source later in this chapter Configuring a Block Tag Block tags can be defined in a Remote I O application or in a DH or ControlNet application If you use block tags in a DH or ControlNet application the application will be compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later
245. changes Use a Screen Template to Ensure Consistency To help increase operator efficiency keep a consistent appearance between all the screens in an application Present the same pieces of information in the same place on each screen for example titles Goto Screen buttons local messages and ASCII display objects time and date objects A screen template is a useful tool for ensuring consistency between screens To create a screen template 1 Use a screen design worksheet to hand draw a screen template that contains the elements common to all or most screens Photocopy the 1000e 1200e or 1400e screen worksheet in Appendix A for this purpose Choose the default resolution of 640 by 480 or choose the high resolution of 800 by 600 for the 1400e PanelView terminal only Save the original for later use Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 8 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 Make a photocopy of the hand drawn template for each application screen 3 Design each application screen on a copy of the screen template You can also design the screen template in PanelBuilder copy it each time you need to create a new screen and use it as your starting point for each new screen For more information see Chapter 8 Creating Screens Using Worksheets to Design Screens PanelBuilder and the Windows environment offer considerable flexibility for creating and changing application scre
246. ck sizes you need full access to find out what rack numbers are available This depends on the type of PLC you are using approximately how many racks you need for your application You must also decide which racks require monitoring only Define these with Listen Only access Use the following table as a guide to determine if you need to use block transfer files The table shows per rack the number of discrete I O image table words and bits available for PLC communication Note You can assign up to 64 rack numbers Rack Size 16 bit Input 16 bit Output Total Input Total Output Words Words Bits Bits 1 4 2 2 32 32 1 2 4 4 64 64 3 4 6 6 96 96 FULL 8 8 128 128 Each block transfer file provides up to 64 words 1 024 bits of space The file can be either read or write You can define up to 64 block transfer files Note Each block transfer file occupies one byte of discrete output which reduces the amount of available discrete I O Planning Applications 2 19 Reducing PLC Addressing Requirements You can reduce PLC address requirements by multiplexing Multiplexing means using one screen object for more than one purpose depending on the state of a variable or using one address for multiple objects on different screens Normally you will not need to multiplex objects because the PanelView terminal provides plenty of separate I O addresses plus the capability for block transfers and multiple racks But
247. condition and that the printer is free Date amp Time to PLC Use these options if you want the programmable controller to store the current time and date from the terminal s clock You can use 7 separate controls which are listed in the table below Any of them can be assigned or left unassigned When the value of any one of the assigned controls changes the values of all the assigned controls are updated Configuring PLC I O Control Options 13 7 Note For Remote I O applications all assigned tags are sent to the PLC in the same programmable controller scan However for DH and ControlNet applications it is not possible to guarantee synchronicity The controls are updated in the order in which they appear in the following table Control Range of Data Sent to the PLC Year 2 digit form 0 99 Day of the Week 1 7 1 Sunday Month 1 12 Day of the Month 1 31 Hour 0 23 24 hour format Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 About the Information Message Window Chapter 1 Gi Working with the Information Message Window This chapter explains what the Information Message Window is and how it works at runtime how to configure the Information Message Window in PanelBuilder 1400e The programmable controller triggers the Information Message Window to display messages when certain events or processes occur The messages that appear in the Information Message
248. control to enable the option When enabled this option allows the PLC to reset the alarm count and total time in alarm to zero e Assign the QTY TIME Reset to PLC control This tag indicates to the PLC when an Alarm Status QTY TIME Reset has occurred This can be done either with the QTY Time Reset Button or through the PLC To configure the Alarm Status screen 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box choose the Status tab Configure Alarms xd m Sa Alarm Status Screen Screen Number 254 QTY Time Reset Button Enabled Screen Color Foreground white gt Background Red Control PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset unassigned QTY TIME Reset to PLC Tag_D103_0_0_Bit Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign 2 Fill in the following Alarm Status screen information Screen Number Choose the screen number from the drop down list You can assign any unused screen number from 1 to 255 Important If you leave the Screen Number field blank the Alarm Status screen cannot be called up by screen select objects or by a PLC Controlled screen change Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 51 QTY Time Reset Button Choose Enabled or Disabled from the drop down list When you enable the QTY Time Reset Button option the QTY Time Reset Button will appear on the Alarm Status screen By pressing this button the operator can reset the alarm count and total time in alar
249. create a new screen Rename Delete Del The Create a New Screen dialog box appears The next available screen number appears in the Number field Number n Name MAN Cancel Help iif 2 To change the screen number type the number you want to assign in the Number field The number must be between 1 and 255 and must be unique The number 255 is the default number for the Alarm History screen If you assign this number to another screen an error message appears You must either assign a new number to the Alarm History screen or assign a different number to the application screen 3 In the Name field type the name for your screen up to 15 characters 4 Click OK If this is the first screen you created for this application a message appears informing you that the Application Startup screen has been reassigned to this screen You can change this if you wish For information see Assigning the Application Startup Screen later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Opening Screens f Screens EB 1MAIN 2PUMPS 3 VALVES EH 4ROTATOR Creating Screens 8 3 The new screen appears It shows the name and number you assigned Screens SAMPLE 1 MAIN Iof x Note An asterisk in the screen s title bar indicates that changes made to the screen have not yet been saved You can open existing screens through the Application Window To open a screen
250. creen Settings Screen Security Screen Validate F9 Screen Tag Usage Viewer F5 Exit Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 You can change the background color of the screen The default background color is black To change a screen s background color 1 Open the Screens folder and open the desired screen 2 Choose Screen Settings from the Screen menu The Screen Background Color dialog box appears 3 Choose the color you want for your screen background from the Background Color drop down list Screen Background Color x Background Color 4 Click OK The screen s background color changes to the selected color All new screens you create will use the selected color automatically You may want to prevent some operators from accessing certain application screens You can control operators access by assigning a security classification to these screens Up to sixteen operators can be given access to each screen Important You cannot assign security to the Alarm History or Alarm Status screens since these must be available to every operator Although you can assign security to the Application Startup screen and to screens requested by the programmable controller any operator will be able to view these screens To assign security access to a screen 1 Open the screen to which you want to assign security 2 Choose Screen Security from the Screen menu Creating Screens Th
251. cts 9 44 P PanelBuilder 1200 applications converting PanelBuilder 1400e about 1 1 1 2 components 1 1 default file format 3 9 dialog boxes 1 1 documentation P 5 downloading applications 1 5 editors 1 1 4 1 equipment requirements P 12 features P 1 hardware requirements P 12 1 4 optimizing performance 2 4 optional equipment 1 7 planning applications 2 2 README TXT file P 5 related publications P 8 software registration P 4 software requirements P 12 1 3 support services P 12 troubleshooting D 1 uploading applications 1 5 validation errors D 3 version compatibility 1 3 wildcards 6 4 6 7 PanelBuilder 900 importing a database 6 37 PanelBuilder for DOS applications converting 3 5 Panels 9 6 9 12 9 22 9 33 PanelView 1200 Enhancement Kit 3 11 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 12 Publication 2711 6 14 November 1998 PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility about 15 1 PanelView terminal enhancing 1 3 information message window 14 2 off line to PLC 11 49 terminal address about 5 19 defining 5 20 types required 1 3 1 4 version control at E 5 Partial racks See Racks partial Pasting objects 9 36 PB1400E INI file 3 13 PCMCIA memory card 1 8 file format 3 9 Performance optimizing 2 4 6 4 PID mnemonics C 14 Planning addresses 2 19 applications 2 1 2 2 ControlNet 2 5 DH 2 5 Remote 0 2 5 safety considerati
252. d Alarm Triqgers Assign Tag Assign Expo Unassign Alarm Trigger Bit or Word Before deciding whether to use Bit or Word triggers careful planning is essential Your choice depends on your application and how you plan to implement alarms Answer the following questions 1 How many alarms need to be generated 2 Do I need to monitor multiple alarms simultaneously or am I only concerned about the first alarm that occurs and want to ignore all subsequent alarms because they probably occur as a result of the domino effect of the first alarm 3 Are alarms coming from multiple PLCs DH or ControlNet 4 Do I need to perform arithmetic or logical operations to determine which alarm to display for example threshold alarming 5 Do Ihave any addressing space constraints In general if monitoring of simultaneous alarms is required it is best to use Bit triggered alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 N7 0 Starting Trigger L Configuring Alarms 11 9 If monitoring of simultaneous alarms is not required Word triggered alarms will generally save address space and therefore update time because one word can generate up to 2000 alarms one at a time Word trigger is also a good choice for monitoring threshold conditions because expressions can be assigned to Word triggered alarms This can offload logic required in the PLC because Panel View does the calculations Alarms can be generated
253. d Both methods for importing messages are described in this section Note If you are importing messages into an existing message file they are inserted above the currently selected row in the Messages spreadsheet Because each application can contain a maximum of 4 000 alarm messages 10 000 local messages and 10 000 information messages you will see the error message You have reached the maximum number of messages if the messages you are importing increase the total number of messages to more than the maximum allowed Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 10 10 Creating Messages Importing Messages Using the Clipboard You can import messages by copying fields rows or columns of text from a text editor The text entries are stored on the clipboard You can then paste them into the message editor To copy and paste a single column each column field must be on a separate line To copy and paste one or more rows each row must begin on a separate line Each field in a row must be separated from the previous one by a tab The following illustration shows an example of how the messages could appear ssh Dzcumenb Feeder Pager HisTrerd Exit Jan Finisher Jan Pager Bia B Paper low Paper Bin E Paper low Copier Pager Jm Copier Tomer Loe Skapler is auk oF staples Skapler janmed gt zzzzrrrii tap a oe oe
254. d colors for the panel window type define whether to display the alarm trigger value and configure the appearance of the trigger value assign controls to determine how the window is cleared Important The operator cannot access the Alarm History or Alarm Status screens through the Single line Alarm Message Window or the Alarm Message Panel If you choose either of these window types the operator can call up the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens if you design the application with one of these features ensure all screens provide a Goto Screen button assign the PLC Controlled Screen Number tag in the PLC I O Control Options dialog box then program the PLC to display these screens You configure the Alarm Message Window in the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 38 Configuring Alarms To configure the Alarm Message Window 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box choose the Message Window tab Configure Alarms x Global Controls History Message Window State Disabled Location Bottom of Screen A Type Multi line c Number of Lines 3 OK Cancel Window Look Show Alarm Panel Trigger Value Font PanelView small Position After Message Z Number of Digits 4 Underline Blink Underline Blink Foreground Color Light Grey Foreground Color Light Grey Background Color Red Background Color Red Control
255. d offset work together to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a PLC For example to convert the raw data into engineering units Offset Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 0 being the default The scale and offset work together to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a PLC Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 24 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 When the PanelView terminal reads a value from the PLC it multiplies this value by the scale value and then adds the offset before it writes the value to the terminal s value table Similarly when the terminal sends data from the terminal to the PLC it first subtracts the offset and then divides by the scale value to convert the value back to raw data before it is written to the PLC With Scale 1 and Offset 0 the default values PLC data is not changed Note For PLC output from Analog and Digital tags you can create expressions to manipulate or convert the data as needed Data Type Analog Tag Only The type of data that the PLC address will accept Note Not all PLCs accept all data types For the list of valid data types for the PLC you are using refer to your PLC s user documentation Specify one of the following Default The default data type is an unsigned integer Unsigned Integer An unsigned integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in binary format The range of raw data values is f
256. d validation 6 22 Index 1 13 Remote alarm parameters setting 12 7 Remote 0 and PanelView 1 5 Block Transfer Files editor 5 2 5 11 choosing as data source 6 3 6 24 Racks editor 5 2 5 8 reducing scan time 2 15 Scanner module user manuals P 8 setting up terminal communications 5 3 Remote 1 0 Tags Worksheet 1 recording tag information 2 22 using 2 21 Remote keyswitch 1 7 Remote station address 2 41 Removing filters in Tag Usage Viewer 6 29 graphic images 9 28 9 31 Renaming applications 3 10 screens 8 6 tags 6 31 Repairing shared database 6 36 Reports creating 3 12 options 3 13 saving as ASCII file 3 15 screen 3 14 setting up printer 3 15 solving printing problems 3 15 Required equipment 1 3 Reserved keywords F 1 Reset QTY TIME button 11 48 Resetting the alarm status screen 11 48 Resolution 2 7 2 8 for Version Control E 5 high resolution screen 2 10 2 11 worksheet A 2 low resolution screen 2 8 2 12 worksheet A 1 A 2 Retain cursor on cancel configuring 12 10 Retentive objects 9 3 addressing 9 5 Safety considerations 9 4 Return to previous screen button 9 6 9 12 9 21 creating 9 22 Return values in expressions 7 18 RIO See Remote 1 0 RM modules 2 42 RS 232 port 1 7 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 14 Publication 2711 6 14 November 1998 RSView sharing tag databases 6 34 Running applications 1 3 S
257. decimal Only local addresses are supported For ControlNet applications using a Logix55xx device use the values in Defining Nodes in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Timeout Type the number of seconds 0 100 to 6553 500 you want the terminal to wait before reporting a communication error The default timeout period is three seconds Enabled Normally nodes are enabled allowing data collection However while you are debugging your application or troubleshooting your network you can disable a node to prevent communication faults or invalid data Once the application file is downloaded and running any values normally sent to a disabled node will be recorded in the terminal but the actual PLC value will remain unchanged To disable nodes clear the Enabled check box Important Make sure the nodes are enabled before you run an application in an online environment 2 When you have finished configuring nodes choose Close Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 24 Defining Communications Unsolicited Messages DH and ControlNet Configuring Scan Classes amp PLC Communications u Communication Setup exe Nodes Scan Classes LA RIO Racks ILE RIO Block Transfer Files E Scheduled Files Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 For DH and ControlNet applications the Panel View terminal supports Unsolicited Messages using the PLC 2 format unprotected read and write requests Unsolicited messages al
258. der 6 9 tags used a screen 8 11 W Wallpaper 9 42 Web Site Allen Bradley P 12 Wedge 9 7 9 13 9 21 9 34 Wildcards 6 4 6 7 Word triggered alarms 11 8 about 11 9 Worksheets about A 1 completing for a Remote 1 0 application 2 20 2 37 recording addresses 2 28 2 53 sample Worksheets A 1 1000e Terminals 2 10 A 2 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 18 Publication 2711 6 14 November 1998 1200e Terminals 2 8 1 1400e Terminals 2 10 high resolution A 2 low resolution A 2 Block Transfer File 2 35 A 1 Block Transfer File I O Usage 2 30 A 1 ControlNet Communications 2 38 A 1 ControlNet Scheduled Tags A 1 Device Tags 2 46 A 1 DH Communications 2 38 A 1 Discrete I O Usage 2 29 A 1 Rack Assignments 2 32 A 1 Remote 1 0 Tags 2 21 A 1 Scheduled File Communications A 1 types 2 5 using to design screens 2 8 2 10 using to help plan applications 2 5 using to plan addresses 2 19 Write expressions 7 23 assigning 7 24 Write objects 9 2 X XOR in expressions 7 16 Z Zooming 9 18 ON Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation helps its customers receive a superior return on their investment by bringing together leading brands in industrial automation creating a broad spectrum of easy to integrate products These are supported by local technical resources available worldwide a global network of system solutions providers and the
259. dge Control tag is set to 1 for as long as the Acknowledged button is being pressed for operator acknowledge or for the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time for remote acknowledge whichever is longer After the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time expires the tag will be reset to O Timing Diagram Ack Control Hold Time Ack Control Delay n T2 SetAcknowledge Trigger SetAcknowledge Reset Acknowledge Value to PLC Control Tag Control Tag 24761 Note The Alarm Control Delay time and Ack Control Hold Time are configured in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box For more information about these parameters see Timing Parameters in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options The following table shows the valid entries and default settings for the remote alarm timing parameters For this timing parameter Valid choices are these The default setting is this Operation Hold Time 50 msec 250 msec 3 seconds 500 msec 750 msec 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds Acknowledge Control Hold 50 msec 250 msec 250 msec Time 500 msec 750 msec 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds Alarm Control Delay 200 msec 400 msec 200 msec 600 msec 800 msec 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 4 seconds 5 seconds Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 20 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 If the Acknowledge Control tag is not assigned disabled
260. digital tag type The tag s PLC address will be read and written to by the terminal For more information on downloading see Chapter 15 Transferring Applications To define network file transfer controls 1 In the Network File Transfer tab select one of the controls and click Assign Tag to choose a tag You can assign a digital or analog tag although a digital tag is recommended The Tag Browser dialog box appears Tip You can also double click the selected address to bring up the Tag Browser 2 Select a tag from the list or choose New Tag to create a new tag For more detailed information about the Tag Editor dialog box refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags 3 Repeat for the other two controls A node is a programmable logic controller connected to the DH or ControlNet network When you configure nodes you specify a name type and station address for each programmable controller with which the application will communicate A device at a DH or ControlNet station is referred to throughout a PanelView application by its node name You should already have determined the station address for each node when you completed the appropriate network Communications Worksheet If not see Chapter 2 Planning Applications for details on determining station addresses Note A node definition can be changed at any time during application development At application or screen validation or download the nodes used by the tags in the a
261. ding a backslash Opening a Folder When you open a folder its contents are displayed in the spreadsheet To open a folder either double click the folder or select the folder and press Enter To open multiple folders 1 Use one of these methods to select the folders click a folder and drag the mouse up or down click a folder and Shift click other folders immediately above or below the first selected folder click a folder and Ctrl click other folders anywhere in the hierarchy 2 Press Enter The tags in the selected folders are displayed in the spreadsheet Adding Tags to a Folder Once you have created a folder you can add tags to it To add tags to a folder 1 Select a folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name is displayed in the Name field of the form 2 After the backslash V type the new tag name Note To add a tag to another folder without closing the current folder type the name of the tag with the full folder path Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 10 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Duplicating a Folder When you duplicate a folder the folder and any folders or tags within it are also duplicated Make sure that you do not exceed the 40 character limit for folder path and tag name when you duplicate nested folders To duplicate a folder and its tags 1 Select the folder in the hierarchy 2 Choose Duplicate Folder from the Edit menu Important
262. display 9 6 9 10 9 21 numeric entry keypad 9 6 9 10 9 13 numeric input cursor point 9 6 9 10 9 22 numeric keypad enable button 9 6 9 10 9 22 overlapping 9 44 panels 9 6 9 12 9 22 9 33 pasting 9 36 planning addresses 2 5 read 9 2 rectangles 9 6 9 13 redo 9 19 retentive 9 3 9 5 addressing 9 5 Safety considerations 9 4 return to previous screen button 9 6 9 12 9 21 9 22 scales 9 6 9 11 screen keypad enable button 9 6 9 12 screen list selector 9 6 9 1 screen print button 9 6 9 1 screen select keypad 9 6 9 scrolling list 9 7 9 12 Selecting 9 15 set bit cursor point 9 7 9 8 9 21 sizing 9 38 with Position dialog box change position 9 40 change size 9 40 spacing 9 47 states configuring 9 57 9 58 9 59 viewing 9 58 static 9 2 symbols 9 7 9 13 text 9 7 9 13 9 21 9 24 time display 9 7 9 13 9 21 toolbox 9 20 touch screen 9 2 trend 9 7 9 21 types 9 2 undo 9 19 ungrouping 9 42 wedge 9 7 9 13 9 21 9 34 working with 9 1 write 9 2 zooming 9 18 Offlink address 2 41 5 6 5 19 2 9 21 1 9 21 12 Index I 11 Offset 2 23 2 50 Online Help See Help Online Manuals 3 16 Opening applications 3 4 screens 8 3 multiple 8 3 Operation hold time 12 7 Operations in expressions 7 4 arithmetic 7 9 comparison 7 10 construct 7 11 logical 7 16 Optional write expression 7 2 OR in expressions 7 16 Organizing tags 6 4 Overlapping obje
263. e Expression Value Returned 3 3 552 10 var Var var 3 3 var 23 1 True if varis equal to 3 0 False otherwise IF var 23 THEN 5 if varis equal to 3 0 False otherwise END IF When you save the application as a pvd file and when PanelBuilder creates a pvd file to download the application to the PanelView terminal expressions are compiled into executable code The executable code contains only the elements needed for evaluating the expression These changes are made to the expression comments are removed extra spaces tabs and blank lines are removed keywords and tag names are changed to upper case line continuation characters are removed and the connected lines are combined into a single line local variables are renamed as VAROOO1 VAROOO2 and so on Where a conflict arises between a variable name and a tag name the variable is assigned the next higher number The maximum size for the compiled expression is 1 Kb Note An expression cannot be compiled if it contains syntax errors or invalid tag references The pvd file cannot be created until all errors are corrected For more information see Validating Expressions later in this chapter When you open a pvd file PanelBuilder automatically regenerates the source text of expressions in the application The expressions are regenerated so that they can be successfully compiled again The executable code is identical to the
264. e Tag tag name is not a device tag In the tag database the device source is Check the tag definition incorrect for the network type Bad value in State List A state value is undefined Ensure that all the state values for the object are assigned and unique Tag tag name start value of value conflicts with another object s start value The object s initial state value for write tag Check the initial state for both objects to conflicts with another object that uses the ensure they are both the same same write tag but with a different initial state value Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 D 4 Troubleshooting Validation Error Message Cause What to Do Bitmap name at position on screen This image does not fit in the object for which it is being used as a label All labels must fit within their containing object Move or resize the object or the bitmap Bitmap name at position on screen The image for this object is not present The image has been removed from the application or was never imported Check that the specified bitmap has been imported correctly Object name at position on screen Part of the object is off screen An object or some element is partly off screen Reposition the object so it is completely on screen Symbol name at position on screen The image for this symbol must be monochrome A color bitmap is b
265. e PLC receives the message State Transition Diagram for Alarm Message to PLC No Control or Handshaking Offline Mode Switch or Power Up Enter Run Mode Reset Control Tag Wait for Alarm with Msg to PLC Flag Mode Switch or Power Off Alarm with Msg to PLC Write Complete Offline Mode Switch or Power Off Write Message to PLC Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Discard if queue full Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Configuring Alarms 11 29 The terminal can queue up to 128 Message to PLC requests in first in first out order Once the queue is full write requests will be discarded and a minor fault will appear Note Delay intervals and hold times are configured in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box For more information about these parameters see Timing Parameters in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Note If you use the Message to PLC control your application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Message Control The Message Control is used to control the flow of messages to the PLC This control uses tags only Use a digital or analog tag When an alarm is triggered the PanelView terminal will initiate handshaking as described in the previous section Message to PLC The type of handshaking performed depends on whether the Message to PLC Message Control or Message Handshake co
266. e that any unused bits in the address are 0 to prevent invalid values from being read Note that writing to a tag will update all bits in the address not just those implied by the tag s data type You can use the following Default If you select Default the data type is dictated by the address For example if the address is N7 0 an integer file the data type would be integer Unsigned Integer An unsigned integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in binary format The range of raw data values is from 0 to 65535 Integer A signed integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 32 768 to 432 767 Long Integer A long integer occupies two 16 bit words stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Floating Point Single precision 32 bit floating point The range of data values is 3 402823E 38 to 1 175494E 37 0 and 1 175494E 37 to 3 402823E 38 Byte The byte data type occupies 8 bits of unsigned data The range of raw data values is from 0 to 255 Binary You can use this data type for Remote I O applications only e Bit Position This data type is a contiguous bit string The position of the least significant bit in the bit string determines the value of the tag For value ranges from 0 to 16 use a 16 bit address For value ranges from 0 to 32 use a 32 bit address Public
267. e use the format Fff ww bb ww bb Examples B8 19 is file 8 word 19 bit 0 Whether this is read or write depends on the definition of your block transfer instruction Whether this is Listen Only or Full access depends on the definition for the rack containing the control byte B1 31 2 14 is a block address with a length specified 31 2 31 15 is a block address with a range specified Addressing Syntax C 19 Discrete SLC Address F S ww bb F File type I Input O Output S optional Slot number 0 7 decimal Not used by the Panel View terminal ww Start word 0 31 decimal bb optional Start bit O 15 decimal If none is specified 0 is assumed Note The address can also be specified as a length or a range For length use the format F S ww bb ll where ll is the bit length For range use the format F S ww bb ww bb Examples 07 is an input address pointing to word 7 O 2 01 01 is an output address pointing to bit 1 of word 1 on slot 2 10 0 13 is an input address with a length specified O 28 0 28 15 is an output address with a range specified Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 20 Addressing Syntax ControlNet Scheduled Mode Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The following section provides addressing syntax for Scheduled read and write tags Fff www bb F File Type S Scheduled ff File Number 1 2 decimal The file number must be fol
268. e Bring to Front from the Arrange menu choose 3 from the toolbar Tip To select an object that is at the back of a stack place your pointer on the objects and click or press Spacebar as many times as necessary to move through the objects in the stack Using Spacebar avoids accidentally double clicking and opening a configuration dialog box To send an object to the back of the object stack 1 Choose the object 2 Do one of the following choose Send to Back from the Arrange menu choose Fal from the toolbar Creating Objects 9 45 Aligning Objects Use the commands in the Arrange menu to align the objects in several ways gt Note Input objects for PanelBuilder 1200e touch screen applications automatically snap to the touch cell grid 64 by 40 pixel Arrange Group Ctl G k Unaroup Ctl H grid Send to Back Bring to Front 1 Choose the objects you want to align mE Center 2 Choose a command from the Arrange menu to align the objects in Align Bight relation to each other Align Top Align Middle This command Aligns selected objects to this object Aion loton Align Left Left most selected object Center Pointe Align Center Horizontal center of all selected objects ign to Grid RA Align Right Right most selected object Space Horizontal Align Top Top most selected object Fip Vertical Align Middle Vertical center of all selected objects Flip Horizontal A
269. e Change Network Type from the Tools menu 2 In the Target Network field choose ControlNet 3 Click OK The following message appears Conliqure Commrminiculimm Setup LZ Change to new ControtNet device type Ce 4 Choose Yes to change your DH application to ControlNet Choose No if you do not wish to continue with the conversion All DH tags become Unscheduled tags and no conversion is required Manually change Unscheduled tags to Scheduled tags if required Note If a DH node is defined as station 0 it will be invalid for a ControINet application The following message appears prompting you to convert the station number There le ird leas one node which is curently incimpatihke willy lie mew type Continues and corsari radan tes thet tries Pair 5 Choose Yes or No If you choose Yes any node with an invalid station number for the ControlNet network will be changed to have a station number of 2 If you choose No the network conversion will be cancelled Defining Communications 5 35 gt Note The Unsolicited_Msgs node will not be removed when the application is converted to ControlNet For more informtion about configuring an application for E PLC Communications ControlNet networks see Defining Communications for a DH Communication Setup dum Nodes or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter d I Scan
270. e Digital ERR Error Analog EWD Error Within Deadband Digital INI PID Initialized Digital KD Derivative Time Analog KI Integral Gain Analog KP Proportional Gain Analog AXI Input Range Maximum Analog AXO Output Limit High Analog AXS Setpoint Maximum Analog NI Input Range Minimum Analog NO Output Limit Low Analog NS Setpoint Minimum Analog 0 Mode Digital OLH Output Limit High Digital OLL Output Limit Low Digital OUT Output Analog PE PID Equation Digital PV Process Variable Analog PVDB PV Alarm Deadband Analog PVH PV Alarm High Analog PVHA PV High Alarm Digital PVL PV Alarm Low Analog PVLA PV Low Alarm Digital PVT PV Tracking Digital 50 Set Output 9 Analog SP Setpoint Analog Addressing Syntax C 15 Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range SPOR SP Out of Range Digital SWM Software A M Mode Digital TIE Tieback Analog UPD Update Time Analog Message Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range AD Asynchronous Done Digital AE Asynchronous Error Digital CO Continuous Digital DATA Reserved Internal Use Analog 0 51 DLEN Done Length Analog DN Synchronization Done Digital EN Enable Digital ER Synchronization Error Digital ERR Error Code Analog EW Enable Waiting Digital NR No Response Digital RLEN Request Length Analog ST Start Transmission Digital TO Time Out Digital Block Transfer Mnemonics Mnemonic Instr
271. e RIO Block Transfer Files editor gt Open the PLC Communications folder Choose RIO Block Transfer Files or in the toolbar The Block Editor dialog box appears Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 12 Defining Communications Bi Edi Yew PussThunanghFda Heip Eiis Un Ei mee es GEE ACME erate Data Entry Form Commi Byin Rack wowa E Low T High File Numbes Rack Number Word Byte Usage Fila Size Access 5 2 Spreadsheet Viewer 3 m f Pee Through Pie Pin Humhur Word fin Surt rows by selected columns The Block editor has two parts the data entry form on top where you define the block transfer file and the spreadsheet viewer on the bottom where you can see all the block transfer files and select one for editing See Chapter 4 Working with Editors for details on working in the form and spreadsheet sections of this editor Creating a Block Transfer File You can have up to 64 input or output block transfer files numbered B1 to B64 In the Block editor you can also define the Remote I O Pass Through control byte for application file transfer Fill in the information from the worksheet in the steps that follow To define a block transfer file 1 In the File area of the editor select the file number and size for the block transfer file e File Number Specify the block transfer file number a number between and B64 File Size This refers
272. e Secure Screen dialog box appears Authorize Operator 2 Authorize Operator 3 Authorize Operator 4 Authorize Operator 5 Authorize Operator 6 Authorize Operator 7 Authorize Operator 8 Authorize Operator 9 Authorize Operator 10 Authorize Operator 11 Authorize Operator 12 Authorize Operator 13 Authorize Operator 14 Authorize Operator 15 Authorize Operator 16 8 9 Secure Screen x Cancel dii Help 3 Foreach operator you want to assign access to either click the check box or use Tab or the arrow keys to move through the selections and press Spacebar to make the selection 4 When you have finished assigning security click OK To view this screen when the application is running the operator must enter a 5 digit access code on a Security Entry window Note If you do not specify operator authorization the terminal will not request an access code and anyone can access this screen If you authorize one or more operators the terminal will request an access code before it displays the screen Access codes are assigned on the terminal A plant floor supervisor with a mode select key can view and change access codes without changing the application For information on assigning and changing access codes on the terminal see Chapter 5 Configuring PanelView Operator Terminals in the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Publication 2711E 6 14
273. e Version 3 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 3 Important For PanelView terminals using Firmware Version 4 select Target Firmware Version 3 and up Version 5 and up allows you to use the new features that come with PanelBuilder Version 5 When you validate your application PanelBuilder warns you if a feature you have used will make the application incompatible with the Target Firmware Version See Appendix E Version Control for a list of features that make applications incompatible with earlier versions of the PanelView firmware To specify the Target Firmware Version o Syst 1 Open the System folder Choose Terminal Setup or from the ystem Hr Terminal Setu toolbar Tag Database Alarms The Configure Terminal Setup dialog box appears PLC 1 0 Control I Information Message Window Configure umm Setup Object Setup Application Startup Screen Screen 255 Alarm History Application Type 1000e 640x480 Keypad Application File Comment Target Firmware Version Version 05 00 and up 01 00 and up 01 03 and up 02 00 and up 03 00 and up 05 00 and up 2 In the Target Firmware Version field choose a version from the list 3 Click OK Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 12 6 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Timing Parameters In the Timing Parameters tab of the
274. e devices currently available to support remote communication Important For versions 1 0 and 1 25 of ControlNet the PanelView Terminal Network Address should not be set to 1 e Timeout The number of seconds the PanelView terminal should wait before reporting a communication error Three seconds is usually enough and is the default when a new node is created Enabled For DH and ControlNet applications if a node is enabled the terminal will communicate with the device at the node If the node is not enabled the terminal will not communicate with the device Instead the PanelView terminal stores values to be written to the device This allows system designers to test their applications without setting up communications and to avoid communication errors at the terminal during testing ControlNet Addressing Local Station Addressing For a node connected to the same ControlNet network as the Panel View terminal valid station numbers are between and 99 decimal Logix55xx Addressing For a Logix55xx node connected to a PanelView terminal on a ControlNet network valid station numbers are Station Address Valid Entries 1 6 85 I address of CNB module for CNet applications 1 99 decimal b backplane address 1 SS slot number of Logix55xx P rocessor depends on chassis size Planning Applications 2 41 DH Addressing Local Station Addressing For a node connected to the same DH network as the PanelView t
275. e displayed beep or energize the relay until it is acknowledged This requires the operator to be aware of the alarm and take action before the alarm is removed An alarm can be acknowledged by either the operator or the PLC The operator can acknowledge alarms from either the Multi line Alarm Window or from the Alarm History screen For more information see Using the Alarm Message Window in the Terminal later in this chapter The Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option allows the PanelView terminal to notify the PLC when an alarm acknowledge occurs sets the Acknowledge Control bit and to send the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the PLC in the address defined for Acknowledge to PLC The Bit or Word selection here refers to the type of addressing used to send the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the PLC See the example above in the Alarm Trigger Bit or Word section for the difference between Bit and Word Your selection here is independent of your selection for the Alarm Trigger type This selection is only required if you want to use the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option If not it can be ignored and you can use the default selection In general Bit Acknowledge to PLC will give you more flexibility in using the acknowledged trigger value in the PLC For example you can use the individual bits in the ladder logic to clear the alarm condition For a sample of the PLC logic required to do this see
276. e help for this dialog box Configure Terminal Setup Timing Parameters Object Setup a Application Startup Screen 1 INITIAL SCREEN Click the arrow to opena drop down list Application Type of options 1200e 640x480 Keypad Press Alt and the Application File Comment underlined letter to select the option Press Alt and the down arrow J to open the drop down list Keypad Color Tutorial Target Firmware Version Version 05 00 and up 4 Configure Communication Setup Terminal Communications Click the pointer to select the desired tab PanelView Location Routing Address 0 Click in the field and begin typing unassiqned unassigned unassigned id Transfer Inhibit Transfer Request Transfer Status To assign an address click an option to select it and then click Assign Tag Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Preface P 11 The following shortcut keys allow you to complete dialog boxes faster This key or key Does this combination Tab Moves the cursor to the next field option or command button Shift Tab Moves the cursor to the previous field option or command button Alt underlined letter Selects an option Displays a drop down list Spacebar Turns check boxes on or off Key Conventions This key combination Means 1
277. e longer than expected to update This causes problems only when you have a busy network combined with a large number of writes being generated in quick succession by the PanelView terminal A large number of writes can be generated under the following conditions when assigning any or all of the Time and Date to PLC tags as these tags write once every second when entering a screen some objects write to their tag address Problems can occur if there is a large number of write objects on one screen Some objects that can cause problems are Scrolling Lists with large numbers of visible states assigned to them and Numeric Input Cursor Points with many points defined when the application is first powered up or is run for the first time if default operation is not used in the Application Startup menu of the PanelView configuration screen In this case you will write either the object s initial state value or if it does not have an initial state 1t will write its initial value as defined in the tag Writes to the PLC happen immediately and are not dependent on scan class e Stagger the background and foreground rates The data packet can then scan at slightly different times instead of all at once Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 48 Planning Applications Device Tags Worksheet Application File Name Scre
278. e operator acknowledges the alarm the time and date of the acknowledgment are displayed directly to the right of the time and date of the alarm occurrence Note The alarm remains active until the alarm condition no longer exists Acknowledging the alarm does not deactivate it Configuring Alarms 11 55 Configuring the Alarm To configure the Alarm History screen History Screen 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box choose the History tab Configure Alarms 2 Fill in the following information Screen Number Choose a screen number ranging from 1 to 255 from the drop down list The default is 255 You can assign any unused screen number to the Alarm History screen Important If you leave the Screen Number field blank the Alarm History screen cannot be called up by screen select objects or by a PLC Controlled Screen Change Foreground Choose the foreground color of the Alarm History screen Background Choose the background color of the Alarm History screen 3 Click OK to save your Alarm History screen configuration Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 About Terminal Setup Options E gt System 5 Terminal Setup 2 Tag Database Alarms e PLC 1 0 Control e Information Message Window Chapter 1 2 Configuring Terminal Setup Options This chapter explains how to match the application to your terminal Instructions include how to specify the Application Startup screen how to change the
279. e size and type of the swap file We recommend using Permanent if 32 bit access is supported by your hardware Windows 95 Choose the Performance tab from the System folder in the Control Panel and set the minimum size ofthe virtual memory swap file to 5 MB and the maximum size to 16 MB Windows NT Choose the Performance tab from the System folder in the Control Panel Click Change and setthe Virtual Memory swap file to the Recommended number under Total P aging File Size for All Drives Tag Usage Viewer reports the wrong number of tags in the database Validation of an application stops after the first 100 errors The Tag Usage Viewer reports the number of tags covered by the validation Correct the errors then re run the validation for accurate results Program is slow The computer is low on memory Close all other programs Ensure that the swap file is configured to be the optimal size for your computer The computer is low on resources Close all other programs If this doesn t work close down Windows and restart Some other program is taking up a lot of processor time Find the offending program and shut it down Unable to add or edit tags ina database Database is damaged or made with a pre release of the PanelBuilder software Use Import Export and save the existing tags to a PanelBuilder CSV format then use New Database to remove the old database and finally use Imp
280. e size of the button margin Button Margins Border Style 1 Choose the button Line Style Fill Style 2 Choose Button Margins from the Format menu Blink The Button Margins dialog box opens Button Margins x Horizontal Margin 8 Vertical Margin p Cancel Underline Tex 3 Specify horizontal and vertical margins for the button The numbers you specify determine the number of pixels the margins will occupy The button will change to the specified size Although the button appears larger on the screen only the original area is touch sensitive When you select and move or size the button a dotted rectangle appears around the active touch area The rectangle indicates the button s touch area The solid outer rectangle indicates the margin area and changes size as the button is stretched or moved Button margin Active button area Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 54 Creating Objects Working with Multi Component Objects The button is selected and the text On is selected Setting Object Defaults Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Some objects such as Control List Selectors and ASCII Input objects consist of multiple components Depending on the object you can change the format attributes of the different components For example you can change border styles touch margins fill type and foreground and background colors You can also resize many components
281. e tags For example you can put all the tags for one screen s objects in one folder The folder name becomes part of the tag name and is separated from the rest of the name with a backslash For example the full name for the tag StartButton Control in the folder called Screen 1 is Screen lWStartButton Control For details on creating tags and folders see Chapter 6 Defining Tags Type Specify one of these types of tags Tag Type Type of Data Stored Digital A single bit giving the values 0 or 1 Use a digital tag for devices that can only be on or off such as push buttons Analog Range of values depends on the data type selected Use an analog tag to control or monitor a value for example a temperature or the position of a rotary control When you define an analog tag you must also fill in the Scale Offset and Data Type fields String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters Use a string tag only with the ASCII Read and ASCII Display objects and optionally for sending alarm messages to the PLC Block A contiguous bit string of up to 1024 bits A block tag is used strictly for defining the Alarm Triggers and Acknowledge to PLC controls These controls can monitor and acknowledge multiple simultaneously active alarm conditions For details see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms Scale Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 1 being the default The scale an
282. e terminal the Set Bit Cursor Point Character becomes invisible To keep the character visible even after the Cancel key is pressed enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel checkbox in the Object Setup tab of the Terminal Setup dialog box For more information about terminal setup options see Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Note If you enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel option the application will be compatible with Panel View Firmware Version 3 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Goto Configure Mode The Goto Configure Mode object is a special object that allows operators to switch the Panel View terminal from Run Mode to Configure Mode without using the terminal s hardware keyswitch The Goto Configure Mode object works with the firmware object the Run Mode button which is enabled separately in the firmware For information about the Run Mode button and how to enable it see Chapter 5 in the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Creating Objects 9 9 Graphic Images Graphic Images are imported bitmaps in monochrome or 16 color bmp format that can appear as a static part of the screen or as object labels PanelBuilder can be installed with a library of graphic images including machine parts symbols and arrows You can place any of these in your application If you wish you can change the foreground and background colors of monochrome images and configure the
283. e type of PLC The data in a packet cannot cross data file boundaries For example the data cannot be from N7 and N10 only from one or the other Planning Applications 2 47 When the PanelView terminal reads from the PLC it tries to optimize the packet by fitting as much data into it as possible If a tag is assigned the address N7 0 and another tag is assigned N7 118 the Panel View terminal will take all the data from N7 0 to N7 118 and fit it into one packet depending on the type of PLC using one read to get data for both tags Group tags according to their scan classes e fone of the tags was on the currently displayed screen the packet would be scanned at the foreground rate of that tag If both tags were on screens not currently displayed the packet would scan at the fastest background rate assigned to those tags Forexample if the tag assigned to N7 0 had a background scan rate of 2 seconds and the tag assigned to N7 118 had a background scan rate of 10 seconds it will scan at the fastest rate of 2 seconds As the packet contains all the data from N7 0 to N7 118 to optimize this packet you should assign tags to the addresses in between Minimize the number of tag writes that must occur simultaneously e PanelView gives writes a higher priority than reads Outstanding reads cannot be processed until all outstanding writes have been sent to the PLC and acknowledged This means that display objects and tags may tak
284. ed Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 6 Configuring Alarms Clearing Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 writes the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the Alarm Acknowledged to PLC tag e starts timing the Alarm Control Delay when the Alarm Control Delay time has been reached sets the Acknowledge Control tag if assigned to 1 and starts the Acknowledge Control Hold timing when the Acknowledge Contol Hold time has been reached resets the Acknowledge Control tag to 0 acknowledges the oldest unacknowledged alarm and continues until all unacknowledged alarms have been acknowledged records the acknowledged time and date for all alarms in the Alarm History screen prints the acknowledged alarms with their acknowledged time and date stamp Press Cancel to abort the Acknowledge All process Note After the Acknowledge All button is pressed any new alarms that occur will not be acknowledged The operator can clear alarms by pressing the Clear All button provided in the Alarm History Screen Note To clear alarms enable the Clear All button by switching the Panel View terminal to Configure mode and then selecting the Alarms Settings tab in the Terminal Response screen When the operator presses the Clear All button in the Alarm History screen and no unacknowledged alarms in the Alarm History exist the terminal does the following depending on how alarms are configured clears the Alarm
285. ed by your application will be converted to Device tags No Remote I O tags will be converted to Scheduled tags This must be done manually You must first create a Scheduled read and write file Next change the device type to Scheduled and give then give the tags valid Scheduled addresses Analog tags using the binary data type will be switched to unsigned integer because binary is not supported for ControlNet applications Defining Communications 5 31 Note If your application s Target Firmware version is Version 1 or Version 1 03 block tags are reported as errors when you validate the application Block tags used in the application are supported in ControINet applications that use Target Firmware Version 2 or later Note If you convert shared tags this may make them invalid for the other applications that are using them Unused tags are not converted and remain as Remote I O tags Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Change Network Type x Current Network Remote 1 0 Target Network ControlNet E Cancel IX Convert Tags Node Scan Class 4 Specify a node name and scan class if required You can specify a node name and scan class when you do the conversion or you can leave them blank If you enter a node name and scan class
286. ed in this chapter Create the new application as described in Chapter 3 Working with Applications Then read Chapter 4 Working with Editors for more information about how to work in PanelBuilder A Configure the communications for the application This includes defining the nodes and scan classes for a DH or ControlNet Unscheduled application defining read and write files for a ControlNet Scheduled application and defining the racks and block transfer files for a Remote I O application See Chapter 5 Defining Communications B Define all the tags and expressions you will need throughout the application See Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 7 Creating Expressions C Create the application screens and objects See Chapter 8 Creating Screens and Chapter 9 Creating Objects D Create the messages if applicable See Chapter 10 Creating Messages E Configure the alarm screens and controls if applicable See Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms F Configure the options for how the application appears and functions at the PanelView terminal and how it interacts with the PLC See Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options and Chapter 13 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 2 Planning Applications G Save your application See Chapter 3 Working with Applications 3 Download the completed application to a PanelView terminal See Chapter 15 Transferring Applications
287. eens and decided which objects you will use you can plan the object addresses Addressing is discussed later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 6 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Tips for Planning Application Screen Designs Practising good screen design principles ensures that your application will be easy to use When planning keep these important principles in mind Consistency Be consistent with your use of symbols and color Be consistent with button labels and button placement When you design several screens keep the same kinds of buttons in the same positions For example if you have a Start button in a certain position on one screen do not put a Stop button in the same position on the next screen Clarity Use easily recognizable symbols For example use the conventional symbols provided as Graphic Images to draw objects such as tanks and valves Do not overload the screen with too much information Use standard clear terminology and avoid abbreviations or acronyms that the user may not understand Use colors with recognizable meanings For example in North America red and green often signify stop and start keep color meanings consistent by assigning red only to Stop buttons and green only to Start buttons Note Because some people are color blind do not rely on color alone to establish meaning Use high contrast color co
288. eing used Import a monochrome bitmap Number of visible states in scrolling object and cursor list must match The number of visible states does not match Change the number of visible states to match Object at position on screen has unassigned State values A state value is undefined Ensure that all state values for the object are assigned and unique A cursor list must exist if scrolling objects are used on the screen There is no cursor list on the screen Create a cursor list object or remove the scrolling object A cursor list and all the scrolling objects it controls must all be grouped together apart from other objects Cursor list object and its object lists must be in a single group Select the cursor list and all scrolling objects it controls and group them Cursor list can only be grouped with scrolling objects A non scrolling object is grouped with the cursor list Remove any non scrolling list objects from this group The group containing the cursor list cannot be embedded within another group The group with the cursor list and object lists is grouped with other objects Ungroup the scrolling objects from other objects before grouping them together Only one ASCII input object is permitted per Screen More than one ASCII input objectis on the screen Remove all but one ASCII input objects Only one cursor list object is permitted per Screen
289. elView 8 by 20 font is preferable because it is closest to the actual pixel size of text on the screen When you choose a font the characters available in that font are displayed Note The Character Map does not show all the extended characters For a list of characters see Appendix B The Extended Character Set Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 26 Creating Objects Creating Symbols Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 Choose the character you want to use and note the Alt number key combination in the Keystroke field 4 In PanelBuilder open the screen where you want to create the text 5 Choose the text tool Position the I beam on the screen and click the mouse button or press any key 6 Hold down Alt and type the key combination from the Character Map on the numeric keypad To use the MS Word extended character set 1 Open the Character Map from the Windows Accessories group 2 In the Font field choose MS Sans Serif The characters available in this font are displayed 3 Choose the character you want to use and choose Select If you wish choose additional characters When you have chosen all the characters you want choose Copy 5 n PanelBuilder click in the dialog box field where you want to use the character and press Ctrl V Note Instead of copying and pasting a character you can type the character using its Alttnumber key combination as described for using the PanelV
290. en Display objects are also called read objects They can use tags and expressions All display objects are non retentive RIO DH and ControlNet Creating Objects 9 3 Input objects transmit information to the programmable controller These objects usually control the application For example Increment and Decrement Value buttons could be configured to control the pressure in a storage tank If the operator presses the Increment Value button the new value is written to the button s tag at the programmable controller The programmable controller uses this value to increase the pressure accordingly Input objects are also called write objects Input objects generally use tags only All input objects are retentive Display and input objects receive information from and transmit information to the programmable controller For example a Momentary Push Button sends information to the PLC to control a machine process and the PLC sends information back to the push button to indicate the state the button should display An object that both displays information and provides input to the PLC is also called a read and write object It can use both tags and expressions Except for Momentary and Latched Push Buttons all display and input objects are retentive About Retentive Objects If an application is selected and run for the first time or if power is switched off and on a non retentive object automatically reverts back to its
291. en Number co c co rc co ei C4 C4 LL LL LL LL LL 5 The grid shows the location of the touch cells on a PanelView 1200e Touch Screen terminal PanelBuilder sizes 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 Notes 1 buttons in multiples of touch cells The smallest size for a 1200e touch screen application input object is 64 by 40 pixels 2 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals 640 by 480 Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 15 65 95 145 175 225 255 305 335 385 415 465 495 545 575 625 Notes 1 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys 2 The PanelView 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated
292. en Number Object Tag Address Ra Site same me T oma cars St Value E Type Value Notes Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value whic 5 dependent on the application start up selection A default application at start up writes nothing to the PLC a non default application writes the initial state value This is called the tag s Start Value Tag Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists For information about addressing syntax refer to Appendix C Addressing Syntax Object Initial Ref No Type State Value Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Recording Object Information For each object fill in the following e RefNo The object s unique identification number Usually you can start with 1 and increase by 1 for each object Start from 1 again for each screen so that adding an object to the first screen does not require that all other numbers change Type The type of object such as Interlocked Push Button Some objects use several tags or expressions See online help or the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual or look at the PanelBuilder objects themselves to plan which tags or expressions to use for each object Use one line in the Device Tags worksheet for each
293. ens Nevertheless you may find it useful to plan the screens using screen worksheets before you begin developing the application Use the following worksheets to define screens and objects Screen Worksheet for 1000e Terminals 640 by 480 Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals 640 by 480 Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals 640 by 480 Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals 800 by 600 Choose the worksheet that matches the PanelView terminal on which the application will run Both show the location of the terminal function keys relative to the screen Each worksheet can be used for designing either touch screen or keypad applications Screen Worksheet for PanelView 1200e Terminals 640 by 480 Use this worksheet to plan application screens for PanelView 1200e keypad and touch screen applications The position of the touch cells is marked on the worksheet for you to use as a guide in positioning touch cell input objects The screen area is 640 by 480 pixels in size There is a 10 by 12 grid of touch cells the smallest size for a touch object is 64 by 40 pixels PanelBuilder sizes touch objects only in multiples of touch cells The position of the terminal function keys is marked on the worksheet for you to use as a guide in positioning function key input objects Objects can be placed anywhere on the screen they need not align to this grid Important Non input objects can overlap but cannot be positioned off screen
294. ering 6 38 Creating a New Tag Database 6 39 Chapter 7 What Are 5510 5 _ 7 1 Types of EXDIGBSIOIS saad oce bdo oed aer s aod 1 2 HOW Expressions Work 1 2 Expression Data TY DGS sgeu iaieiiea adasia aceti 7 3 Tag Data Types in Expressions 1 4 Expression Language 1 4 Types of Operations Expressions Can Perform 1 4 Order of Precedence 7 4 Other Expression Components 1 5 Local Variables c ous sup hr eR ERR ER SERA 7 6 Evaluation of Local Variables 7 7 Expression Maximums 7 8 Arithmetic 7 9 Comparison Operations 1 10 Construct Operations 7 11 00 5 7 16 Expression Return Values 7 18 Expression Compilation and 7 19 Using the Expression 7 20 About Expression Editor Window 7 20 Entering and Formatting 0 5 7 21 Checking Syntax 1
295. erminal valid station numbers are between 0 and 77 octal Logix55xx Addressing For a Logix55xx node connected to a Panel View terminal on a DH network valid station numbers are between 0 and 77 octal Remote Station Addressing A PanelView terminal can communicate with nodes on remote DH networks Remote DH networks can be bridged by a 1785 KA interface module or by a Pyramid Integrator that has an RM or KA module DH Networks Bridged by a 1785 KA The format of the station address for nodes on remote DH networks 18 Station Address Valid Entries ll rrr ss local bridge address 0 77 octal rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal 55 Station address on remote DH 0 77 octal or You can shorten the offlink address by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote station address to produce a shorter address that still points to the same node 1 55 local bridge address 0 77 octal 55 combined remote bridge address and remote station 0 376 octal address The following figure shows a PanelView 1400e terminal connected to a DH network The local DH network is bridged to a remote DH network which is bridged to a second remote DH network The 1785 KA interface modules are used to bridge the networks The valid station entries for the various nodes in the figure are
296. es and scan classes that your tags will use then update each tag with the node and scan class names that you have created For more information see Defining Communications for a DH or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter Click OK The following message appears Conligare Communication Setep 2 Rack and Block Transfer File cefinilians will be last after the network type is converter to s Continua 6 Choose Yes to confirm that you want to continue To change the network type from Remote I O to ControlNet Important When you change an application from Remote I O to ControlNet you will have to define the necessary ControlNet nodes and scan classes and change any tag addresses that are not valid for ControlNet device tags Choose Change Network Type from the Tools menu In the Target Network field choose ControlNet To convert the tags in the application select the Convert Tags check box If you do not want to convert tags in the application clear the check from the Convert Tags check box Ifyou do not convert the tags to ControlNet format the tags data source remains Remote I O For any tags to be used in the ControlNet application you will have to change the data source to Device for Unscheduled tags and Scheduled for Scheduled file tags and give them valid ControlNet addresses Ifyou do convert the tags to ControINet format all the tags in the database that are us
297. es are in different data packets than the tags for the foreground scan rates or they will be scanned at the foreground scan rate Stagger the background and foreground rates This will result in having the data packet scanned at slightly different times instead of all at once Recording Scan Class Information In the bottom part of the DH and ControlNet Communications worksheet define how you want to configure each scan class Name The scan class name you want to assign to a particular node By default scan classes are named A through You can change these letters to any name up to 20 characters long The name can include letters numbers and the underscore character Spaces are not permitted Foreground The rate at which tags used in the current screen in the Alarm and Information windows in foreground and background trends and for the PLC I O control options are updated Specify the speed in seconds or in fractions of a second Background The rate at which tags used in all screens not displayed are updated Specify the speed in seconds or in fractions of a second Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 46 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Scheduled Files A Scheduled File consists of a read and or write file in a ControlNet application For each Scheduled File you must identify the file number its size and its usage Recording Scheduled File Informat
298. es of text within an object 1 Position the two outermost text objects as desired 2 To choose only the text elements press Ctrl Shift while you draw a selection border 3 Choose the appropriate Align or Space command You can also arrange the text relative to the object For example you could arrange the text to line up with the sides of the object or the middle To arrange text relative to the object 1 Choose all the text objects Then Shift click the object to select it 2 Choose the appropriate command for example Align Center to arrange the text as you want Creating Objects 9 49 Changing Object Each object has certain default settings for colors size number of Appearance states and so on You can change these settings to suit your needs You can apply different foreground and background colors to objects select different borders or add emphasis to objects by making them blink Setting the Object s Foreground and Background Colors Formal E d Col erue Em 1 Black You can set different foreground and background colors for graphic Ui aas objects and screen objects For static objects choose the colors Tiny Font i before you create the object For dynamic objects create the object v Small Font 3 Double Wide Font 5 Red and then specify the colors Double High Font Magenta M 7 Yellow Dynamic objects have default appearance attributes For details 8 Light Grey i p 33 Extra
299. ess 1264 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 2 Addressing Syntax PLC 3 Data Table Sections Fnnn wwww bb F File type A ASCII B Binary N Integer D Decimal BCD O Output I Input F Floating point S Status H High order integer nnn File number 0 999 decimal wwww Word address For I O section 0 7777 octal For all others 0 9999 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 17 octal Bit offset not permitted in the H and F sections Example of digital address B5 173 15 Example of analog address N3 173 Example of string address A1 126 PLC 3 Timers and Counters FWWW nnnn bb F File type C Counter T Timer WWW Structured word CTL Control word PRE Preset value ACC Accumulated value nnnn Counter Timer number 0 9999 decimal bb Bit offset within word 15 octal done bit 16 octal timing bit 17 octal enable bit Example of digital address TCTL 125 17 Example of analog address CPRE 125 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Addressing Syntax C 3 PLC 5 Data Files Fnnn eee bb F nnn eee bb optional File type B Binary N Integer D z Decimal BCD F Floating point ASCII File number 3 999 decimal Binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Element number 0 999 dec
300. ess any key and begin typing 4 When you are finished creating text deselect the text tool Creating Objects 9 25 You can assign different foreground and background colors font sizes and fill styles See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter Editing Text 1 Choose the Text tool as described above or select a text string and double click or right click the mouse button The pointer changes to an I beam 2 Position the I beam on the text string you want to edit and click the mouse or press any key and begin typing 3 Use Backspace or Delete to delete characters Creating Extended Characters In PanelBuilder you can use two extended character sets PanelView extended character set to create characters in screens and messages MS Word Sans Serif extended character set to create characters in all other areas of PanelBuilder where you type text for example in naming screens objects or tags Note To view the extended character sets use the Windows Character Map The Character Map is part of the standard install set for Microsoft Windows prior to Windows 95 For Windows 95 and Windows NT ensure the Character Map is installed Note You can edit extended characters as you would edit any text string To use the PanelView extended character set 1 With PanelBuilder running open the Character Map from the Windows Accessories group 2 In the Font field choose any PanelView font The Pan
301. et of handles appears showing that the objects are grouped When you select one of these objects you select the whole group You can move cut copy paste or delete the group of objects in one operation or you can change object attributes for all objects at once But you can still work with each object in the group individually When you click twice on an object in a group you select it You can move it within the group and edit it without changing its group status You can also cut copy and delete objects in the group To ungroup objects 1 Choose group 2 Do one of the following choose Ungroup from the Arrange menu choose from the toolbar The objects are separate again Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 44 Arrange Group Ungroup Creating Objects Ctrl G Ctri H Send to Back Bring to Front Align Left Align Center Align Right Align Top Align Middle Align Bottom Align Center Points Align to Grid Space Vertical Space Horizontal Flip Vertical Flip Horizontal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Editing Overlapping Objects You can change the stacking order of overlapped objects with the Send to Back and Bring to Front commands Note An input object or button can be on top of another object but they cannot be under another object To bring an object to the front of the object stack 1 Choose the object 2 Do one of the following choos
302. ete PLC C 17 discrete SLC C 19 SLC 5 writing to output files C 7 SLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax C 10 binary integer float ASCII and string files C 8 I O files C 7 status files C 8 timer counter and control files C 10 analog member addressing optional syntax C 12 bit member addressing optional syntax C 11 Alarm acknowledge to PLC about 11 10 Alarm control delay 12 7 Alarm controls 11 11 Alarm editors 11 7 Alarm history screen 11 52 about 11 3 11 52 calling up from the terminal 11 31 11 35 11 52 configuring 11 55 screen security 8 8 using buttons 11 53 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 2 Index using in the terminal 11 52 Alarm message panel about 11 35 Alarm message window about 11 3 11 30 choosing type multi line 11 38 single line 11 38 disabling 11 38 enabling 11 38 multi line 11 33 single line 11 31 types 11 30 using buttons 11 34 using in the terminal 11 31 Alarm messages 10 1 11 30 11 33 audio 11 24 changing options 10 9 displaying on the terminal 11 33 enabling audio option 10 8 Dataliner 10 8 print option 10 8 the alarm relay 10 8 in alarm history screen 11 52 in alarm status screen 11 43 in alarm window 10 8 options 10 8 Alarm status screen 11 41 about 11 4 11 41 assigning reset control automatic 11 51 manual 11 51 calling up from the terminal 11 43 configuring 11 50 display active alarms mode
303. ether to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a programmable controller When the PanelView terminal reads a value from the PLC it multiplies this value by the scale value and then adds the offset before it writes the value to the terminal s value table Similarly when the terminal sends data to the PLC it first subtracts the offset and then divides by the scale value to convert the value back to raw data before it is written to the PLC With Scale 1 and Offset 0 the default values PLC data is not changed Note For PLC output from Analog and Digital tags you can create expressions to manipulate or convert the data as needed Data Type Analog Tag Only Unless you have specific reasons for doing so that is if you want a special manipulation of the data use the Default data type Note Not all PLCs accept all data types For the list of valid data types for the PLC you are using refer to your PLC s user documentation Planning Applications 2 51 An example of special manipulation of the data is to treat the data in the integer file N7 0 as a 4 digit BCD In this case you would specify 4 BCD as the data type Important No matter what data type is assigned the tag s entire address is read when a tag value is retrieved from the programmable controller For example for a tag with the address N7 00 and byte data type the terminal will still look at all 16 bits in the 0 element of integer file 7 Ensur
304. evice C DDE C Memory 8 Remote 1 0 Scheduled Log Data Address Far Help press F1 3 For Type choose Analog 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security This field is present to maintain compatibility with RSView databases You cannot enter anything in the Security field Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Minimum and Maximum These fields are present to maintain compatibility with RSView databases You cannot enter anything in the Minimum and Maximum fields Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Tags 6 15 Scale and Offset Type a number For the scale do not use 0 Scale and offset together transform raw PLC data into meaningful units for the operator At runtime all data read from the programmable controller into an analog tag will be scaled using the formula y mx b where m scale x raw PLC data b offset y scaled value The terminal displays the scaled value When data is written to the programmable controller using an analog tag the value will be inversely scaled using the formula This converts the value back to raw PLC data before it is written to the programmable controller With Scale 1 and Offset 0 the default values for a new analog tag programmable controller data is not changed Important A fractional scale or offset value will result in a floating point scaled value This will be true rega
305. ey Working with Editors 4 11 To sort a portion of the spreadsheet 1 Select the block of fields to sort by clicking on a cell and dragging the mouse diagonally toward the opposite corner of the block 2 Choose Sort Messages from the Edit menu or in the toolbar Your data is sorted according to the column s you selected Duplicating Rows You can repeat the information in a single row by using the duplicate tool This is useful for creating several rows with similar information Note You can use this command to duplicate rows only not cells or columns To duplicate one or more rows 1 Select the rows 2 Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or in the toolbar or press Ctrl D The duplicate rows appear immediately below the last row you selected 3 Since records must be unique edit each duplicate row Filling Portions of the Spreadsheet Messages Only In the Messages editors there is a quick way to fill portions of the spreadsheet with identical data To filla series of rows with identical data 1 Select a series of rows 2 Choose Fill Forward from the Edit menu or in the toolbar or press Ctrl F The contents of the first row are copied into the successive rows of the selection Existing data in the successive rows is overwritten If the first row is blank all successive rows are blank also Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 12 Working with Editors Publication 2711E 6 14 November
306. f it is not The result is considered reliable if both operands are reliable Creating Expressions 7 11 This table describes the types of comparison operations you can use expressions to perform Operator Symbol Syntax E quality Operand2 Inequality lt gt lt gt Operand2 Less than lt lt Operand2 Greater than gt gt Operand2 Less than or equal to lt lt Operand2 Greater than or equalto gt Operand1 gt Operand2 There are spaces before and after all the comparison operators Important You also use the symbol to assign variables To avoid confusion between the two operations always place parentheses around the operands when you wish to perform the equality operation on a variable Otherwise PanelView may treat the operation as an assignment to the variable For examples using comparison operators in expressions see Construct Operations next in this chapter Construct Operations Construct operations allow you to use conditional logic in your expressions This table describes the types of construct operations you can use expressions to perform Operator Syntax Description of Result IF THEN If Condition Then If the value of the condition is non zero Statement s True the statements are executed and Endlf evaluation of the construct ends If the value o
307. f the condition is zero False evaluation of the construct ends and returns a value of zero Note Conditions and statements can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 12 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Operator Syntax Description of Result IF THEN ELSE f Condition Then If the value of the condition is non zero Statement s True the statements are executed and Else evaluation of the construct ends i If the value of the condition is zero False n the else statements are executed and evaluation of the construct ends Note Conditions statements and Else statements can include any combination of variables tags constants and operators that result in a number SELECT CASE SelectCase Test If the value of the test matches any of the Case Constanti Statement s 1 Case Constant2 Statement s 2 Case ConstantN Statement s N CaseElse ElseStatement s EndSelect constants the statements following the first match are executed and evaluation of the construct ends Use of CaseElse is optional If you use it and the value ofthe test does not match any of the constants the else statements are executed and evaluation of the construct ends If you do not use it and the value of the test does not match any of the constants evaluation of the construct ends Note Tests
308. field 4 Type a new screen name in the Name field 5 Click Copy This copies the screen its objects and all their tag assignments to the new screen If you wish you can continue copying this screen Copy as many screens as you wish 6 When you are ready to exit click Close Important Since the object controls tag assignments and expression definitions in the application screen are also copied you may need to change them Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Screens 8 5 Copying Application You can do a screen copy within the same application but not Screen Contents into across multiple applications However you can copy certain objects Another Application from a screen in one application and paste them into a screen in another application gt Note Although you can copy some objects between touch screen and keypad applications you cannot copy objects that are specific to touch cell or keypad applications or objects that contain buttons This includes objects such as Control List Selectors and Push Buttons By default when you copy objects their controls tag assignments and expression definitions are also copied You can choose whether or not to copy the controls D Note Even if you copy the control tag assignments and expression definitions the tags themselves are not added to the destination application s tag database You must add the tags to the destination application s tag database befo
309. folders The spreadsheet viewer portion of this editor allows you to see the database structure Note The Tag Database editor works with both PanelBuilder and RSView databases but because the two have different product feature sets some features will appear in the editor that are not relevant to editing tags in PanelBuilder These features will be disabled Opening the Tag Database Editor 1 Open the application you want to edit 2 Open the System folder and choose Tag Database or choose from the toolbar Using the Editor The Tag Database editor has the following parts form query box folder hierarchy and spreadsheet Each part is described on the following pages PanelBuilder allows both full and incomplete tag information to be saved If all tag fields are filled in only completely valid tag records are accepted Otherwise error messages flag the fields in error If any of the data fields are not filled in clicking the Accept button will save the incomplete tag record without validating it This lets you define a tag first and fill in nodes racks scan classes and addresses later Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 6 Defining Tags CAE Database K14C7DHP dx File Edit View Help ale lt a A Tag Name Alm Cir Type Digital 2 Security Description Prev Off Label o On Label fi Form Initial Value o Data Source Device
310. for any of the following Unscheduled mode or Unscheduled Scheduled mode or Scheduled mode p Note ControlNet Scheduled mode runs applications on PanelView 1400e or 1000e terminals and is valid only for PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 or higher For PanelBuilder 1400e Versions 4 or lower Scheduled file information is not included when the application is saved as a pvd file The Logix55xx Controllers do not support ControlNet Scheduled mode at runtime b Note PanelBuilder 1400e cannot set the scan rates for scheduled files To configure the rate at which scheduled file information is broadcast over ControINet you must have RSNetworx installed RSNetworx is a separate software package Use the Map Editor Tool to configure the PLC to read and write files to and from the PanelView terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Communications 5 27 E gt PLC Communications Communication Setup eee Nodes 11 Scan Classes lh RIO Racks L RIO Block Transfer Files Scheduled Files To open the Scheduled File Editor dialog box Open the PLC Communications folder Choose Scheduled File Editor or in the toolbar The Scheduled File Editor dialog box appears I Scheduled File Editor Untitled1 PIE File Edit View Help Number Size fo J 51 Read File Number i For Help press F1 INUM To configure Scheduled Files 1 Specify read and write file sizes The files
311. for purposes of determining message length When a Version 2 or later application is downloaded to the Panel View terminal the Newline code is converted to a carriage return and line feed sequence For a pre Version 2 application the n character sequence is not converted to a carriage return and line feed When a Version 2 or later application is uploaded from the Panel View terminal the carriage return and line feed is converted back to n Note For pre Version 2 applications n is not converted into a new line The n appears as is in a message format Note For alarm messages the Newline code works only in the Panel Alarm Message Window In the other Alarm Message Windows and alarm screens the code appears as this symbol vv Creating Messages 10 5 Version 2 or Later Applications You can use formatting codes only for applications that are compatible with PanelView Version 2 or later If you are creating a Version 2 or later application and you want to use the character sequence n you must enter it as Wn Otherwise PanelBuilder will interpret it as a carriage return and line feed PanelBuilder strips out the extra backslash when creating the Version 2 or later pvd file so the characters in your message will appear as Wn on the Panel View terminal The following examples illustrate how messages containing the n character sequence appear in PanelBuilder and PanelView Example 1 Using the Newline Code in Version
312. g Assigned Tags You can view the tags used in a screen by selecting Screen Tag Usage Viewer from the Screen menu or by selecting Tag Usage Viewer from the Application Window s Tools menu For details see Using the Tag Usage Viewer in Chapter 6 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 What Are Messages E gt Messages Alarm Messages Information Messages E Local Messages Chapter 1 0 Creating Messages This chapter tells you about the different kinds of messages how messages are triggered creating and editing messages using formatting codes in your messages adding options to alarm messages importing and exporting messages validating and updating messages Messages keep the operator informed about the status of the operation when the application is running Messages provide the operator with prompts instructions warnings and information on current status and about what is happening in the process Kinds of Messages You can create messages in each of the Messages editors There are three kinds of messages Alarm messages alert the operator to problems in the process Each alarm message can be equipped with special notification options These can sound an audio alarm print the alarm message display the message in the Alarm Window on the terminal s screen send the alarm message to a PLC and energize an alarm relay You can create a maximum of 4 000 alarm messages Alarm messages appear i
313. g can use any Full or Listen Only I O address A write tag must use a discrete Full Access address or the block transfer file address of a file with a control byte defined on a Full Access input module Note You can use expressions to perform calculations and logical and conditional operations to manipulate the values of tags See Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Data Sources Defining Tags 6 3 The data source for a tag is the physical location within a programmable controller that PanelView is to read a value from or write a value to The data source for tags in a PanelBuilder application can be either Device Remote I O or Scheduled Which one you select depends on whether you are creating tags for a DH ControlNet Scheduled or Unscheduled or Remote I O application The other two data sources you can see in the Tag Database editor Memory and DDE are used only by RSView Device When you create tags for a DH or ControlNet application select Device as the data source For each tag you must specify a node name a scan class and the physical address within the programmable controller that the tag is to reference The node name refers to the programmable controller s location on the DH or ControlNet network the scan class determines how often the terminal is to check the value at this address For information about configuring nodes and scan classes see Chapter 2 Planning Applications Remote 1 0 When you create tags for
314. g the Small or Double Wide font you can display from 1 to 6 lines in the Alarm Message Window 1 message only e Ifthe window will be using the Double High or Large font you can display from 1 to 3 lines in the Alarm Message Window 1 message only Configure the Window Look as follows Font Type For this window type Choose one of these fonts Single line Small only Multi line Small or Double High Panel Small Double Wide Double High or Large Underline Click the checkbox to choose Yes if you want the alarm messages to be underlined Leave it unchecked to choose No Blink Click the checkbox to choose Yes if you want the alarm messages to blink Leave it unchecked to choose No Foreground Color Choose the foreground color of the alarm message Background Color Choose the background color of the alarm message Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 40 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 For Alarm Message Panel configure the message trigger value as follows Show Alarm Panel Trigger Value Leave the box checked to display the message trigger value or clear the checkbox to not display the trigger value If you choose not to display the trigger value go to Step 5 Position Choose Before Message or After Message to specify where in the panel to display the trigger value The trigger value is left justified in the trigger value field if you choose Before Mes
315. ghout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to identify a hazard avoid the hazard recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product PanelBuilder PanelView Data Highway Plus DH ControlNet ControlLogix and SLC are trademarks and PLC PLC 2 and PLC 3 are registered trademarks of Allen Bradley Company Inc RSView RSLinx and RSNetworx are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc IBM PC PS 2 VGA and PC DOS are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation HP and Hewlett Packard are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company Microsoft Windows MS and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc Taylor and ProWORXPLUS are registered trademarks of Taylor Industrial Software Inc MODICON MODSOFT Quantum and Modbus are registered trademarks of AEG Schneider Automation Inc All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Table of Contents Preface Welcome to PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for WINDO
316. gles except that you can assign a border You can also assign a hollow or solid fill Creating Objects 9 13 Rectangles can surround other objects or simply illustrate You can configure the rectangle as hollow or solid and change its line style or width Wedges or pie shapes are partial ellipses They are similar to arcs except they are closed You can configure them to appear hollow or solid and assign any line style or width Symbols Symbols are like Multistate Indicator objects except that the same monochrome bitmap appears for each state Symbols can show up to 255 states with user configurable values and different colors for each state Any monochrome bitmap or monochrome dxf image can be used for a symbol You can increase or decrease the size of a monochrome bitmap to achieve the symbol size you want PanelBuilder is installed with 32 bitmaps of standard ISA symbols in two sizes If the default installation was followed these are contained in the C AB PB1400E IMAGES directory A set of DIN symbol bitmaps is also installed there Text Text is used for screen titles to provide instructions or to add text labels to objects Text can be configured as transparent or solid with background and foreground colors Time and Date Date Display shows the current date It can be displayed anywhere on the screen Depending on the Panel View terminal settings the object can appear in a variety of formats Time Display show
317. gure the Information Message Window 1 Open the System folder Choose Information Message Window or cs from the toolbar The Configure Information Message Window dialog box appears Configure Information Message Window Ea Message Window Window Removal State Disabled Operator Acknowledged M Cancel Window Look Help Font Type PanelView small zl Underline Blink Foreground Color Background Color ight Grey Control PLC Controlled Information Window unassigned Acknowledge to PLC unassigned Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign 2 Configure the window to your specifications by filling in each field as follows Message Window State The Information Message Window is an optional feature in your application By default it is disabled To make it appear select Enabled in the State drop down list If you do not want it to appear leave it disabled Note Information messages defined in the Information Messages editor will not appear if the window is disabled Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 14 4 Working with the Information Message Window Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Window Removal At runtime the Information Message Window can be removed from the terminal s screen in one of three ways Select the desired option from the Window Removal list e PLC Cleared the programmable controller clears the window by setting the value at the
318. h paper 3 Ensure you have selected report options Saving the Report as an ASCII Text File You can save the application report as an ASCII text file To save the report as an ASCII text file 1 Click the Save As button in the Report Selection dialog box The Save As dialog box appears Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 16 Working with Applications Save As 2 File name Folders UNTITLED RP c ab pb1400e Cancel E c 25 E gt PB1400E Network DEMO C3 IMAGES CPALETTE DLL TUTORIAL CSHR100 DLL DEFLTGFx zl g Save file as type Drives i Files C By default the file name is the same as the application name The file extension is rpt 2 To change the file name type the new file name in the File Name field 3 Change the drive or directory if required 4 Click OK b Note The ASCII text file does not include screen images Using Help in Applications While working in a PanelBuilder 1400e application Help is available through either online Help or View Online Manuals To open online Help 1 Select Help Index from the Help menu or click on a specific help button or press F1 2 Choose the help topic To open View Online Manuals 1 Select View Online Manuals from the Help menu 2 Choose the manual you wish to view Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Working with Applications 3 17 Closing Applications When you close an ap
319. h cell grid is not selected or displayed The PanelView 1000e and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The high resolution screen of 800 by 600 runs at the same display size as the 640 by 480 screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1000e and 1400e terminals The PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e terminal screens are 640 by 480 pixels in size The PanelView 1400e terminal also supports a high resolution of 800 by 600 pixels You can change the grid spacing to enable you to size and position objects more precisely The following illustration shows the default grid setting 8 by 20 pixels for a keypad application screen Screens SAMPLE 1 MAIN ioj Xx If you do not want the grid to show you can turn it off Note If you change the grid settings all
320. hapter 8 Creating Screens Instructions for working with application screens and using some of the tools Chapter 9 Creating Objects An overview of the different types of application screen objects you can create in PanelBuilder and step by step instructions for creating editing and configuring objects Chapter 10 Creating Messages Information about the different types of messages and how they work and instructions for creating editing and importing messages Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms General discussion of how alarms are reported on a Panel View terminal and details about how to configure the various alarm reporting options Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Information about configuring options that determine how the application appears on the terminal Chapter 13 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Information about configuring options that determine how the application interacts with the PLC Chapter 14 Working with the Information Message Window Information about configuring the Information Message Window object to display messages on the terminal s screen Chapter 15 Transferring Applications Information about transferring applications between the development computer and PanelView terminal using the Upload Download cable Remote I O Pass Through network downloads and uploads or the PCMCIA memory card Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 P 8 Preface Publication 2711E 6 14
321. haracter Set Addressing Syntax Table of Contents toc xiii Chapter 15 About Transferring Applications 15 1 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C PLE Addressing Syntax C 1 die A 1 PLC 3Data Table 2 PLC 3 Timers and Counters C 2 PICS Data Files a e ded C 3 PLC 5 Binary Files Optional Syntax C 3 PLC 5 1 0 and Status TIES 4 nd EE EVERY 3X cw C 4 PLC 5 Timers Counters and Control Files C 4 PLC 5 Enhanced 1 0 and Status Files C 5 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Integer BCD ASCII Float and SUO Files oa ouo wach ace abr e ato ints dean ad C 5 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax C 6 PLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter Control SFC Status Message PID Block Transfer and Token Data Files C 6 SLC Addressing Syntax C 7 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Files C 7 SLC 5 Enhanced Status Files C 8 SLES SIMS FICS ductus ob usce dac v E as e C 8 SLC 5 Enhanced Binary Integer Float ASCII and String Files C 8 SLC 5 Binary and Integer Files C 9 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax C 10 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and C
322. hardware devices that are installed and detected Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The correct network communication driver is not installed You can verify that the correct hardware and communication drivers are installed by referring to the Terminal Information screen when the terminal is in Configure mode Temna dvformation Size dm Bytes Last Medilied Comment Tammi nscatlos Rema H W Total Sire KB AAT Free Sgacn 11 837 ES Appendix F Reserved Keywords The following keywords are reserved for use in the Expression language and cannot be used to name local variables And Else Integer SelectCase As End Long Single Boolean Endlf Mod Then Byte EndSelect Not To Case Exit Or True CaseElse False Rem Variant Dim If Select Xor The following keywords are reserved for future use in the Expression language and cannot be used to name local variables ByRef Function Static While ByVal Loop Step Do LoopUntil String Double LoopWhile Sub DoUntil Next Ulong DoWhile Private Until For P ublic Wend Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Symbols amg file 10 11 apl file 3 4 Cfg file 3 4 csv file 6 34 6 37 and column ordering 6 38 importing a database 6 37 db file 6 34 img file 10 11 mg file 10 11 pbw file 3 4
323. he PanelView Location Routing Address 5 19 Defining the Network File Transfer Controls 5 20 COMGUNNG NDS oe e i sce ups 5 21 Unsolicited Messages DH and ControlNet 5 24 Configuring Scan Classes 5 24 Configuring Scheduled Files 5 26 Changing the Network Type 5 28 Converting from Remote 1 0 to DHE 5 28 Converting from Remote 1 0 to 5 30 Converting from DH to Remote 1 0 5 33 Converting from DH to 5 34 Converting from ControlNetto Remote 1 0 5 36 Converting from ControlINetto 5 37 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 toc vi Table of Contents Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Chapter 6 What Are 6 1 TAQ TYPES p a arx niaaa OCURRA adie NUR RD ER E RA 6 2 Read and Write 5 6 2 DataS OUNCES iara d odere E patch quip UP Pado eu 6 3 DEVICE T ET 6 3 PEM DPA Pe PII TREE VIE 6 3 5 6 3 Organizing TagS 6 4 Naming 5 6 4 Using Folders to Group Tags
324. he Rack editor has two parts the data entry form on top where you define the rack and the spreadsheet viewer on the bottom where you see all the rack assignments and select one for editing Duplicate Ctrl D Delete Delete Insert Row Device Type Defining Communications 5 9 Specifying the Device Type Before you can assign racks you must first specify the type of programmable controller the terminal will be connected to The default is the PLC 5 15 To specify the PLC type p Select a device type from the drop down list in the Rack Editor tool bar or choose Device Type from the Edit menu and select the type to use Note If you select the Logix5530 or the Logix5550 as the Device Type for a Remote I O network set the target firmware to Version 5 or a validation error will occur Addresses of tags used in an application must conform to the address syntax for the selected device The SLC address syntax differs from that of the PLC devices When the device is switched from a PLC to SLC device or vice versa the application tag addresses will be updated automatically when the application is validated Tip Validate your application right after a SLC to PLC or PLC to SLC device type change to update all your tag addresses so your reports and the Tag Usage Viewer will display the correct information Assigning Racks You can define the Panel View terminal to function as one or more partial or full racks on the programm
325. he Undo command When you move the pointer over the Undo or Redo icons the status bar displays the action that will be performed Note You cannot use Undo and Redo in the Node Rack and Block editors To undo an operation Choose Undo from the Edit menu or in the toolbar To redo an operation Choose Redo from the Edit menu or in the toolbar Selecting Cells Rows and Columns Before you can edit your records in the spreadsheet you must select the area you want to work with You can use the first method for all the form or spreadsheet editors The remaining methods work in the Messages editors only To select a single row Click the row number at the left edge of the spreadsheet The row is highlighted indicating that it is selected To select a cell Click the cell or press Tab or the arrow keys A gray border appears to indicate that the cell is selected Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 8 Working with Editors Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To select a block of cells Select a cell in one corner of the block you want to select Press the left mouse button While holding down the mouse button drag the mouse toward the opposite corner of the block until the desired selection is highlighted Release the mouse button If you are using a keyboard hold down the Shift key and use the arrow keys to highlight the block To select more than one row 1 2 Cl
326. he window will remain on the screen until one of the following OCCUIS e The programmable controller sets the value at the Information Window Control to 0 The operator presses the window s Clear button e The operator presses the window s Ack button This button appears only if the Acknowledge to PLC control has been enabled When the operator presses the Ack button the Acknowledge to PLC tag is set to 1 for the duration of the Information Window Ack Hold Time The PLC can be programmed to instruct the terminal to clear the window by setting the Information Window Control back to zero Note If the Information Message Window is on screen at the moment when an alarm occurs the Alarm Window may overlap the Information Message Window The Information Message Window will remain after the Alarm Window is cleared Configuring the Information Message Window e System m Terminal Setup a Tag Database Alarms PLC 1 0 Control EF Information Messa ge Window Working with the Information Message Window 14 3 When you configure the Information Message Window you can enable or disable it specify how the window is removed from the terminal s screen change the default colors and other aspects of the window s appearance define the control that the PLC uses to trigger the Information Message Window define the Acknowledge to PLC control if you specify that the operator must acknowledge each message To confi
327. hem It serves as a placeholder for the value the operator enters The user entry character will be replaced by a numeric value and is treated as a Long or Floating Point constant You cannot use the user entry character in any other expressions For more information see Assigning Write Expressions later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Local Variables Local variables allow you to simplify your expression text and make it more readable For example if you are repeatedly referencing a tag with a long name such as Tag_For_Temperature_Probe you can create a local variable called analog input and assign the tag to it You can also use a local variable when you want to use a calculated value multiple times in an expression See Example 5 at the end of this chapter You can use up to 30 local variables in each expression You must declare a local variable in the expression before you use it The declaration includes the name of the variable and optionally the data type Use this syntax to declare local variables Dim varnamel As datatypel varname2 As datatype2 Alternatively you can declare each variable separately on its own line with its own Dim statement For example DIM temperature AS SINGLE input AS INTEGER probe AS LONG Variable names are a maximum of 40 characters long They must begin with a letter from A to Z and can contain letters numbers and the underscore charac
328. hen you save or close the converted file it will be saved as a pvc file The pvc file format is the PanelBuilder 1400e configuration file format Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 6 Working with Applications The Conversion Process Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 When the PanelBuilder for DOS or PanelBuilder 1200 application file is converted the following changes are made a tag database is generated and a tag is defined for each unique address that had been associated with objects windows and Global Address options the rack and block transfer definitions are generated each object window and Global Address option that used to have an address associated with it now has the correct tag assigned to it all screen components are converted to their pixel graphic equivalent For example two connected lines will now appear as two regular lines buttons will have the new three dimensional button borders and so on lines of characters are converted to text the file format is pvc When you open an application created with PanelBuilder for DOS PanelBuilder 1200 or an earlier version of PanelBuilder 1400e other than Version 5 the following Version 5 default values are set the application s pvc file is saved as a PanelBuilder Version 5 file It is set to run on a PanelView terminal using firmware Version 1 or later To change the Target Firmware Version see Specifying Target Firmware Version next the Mes
329. how they work 7 2 indenting 7 22 language about 7 4 limits in 7 8 local variables in 7 6 maximum size of 7 8 7 19 operations order of precedence 7 4 operations in 7 4 optional write 7 2 read 7 2 regeneration of 7 19 reserved keywords F 1 return values in 7 18 samples 7 26 syntax checking 7 22 errors 7 22 types 7 2 user entry character 7 6 validating 7 26 values 7 18 write 7 2 7 23 Index 1 7 Extended character set B 1 MS Word Sans Serif 9 25 using 9 26 PanelView 9 25 using 9 25 F Features new P 1 File format for importing messages 10 12 Filtering data in the Tag Usage Viewer 6 28 removing filter 6 29 setting filters 6 29 Firmware features Version 1 03 E 2 Version 2 E 2 Version 3 E 3 Version 4 E 3 Version 5 E 3 target version 12 4 Flipping objects 9 47 Floating point accuracy in expressions 7 4 Floating point data type 2 24 2 51 Folders adding tags 6 9 creating 6 8 deleting 6 10 digital tags 6 18 6 19 duplicating 6 10 nesting 6 4 6 8 opening multiple folders 6 9 using to group tags 6 4 working with 6 7 Font in information message window 14 4 Font sizes 9 52 Form S preadsheet editors using 4 3 Formatting expressions 7 21 indenting 7 22 Formatting codes in messages 10 4 Forms using 4 3 Fractional racks See Racks partial Full access 2 16 Full racks See Racks full Function keys assigning 9 56 displaying in PanelBuilder
330. hrough over Remote I O 1500 message alarm history PanelView Firmware Version 5 includes support for the following features ControlNet 1 5 Scheduled mode operation Keyboard and bar code reader support RS 232 alarm message output to Dataliners VGA and SVGA applications 800 by 600 resolution HP LaserJet compatibility printers Enhanced alarm history and alarm status More local and information messages Logix55xx Processor support ControlLogix Gateway Smaller font sizes Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 E 4 Version Control Version Control and Downloading Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Because you can use PanelView terminals as PCMCIA card writers for other terminals you can download applications to terminals which cannot run them Version Control does ensure however that you do not attempt to Make Current any application which will not run on the terminal to which you are downloading If you have selected the Make Application Current option in the Download Options dialog box before downloading an application to a PanelView terminal PanelBuilder terminates the download with an error under these circumstances The firmware version required by the features used in the application the Actual Firmware Version exceeds the firmware version installed in the PanelView terminal to which you are downloading The terminal is of the wrong type The download aborts with an error if The
331. ial value or the object initial state value if one exists For information about addressing syntax refer to Appendix C Addressing Syntax Scheduled File Worksheet Application File Name Notes 1 Record the Scheduled File Number and Size Circle Read or Write Use additional worksheets if necessary File Number Scheduled Files Usage Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Write Enter a number between 0 and 240 ControlNet Scheduled Tags Worksheet Application File Name Screen Number Object Tag Address Initial Analog Tag Only m No of Bits End Address Tag Ref Name T Initial Range Address s ype State ype or string tag only Start No Value Offset Data Value of Values No of Characters Value Notes Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run Tag Start Value This is called the tag s start value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists For information about addressing syntax refer to Appendix C Addressing Syntax Screen Worksheet for 1200e Terminals 640 by 480 Application File Name Screen Name Scre
332. ialog box choose Import Select one or more graphic images to import HES File name Folders bmp c ab pb1400e images isa exc a ab Network amp y pb1400e images C3 isa if Cancel agitatr bmp agitatrl bmp blower bmp blowerl bmp comprsr bmp comprsrl bmp conveyr bmp conveyrl bmp List files of type Drives windows Bitmaps amp c Creating Objects 9 31 2 Choose one or more files to import Click a file name to select it Use Shift click to select a range of images and Ctrl click to select additional images 3 Click OK The files are listed in the Select Image dialog box Imported graphic images are stored with the PanelBuilder 1400e pvc file If you do not use them in any screens remove them to keep your pvc file to a manageable size and to conserve disk space To remove unused graphic images 1 In the Select Bitmap Image or Select DXF Image dialog box choose any unused files and click Remove A warning message appears 2 Choose Yes to remove the image If you remove an image that is used in a screen the screen will display a white box marking the spot where the image was When you select this white box the name of the associated file appears in the status line You must delete the box or re import the file Otherwise PanelBuilder will report a validation error Exporting Graphic Images You may want to export images from your pvd
333. ications 3 17 screens 8 7 Color palette using 9 14 Commands conventions P 11 Communication errors time before reporting 5 23 Communication Setup editor 5 2 5 15 Communications defined 5 1 Comparison operations in expressions Compatibility version 1 3 Compilation of expressions 7 19 Components in expressions 7 5 7 21 maximum number of 7 8 Compressing applications 3 8 3 10 Configuring alarm history screen 11 55 alarm status screen 11 50 alarms configuring 11 7 global controls 11 8 analog tags 6 14 block tags 6 19 communications 2 1 digital tags 6 17 information message window 14 1 14 3 list object states 9 61 nodes 5 22 object defaults 12 9 object states 9 57 9 58 9 59 objects 9 55 scan classes 2 44 5 24 string tags 6 18 tag type 6 13 terminal setup 12 1 Consistency and screen design 2 6 using screen templates 2 7 8 4 Construct operations in expressions 7 11 IF THEN ELSE 7 12 SELECT CASE 7 14 Control byte 5 13 Control list selector with Enter key 9 5 9 8 9 21 without Enter key 9 5 9 8 9 21 Control mnemonics C 13 Control selectors 9 8 control list selector with enter 9 8 control list selector without enter 9 8 set bit cursor point 9 8 ControlLogix Gateway bridge addressing ControlNet addressing local station 2 40 Logix55xx 2 40 choosing device as data source 6 3 Node Editor 5 15 5 21 optimizing data flow 5 24 Scan C
334. ick Cancel Assigning Write Expressions Creating Expressions 7 23 Write expressions allow the PanelView terminal to perform a mathematical calculation or logical operation on the value the operator enters at the Panel View terminal The result produced by the write expression is then sent to the Keypad Numeric Input control The use of write expressions is optional Note If the write expression attempts to divide by zero a value is not sent to the Keypad Numeric Input control Note If you assign a write expression the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions You can assign write expressions to three PanelBuilder screen objects e Numeric Keypad Enable Button Numeric Input Cursor Point Numeric Entry Keypad Each of these objects has an Optional Keypad Write Expression control If you assign the Optional Keypad Write Expression you must also assign a tag to the Keypad Numeric Input control or PanelBuilder reports a validation error Note If you assign an Optional Keypad Write Expression the Raise and Lower keys are disabled User Entry Character The User Entry Character provides a placeholder in the expression for the value the operator enters in the terminal The User Entry Character is a question mark You must enter at least one in the write expression You can enter multiple User Entry Characters in a single write ex
335. ick the row number for the first row you want to select Continue holding the mouse button down and drag the mouse through the row numbers until all the desired rows are highlighted Release the mouse button The rows are highlighted indicating that they are selected To select a single column Click the column header at the top of the spreadsheet The column is highlighted indicating that it is selected To select more than one column 1 2 Click the column header of the first column you want to select Continue holding the mouse button down and drag the mouse through the column headers until all the desired columns are highlighted Release the mouse button The columns are highlighted indicating that they are selected To select the entire spreadsheet Choose Select All from the Edit menu or click on the empty field in the top left corner of the spreadsheet above the column numbers and to the left of the column headings Working with Editors 4 9 Cutting or Copying and Pasting Selections Messages Only You can cut or copy and paste any entry in the spreadsheet Note You cannot cut copy or paste entries in the Node Rack and Block editors To cut or copy and paste cells rows or columns 1 In the spreadsheet select the area that you want to copy 2 Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu or Or in the toolbar This places the contents in the clipboard replacing the clipb
336. icking Print in the dialog box or you can leave this dialog box open while you are making corrections to your screen 2 Make all necessary corrections to your screen To help correct errors in your application that were caught in the screen validation see PanelBuilder Validation Errors in Appendix D Troubleshooting 22 Tip With no objects selected move the pointer over the screen The coordinates of the pointer will be displayed in the status bar This will enable you to find problem objects quickly 3 When you have finished making changes click Update in the dialog box or press F9 to check whether you have fixed the errors 4 When you have fixed all errors click Close Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Screens 8 11 Viewing the Tags Used in a To see which tags have been assigned to the various objects in a Screen screen use the Tag Usage Viewer for Screens The Viewer has search and filter functions so you can choose which tag information is displayed Tag Usage Viewer for Screens T14C7DHP 10 Tank PID x Spreadsheet Operations Search Parameters C Filter In Column Search Direction Down Column C Across All Rows torens regendo ter vretiregTope ode scan configurator __ screentory Screen bject UsageDescrip 4 1 135 pvz NODE Cont Screens 376 Numeric Data Dsp Disp Value 1135 pvz NODE Cont Screens 165 Vertical Bargraph Control 1137 pv3 NODE Cont Screens 179 Horizontal
337. iew extended character set Symbols are identical in function to Multistate Indicators except that the same graphic image label appears for every state Symbols use less memory than Multistate Indicators and the PanelView terminal processes information more quickly for symbols You can include any number of symbols in your screen A symbol can be any monochrome bitmap drawings that you import into a screen Note You can resize symbols See Sizing Objects later in this chapter Creating Objects 9 27 To create a symbol 1 To open the Select Symbol dialog box choose Symbol from the Objects menu or choose from the toolbar Select Symbol x Current symbols DISTOWR BMP Only imported images are EXCHNGRL BMP FTRLIQD BMP an image thatis not in the FTRLIQDL BMP Current symbols list import it FTRVACM BMP FTRVACHL BMP as described below FURNACE BMP FURNACEL BMP EMP _Cancet_ available for selection To use Remove Monochrome Bitmap 2 Select an image and click OK The pointer changes to the active graphic tool 3 Position the pointer where you want to place the image symbol Left click to create the object s outline and drag the outline to position the image symbol 4 When you are finished release the mouse button You can assign different foreground and background colors and fill styles to monochrome graphic images See Changing Object Appearance later in this chap
338. iew your tags and remove any that are not being used Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Validation Error Message Cause Troubleshooting D 5 What to Do Initial Value Offset or Scale factor is bad Ensure de scaled tag start value fits within address The analog tag initial value is too large to fit nto the specified address Check the tag values or change the address and or data type to include more bits The state value for the object s initial state is too large to fit into the specified address Refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags The de scaled initial value or starting value for analog tags that have offset or scale factor 5 too large to fit into the specified address Refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tags Target Firmware Version Exceeded The object configuration you have defined is not compatible with the Target Firmware Version Reconfigure the application for compatibility with the current Target Firmware Version or raise the Target Firmware Version of the application For more information see Appendix E Version Control The image for this object is corrupt Please re import it Corrupted image file Re import the image file The associated write tag must also be assigned if Optional Write Expressions are used There is no assigned write tag associated with the optional write expression used Assign the write tag associated with the optional write express
339. if your application requires extra memory you can multiplex momentary push buttons numeric display data and other objects Important Multiplexing increases the complexity of PLC programs which can outweigh the benefits of address space saved Use multiplexing with caution Planning Addresses After designing the screens for your application you know the types and numbers of objects you will need At this point you can plan the object addresses The addresses used throughout the application are defined in the tag database Each entry in the database is called a tag which is simply a symbolic name for an address The tag database provides a way to define all addresses in one place The same address need only be defined once no matter how many objects use the address To assign an address to an object assign a tag or assign an expression that manipulates the value of one or more read tags before displaying the result on the PanelView terminal For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Using Worksheets to Plan Addresses Use the following worksheets to keep track of the objects and the amount of address space being used Appendix A of this manual contains sample worksheets Fill them in at the same time e Remote I O Tags Worksheet Use the Remote I O Tags worksheet to record information about all dynamic objects Dynamic objects are those that communicate with the PLC For a list of dynamic objects see
340. ifying communications with the PLC The remainder of this chapter includes instructions on using the worksheets as you plan Appendix A of this manual contains sample worksheets Make photocopies of the worksheets and use them as directed Getting to know the process you will be automating is the most important planning step Try to find out as much as possible about the existing process and or the one you plan to design To get information about the process talk to operators process engineers and other experts who will be running the system Ask questions such as What specific tasks does the process need to perform What controls do they need Where should the controls go What values and types of values are they working with e Should access to certain controls be restricted What needs to be alarmed Next find out which programmable controllers the process will be using and how this will affect the application Tip A questionnaire is a valuable tool to get this kind of information quickly When you are finished researching the process make a comprehensive list of its individual operations and tasks The second step in planning an application is designing the screens and objects This section includes the following information how to plan application screen designs how to plan for consistency across the application how to use worksheets as you plan screens and objects Once you have completed the scr
341. ilder 1400e application of the same network type However a PanelBuilder 1400e application of any network type can select an RSView project Each application using the database can modify the database so make sure that any definitions you change will not adversely affect the other applications Databases can be shared only by applications on the same physical computer They cannot be shared over a network Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 34 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 When you select a PanelBuilder 1400e database for the current PanelBuilder 1400e application to share you specify the PanelBuilder application not the database itself The source application s communication information nodes racks and so on is copied into the current application Important If an application already has communication information defined it will be overwritten when you select a shared database When you select an RS View database no communication information is copied to the PanelBuilder 1400e application You must define node and scan class information for the application using the Nodes and Scan Classes editors RS View does not support Remote I O tags In order to select an RSView project RSView must be installed on the same computer as PanelBuilder If RSView is not installed on your machine you need to export the RSView project as a csv file then import this file into PanelBuilder You can also
342. imal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Not applicable to floating point file types Example of bit address B3 173 15 Example of word address N7 12 PLC 5 Binary Files Optional Syntax Fnnn bbbbb F nnn bbbbb File type B Binary File number 3 999 decimal Uses default file number 3 if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file 0 15999 decimal Example B3 1024 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 4 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PLC 5 1 0 and Status Files F ee bb F ee bb optional File type I Input O Output S Status Element number For input and output files PLC 5 10 0 037 octal PLC 5 12 0 037 octal PLC 5 15 0 037 octal PLC 5 25 0 077 octal For status files 0 31 decimal Bit offset within word For input and output files 0 17 octal For status files 0 15 decimal Example O 64 17 PLC 5 Timers Counters and Control Files Fnnn eee MNE bb F File type C Counter T Timer R Control nnn File number 3 999 decimal eee MNE bb optional Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 999 decimal Member mnemonic see Timer Mnemonics Counter Mnemonics and Control Mnemonics under Mnemonic Tables later in this appendi
343. in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options PLC Controlled Silence Alarms The PLC Controlled Silence Alarms option silences the beeper and deactivates the alarm relay when the value associated with this tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression for this control This tag affects the beeper and relay if they are active at the time of 0 to non zero transition and has no effect on alarms triggered after the transition is made Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 24 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PLC Controlled Audio The PLC Controlled Audio option allows the programmable controller to sound the terminal s built in beeper You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression that reads one or more digital or analog tags for this control Whenever the value associated with this tag or expression changes from 0 to non zero the beeper sounds When the value is reset to 0 the beeper stops The programmable controller can sound the beeper by setting the associated control value or you can allow the operator to control the beeper from the terminal by assigning this control to a push button on a screen Important The PLC Controlled Audio does not affect any alarm messages you may have configured to sound the beeper These alarms will sound the beeper regardless of whether you have enabled or disabled PLC Controlled Audio However if
344. in the same Remote I O scan as a PLC Controlled Screen Change the screen will change before the new screen is printed Screen prints are depicted as they actually are but in gray scale rather than color Important A screen print captures the terminal screen image and prints a gray scale representation of the screen If you are using a PLC Controlled Screen Print option ensure that your screen saver is disabled Otherwise if the screen saver is displayed when the print request is received only the screen saver not the application screen and pop up windows will be printed PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control Assigning a digital tag to the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control allows the programmable controller to obtain the time and date and to reset the terminal s internal clock to match The PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control defines the PLC address that triggers the terminal to get the time and date from the individual PLC Controlled Date amp Time controls This option is especially useful if you have several terminals connected to the same programmable controller Instead of an operator having to reset the date and time on each terminal the programmable controller can reset all internal clocks at once Configuring PLC I O Control Options 13 5 When the PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control value changes from O to non zero the terminal resets its internal time and date to the time and date read from the individual
345. in this column Recording the Address For each tag record the PLC address as follows e Start Address For Remote I O applications the starting point of the address To address an area of memory larger than a single bit specify the length or end address The syntax depends on the type of address or controller See Remote I O in Appendix C Addressing Syntax No of Bits End Address or String Tags Only No of Characters The length of the tag s address Specify one of the following For digital tags the bit address you enter in the Start Address column is the entire address Ignore this column e For analog tags specify either the number of bits used or the end address In the Tag Database editor you can enter this address in one of two forms Start Address No of Bits that 1s the start address a comma and the number of bits like this I 011 01 3 Start Address End Address that is the start address a dash and the end word and bit like this 1 011 01 11 04 For String tags specify the length of the string in characters For Block tags specify the number of bits up to 1024 If the tag uses a discrete I O start address the number of bits allowed is 1 to 128 Use a block transfer file for longer block lengths For information about how block tags work to trigger and acknowledge alarms see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms e Tag Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial s
346. inal screen are copied into the new screen in exactly the same location as on the original screen 8 If you copied the objects with their tag assignments that is if Copy with Controls was checked in the Edit menu add the tags definitions to the database if the tags do not already exist Renaming Screens You can change the name and number of an existing screen with the Rename command To rename a screen 1 Select the screen you want to rename in the Screens folder 2 Choose Rename from the Application Window s Screen menu or Screen h Ib New rom the toolbar Copy Rename The Rename Screen dialog box opens with the current number Delete Del and name From Number 1 Name MAIN Cancel To Help Number fi He Name INITIAL 3 In the Number field type in the new number i Note The number 255 is the default number for the Alarm History screen If you assign this number to a screen an error message appears You must either assign a new number to the alarm screen or assign a different number to the application screen 4 In the Name field type in the new name The name can be up to 15 characters long 5 Click OK The new screen name and number replace the original name in the Screens Editor Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Updating Screens Closing Screens Deleting Screens Copy Rename Creating Screens 8 7 When you close a screen the change
347. inal to read from or write to the PLC Important For DH and ControINet analog tags the entire PLC data file element assigned to the tag s address is used in determining the tag s value This is true regardless of the tag s data type For example a Byte data type assigned with the address N7 0 will still look at the entire 16 bits of the integer element even though the tag is interested only in the lower 8 bits PLC logic must ensure that the unused bits are 0 to prevent invalid or out of range data from being read from the address Device Data Source A tag with Device as its data source receives and sends its data from a programmable logic controller on the DH or ControlNet network If you have not configured the node and scan class for the tag you can configure them from the Tag Database editor while you are defining a tag or you can configure them after you have finished creating tags If you are going to define them after the tag is created make sure one of the node scan class or address fields is blank so that when you choose Accept PanelBuilder will not validate the tag and expect a valid tag record complete with supporting node and scan class definitions See Relaxed Validation on the next page Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 22 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Tags Remote 1 0 Data Source A tag with Remote I O as its data source receives its data from a programmable logic cont
348. ine Custom Colors gt gt Cancel 6 Choose the color you want 7 Click OK Using the Touch Cell Grid for PanelView 1200e Applications Only The touch cell grid indicates the touch cells that are available on the PanelView 1200e terminal In 1200e touch screen applications all input objects such as push buttons automatically align themselves to the touch cell grid To show the touch cell grid 1 Choose Grid Settings in the View menu The Grid Settings dialog box appears 2 Select the 1200e Touch Cell Grid checkbox You cannot change the size of the touch cell grid 3 Click OK The touch cell grid appears on the application screen Displaying Function Keys Keypad Applications Only Creating Screens 8 15 When you are creating application screens for keypad terminals you may want to align input objects to the function keys that are assigned to them PanelBuilder enables you to display the function keys for your keypad application screens To display the Function keys e If you have Super VGA resolution choose Maximize from the Control menu or the button in the screen s title bar Ifyou have VGA resolution choose Zoom Out in the View menu The screen appears with the function keys displayed With Super VGA resolution the screen appears as in the following illustration Screens TUTORK 1 INITIAL SCREEN KODIAK ri Duplicator If your computer has Super VGA resolution to return t
349. ink the button to a function key For example if you want the operator to press F21 to go to the next screen create a Goto Screen button and position it on the screen next to the F21 key Then create a label that says F21 and assign F21 to the button Tip To see which objects have been assigned function keys choose Reports from the application window s File menu and print a report on the screen using the Report Selection dialog box Use the View menu s Zoom Out feature to see the function key layout on the terminal Important Assign the same function key only once for each screen To assign a function key 1 Choose a button or create a new button 2 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously Creating Objects 9 57 3 From the Function Key drop down list choose the function key you want to assign Repeat for each button in the object Function keys that are already assigned have an asterisk beside them Function keys that have more than one assignment have multiple asterisks Do not assign the same function key more than once in a screen Tip If you need to use two function keys simultaneously use one key from the horizontal group F1 to F16 and one from the vertical group F17 to F21 Do not use two keys from the same group 4 Click OK Tip Where appropriate move the button so it is positioned next to the assigned function key This makes the app
350. inue pressing Spacebar until you select the desired object Each time you press Spacebar a different overlapping objectis selected Creating Objects 9 17 Example 1 Multiple Levels of Selection When you select an object within an object such as one component of a multi component object hollow handles appear around the inner object The status bar reports which part of the object is selected The following illustration shows three selection levels the whole button the panel and the label The status line is also shown B 1 Click once to select the button b Y 22 Width Height 60 State 0 Normally Open Momentary Push Button 2 Click a second time to select the button s panel a 15 22 Width al Height 60 Panel 3 Click a third time to select the button s label a 39 r 43 Width 32 Height 20 Text Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 18 Creating Objects Deselecting Objects To deselect this Do this A selected object Shift4click the object or Press Shift S pacebar Several selected objects Hold down Shift and drag a selection box around the objects or Shift click each object All selected objects Click in the drawing area away from any objects or Press Esc When you deselect an object the handles around the object disappear Zooming In and Out Next State Alt N Previous State Alt P Grid Settings Use the Zoom In and Zoom
351. ion e File Number The number assigned to a Scheduled File By default the numbers begin with 1 and are selected from the drop down menu in the Scheduled File editor A Scheduled File consists of a read and or write file e Size Specify the number of words required minimum of 0 to a maximum of 240 Usage Specify whether the file is a read or write file Planning Addresses After defining the screens for your application you know the types and number of objects you will need With the node and scan class definitions complete you are ready to plan the object addresses For each screen use one or more Tags worksheets to record tag information for each dynamic object Also use the Tags worksheets to record information about Alarm and Information windows and PLC I O Control options These items are not specific to particular Screens so use a separate worksheet for them Important The Device Tags Worksheet is used for DH and ControlNet Unscheduled applications The ControlNet Scheduled Tags Worksheet is used only for ControlNet Scheduled applications Guidelines for Organizing Tags to Optimize DH and ControlNet Unscheduled Communications Performance Group tags as closely together as possible Aconsideration for optimizing network traffic relates to the addresses PLC data file addresses that are assigned to tags PanelView reads or writes data in packets A packet can contain up to 119 words of data depending on th
352. ion for the object Only four Trend objects are allowed per screen You have assigned more than four Trend objects to the current screen Ensure that no more than four Trend objects are used on the current screen No more than 3000 points are allowed in all the Background plotting trend pens in an application The total number of data points for all pens using background plotting in your application cannot exceed 3000 Configure fewer pens for background plotting or reduce the sample rate or time span of some of the trend objects No more than 85 pens are allowed in all the Background plotting trend objects in an application You can configure a maximum of 85 pens across all Trends in your application for background screen plotting Reduce the number of pens configured for background screen plotting in your application ControlNet Scheduled File tag name requires a minimum of Firmware Version 5 You have assigned a Scheduled File tag name with a Firmware Version that is earlier than Version 5 Set the Target Firmware Version to Version 5 or later Maximum number of tag references 16 300 has been exceeded You have exceeded the maximum number of tag references Remove unwanted tag references Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 What Is Version Control Version Control and Application Validation Appendix E Version Control Version Control is a set of rules embedded in
353. ion type Important If your application is configured for a touch screen terminal you cannot change it to run on a keypad terminal or vice versa Dynamic and Static Objects Objects are dynamic or static depending on whether or not they interact with the programmable controller Dynamic objects communicate with the programmable controller by receiving or transmitting information You assign one or more tags or expressions to each dynamic object You can use tags to write to or read from the programmable controller In general you can use expressions to read from the programmable controller only For more information about tags see Chapter 6 Defining Tags For more information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions e Static objects appear on the screen but do not interact with the programmable controller Therefore you do not assign tags or expressions to these objects Some examples of static objects are display text and lines Display and Input Objects Dynamic objects are either display input or display and input objects depending on how they interact with the programmable controller Display objects receive information from the programmable controller These objects usually display information about the status of the process For example the programmable controller places a value in the control tag of a bar graph The bar graph object reads this value and displays it visually on the application scre
354. ion will communicate RIO Racks and RIO Block Transfer Files editors for configuring the racks block transfer file definitions and Pass Through control byte for Remote I O application file transfers Scheduled File editor for defining the read and write files for Scheduled tags Terminal Setup dialog box for specifying the start up screen application type application comment and setting timing parameters Tag Database editor for defining programmable controller addresses required by the application Alarms dialog box for configuring the alarm information that informs users about problems when the application is running PLC I O Control dialog box for assigning tags to PLC Controlled and Notify PLC options Information Message Window dialog box for configuring the look and function of the Information Message window Three Message editors for creating and editing messages Screen editor for designing the application screens and configuring the application screen objects that allow the operator to monitor and control the process or machine What Are You Building Use PanelBuilder to build applications that run on PanelView terminals PanelBuilder applications help automate industrial processes allowing an operator to monitor and control a single machine or an entire process through the terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Version Compatibility Required Equipment Introduction to PanelBuilder 1 3 Applications created in
355. ions Screen Worksheet for 1000e Terminals 640 by 480 Use this worksheet to plan the object positions for each screen you want to create for PanelView 1000e keypad or touch screen terminal applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Application File Name Full or Listen Only Access 17 16 15 14 13 12 Circle One PLC Output Bit Numbers 1 10 7 6 Rack Number 5 4 0 i i 17 16 15 14 13 12 PLC Input Bit Numbers 1 10 7 6 5 0 Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Page 1 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Number of Words READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Enter a number between 1 and 64 Enter a number between 1 and 64 Circle One Circle One PLC Bit Numbers 15 14 13 12 IU 10 9 8 7 6 WN Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Page 2 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Number of Words READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Enter a number between 1 and 64 Enter a number between 1 and 64 Circle One Circle One PLC Bit Nu
356. ions that require the same tags you can define each tag once in one database and share this database with other applications The Private Database When you create a new application its tag database is private and is stored as part of the application file All the information relating to the application from the communication definitions that is nodes scan classes racks and block transfer files to the tags and the screens is contained in one file This file has the extension pvc Communication and other information Tags Screens The application file pvc When a tag database is part of the application file no other applications can access it If you are creating a single application or if none of the tags in your applications are common this is all you need Note An advantage of using a private tag database is that the application is self contained within the pvc file This simplifies moving the application complete with its tags to another machine or directory Important When you make changes to the tags in a private database the changes are not saved until you save the application Communication and other information Link to tag database Screens A PanelBuilder 1400e Application Using Shared Tag Databases Defining Tags 6 33 The Shared Database If you are creating multiple PanelBuilder 1400e applications or if you are working on a PanelBuilder 1400e a
357. ique in each message editor and can be any signed long integer except 0 At runtime messages are displayed according to their trigger values For example when the programmable controller moves a number that matches an information message trigger value to the Information Window Control the Information Message Window appears if it is enabled and displays the message that has been assigned this trigger value The trigger values you assign can help simplify PLC programming For example you could assign trigger values to these messages as follows Message Trigger Value Temperature is 32 32 Warning Temperature is 1009 1009 Danger Temperature is 1457 1457 In this example the trigger value of each message matches its temperature Creating and Editing Messages Local Messages Creating Messages 10 3 You create and edit each message type in its own editor Note The procedure for creating and editing alarm information and local messages is identical except that alarm messages have extra features These features are explained separately Guidelines for Creating and Editing Messages Each message must have both a trigger value and text Alarm messages are the only exception in that text is optional If the audio print or relay alarm option is set to Yes you do not need to enter text But if the Message to PLC alarm option is set to Yes you must enter text The trigger value must be a signed
358. is optional bit offset All numbers are octal e g E011 12 Block Transfer Bff ww bb B is block transfer ff followed by a space is file number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are octal e g B1 01 01 Discrete SLC I O ss ww bb I is input is output ss is optional slot number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are decimal e g O 01 18 Notes Initial State Value Tag Start Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run This is called the tag s Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists DH Communications Worksheet Application File Name PanelView Station Number Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft Node Definitions Node Name PLC Type Station Address Timeout sec ee The Unsolicited Messages Node is the PanelView terminal By default the terminal s Station Address is the DH station number configured in the current application The Station Address can be changed in the Panel View terminal s Terminal Network Setup screen Note For more node definitions use additional copies of this worksheet Scan Class Definitions Note The default foreground and background rates are 1 000 seconds and 86400 000 seconds respectively ControlNet Communications Worksheet Applic
359. ith the time and date when the alarm occurred The alarm message will be printed again with the time and date when the alarm is acknowledged You can configure the printer s form feeds and line feeds through the PanelView terminal s Printer Setup screen For information about configuring the printer see the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Print can also send the triggered alarm message to the Dataliner display For more information on how to connect a Dataliner message display device to a PanelView terminal see Connecting the Dataliner in Chapters 2 3 or 4 in the PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual Display sends the message to the Alarm Window This option is enabled by default If this option is disabled the message will still appear in the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens if these are enabled but will not be displayed in the Alarm Window Relay energizes the alarm relay when the alarm is triggered This switches on whatever device is connected to the relay such as a warning light or remote audio alarm Message to PLC sends the alarm message to the PLC where it can be retrieved by a third party utility or another PanelView terminal This option is disabled by default To use this option you must assign the Alarm Message controls in the Global Controls tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box For more information see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms If you use
360. l This chapter describes how to define the communication parameters in PanelBuilder The first section of this chapter describes defining communications for Remote I O applications The second section describes defining communications for DH and ControlNet applications To define communications for a DH or ControlNet application see Defining Communications for a DH or ControlNet Application later in this chapter The third section of this chapter describes how to change from one communication network type to another For information about changing from one network type to another see Changing the Network Type later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 2 Defining Communications Defining Communications To define communications for a Remote I O application also called for a Remote 1 0 RIO use these editors Application Communication Setup Editor to define the baud rate used to communicate between the terminal and the programmable controller If you are transferring an application to the PanelView terminal using Remote I O Pass Through over a DH ControlNet or Ethernet network you can define the station address of the terminal s PLC for DH and Remote I O ControlNet and Remote I O or Ethernet and Remote I O Pass Through and you can define network file transfer control tags RIO Racks Editor to identify the programmable logic controller the terminal will communicate with and
361. l distance apart vertically Space Horizontal Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart horizontally T eget Centers are CY Me RM separated by an equal L Ete vertical Select objects Space vertically distance Centers are 4 o separated by an equal horizontal distance Select objects S pace horizontally Flipping Objects Flipping a group of selected objects creates a mirror image of those objects You cannot flip single objects such as graphic images symbols buttons lists and text objects 1 Choose the objects or object components 2 Choose a flip command from the Arrange menu This command Flips selected objects this way Flip Vertical Top to bottom upside down Flip Horizontal Left to right Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 48 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The following illustration shows objects flipped vertically and horizontally m m m m m m m C D DIC m m a m m m D AIB B m m m m m m Select group Flip vertical Flip horizontal Arranging Labels You can arrange labels such as multiple lines of text or graphic images within an object To space labels vertically or horizontally you must first position one object at each end of the area in which you want to arrange them To align or space multiple lin
362. l analog value uses decimal digits otherwise use L K Min Analog Minimum analog value use 0 L Max Analog Maximum analog value use 100 M Initial Analog Initial analog value analog tag N Scale Scale multiplier val Scale X Offset analog tag O Offset Offset analog tag P Deadband Deadband unused use 0 Q Units Units label use blank R Off Label Digital Digital off label use blank S On Label Digital Digital on label use blank T Initial Digital Initial digital value must be either the on or off label use 0 or 1 digital tag U Length String String length string tag V Initial String Initial string value string tag W Node Name Node name device tag X Address Programmable logic controller address device tag Y Scan class Scan class name use A K or custom names device tag Z DDE Application DDE application name use blank AA DDE Topic DDE topic name use blank DDE Item DDE item name use blank AC System Source System data source name use blank AD System Source Index System data source index use blank AE RIO Address Remote 1 0 address Remote 1 0 tags AF Element Size Block Use B block tag AG Number Number of bits in the block tag Elements Block AH Initial Block Initial value of a block tag 0 or 1 The New Database command on the Database menu creates a new empty tag database for the application When you u
363. larm tags or expressions That is the same alarm can be triggered by different tags or expressions If the same alarm is triggered by multiple tags or expressions in the same PLC scan multiple instances of that alarm will be indicated Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 16 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To assign tags or expressions to Word triggered Alarm Triggers 1 In the Configure Alarms dialog box select the Global Controls tab 2 Double click Alarm Triggers or click Alarm Triggers and the Assign Exprn Expression button The Alarm Control Expressions dialog box appears Note Choose Assign Expression even if you want to enter a tag Alarm Control Expressions xi Alarm Control Expression Clear d Alm enl o 2 IF cni lt 100 THEN 2 Alm gt 150 Cut a E Paste 3 Click on a row to enter the tag or expression To assign a tag click Assign Tag The Tag Browser dialog box appears From this dialog box you can choose an existing tag by double clicking it or create a new one by choosing New Tag If you choose New Tag the Tag Editor dialog box appears For details on using the Tag editor see Other Methods of Creating Tags in Chapter 6 Defining Tags To assign an expression click Assign Exprn Expression The Expression editor appears For more information on how to use the Expression editor see Chapter 7
364. lass Editor 5 15 scan classes 5 24 Scheduled F iles about 5 26 configuring 5 27 editor 5 27 tags 6 3 6 16 setting up terminal communications 5 17 station number 5 17 ControlNet Communications Worksheet A 1 using 2 38 ControlNet Scheduled Tags Worksheet A 1 Controls alarms 11 11 copying with screen object 8 5 Conventions commands P 11 documentation P 9 key combinations 11 mouse P 9 print P 9 selection P 9 selection in dialog boxes P 10 shortcut keys P 11 Converting network types 5 28 PanelBuilder 1200 applications 3 5 PanelBuilder for DOS applications 3 5 private tag database to shared 6 34 tags 5 29 Copying applications 3 10 with shared tag database 3 10 expressions 7 22 objects 9 36 screen contents 8 5 screens 8 4 Counter mnemonics C 13 Creating applications 2 1 3 2 arcs 9 34 block transfer files 5 12 expressions 7 1 extended characters 9 25 folders 6 8 graphic image 9 29 labels 9 35 lines 9 33 messages 10 3 10 6 objects 9 20 9 22 panels 9 33 reports 3 12 symbols 9 26 screens 8 2 tag folder 6 4 tags 6 1 text 9 24 wedges 9 34 Cursor configuring visibility 12 10 retain on cancel 12 10 visibility 12 10 Cutting objects 9 36 D Data flow optimizing for ControlNet 5 24 Data Highway Plus See DH Data sources 6 3 6 21 and relaxed validation 6 22 device 6 3 6 21 6 22 and scan classes 5 24 Remote
365. ld time has been reached resets the Acknowledge Control tag to 0 acknowledges the oldest unacknowledged alarm and continues until all unacknowledged alarms have been acknowledged Press Cancel to abort the Clear All process You can use three editors to configure alarms in PanelBuilder 1400e Touch Screen 640x480 Remote 1 0 Private Tags E gt PLC Communications Communication Setup ga Nodes 1 Scan Classes RIO Racks LE RIO Block Transfer Files E Scheduled Files E gt System m Terminal Setup Tag Database Alarms Ri PLC 1 0 Control 5 Information Message Window Messages Alarm Messages amp Information Messages Bi Local Messages im Screens Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 8 Configuring Alarms Configuring Global Open the System folder and choose Alarms to open the Configure Controls Alarms dialog box Select the Global Controls tab Message Window Alarm Trigger Alarm Acknowledge to PLC Bit C Bit C Word Word Help Operator C Operator and Remote Control unassigned unassigned unassigned Remote Acknowledge unassigned Silence Alarms to PLC unassigned PLC Controlled Silence Alarms unassigned PLC Controlled Audio unassigned PLC Controlled Relay unassigned Message to PLC unassigned Message Control unassigned Message Handshake unassigne
366. lect this white box the name of the associated file appears in the status line You must delete the box or re import the file Otherwise PanelBuilder will report a validation error Creating Graphic Images Creating Objects 9 29 Exporting Symbols You can export a symbol to another PanelBuilder application by simply copying it and pasting it into the new application See Cutting Copying and Pasting later in this chapter To use a PanelBuilder graphic image in a non PanelBuilder program import the image s file into the program as described in that program s documentation Graphic images are static objects that are used to illustrate screens objects functions and so on You can add graphic images to the screen background or add them to an object as object labels Graphic images can be monochrome or color bitmap drawings that you import into a screen For graphic images you can use bitmaps or AutoCAD graphics saved in the dxf format Graphic images can be used as labels inside buttons For example you can add a graphic image for each state so the image changes as the state changes For details see Adding Labels later in this chapter Note You can resize graphic images See Sizing Objects later in this chapter Note Not all types of dxf images can be used in PanelBuilder For information about which versions of dxf images will work with PanelBuilder see the Readme file which accompanies your softw
367. lication easier to use on the PanelView terminal To unassign a function key Choose the blank item in the Function Key drop down list or assign another function key to the selected button Configuring Object States Certain objects in PanelBuilder 1400e can have different states There are two state objects and variable state objects These are the two state objects e Momentary Push Buttons Latched Push Buttons Maintained Push Buttons Each time a two state button is pressed it changes state For example when a Normally Closed Momentary Push Button is pressed it changes from On State 0 to Off State 1 gt Button press Button release State 0 State 1 You can change the appearance of the object for each state For example if State 0 of a Normally Closed Momentary Push Button appears black and displays the word for state 1 you might change the color to white and add the word Off Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 58 Creating Objects These are the variable state objects This object Can have this many Is each state s states appearance individually configurable Multistate Indicator 2 255 Yes Multistate Push Button 2 255 Yes Scrolling List s Multistate Indicator 2 255 Yes Object List Symbol 2 255 Yes The table shows that multistate objects can have a different appearance depending on which state is active You can individua
368. lication validation process You must assign tags or expressions to all dynamic objects on your screens For information about tags see Chapter 6 Defining Tags For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions For details about a particular object see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual check the configuration section for the object you are configuring All dynamic objects require at least one tag or expression Depending on the object several tags and expressions may be required In general for read functions you can use either a tag or an expression The only exception is the ASCII Display object which uses a string tag Expressions do not support string tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 64 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 For write functions you generally must use tags only The exceptions are the Numeric Entry Keypad Numeric Input Cursor Point and Numeric Keypad Enable Button objects These objects allow you to use an optional write expression that manipulates the operator s input before sending it to a write tag You can define each tag when needed using the Tag Browser dialog box or you can define all the tags in the Tag Database editor You define expressions individually in the configuration dialog box for each object although you can copy expressions from one object to another To assign a tag or expression 1
369. lied is shown beneath the Filter In Column button In the example below the last filter applied is a filter string on the Configurator column Tag Usp Viewer for Applination TLI TORK Sproadecheast pernios Filter Porometece P ous Filter Eirin Column Cantar Piarum Filer Tag 01010 Bic Digital Fuld ry Time to D a n z32 0 3 13 Tag 3 n T 17 Bit Block Full Almas Alarm Trigger p Tip To see a list of tags associated with one particular screen open that screen and choose Tag Usage Viewer from the screen editor s Screen menu To filter the list of tags 1 Click the Filter In Column button 2 Choose the column you want to set the filter in from the drop down list in the In Column field 3 Specify the limiting filter in the Filter String field The filter is not case sensitive 4 Click the Filter button Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Tags 6 29 Example Setting Filters To seta filter to view tags that have addresses in the output file only do this 1 Click the Filter in Column button 2 Choose Address from the drop down list in the In Column field 3 Type O inthe Filter String Field 4 Click the Filter button To seta filter to view tags associated with the Alarm window only do this 1 Choose Configurator from the drop down list in the In Column field 2 Type Alarms in the Filter String column
370. lign Bottom Bottom most selected object Align Center Points Center of all selected objects Align to Grid Aligns all selected objects upper left hand corners to the nearest screen gridpoint Aligning objects left right and center m m a a a a Select objects Align left a a a a E Align center Align right Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 46 Creating Objects Aligning objects top middle and bottom Align top Align bottom Aligning objects to grid Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Arrange Group Ctl G Ungroup Stri H Send to Back Bring to Front Align Left Align Center Align Right Align Top Align Middle Align Bottom Align Center Points Align to Grid Flip Vertical Flip Horizontal Arrange Unaroup Ctrl H Send to Back Bring to Front Align Left Align Center Align Right Align Top Align Middle Align Bottom Align Center Points Align to Grid Space Vertical Space Horizontal Creating Objects 9 47 Spacing Objects Use the Space Vertical and Space Horizontal commands to space the objects vertically or horizontally so the center points of the objects are at equal distances from each other 1 Choose the objects you want to space 2 Choose a space command from the Arrange menu This command Does this Space Vertical Places the centers of the selected objects an equa
371. line Alarm Message Window displays the most recent alarm message only with the time and date of occurrence and the alarm state It can appear at the top or bottom of the terminal s screen depending on how you configure it in the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box This window has no buttons and allows the current application screen s buttons to remain active for operator input Tip Because you will not be able to call up the Alarm History screen from the Single line Alarm Message Window include a Goto Screen button on your screens that calls up the Alarm History screen Important If the Single line Alarm Message Window is used the operator can acknowledge and clear alarms only through the Alarm History screen See About the Alarm History Screen later in this chapter for more information Single line Alarm Message Windows can also be cleared by the programmable controller Single line Alarm Message HEIHINIBENHENIME Window top of screen Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 32 Configuring Alarms Single line Alarm Message Window bottom of screen eee 29389 AM 12 13 96 Safety bar 10 2 15 open The Single line Alarm Message Window can be removed from the screen by acknowledgement of the alarm in the Alarm History screen e a PLC Controlled Clear Window tag or expression e aremote acknowledgement from the PLC If
372. ll Amaio Puli Tull Digital Tull Soran 3455 Homarcarg Puen Indicmatrr Leth Momesrcarg BA Pasion Carl 2 1887 Momrprars Ho Rice Indicaret Cetli List Cazezal 4 765 Goel Liar Selector Comal 2 CIR Conk melector Cantal 3208 Hi Pussfen Costal icrsara Snr Sonn l iji Bini beer The field containing the first occurrence of the specified text is highlighted In the example above the first occurrence of the specified text Cntl List Selector is highlighted Click the Search button again to continue the search When the search has reached the bottom of the list it will wrap to the top and begin again You can search a filtered list If one or more filters are in place the most recent filter is named under the Filter In Column button For information about customizing the display in the viewer see Changing Column Width and Row Height in Chapter 4 Working with Editors Note The Tag Usage Viewer retains the new settings when you change column widths The next time you open the Tag Usage Viewer columns you shrank to hide will appear as thin strips that you can resize to hide or reveal Rows are restored when you reopen the viewer Renaming a Tag Defining Tags 6 31 Use the following procedure to rename specified instances or all instances of a tag 1 From the Application Window choose Replace Tag Na
373. ll not permit a download You can use a digital tag for the Transfer Inhibit control since the terminal only looks for 0 and non zero Typically the control will be set and cleared by the programmable controller Transfer Request This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives a download request It is reset to 0 by the terminal when the download starts This control should use a digital tag that can be written to by the terminal You can program the PLC to clear the Transfer Inhibit control when this control is set to 1 This will allow subsequent file downloads to proceed e Transfer Status This control is set to 1 by the terminal when it receives the first download block transfer It remains set throughout the transfer and is reset to 0 when the download is completed when the terminal s mode is switched or when the power is cycled The Transfer Request control is cleared when the Transfer Status control is set This control should use a digital tag that can be written to by the terminal For more information on using Remote I O Pass Through to download applications see Chapter 15 Transferring Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 8 Defining Communications Assigning Device Type and Racks for the PanelView Terminal ES PLC Communications Communication Setup eee Nodes 1 Scan Classes ransfer Files jc Scheduled Files Rack Editor Untitled Edt View Help
374. lled Audio is not active Does the Ack Alarm have Relay Flag Yes y Disable Relay if PLC contolled Relay is not Active Does the Ack Alarm have Print Flag Yes Y Print ALL instances of Acknowldged Alarm from the Oldest to Newest No Is Notify PLC option enabled Nom Yes Remote Alarm Ack Value Alarm Normal Value AND Alarm Ack Tag is Block Yes No Y Write Remote Alarm Ack Value to Alarm Ack Tag Word or Block Was the Write to Alarm Ack out of range Yes y Generate MISTAKE Ack Out or Range Set Acknowledge Button to PLC Bit for Hold Time Duration Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 22 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Example 4 PLC Logic Used to Control Remote Alarm Acknowledge from the PLC to the PanelView Terminal NEQ MOV NOT EQUAL MOVE Source A N7 8 Source N7 8 0 0 Source B N7 11 Destination N7 11 0 FIFO Load C Rung 2 Done 0 B3 R6 0 FFL 111 FIFO LOAD EN 0 DN Source Control Length EM Position Rung 3 ACK Control FIFO Load Ack To PLC Tag Empty NEQ N7 9 R6 0 FFU NOT EQUAL FIFO UNLOAD EU Source A N71 1 EM FIFO 3N7 12 0 Destination 7 2 L DN Source B N7 12 Control R6 0 0 Length 50 EM
375. llows the operator to reset the alarm count to 0 and the accumulated time in alarm to 00 00 00 User confirmation is required For bit triggered alarms after a reset an active alarm that has not been re triggered will continue to log accumulated time the alarm will be displayed with Qty 0 and a non zero accumulated time For word triggered alarms the accumulated time data is not displayed so the display shows Qty 0 only Page Up P age Down Displays the previous or following page of alarms Cursor Up Cursor Down Moves up or down one line through the list of alarms Print Prints out the alarm status of all the alarms in the currently active screen mode User confirmation is required Alarm History Opens the Alarm History screen Exit Depending on how the Alarm Status screen was initially invoked this button returns the operator to the Alarm History screen the Alarm Message Window or the last user defined application screen Important Whether the alarm quantity and accumulated time counts are reset manually by the operator from the Alarm Status screen or automatically by the programmable controller depends on how the screen is configured Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 48 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Resetting the Alarm Status Screen s QTY TIME The Alarm Status screen s quantity and time counts QTY TIME are reset when the PLC Controlled QTY TIM
376. lly configure the appearance of each state When you create a new object each state s default appearance is already assigned To view the default state appearances 1 Choose the object The status bar shows which state is being displayed 2 Choose the object state to view by doing one of the following choose Next State or Previous State from the View menu Next State Previous State Alt P press Alt N for next state or Alt P for previous state choose State o from the toolbar by using the mouse or by pressing Ctrl Shift S and choose a state Grid Settings Zoom In Zoom Out Y Show Color Palette Y Show Toolbox The appearance of the object changes The status bar indicates the object s new state 3 If there are more states move through them to view them all To configure state appearances 1 Choose the object 2 Choose a state as described above 3 Make the desired changes using the options from the Format menu If you wish add text or graphic image labels Configuring Number of States Variable state objects are created with a default number of states For example a symbol has four states by default You can change the default number of states The previous table shows the allowable number of states for each variable state object Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Objects 9 59 To configure the number of states 1 Open the object s configuration di
377. load for a ControlNet application PCMCIA memory card for a Remote I O DH or ControlNet application Databook compatible drive For more information about equipment necessary for transferring applications see Optional Equipment in this chapter To transfer application files to or from PanelView terminals the PanelView e Transfer Utility must be installed This utility is included with your PanelBuilder distribution It is also available separately in the PanelView Transfer Utility Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E ND7 For information about installing the PanelView e Transfer Utility and transferring application files see the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 Programmable Controllers PanelView terminals can be connected to a programmable controller as follows e PanelView terminals can be connected to any Allen Bradley 1771 Remote I O Link Applicable host controllers include almost all Allen Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers as well as certain IBM computers VME Controllers and the DEC Q Bus interface Newly released Allen Bradley programmable controllers not listed that support the 1771 Remote I O link will support PanelView terminals Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 6 Introduction to PanelBuilder Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 DH The following table lists the available programmable controller and scanner types
378. location t o terminal store uploaded data Transfer Method Select upload method Serial Configure Method Browse Transfer Topology Currently Configured Uplosd Spore 5 Serial connection m Upload from a PV terminal to your PC via a direct serial connection Serial driver Serial 1 For Help press F1 3 For information about configuring the upload or download once the main download upload dialog box appears see Chapter 3 Uploading 1000e 1200e 1400e Application Files and Alarm History Files Chapter 4 Downloading 1000 1200 1400 Application Files and Chapter 5 Configuring Communications Settings for 1000e 1200e 1400e Application Transfers in the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 To transfer an application from the PanelView e Transfer Utility See the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Appendix A Sample Worksheets The worksheets in this appendix are designed to help you plan your application To complete these worksheets see Chapter 2 Planning Applications Make copies of the worksheets as you need them and save the originals for future use This Appendix contains the following worksheets Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Use this worksheet to help you keep track of the PLC addresses Use one for each full or partial rack assignment
379. long integer A value of 0 cannot be assigned Each trigger value must be unique in each editor You can use any ASCII character including the characters in the extended ASCII character set See Appendix B The Extended Character Set in this manual Also for a listing of the regular ASCII character set see Appendix D ASCII Character Set in the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual The following table describes the fonts and message lengths you can use Information Messages Alarm Messages Font size all all except Extra Large Single line window Small Tiny and Very Tiny Multi line window Small and Double High Panel window all except Extra Large Tiny and Very Tiny Where to configure Format menu with the Configure Information Message Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog characters earlier versions font size Local Message Display Window dialog box box object selected essage length in 1 256 1 144 0 80 characters Version 2 or later firmware essage length in 1 72 1 70 single width 0 50 1 35 double width messages displayable atone time aximum number of limited by object size 3 Single line window 1 lines displayable per Multi line window 1 message Panel window 1 6 aximum number of 1 1 Single line window 1 Multi line window up to 20 depending on text size Panel window 1 Publication 2711E 6 14 November
380. lors 9 49 changing line styles 9 51 colors 9 49 commands 9 15 9 21 configure dialog box 9 55 configuring 9 55 control list selector with enter 9 5 9 8 control list selector without enter 9 5 9 8 9 21 copying 9 36 with addresses 9 37 without addresses 9 37 creating 9 20 9 22 cutting 9 36 date display 9 5 9 13 9 21 decrement value button 9 5 9 9 9 21 defaults 9 54 deleting 9 55 defined 9 1 deleting 9 37 drawing 9 20 duplicating 9 37 dynamic 9 2 read 9 2 write 9 2 editing 9 36 ellipse 9 5 9 12 9 21 fill 9 50 flipping 9 47 Goto Configure Mode 9 8 goto screen button 9 6 9 12 9 21 graphic images 9 6 9 9 9 29 grouping 9 42 increment value button 9 6 9 10 9 21 initial state value 2 27 2 52 8 7 9 4 9 63 interlocked push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 join line ends 9 33 keypad 9 2 atched push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 ines 9 6 9 12 9 21 9 33 istindicator 9 6 9 9 9 21 iststates configuring 9 61 ocal message display 9 6 9 9 9 21 maintained push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 menu 9 15 9 20 9 21 momentary normally closed push button 9 11 9 21 open push button 9 11 9 21 moving 9 40 precision movement 9 41 with Position dialog box 9 41 multi component 9 54 multistate indicator 9 6 9 9 9 21 multistate push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 non retentive 9 3 9 5 normally closed momentary push button 9 6 normally open momentary push button 9 6 numeric data
381. low the terminal to talk to more than one programmable controller using only a single tag address The terminal will maintain a PLC 2 format data table of 512 words Data is retained across power cycles and mode switches At runtime a Panel View application can interact with programmable controllers using Unsolicited Messages by defining tags on the Unsolicited_Message node with addresses in the 512 word data table When the application runs new values written to the tag are stored in the terminal s data table where they can be read by other programmable controllers In addition the programmable controller can write values to the terminal s data table and Panel View will scan the tag addresses to read the new values Note Tags that are assigned to a ControlNet Unsolicited_Msgs node will only work with a 1784 KTCS card Tags defined on the Unsolicited_Message node must use standard PLC 2 addressing format See Appendix C Addressing Syntax for addressing format information Any tag that has Device as its data source must be assigned to a scan class At runtime the Panel View terminal periodically updates its tag information by scanning the programmable controller addresses You determine how often a tag value is updated by assigning the tag to a scan class that you have configured in the Scan Classes editor Make sure that tags with rapidly changing PLC values are assigned to a fast scan rate while those that do not change often are s
382. lowed by a space to separate it from the word number S1 specifies a read file and S2 specifies a write file WWW Start Word 0 239 decimal bb Start Bit 0 15 decimal If none is specified 0 is assumed Note The address can also be specified as a length or a range For length use the format Fff www bb 11 where 11 is the bit length For range use the format Fff www bb www bb Examples S2 19 is file 2 write file word 19 bit 0 S1 31 2 14 is a Scheduled file address with a length specified S1 31 2 31 15 is a Scheduled file address with a range specified PanelBuilder Problems Problem Appendix D Troubleshooting This appendix contains information about problems you could encounter using the PanelBuilder software It also contains causes of and suggested responses to PanelBuilder Error and Validation Error Messages you could encounter For information about troubleshooting file transfers see the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 The following table identifies some of the problems you could encounter using PanelBuilder software Cause What to Do Program won t run Windows 3 1 SHARE EXE has not been installed add the following line to your AUTOE XEC BAT file share exe F 5100 L 600 A copy of PanelBuilder is already running Use the instance of PanelBuilder that is already running Not enough Low Memory below 1 MB
383. ly specify the initial state When an initial state is defined for an object the state value of this state overrides the object s control tag s initial value The object s initial state value is used to initialize the programmable controller Note If the initial state is not defined the object state value will not override the control tag s value Two objects with different initial state values cannot share the same tag or a validation error will occur Safety Considerations for Retentive Objects Instead of using a retentive object to start a machine or process use a momentary input object such as a Momentary Push Button Also make sure that the programmable controller is programmed to stop any machines or processes whenever the communication is interrupted so that a machine or process can only be restarted by an operator ATTENTION Never use a retentive object to initiate a process or turn on a machine For example imagine your programmable controller is programmed to turn a machine on whenever a Maintained Push Button is set to 1 If communication is temporarily cut while the Maintained Push Button is set to 1 the machine will automatically restart as soon as communication resumes Creating Objects 9 5 Retentive Objects and Tags Retentive objects reduce programmable controller programming instructions Every retentive object must have a tag that writes to the programmable controller More than one retentive object
384. m as hollow or solid You can also import bmp files from another application or AutoCAD graphics saved in the dxf format and place them on the screen Indicators List Indicator displays a list of programmable controller states with the current state highlighted The value of the Indicator State control tag or expression determines which item is highlighted State values are user defined Multistate Indicator can display between 2 and 255 states one state at a time Each state can have a different combination of text colors graphic images and attributes The value of the Indicator State control tag or expression determines which state is displayed State values are user defined Local Message Display Local Message Display object displays messages from the list of local messages to provide status information or instructions to the operator Numerics Decrement Value Button decreases the value stored at the Button Control Tag by a whole or a fractional value each time the button is pushed If the button is held down the programmable controller value continues to decrease until it reaches a preassigned limit The object can be configured to display the numeric value contained in the tag Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 10 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Increment Value Button increases the value stored at the Button Control Tag by a whole or a fractional value each time the button is p
385. m to zero There are two ways to have the quantity and time values reset on the Alarm Status screen Manual reset the operator can reset the alarms by pressing the QTY Time Reset Button if the QTY Time Reset Button is enabled Automatic reset the programmable controller can reset the alarms automatically if the PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset control is assigned Important Be sure you have at least one reset enabled If both are disabled the alarm count cannot be reset Note If the value of the TIME field exceeds 99 99 99 the field displays instead The QTY field stops accumulating at 9999 Foreground Choose the foreground color for the messages in the Alarm Status screen Background Choose the background color for the messages in the Alarm Status screen 3 Assign controls in the Control field This control Does this PLC Controlled QTY TIME Allows the programmable controller to reset the time and Reset quantity counts in the Alarm Status screen Whenever the programmable controller sets the control value from 0 to non zero the time and quantity are reset Assign a tag or expression to enable this option For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions QTY TIME Reset to PLC Allows the terminal to notify the programmable controller when an Alarm Status QTY Time Reset has occurred whether from a PLC Controlled QTY TIME Reset from the Reset QTY Time button Whe
386. mber 1998 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating Objects Object Type Keypad or Read or Retentive Touch Write Screen Goto Screen Button Static Both Not N A applicable Graphic Image Static Both Not N A applicable ncrement Value Button Dynamic Both Write Yes nterlocked Push Button Dynamic Both Write Yes Latched Push Button Dynamic Both Both Non retentive Line Static Both Not N A applicable List Indicator Dynamic Both Read Non retentive Local Message Display Dynamic Both Read Non retentive aintained Push Button Dynamic Both Both Yes ultistate Indicator Dynamic Both Read Non retentive ultistate Push Button Dynamic Both Both Yes ormally Closed Momentary Push Dynamic Both Both Non Button retentive ormally Open Momentary Push Dynamic Both Non Button retentive Numeric Data Display Dynamic Both Read Non retentive umeric Entry Keypad smalland Dynamic Touch Both Yes large Screen Numeric Input Cursor Point Dynamic Keypad Both Yes Numeric Keypad Enable Button Dynamic Keypad Both Yes Panel Static Both Not N A applicable Rectangle Static Both Not N A applicable Return to Previous Screen Button Static Both Not N A applicable Scale Static Both Not N A applicable Screen Keypad Enable Button Static Keypad Not N A applicable Screen List Selector Static Both Not N A applicable Screen Print Button
387. mbers 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 Rack Assignments Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 115 2K 5 000 Ft 230 4K 2 500 Ft Note You must make at least one rack assignment Additional rack assignments are optional Record the Rack Number and circle the Module Groups Last Chassis designation and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary Rack Assignments 01 23 45 67 Y N Fui Listen Only 23 45 67 Y Fel LienOny Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Y N Full Listen Only 0 0 0 0 0 Full Listen Only Y N Fut LisenOny Full Listen Only wl 3 1 1 1 x 45 6 7 45 6 7 45 6 7 45 6 7 45 6 7 45 6 7 0 45 6 7 0 45 6 7 TK IK IK LK IK IK OTK 212 2 12 212 12 212 DL 2 45 4 0 1 23 45 6 7 45 6 7 1 23 1 23 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 209 2 3 lt Z 0 Block Transfer File Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 115 2K 5 000 Ft 230 4K 2 500 Ft Notes 1 Block Transfers are optional Record the Block Transfer File Number and Size write in one of the Rack numbers from the previous worksheet circle the ap
388. mbinations such as yellow on blue Usability On keypad screens place button labels near their associated function buttons On touch screens do not place important buttons where they will be blocked by a pop up window The user cannot press a covered button For details on where windows appear refer to Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms and Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Planning Applications 2 7 The PanelView 1000e and 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The high resolution screen of 800 by 600 runs at the same display size as the 640 by 480 screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1000e and 1400e terminals Ensure there is always a clear way to move between screens especially if the programmable controller does not control the screen
389. me in the Tools menu Type the tag name you want to change or choose Eg to select a tag name from the Tag Browser Or click the down arrow to choose a tag name from the four most recent entries in this field Type the name of a new or existing tag in the Replace With box Choose a Search In option Whole Application replaces all instances of the tag name specified in the Look For field with the tag name specified in the Replace With field Selection replaces the tag name specified in the Look For field with the tag name specified in the Replace With field only in the selected program components Choose whether to rename the tag in the Tag Database automatically By default the Rename in Database box is checked Uncheck it to allow you to change a tag name to one that does not exist in the Tag Database You must create the tag manually before you validate the application Choose whether you want the application to be validated automatically once the tag has been renamed By default the Validate on Completion box is checked Uncheck the box if you have unchecked the Rename in Database box Click Replace Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 32 Defining Tags Private and Shared Tag Databases Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 A PanelBuilder 1400e application can have its own private tag database or it can share a database with other PanelBuilder 1400e or RSView applications This means if you have applicat
390. mer Counter and Control Files Bit Member Addressing by Bit Address Optional Syntax Fnnn eee bb F nnn optional eee File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 12 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 bb optional Bit number Timer 13 15 Counter 10 15 Control 8 11 13 15 Example T87 133 14 SLC 5 and SLC 5 Enhanced Timer Counter and Control Files Analog Member Addressing Optional Syntax Fnnn eee o bb F nnn optional eee bb optional File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal Timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Word offset 1 2 decimal Bit number 0 15 decimal Example R44 72 1 14 Mnemonic Tables Addressing Syntax C 13 Timer Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type ACC Accumulator Value Analog DN Do
391. meric Entry Scratchpad When the operator enters a screen number the screen with that number appears This object is available only for keypad applications Screen List Selector allows an operator to change to another screen by choosing a screen from a list Screen Select Keypad Large and Small enables the operator to change to another screen by entering the screen s number This object is available only for touch screen applications Scrolling List Scrolling List objects are like scrolling versions of Control List Selectors The number of states is not limited by the number of lines on the screen A Scrolling List consists of a Cursor List and any number or combination of Local Message Multistate Indicator and Numeric Data Display Object Lists The Cursor List can have up to 999 items The operator or programmable controller can use the Scrolling List to control and monitor operations or to make selections Shapes Drawing Objects Ares can appear in any size or shape You can configure the arc to appear hollow or solid and change the line style or width You can also connect them with line objects to form rounded corners Ellipses are closed circular shapes You can configure the ellipse as hollow or solid and change the line style or width Lines are used to illustrate and to separate sections of screens Lines can be drawn in any direction and are available in various widths and formats Panels are similar to rectan
392. mily Controller Programming Reference Manual 1775 6 4 1 PLC 5 Family Programmable Controllers Hardware Installation Manual 1785 6 6 1 PLC 5 Programming Software 6200 6 4 7 5250 LP1 LP2 PLC 5 250 Programming Manual 5000 6 4 8 SLC 500 Family of Programmable Controllers Advanced Programming 1747 NM002 Software User Manual ControlNet PLC 5 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1785 6 5 14 Conventions Used RIO DH ControlNet DH and ControlNet All network types Preface P 9 Information is provided in a consistent way throughout all the PanelBuilder 1400e user documentation The documentation uses these print conventions mouse conventions selection conventions key conventions and command conventions Print Conventions Applications can be created that communicate with PLCs over Remote I O DH or ControlNet When instructions apply specifically to one type of application or the other this is noted in the margin means instructions for a Remote I O application only means instructions for a Data Highway Plus DH application only means instructions for a ControlNet application only means instructions for DH and ControlNet applications but not Remote I O applications means instructions for all applications regardless of communication network type Mouse Conventions You can use a mouse with one or two buttons This manual assumes that if you have a multiple button mouse the left mouse button is
393. munications Communication Setup amp Nodes 1 Scan Classes l RIO Racks L RIO Block Transfer Files 9 Scheduled Files Defining Communications 5 39 Choose Yes to continue with the network conversion or choose No to stop the conversion If you continue any invalid station numbers will be changed to a default value of 0 For more information about configuring an application for DH see Defining Communications for a DH or ControlNet Application earlier in this chapter After converting the application to DH you may need to change the Terminal Network Address on the Terminal Communications tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog Configure Communication Setup x 5 Network File Transfer Network Type DH Address fo Driver Baud Rate 57 6K The Terminal Network Address remains unchanged by the conversion Ensure this value is still correct for your application on the network you are switching to if not change it The range is 0 to 77 octal For example if the Terminal Network Address for your ControlNet application was 25 decimal it will be 25 octal for your DH application In the Network File Transfer tab the Panel View Location Routing Address will be set to the Terminal Network Address Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Chapter 6 Defining Tags This chapter describes e tags and the tag database the importance of organizing tags
394. n Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Off Label and On Label These fields are present to maintain compatibility with RSView databases You cannot enter anything in them Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 18 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Initial Value Enter an initial value of 0 or 1 for the digital tag When a tag is used with a PanelBuilder input object or function this initial value is written to the programmable controller when the application first executes For a PanelBuilder object with an initial state and a main control tag the object s initial state value supersedes the tag s initial value so that the initial state value is written to the programmable controller instead of the tag s initial value On application upload the object s initial state value is used as the tag s initial value 5 To fill in the fields for data source see Specifying a Data Source later in this chapter Configuring a String Tag 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash V 3 For Type select String 2 Tag Database Untitled1 BEE File Edit View Help Tag Name Tutorial Type Secu gt Description Length 82 Data Source Devi
395. n the Duplicate command will duplicate and move the object in a single step This is useful if you are creating a series of objects with an equal distance between them Selectobject Duplicate object Move object Duplicate again Sizing Objects You can change the size of most objects by selecting and dragging them to the size you want The exceptions are text objects ASCII Input object Screen Select Keypad and the small and large Numeric Entry Keypads Note Input objects for PanelBuilder 1200e touch screen applications can be sized by touch cell increments only not by pixels Note Do not resize an object so part of it is off the screen You cannot download an application if part of an object is off the screen Creating Objects 9 39 Important If you are sizing an object that contains a text or graphic image label you cannot make the object smaller than the label For example if you size a push button that has text in state 0 and no text in state 1 you cannot size the button smaller than the text size in state 0 even if you are in state 1 where you can see no text Important If you want to resize graphic images in PanelBuilder set your display adapter to at least 65 536 colors To change the size of an object 1 Choose the object 2 Position the pointer over a handle The pointer changes to show the direction you can size the object 3 Press the left mouse button While holding it down drag the object If you
396. n Startup screen and change the application type You also use this tab to define a comment to be stored with the file and specify the version of PanelView firmware on which you want the application to run The Application Startup Screen The Application Startup screen is the first screen displayed on the terminal when the application starts up In a new application the Application Startup screen is preset to be the Alarm History screen screen 255 by default If you want to use a different screen as the Application Startup screen select a new screen from the Screen drop down list For more information see Assigning the Application Startup Screen in Chapter 8 Creating Screens Changing the Application Type You select the type of PanelView terminal on which the application is run when you create the application However you can use the General tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box to change the application type so it can run on a different terminal type Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 3 Keep the following in mind when changing the Application Type e You cannot run a keypad application on a touch screen terminal or a touch screen application on a keypad terminal Once you choose touch screen or keypad for your application type you cannot change to the other type A 1000e or 1400e touch screen application 640 by 480 can run interchangeably only on 1000e or 1400e touch terminals 640 by 480 However you can
397. n a reset occurs the control is setto 1 for the Remote Alarm Operation Hold time before it is resetto 0 Assign a tag to enable this option For information about how to assign and unassign tags and expressions see Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 7 Creating Expressions 4 Click OK to save the Alarm Status screen configuration Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 52 Configuring Alarms About the Alarm History Screen Working with the Alarm History Screen in the Terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The operator can view a list of historical alarms by calling up the Alarm History screen The Alarm History screen contains a list of the most recent alarms for the current application You can choose from a configurable range 128 500 1000 1500 or 2500 alarms Note If more than the maximum number of alarms in that chosen configurable range occur the oldest alarm records will be dropped from the list If you need to keep a permanent list of old alarms print the message list regularly or upload the Alarm History file For information about uploading the Alarm History file see the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual This section tells you how the Alarm History screen works when the application is running Calling up the Alarm History Screen from the Terminal When the application is running the operator can call up the Alarm History screen from the Multi line Alarm Message Window the Al
398. n dialog box 1 Select an on screen object and press Ctrl O or choose Position from the Edit menu The Position dialog box appears Note The top text line From of the Position dialog box shows the current x y coordinates of the line object s From position The bottom text line To shows the current x y coordinates of the object s To position You can resize the line object by changing the coordinates for the From or To position 2 Enter the desired x y coordinates 3 Click OK Moving Objects You can move objects by using the mouse or by using the arrow keys in addition to the mouse Note Do not move objects off the screen You cannot download an application if an object is off the screen Note Input objects for PanelBuilder 1200e touch screen applications can be moved by touch cell increments only not by pixels To move an object 1 Choose the object 2 Place the pointer on the object not on the handles 3 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the object to the position you want If you are using only the keyboard press Ctrl arrow to move the object Creating Objects 9 41 An outline appears as you drag the object IIIS Selectthe object Drag the object to the correct position 4 When the object is in the correct position release the mouse button or the Ctrl arrow keys To move objects more precisely 1 Choose the object 2 Place the pointer on the object 3 Press the or key
399. n expressions 7 22 Indicators 9 9 Information message window about 14 1 acknowledging 14 2 clearing 14 2 configuring 14 3 configuring window removal acknowledge hold time 12 8 disabling 14 3 enabling 14 3 font type 14 4 information messages 10 1 information window control tag 14 5 removing 14 4 tags 14 5 using at the terminal 14 2 Initial state value 2 22 2 27 2 48 2 52 9 4 9 63 deleting objects with 8 7 Initial value 2 27 2 28 2 52 9 4 Inner text 9 24 arranging 9 48 Inserting rows in spreadsheets 4 12 Interlocked push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 K KA modules 2 42 Key conventions P 11 Keypad objects 9 2 Keywords reserved F 1 L Labels 9 29 9 35 Last chassis 2 16 5 10 Last Quantity Time Reset stamp See Alarm status reset time date stamp Latched push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 Limits in expressions 7 8 Lines 9 6 9 12 9 21 9 33 changing styles 9 51 istindicator 9 6 9 9 9 21 ist objects 9 61 resizing 9 61 Listen Only access 2 16 Local message display 9 6 9 9 9 21 Local messages 10 2 Local station address 2 41 Local variables assigning values to 7 7 declaring 7 6 evaluation of 7 7 in expressions 7 6 naming 7 6 syntax 7 7 reserved keywords F 1 Logic 5 software importing a database 7 r Logical operations in expressions 7 16 Long integer data type 2 24 2 51 Maintained push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 Maximums components number
400. n press Shift S pacebar All objects in an area Drag diagonally to draw a selection box around the objects When the objects are surrounded by the box release the mouse button or Use the arrow keys to move to an object then press Ctrl arrow keys to draw a selection box All objects on the screen Choose Select All from the Edit menu or Press An object within an object for example an object component or a grouped object Click the whole object and then click the component or object Hollow handles appear on the second object to indicate that it is selected or Drag diagonally to draw a selection box around the components Click the object within the first object Hollow handles appear on the second object to indicate that it is selected or Use the arrow keys to move to an object and press S pacebar to select the whole object press S pacebar again to select the component or object Hollow handles appear on the second object to indicate that itis selected Tip When using a selection border to select objects within another object press Ctrl S hift to select only the inner objects See the example that follows Overlapping objects Click the overlapping objects and continue clicking until you select the desired object Each time you Click a different overlapping object is selected or Use the arrow keys to move to an object then press S pacebar to select the object Cont
401. n shows a sample alarm message text file created in Notepad in Microsoft Windows Tutorial amg Notepad OF x File Edit Search Help Document Feeder Paper Hisfeed Top Exit Jam Finisher Jam Paper Bin fi Out of Paper Paper Bin B Out of Paper Copier Paper Jam Copier Cabinet Open To import messages using the Import Message File command 1 Choose Import Message File from the File menu Update Messages Ctrl U Close Ctrl F4 A dialog box appears If it does not show the file you want to import you may need to change the drive and directory 2 Select the file Import Message File 3 Click OK If there are no errors in the format of the message file it appears in your message list above any existing messages 4 Choose Update Messages from the File menu or from the toolbar to save the messages gt Note The messages you are importing are added to the message database at the current cursor position They are automatically re sorted by trigger value when you next open the Message Editor Exporting Messages To export messages you must use the clipboard You can copy the messages trigger values and alarm notification options from the message editor and paste them into the text editor of your choice To export messages using the clipboard 1 Select the area of the spreadsheet you want to copy 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu from the toolba
402. n that highway and to controllers on a remote DH or Data Highway DH network through offlink addressing ControlNet Optional Equipment Introduction to PanelBuilder 1 7 e You can connect the PanelView terminal to a ControlNet network The terminal can then communicate with all the controllers on that network through Unscheduled messaging or Unscheduled Scheduled messaging or Scheduled messaging e You can connect the PanelView terminal to a Modbus network For more information see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 which is supplied as part of the optional Modbus Communications Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E UMOD Programmable Controller Software and Logic You need the appropriate software to run the programmable controller You also need to write a PLC program for the programmable controller so it can interface with the PanelBuilder application You can enhance your system with the following equipment Serial Upload Download Cable RS 232 Use the Upload Download cable to transfer applications between the development computer and terminal If you have several terminals or want a spare cable you can order additional cables For PanelView 1200 1200e and 1400e terminals the cable is A B Catalog Number 2711 NCI For PanelView 1000e terminals the cable is A B Catalog Number 2711 NC13 2711 NC14 or 2706 NC13 Remote Keyswitch and RS 232 Port
403. n the programmable controller chooses will override the operator s selection and take the operator to the current screen for that state of the operation The programmable controller relinquishes screen change control back to the operator when the tag or expression s value is zero Important Ensure your tag address is large enough to accommodate the largest screen number including the screen numbers of the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 13 4 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PLC Controlled Screen Print By activating the PLC Controlled Screen Print option you allow the programmable controller to trigger a screen print of the currently active screen and pop up windows such as the Alarm and Information Windows When the tag or expression value changes from 0 to non zero the screen and pop up windows displayed on the terminal will be printed The programmable controller must maintain the set bit long enough to ensure that the terminal does not miss it Note You can also allow manual screen printing by adding a Screen Print Button to screens For more information on creating buttons see Chapter 9 Creating Objects About Screen Prints from the Terminal Screen prints can be requested by the programmable controller or initiated manually by the operator pressing a Screen Print Button object If a PLC Controlled Screen Print is detected
404. n the single line multi line and panel Alarm Windows on the PanelView terminal s screen and in the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens Information messages inform the operator about the status of the operation providing prompts instructions or warnings You can create a maximum of 10 000 information messages Information messages appear in the Information Message Window on the PanelView terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 10 2 Creating Messages Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Local messages inform the operator about the status of an operation or provide prompts or instructions You can create a maximum of 10 000 local messages Local messages appear in the Local Message Display object in application screens The list of local messages is used by all the Local Message Display objects in all the screens of the application You can also configure Local Message Displays as part of the Scrolling List object Note To use the increased number of messages your application must be compatible with PanelView Version 5 or later The application will not be compatible with earlier versions For information about the Alarm and Information Message Windows see Chapters 11 and 12 For detailed information about the Local Message Display object see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual How Messages Are Triggered Each message is assigned a trigger value This value must be un
405. n the toolbar or commands from the Edit menu This menu Or this toolbar Does this command icon Undo mb Undoes the most recent action or series of l actions Redo ER Redoes actions that you undid using the Undo command Cut Cuts the selected block of cells records or db columns Copy Copies the selected block of cells records or columns Paste Pastes the previously cut or copied block of cells records or columns into a screen area Duplicate Duplicates the selected record or block of records Delete Deletes the selected record or block of records Insert Inserts a blank record between existing records Fill Forward Copies identical data forward into the selected area Sort or A Arranges the records alphabetically or Sort Messages amp numerically supported in the Node Rack and Block editors supported in the Rack Block and Scheduled editors All editors Messages only Working with Editors 4 7 Using the Undo and Redo Commands Messages Only Before you begin creating or editing records you should know how to use the Undo and Redo commands Use these commands any time you create or edit a record and then decide that you want to reverse your actions The Sort command is the only operation you cannot undo When you undo an operation and then change your mind you can reverse your action using the Redo command You can use the Redo command as many times as you used t
406. nal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 44 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Defining Scan Classes When your application is running it must periodically read values from the PLC controllers by scanning the PLC addresses You must assign all tags used in a DH or ControlNet Unscheduled application to one of eleven scan classes You can then assign a different foreground and background scanning period rate to each scan class The scan rate determines how often a tag value is updated A foreground period applies to the data packets which have tags from the current screen the alarm and information window addresses and from the PLC controlled PLC I O Control options The background scan period applies to all other data packets in the system When the PanelView terminal is switched to Run mode all the tags in the application are arranged into data packets Each data packet can have up to 119 words containing contiguous addresses from one data file in the PLC These data packets are scanned at the background rate As a screen appears on the PanelView terminal the data packets which have tags from the current screen will now scan at the foreground rate Guidelines for Configuring Scan Classes e Specify a frequent scan rate for tags representing fast moving devices and a less frequent scan rate for tags representing devices that change less often Also ensure that these tags are not in the same d
407. nalog Range of values depends on the data type selected Use an analog tag to control or monitor a value for example a temperature or the position of a rotary control When you define an analog tag you must also fill in the Scale Offset and Data Type fields Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 50 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Tag Type Type of Data Stored String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters Use a string tag only with the ASCII Input and ASCII Display objects and optionally for sending alarm messages to the PLC Block A contiguous bit string of up to 1024 bits A block tag is used strictly for defining the Alarm Triggers and Acknowledge to PLC controls These controls can monitor and acknowledge multiple simultaneously active alarm conditions For details see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms Note If you assign a block tag in a DH or ControlNet application the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Scale Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 1 being the default The scale and offset work together to modify any raw data that comes from or is written to a programmable controller for example to convert the raw data into engineering units Offset Analog Tag Only Specify a value with 0 being the default The scale and offset work tog
408. nassigned Day of the Month unassigned Hour unassigned Minute unassigned Second unassigned Assign Tag Assign Exprn Unassign Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Assign Tag Assign Exprn Configuring PLC I O Control Options 13 3 To assign or unassign a PLC I O Control option 1 In the PLC I O Control dialog box select either the Notify PLC tab or the PLC Controlled tab Highlight the desired control option and click Assign Tag Assign Exprn Expression or Unassign The control options are described in the next two sections If you are assigning a tag the Tag Browser dialog box appears For details on how to assign a tag or create a new one see Chapter 6 Defining Tags If you are assigning an expression the Expression Editor appears For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions If you unassign a tag the tag remains in the database but is no longer assigned to the option If you unassign an expression it is deleted Click OK PLC Controlled Options The PLC Controlled Options include these controls PLC Controlled Screen Number PLC Controlled Screen Print PLC Controlled Date amp Time Control which works with the PLC Controlled Date amp Time tags or expressions PLC Controlled Screen Number With the PLC Controlled Screen Number assigned the programmable controller can display specific screens The scree
409. nd an Indicator State tag or expression Record all necessary tag names addresses and information about the expressions in the worksheet For each expression fill in the name of the expression in the object for example Indicator State the name of the tag or tags the expression will read data from and the manipulation the expression will perform on the tag data For information about the kinds of operations expressions can perform see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions For each tag fill in the following Name A symbolic name you assign to this address The tag name can be up to 40 characters long and can include letters numbers the dash and the underscore character _ Spaces and periods are not permitted When you define tags in the Tag Database Editor you can also define folders Folders are a convenient way to organize tags For example you may put all the tags for one screen s objects in one folder The folder name becomes part of the tag name and is separated from the rest of the name with a backslash For example the full name for the tag StartButton Control in the folder called Screen 1 is Screen lWStartButton Control For details on creating tags and folders see Chapter 6 Defining Tags Type Specify one of these types of tags Tag Type Type of Data Stored Digital A single bit giving the values 0 or 1 Use a digital tag for devices that can only be on or off such as push buttons A
410. nd PLC I O Control options you are assigning an address You need to assign the tag to establish communication between the programmable controller and the application in the PanelView terminal When the application is running it sends information to and receives information from the programmable controller The controller communicates through the input and output addresses assigned to the tags Planning Applications 2 13 The addresses defined in the tags work as follows the input addresses are for inputs to the programmable controller for example control list selectors push buttons or other objects that write to the programmable controller the output addresses are for outputs from the programmable controller for example display current state alarms or counts from the programmable controller Addresses defined as racks words and bits are locations within the Remote I O racks These locations are represented on the PLC s Remote I O image table The two types of addresses objects can use are discrete Remote I O addresses block transfer file addresses These two address types are discussed in detail later in this chapter Understanding Rack Assignments PanelView terminals are connected to a host controller usually a programmable controller The programmable controller communicates with one or more I O racks to solicit its input and write its output An I O rack is an addressing unit that corresponds to u
411. ndicated by the checkbox In the example below the past alarms are displayed Display Past Alarms Mode Alarm Status TEREE 21 3796 Alarm messages Display modes Lu E Lesi Aost 2 12013496 Display Mode button Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Working in Display Active Alarms Mode The Display Active Alarms Mode shows all the alarms currently active whose state is ON The Alarm Status screen opens first in Active mode This mode shows all alarms that are ON in numerical order of the alarm trigger along with the alarm s quantity accumulated time and message information If you enter Display Active Alarms mode from Display All Alarms or Display Past Alarms mode the display starts with the first active alarm from the current page on the screen and displays the next 14 active alarms If there are no active alarms from the current page to the end the search will go backward until it finds 14 alarms or until it reaches the beginning of the list The first alarm in the Active screen acts as an anchor to the alarm messages If this alarm changes to OFF all the alarms on the screen shift upwards If this same alarm becomes active again it reappears at the top of the list and the other alarms shift down As new alarms are entered on the screen the alarms below the new entry shift downwards Configuring Alarms 11 45 If all the alarms displayed on a screen t
412. nditions warnings e informative messages You create these messages in the Alarm Messages editor For more information see Chapter 10 Creating Messages You can use the Message Window tab of the Configure Alarms dialog box to enable or disable the Alarm Message Window to configure the appearance of the window and to assign control tags or expressions You can choose one of these types of Alarm Message Window e Single line Alarm Message Window displays only the most recent alarm message at the top or bottom of the screen Multi line Alarm Message Window can display up to 20 single height or 10 double height messages Alarm Message Panel displays a single message up to 6 lines long at the top or bottom of the screen It can also display the message trigger value About Background Alarms Display of the Alarm Message Window is optional If the Alarm Message Window is disabled alarms will continue to be triggered in the background They will still cause audio alarms trip the alarm relay and send alarm messages to the printer Dataliner message display device PLC and Alarm History screen However the Alarm Message Window will not be displayed Using the Alarm Message Window in the Terminal Configuring Alarms 11 31 Where the Alarm Message Window appears on the screen and how it appears depends on whether it is a Single line Multi line or Alarm Message Panel Single line Alarm Message Window The Single
413. ne Mode Switch or Power Off Mode Switch or Power Off 1 Wait for Wait for Alarm Transition in Expression Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Discard if queue full Delay Over Set Control Tag Raise Handshake Condition Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Nee Discard if queue full Configuring Alarms 11 27 Partial Handshaking If the Message Control is assigned and the Message Handshake is not the Message Control is set to 1 after the Alarm Control Delay interval and reset to 0 after the Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time expires State Transition Diagram for Alarm Message to PLC Control and No Handshaking Offline Mode Switch or Power Up Enter Run Mode Reset Control Tag Wait for Alarm with Msg to PLC Flag Alarm with Msg to PLC Operations Hold Time Expires Write message to PLC Reset Control Tag Start Control Display Clear Handshake Condition Mode Switch or Power Off Offline Mode Switch or Power Off Mode Switch or Power Off Wait for Wait for Alarm Operation Hold Control Delay Time to Expire Alarm with Msg to PLC Alarm with Msg to PLC Queue Msg Queue Msg Discard if queue full M Discard if queue full Control Delay Over Set Control Tag Raise Handshake Condition Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 28 Configuring Alarms No Handshaking If the Message Control is not assigned the message is sent immediately to the PLC without handshaking to confirm that th
414. ne Digital EN Enable Digital PRE Preset Value Analog TT Timing Digital Counter Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type ACC Accumulated Value Analog CD Count Down Enable Digital CU Count Up Enable Digital DN Done Digital OV Overflow Digital PRE Preset Value Analog UN Underflow Digital For fixed 1 0 SLC only UA Update Accumulator Value Digital Control Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type DN Done Digital EN Enable Digital ER Error Digital FD Found Digital IN Inhibit Digital LEN Length Analog POS Position Analog UL Unload Digital For all programmable controllers except the fixed I O SLC and the SLC 5 01 EM Empty Digital EU Enable Unloading Digital Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 14 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PID Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range ADDR Address of Master Loop Analog 0 3 BIAS Output Bias Analog CA Control Action Digital CL Cascaded Loop Digital CT Cascaded Type Digital DATA Reserved Internal Use Analog 0 13 DB Deadband Analog DO Derivative Of Digital DVDB Deviation Alarm Deadband Analog DVN Deviation Alarm Analog DVNA Deviation High Alarm Digital DVP Deviation Alarm Analog DVPA Deviation Low Alarm Digital EN Enabl
415. ne oe Screen SETUTEZHIETLIEG IF Xp Mazmantwery Hd Puhtu Indicator L aETIREPREHTIEG 286 Boi HBa enrary Fusbhrs Conrah ID SETUT4JHIHTIEG Tag OIOI D LE Bir Screens Tag p 5 Bit Tag DICO D 17 Bit Pall Tag Diii 0 LT Bir Lu bal Pull HEB L DI Tag DIDI 1 0 1 1 Bin 1 Ta11 LiG Tag DIDI 1 4 1 5 Bim 3 Tui 1 031 LD L 11 Tug D2b3 1 L2 1 31 san 1 Pill KIA Tag 0201 2 0 2 2 kias 2 i P211 i Teg 0509 4 Bir Pali Tag DIDO 2 4 Pat Tag DIG3 5 Fir Tag DID3 Z 5 Fit Ereni Digitel Foi Pigszal Pali Digital Pill Screens p Mamerntuzy H TusbBtpr Indicator Initially all tags used in the application or on the screen are listed in the Tag Usage Viewer If you assign tags to expressions those tags also are listed in the Tag Usage Viewer You can restrict the list of tags by applying a filter search for specific characters such as an address or tag name in the listing and print out the listing Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 28 Defining Tags Filtering Data A filter is a way of screening the list of tags Only those tags that match the filter criteria will be viewed Note Filters remain in effect throughout other operations If you set a second filter you will be filtering only the filtered listing Similarly if you search or print you will search or print only the filtered list of tags The last filter app
416. ned to a node defined by the user It allows the terminal to support unsolicited messages to and from the PLC Tip Use a name that will help you to identify your programmable controllers when you are assigning tags later in your application For example you could name your programmable controllers according to their locations or according to the machine or part of the process they will be controlling or monitoring ControlNet DH ControlNet ControlNet Defining Communications 5 23 Select the type of programmable controller you are using from the drop down list The type of programmable controller determines the addressing syntax and range for all the tags with addresses on this node For ControlNet applications you can select PLC 5 Enhanced or Logix55xx Note If you select Logix55xx as the Device Type set the target firmware to Version 5 or a validation error will occur Channel The Channel number is 1 by default The application network type determines this channel You cannot change this value This field maintains compatibility with RSView M and provides future communication option expansion Station Type the address of the programmable controller You can use local and remote stations on bridged DH networks For station addressing syntax see DH Addressing in Chapter 2 Planning Applications For ControlNet applications using a PLC 5 Enhanced device values are between 1 and 99
417. nel Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 36 Configuring Alarms Alarm Message Panel large gt REAAL OR fd text and underlined top of Close it before starting motor screen tact n mbezt the conveyor ip detersioe the current Wire 5 Hn debet the conveyer ip detersion the current statis 18 8 p Alarm Message Panel small seem text bottom of screen The Alarm Message Panel can be removed from the screen by acknowledgement of the alarm in the Alarm History screen aPLC Controlled Clear Window tag or expression aremote acknowledgment from the PLC Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Configuring the Alarm Message Window Configuring Alarms 11 37 If the alarm displayed in the Alarm Message Panel becomes inactive the window remains on the screen but the message is erased If the screen changes the alarm display remains on the new screen unless it is cleared by the PLC or the alarm is acknowledged by the operator or PLC When you configure the Alarm Message Window you can enable or disable the Alarm Message Window select the window type single line multi line or panel determine the location of the window and the number of lines it can display define the appearance of the window font type underline blink an
418. nelView terminal out of Run mode The Pass Through block transfer file uses a control byte in the output image table which cannot be shared with any other block transfer file or discrete tag The control byte must be defined on a rack that has full access Mark the Rack number Word and Byte on the Block Transfer File Worksheet If you are using an SLC 5 04 device also note the SLC Slot number in the Rack column After you complete the planning steps in this chapter your worksheets contain all the information you need to create your application To create your application work through the remaining chapters in this manual as described in Steps for Building an Application at the beginning of this chapter Planning DH or ControlNet Communications DH and ControlNet Planning Applications 2 37 This section describes how to complete Step 3 planning how the application will communicate with the PLC for a DH or ControlNet application It includes information about these tasks using worksheets to help you plan DH or ControlNet applications defining nodes e defining scan classes defining scheduled files planning addresses Using Worksheets to Plan Communications Use these worksheets to determine addressing and communication requirements in DH or ControlNet applications Communications worksheet Data Highway Plus Communications Worksheet ControlNet Communications Worksheet for Unscheduled
419. nged state when released Pressing the push button a second time changes the button back to its original state Momentary Push Button Normally Open or Closed changes state when pressed and changes back to its Initial State when released Multistate Push Button sends one of a series of user configured state values to the Button Control Tag each time the operator presses the button You configure how many states this button has to a maximum of 255 and assign a value to each state Each time the operator presses the button the value assigned to the next state is sent to the programmable controller When the last value is sent the procedure begins over with the first state s value being sent Scales Scales consist of lines with tick marks used to provide an illustrative measurement scale beside Bar Graphs and Trend objects You can create vertical and horizontal scales Screen Print Button Screen Print Button allows the operator to print the application screen and pop up windows currently displayed on the terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 12 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Screen Selectors Goto Screen Button is configured to change the screen selection to another application screen on the terminal When the operator presses this button the assigned screen appears Return to Previous Screen Button switches back to the previous screen Screen Keypad Enable Button pops up the Nu
420. ntrol options These items are not specific to a particular screen so use a separate worksheet for them Remote I O Tags Worksheet Application File Name Screen Number Object Tag Address Ref Pu B Analog Tag T Initial a Start Deere cue EN Te ame Pe g Offset ata Val 0 Add ar Ne Value Seale ii Type Values uad No of characters Value Address formats Discrete O rrw bb Iis input O is output rr is rack number w is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are octal e g 1 011 12 Block Transfer Bff ww bb is block transfer ff followed by a space is file number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are octal e g 01 01 Discrete SLC 1 O ss ww bb Iis input O is output ss is optional slot number ww is start word bb is optional bit offset All numbers are decimal e g O 01 18 Notes Initial State Value Objects such as Multistate Push Buttons have a user configurable initial state whose value will supersede the tag s initial value when the application is first run This is called the tag s start value Tag Start Value The start value is the tag initial value or the object initial state value if one exists Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 22 Planning Applications Object Ref No Type Initial State Value Tag
421. ntrols are assigned Note Delay intervals and hold times are configured in the Timing Parameters tab of the Configure Terminal Setup dialog box For more information about these parameters see Timing Parameters in Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Note If you assign a tag to this control your application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Message Handshake You can use a digital or analog tag or an expression that reads one or more digital or analog tags for the Message Handshake control This option provides the terminal with confirmation that alarms with the Message to PLC option enabled are actually received by the PLC The Message Handshake works with the Message to PLC and Message Control For more information see Message to PLC earlier in this chapter Note If you use this control your application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 30 Configuring Alarms About the Alarm Message Window Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Alarm Message Window displays the alarm messages you create in the Alarm Messages editor The Alarm Message Window is triggered by the programmable controller and appears on the terminal when the application is running It provides messages to the operator including alarm co
422. o compress an open file 1 Choose Save Application As from the File menu 2 Check the Compress box 3 Click OK To save an open application under a new name or in another directory 1 Choose Save Application As from the File menu The Save As dialog box appears The application name is the default file name 2 Type the new name for your application using a maximum of eight characters or change the default drive or directory Working with Applications 3 9 Note PanelBuilder does not support long file and directory names Ensure that the file and directory names you use conform to the DOS naming standard If you enter an invalid file or directory name an error message will appear and you will be prompted to re enter the file name 3 Click OK Saving an Application in Another File Format Save your applications as e pvc The file format for PanelBuilder 1400e This is the default format e pvd the file format for an application to be downloaded to PanelView terminal To save an application as another file type 1 Choose Save Application As from the File menu The Save As dialog box appears If you are saving a new application the file name field displays pvc If you are saving an existing application the application name is the default file name Save An x ined List of f puri 2 Enter the new name for your application using a maximum of
423. o cut or copy and paste objects 1 In the screen choose the objects you want to cut or copy 2 Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu choose Or from the toolbar or press Ctrl X or Ctrl C This places the contents in the clipboard replacing the clipboard s previous contents 3 Open the screen you want to copy the objects into and click in the screen area 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press Ctrl V The objects are pasted into the new screen Undo Ctrl z Hedo Cte Ctrl C with Controls v Join Line Ends Utrie Select All Duplicate Delete Clear All Make Label Set Object Defaults Configure Screen Object Position CtrleA Ctrl D Del Ctr O Creating Objects 9 37 Copying Objects with Controls Expressions and tags control the object s inputs from and outputs to the PLC Expression definitions and tag names assigned to an object can be copied with the object but tag definitions cannot If you copy controls across applications the tags are not added to the target application You must create the tags if they do not exist or assign different tags Tip If both applications will use the same tags use a shared tag database To copy objects without controls p Ensure the Copy with Controls item in the Edit menu does not have a check mark If it has one select the item so the check mark disappears Copying Graphic Images
424. o export a database 1 Open the application from which you want to export a tag database 2 Choose Import Export from the Database menu 3 Choose Export to PanelBuilder 1400e CSV Tag file and click Next A default destination file name pvtags csv and path are displayed 4 Click Finish to complete the export or type a new destination file name and or path and then click Finish CSV File Column Ordering When you convert a PanelBuilder database to a comma separated variable csv file or when you create a spreadsheet in third party software it should consist of the following columns Column Description A Tag Type A D S T B or F Analog Digital String Structure Block Folder B Tag Name Any legal tag name C Tag Description Text describing the tag D Read Only T orF use Specifies whether the tag is editable in the database E Data Source D E R I M S C Device DDE Remote 1 0 Memory System Scheduled F Security Code asterisk or letters A P use A P used by RSView only G Alarmed T or F not yet supported use F H Data Logged T or F not yet supported use F Native Type D U I L F B P and 1 8 Default Unsigned Integer Integer Long Floating Point Byte Bit Position Binary and 1BCD 8BCD Creating a New Tag Database Defining Tags 6 39 Column Description J Value Type L or F use if scale offset or initia
425. o normal view you can resize the screen by choosing Restore from the Control menu or the button in the screen s title bar If your computer has VGA resolution choose Zoom In from the View menu to restore the screen to normal size Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 8 16 Creating Screens Assigning the Application Startup Screen Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Application Startup screen is the first screen that appears when you start the application In an application file without screens the Application Startup screen is preset to the Alarm History screen screen 255 by default if the Alarm History screen is enabled The first screen you create in an application is automatically assigned as the Application Startup screen If you wish you can assign another screen as the Application Startup screen If you delete the Application Startup screen the screen with the next highest number will automatically be assigned as the Application Startup screen Important When the PanelView terminal is powered up the Application Startup screen is always displayed regardless of the security assigned to it To change the Application Startup screen 1 In the Application Window open the System folder and choose Terminal Setup or from the toolbar 2 In the General tab click the Screen field 3 In the list that appears choose the screen you want to assign What Is an Object Chapter 9 Creating Objects
426. oard s previous contents 3 Select the area into which you want to paste the contents of the clipboard or click on a single cell 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or in the toolbar This pastes the selection into the entire area you selected Or if you clicked on one cell only this pastes the selection into the area starting with the cell Copying and Pasting into Differently Sized Areas The area you copy does not need to be the same size as the area you paste into To copy information into a differently sized area 1 Select the area you want to copy 2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu or 4 in the toolbar or press Ctrl C 3 Select the area you want to paste into 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or in the toolbar or press Ctrl V If you pasted a small selection into a larger area information is repeated If you pasted a large selection into a smaller area information is truncated Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 4 10 Working with Editors Messages only Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Sorting Entries in the Spreadsheet You can sort all or some of the entries in the spreadsheet numerically or alphabetically In the Messages editors if more than one column is selected to be sorted the Sort operation will proceed beginning with the left most selected column Any duplicate items are arranged according to the contents of the next columns The Rack editor is sorted numerically by the
427. object s control tag the object s Initial State takes precedence The tag s initial value is used only if an initial state is not defined Range of Values If an object has a range of state values record the values in this column Address Number of Characters string tag only Carrying Out Your Plan Planning Applications 2 53 Recording the Address For each tag record the programmable controller address as follows Address The tag address Record the full tag address of digital and analog tags in this column Except for string and block tags the length of the address will be the size of the data file element in the address For string and block tags record the address of the first bit in the array in this column The data file location in the PLC must accept string tag addresses The address must start on an element boundary sub element starting addresses are not supported The address cannot cross PLC data file boundaries The syntax depends on the type of address or controller See Appendix C Addressing Syntax Number of Characters String Tags or Number of Bits Block Tags e For String tags specify the length of the string in characters The length of the string must be a multiple of the number of bytes in the address For Block tags specify the number of bits in the array up to 1024 The number of bits must correspond to the element in the address For example if the
428. odules and when the PanelView terminal is connected to either of the above DHRIO or CNB modules Preface P 3 ControlLogix Gateway PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 provides enhanced communications for ControlLogix Gateway bridge addressing You can transfer application and alarm history files across networks using ControlLogix bridge modules such as the 1756 DHRIO the 1756 CNB and the 1756 ENET Enhanced Font Sizes With PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 you can select tiny 6 by 14 pixels and very tiny 4 by 10 pixels fonts for your PanelBuilder applications Online Manuals and Enhanced Online Help PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 supports online manuals You can install PanelBuilder 1400e and PanelView manuals onto your hard drive or if space is a problem you can view the online manuals directly from the CD ROM In addition you can access and view the online manuals directly from your Panelbuilder 1400e application Direct Object Placement PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 supports direct placement of a selected object within a screen application by entering the desired x y coordinates Snap To Line Objects For a greater level of control in screen applications PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 can automatically join line ends when they are placed within a certain distance This snap to feature can be turned on or off Most Recently Used List PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 gives you access to the four most recently opened p
429. of in expressions 7 8 Message control 11 29 Message handshake 11 29 Message to PLC 11 25 Messages about 10 1 alarm 10 1 creating 10 3 10 6 editing 10 3 editors 10 1 exporting 10 11 10 13 file format for importing 10 12 formatting codes in 10 4 importing 10 9 file format for 10 12 using clipboard 10 10 information 10 1 Index I 9 local 10 2 mnemonics C 15 saving 10 14 trigger value 10 2 updating 10 14 validating 10 14 Mnemonics block transfer C 15 C 16 C ontrol C 13 counter C 13 message C 15 PID C 14 SFC status C 16 tables C 13 timer C 13 token data C 16 Module groups 2 14 5 10 deleting from a rack 5 15 Modules KA 2 42 RM 2 42 Momentary normally closed push button 9 11 9 21 open push button 9 11 9 21 Mouse conventions P 9 Moving objects 9 40 Mu Mu Mu Mu Mu ti component objects 9 54 ti line alarm message window 11 33 choosing 11 38 using buttons 11 34 tistate indicator 9 6 9 9 9 21 tistate objects 9 57 tistate push button 9 6 9 11 9 21 N Naming tags 6 4 Nesting folders 6 4 6 8 Network download controls transfer inhibit control 5 20 transfer request control 5 20 transfer status control 5 21 Network file transfers ControlNet DH PanelView terminal address 5 19 setting up 5 18 PanelView terminal address 5 19 setting up 5 18 Remote 1 0 PLC station address 5 4 5 5 setting u
430. om the Edit menu Every new object of this type you create in this application will appear like the one you just created Important The defaults you assign will apply to all applications you create and to all applications you modify If you want to create applications that use the original defaults before you assign new defaults you should exit PanelBuilder and rename the defltgfx file in the PB1400e directory or copy it to another directory To use the PanelBuilder defaults again rename the file to defltgfx or copy the file back to the PB1400e directory before opening PanelBuilder 1400e You can configure all dynamic objects and some static objects in the object s configuration dialog box The configuration information differs from object to object The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual explains each object in detail and describes how to configure them This section describes only the most common types of configuration These are assigning function keys to input objects on keypad applications configuring object states configuring list object states assigning tags and expressions to objects Note To minimize the size of the application file do not assign names to objects Names use one byte per character To open an object s configuration dialog box do one of the following choose the object and choose Configure Screen Object from the Edit menu choose the object and choose
431. on address to produce a shorter address that still points to the same node ll rss I local bridge address 0 77 octal 55 combined remote bridge address and 0 376 octal remote station address The following table shows the syntax for a remote station connected by a Pyramid Integrator Station Address Valid Entries II rrrrr ss I local bridge address 0 77 octal rrrrr PI Link number 0 65535 decimal 55 station address on remote 0 77 octal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 20 Defining Communications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 For more examples of valid remote station addressing see DH Addressing in Chapter 2 Planning Applications These examples show remote station addresses for a programmable controller but the method is the same for the PanelView Location Routing Address To define the PanelView Location Routing Address 1 In the Configure Communication Setup dialog box choose the Network File Transfer tab 2 In the PanelView Location Routing Address field type the terminal s station number If the PanelView terminal and development computer are on different bridged DH networks you must specify local and remote bridge addresses in addition to the station number Defining the Network File Transfer Controls If you plan to download your application over the DH or ControlNet network using a network download or a Remote I O download you should define the
432. on on the toolbar Click Accept to save the information for a tag or Discard to discard it Note The row position of the new tag is only temporary Even if a tag is not displayed it is still saved When the spreadsheet viewer is refreshed the new tag if it still matches the query set will be displayed in alphanumeric order relative to other tags in the database Scrolling the spreadsheet closing folders and opening folders will cause a refresh Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 12 Defining Tags Duplicate Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Duplicating a Tag Select the tag you want to duplicate Choose Duplicate on the Edit menu or the Duplicate button on the toolbar A new row is inserted below the highlighted row The new row contains all the same information except the tag name In the Tag Name field type the name for the new tag Click Accept to save the new row or Discard to cancel it Note As with saves the row position of the new tag is only temporary Even if a tag is not displayed it is still duplicated When the spreadsheet view is refreshed if the duplicate tag still matches the query set it will be displayed in alphanumeric order relative to other tags in the database Scrolling the spreadsheet closing folders and opening folders will cause a refresh Editing a Tag 1 Select the tag you want to edit The details of the tag appear in the form area Edit any details
433. on sooner the terminal will ignore the press No operator initiated screen changes are allowed when a Push Button Hold Time is active However PLC controlled screen changes will cancel the hold time and be processed Configuring Terminal Setup Options 12 7 Setting the Remote Alarm Parameters The Operation Hold Time allows you to specify the interval of time the Alarm Control Tag is set for when any of the following is activated e Silence Alarms to PLC Clear Window to PLC e QTY TIME Reset to PLC Message to PLC By default the interval is 3 seconds Note For Remote I O applications this default is usually sufficient For DH and ControlNet applications the hold time should reflect the highway traffic To set the Operation Hold Time Inthe Operation Hold Time list choose the minimum time you want to assign The Ack Control Hold Time determines the time interval for the Acknowledge Control When an alarm is acknowledged by the operator or by the PLC the address corresponding to this tag is set to 1 for the specified time To set the Acknowledge Control Hold Time p Inthe Ack Control Hold Time list choose the minimum time you want to assign The Alarm Control Delay determines the interval between the time the acknowledged alarm value is sent to the programmable controller and the time the Acknowledge Control tag is set The delay ensures that the acknowledged alarm value is recorded in the programmable cont
434. on the screen to keypad terminal function keys 2 The PanelView 1000e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid ATTENTION Do not press multiple touch screen locations at the same time In the unlikely event that two or more touches occur simultaneously in the same horizontal or vertical line an input object located half way between the two touches could be activated This is inherent in the analog resistive touch screen technology used in PanelView 1000e terminals Appendix B The Extended Character Set You can use PanelBuilder to create characters not on your keyboard The following tables list the extended characters available in PanelBuilder Hold down the Alt key and type the specified number on the numeric keypad
435. ons P 6 Chapter 6 Defining Tags P 6 Chapter 7 Creating Expressions P 6 Chapter 8 Creating 5 P 7 Chapter 9 Creating Objects 2 22 sees e P 7 Chapter 10 Creating Messages P 7 Chapter 11 Configuring P 7 Chapter 12 Configuring Terminal Setup Options P 7 Chapter 15 Transferring Applications P 7 Who Should Read This P 8 Related Publications devs sasuke dh at ERA SERES P 8 Conventions USed ons epe aan Ee RR E ERR CER ERAS P 9 Pb 22 59 Ach qoo dox acini on P 9 Mouse Conventions P 9 Selection Conventions P 9 Selection Conventions in Dialog Boxes P 10 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 toc ii Table of Contents Introduction to PanelBuilder Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Key Convent S Command Conventions Before You Technical SUDDOIUSGIVICOS 2a esae ceo reet arae derart Chapter 1 PanelBullger Components What Are You Building Version Compatibil
436. ons Tip Use the information on the Remote I O Tags or Device Tags Worksheets when creating expressions for your application Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 2 Creating Expressions Types of Expressions How Expressions Work Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 gt You can use an expression to manipulate the value of any analog or digital tag that reads output from the PLC You cannot assign expressions to the following the ASCII Display object because it requires String tags the Transfer Inhibit Control the Bit triggered Alarm controls An expression can also perform calculations on the values of multiple read tags However expressions can perform calculations on analog and digital tags only Expressions cannot perform calculations on string or block tags If a control allows you to use an expression the Assign Expression button is available otherwise it is dimmed The use of expressions is always optional If you do not want to use expressions you can assign tags to the controls PanelBuilder also supports write expressions A write expression allows you to manipulate the value of a tag before it is written to the PLC PanelBuilder supports write expressions for these objects Numeric Entry Keypad Numeric Input Cursor Point Numeric Keypad Enable Button For these three objects only you can assign an optional write expression that performs calculations on the operator s input before
437. ons 2 2 object addresses 2 5 rack assignments 2 16 screens 2 5 tags 2 19 PLC controlled audio 11 24 date and time control 13 4 QTY TIME reset 11 48 11 50 relay 11 24 screen number 13 3 screen print 13 4 silence alarms 11 23 PLC 1 0 control options about 13 1 assigning 13 3 notify PLC options controller tags date and time to PLC 13 6 screen print active to PLC 13 6 screen print to PLC 13 6 tags Individual PLC controlled date and time controls 13 5 PLC controlled date and time control 13 4 screen number 13 3 screen print 13 4 unassigning 13 3 PLC station address about 5 4 5 5 defining 5 7 PLC type 5 23 PLC 2 addressing syntax C 1 PLC Scanner Type recording on worksheets 2 33 PLC 3 addressing syntax data table sections C 2 timers and counters C 2 PLC 5 addressing syntax 2 39 C 1 binary files optional syntax C 3 data files C 3 I O and status files C 4 timers counters and control files C 4 PLC 5 Enhanced addressing syntax 2 39 C 1 binary files optional syntax C 6 binary integer BCD ASCII float and String files C 5 1 0 and status files C 5 timer counter control SFC status message PID block transfer and token data files C 6 Powerup screen See Application startup screen Precedence order of in expressions 7 4 7 9 7 10 7 12 7 16 Print conventions P 9 Printer compatible with development computer 1 7 other printers Epson F X 80 1
438. or text 6 29 using 6 27 Tags adding to folders 6 9 analog 6 2 configuring 6 14 in expressions 7 4 and addresses 2 13 2 16 2 19 2 46 and Remote 1 0 6 2 assigning a name 2 23 2 49 assigning to objects 9 63 block 6 2 configuring 6 19 configuring type 6 13 converting 5 29 converting from Remote 1 0 to ControlNet 5 30 5 39 copying between applications 8 5 creating 6 1 6 25 other methods 6 25 data sources 6 3 6 21 Device 6 3 6 21 6 22 Remote 1 0 6 3 6 22 6 24 Scheduled 6 3 6 22 6 24 data types in expressions 7 4 defined 6 1 specifying 12 4 Technical support services P 12 Templates 8 4 screen designing 2 7 Terminal setup options about 12 1 configuring 12 1 Terminals selecting type 12 2 types required 1 3 1 4 Testing applications 2 2 Text 9 7 9 13 9 21 changing appearance 9 52 creating 9 24 editing 9 25 extended characters 9 25 inner text 9 24 arranging 9 48 labels 9 35 sizes 9 52 underlining 9 52 Time and date in PanelView terminal date and time to PLC controller data tags 13 6 PLC controlled date and time control tag 13 4 Time display 9 7 9 13 9 21 Timeout 2 40 5 23 Timer mnemonics C 13 Timing parameters 12 6 push button hold time 12 6 remote alarm 12 7 Token data mnemonics C 16 Toolboxes items 9 15 9 21 using 9 14 9 20 Touch margins 9 52 Touch screen objects 9 2 Transfer controls transfer inhibit 5 7 5 20
439. ort E xport to recreate the existing tags Install the latest release Cannot add tags Database already has a total of 32 000 Device and Remote 1 0 tags Application file won t download or upload PanelView Transfer Utility is not installed Install the appropriate version of the Transfer Utility For more information about upload download problems see the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual PanelView Transfer Utility is performing another file transfer You are trying to upload download a file while another upload download is already in progress Close the Upload Download dialog from the Transfer Utility if the transfer is complete Installed Transfer Utility is not compatible with this version of PanelBuilder The version of the Transfer Utility installed on your computer is obsolete Install the compatible Transfer Utility Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Problem Cause Troubleshooting D 3 What to Do Tag Database won t start up Low resources Close all other programs and any extra PanelBuilder windows If this doesn t work close down Windows and restart Not enough disk space Delete any unnecessary files Note Check your temporary directory You should close down Windows before doing this and be aware of what other items are in the temporary directory Not enough memory Increase virtual memory swap size Windows 3 1 Use Control Panel
440. ose the Text tool Position the I beam next to the first state in the list and type the name for that state Move to the next item in the list and type the name for the state The quickest way to move to the next item is to press Enter Note While you edit text the status bar indicates the current state Assigning Tags and Expressions to Objects Creating Objects 9 63 Configuring Initial States Certain objects have pre defined initial states while other objects allow you to configure the inital state You can configure the initial state for the Control List Selectors the Maintained Push Button and the Multistate Push Button When you assign a tag to a control the tag you assign to the object can also have an initial value defined for it If you define both an initial state for an object and an initial value for a tag the object s initial state will take precedence If you leave the Initial State field blank the tag s initial value is used instead of the state value To specify the inital state 1 Open the object s configuration dialog box using one of the methods described previously 2 Enter a value in the Initial State field Initial State 9 M Important A tag s address can have only one initial state value If you assign more than one initial state value to a tag address by assigning the same tag to two different objects with different initial states an error will be reported during the app
441. ou are using Module Group Circle the module groups you are assigning to the rack number Last Chassis Choose Yes if there are no other fractional PLC rack assignments that have the same rack number and a higher starting module group number Otherwise choose No e Access Choose Full if the PanelView terminal will have full read and write access to the rack choose Listen Only if the terminal will only monitor the rack Planning Applications 2 35 The Block Transfer File Worksheet Block transfer files occupy space in the PLC discrete output table only For each file define the block transfer file address and the block transfer file control address in the PLC Important Some scanners the 1771 SN and 1747 SN Series A Modules for example do not support block transfers to a Remote I O device Block transfer file assignments apply only if you are using another Remote I O scanner device To determine whether your scanner supports the use of block transfers refer to your scanner s user documentation Block Transfer File Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 115 2K 5 000 Ft 230 4K 2 500 Ft Notes 1 Block Transfers are optional Record the Block Transfer File number and size write in one of the rack numbers from the previous worksheet circle the appropriate Word and Byte circle Read or Write and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary If the Block Transfe
442. p 5 4 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 10 Publication 2711 6 14 November 1998 Network transfer controls defining 5 21 Transfer inhibit 5 7 Transfer request 5 7 Transfer status 5 7 Network type changing 5 28 5 33 from ControlNetto DH 5 37 5 39 from ControlNetto Remote 1 0 5 36 5 39 from DH to ControlNet 5 34 5 39 from Remote 1 0 to ControlNet 5 30 5 39 Node name valid characters 5 22 Nodes about 5 21 configuring 5 22 defining 2 36 2 37 2 39 2 53 enabled 5 23 local station addressing 2 41 name 2 39 PLC type 5 23 remote station addressing 2 41 Station address 5 23 timeout 5 23 Non retentive objects 9 3 Normally closed momentary push button 9 6 Normally open momentary push button 9 6 NOT in expressions 7 16 Numeric data display 9 6 9 10 9 21 Numeric entry keypad 9 6 9 10 9 13 Numeric input cursor point 9 6 9 10 9 22 retain cursor on cancel 12 10 Numeric keypad enable button 9 6 9 10 2 Numerics 9 9 O Object setup configuring 12 9 Objects addresses 2 19 aligning 9 45 arcs 9 5 9 12 9 21 9 34 arranging 9 42 ASCII display 9 5 9 7 9 21 ASCII input 9 5 9 7 9 21 assigning addresses 2 46 assigning function keys 9 56 assigning tags 9 63 assigning write expressions to 7 23 bar graph 9 5 9 7 9 21 blinking 9 51 boxes 9 6 9 21 buttons changing touch margins 9 52 changing border styles 9 51 changing co
443. p Bit 3 low speed means starting REM Any other bits means alarm state state motor1 sts Get current state of motor Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 18 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 IF state 0 THEN result 0 The motor is not running EXIT END IF The conditional expression wraps to the next line Note the use of the line continuation character IF state AND 4 lt gt 0 AND NOT state AND 251 _ lt gt 0 THEN result 1 The motor is running EXIT END IF IF state AND 4 lt gt 0 AND state AND 8 lt gt 0 AND NOT state AND 243 0 THEN result 2 The motor is starting since run and low speed are active EXIT END IF IF state AND 243 lt gt 0 THEN result 3 The motor has an alarm EXIT END IF The numbers used are based on converting the binary representation of the state bits into a decimal number For instance when bit 2 is set this is equivalent to the number 4 when bit 3 is set this is equivalentto the number 8 243 represents all alarm bits set Expression Return Values It is important to understand how an expression is evaluated in order to correctly determine the result of the expression An expression will return the value of its last executed statement Creating Expressions 7 19 Expression Compilation and Regeneration In each of the following examples var is a properly declared local variabl
444. p to eight input words and eight output words in the I O image table To the programmable controller the PanelView terminal looks like any other Remote I O rack You can configure the PanelView terminal as one or more full or partial Remote I O racks in the Rack Editor in PanelBuilder Depending on the type of controller the PanelView terminal can simulate up to 64 different rack numbers It can also simulate partial racks The following figure shows a PLC 5 15 It is configured for one local and three Remote I O racks The PanelView terminal could be configured to occupy all or part of the three Remote I O racks Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 14 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Input Output i gt Local Rack 2 Remote Rack 3 23730 23737 Programmable Controller PLC 5 15 For detailed information on configuring I O racks refer to Allen Bradley Programmable Controller and Remote I O Scanner user manuals Understanding Module Groups A PanelView rack supports up to eight module groups numbered 0 7 A module group consists of a 16 bit input word and a 16 bit output word The following table shows the starting module groups for the four rack sizes With this starting module You can assign these rack sizes group 1st quarter of rack 0 1 4 1 2 3 4 FULL 2nd quarter of rack 2 1 4 1 2 3 4 3rd quarter of rack 4 1 4 1 2 4th quarter of rack 6 1 4 Because the smalle
445. pen the RIO Racks editor or RIO Block Transfer Files editor 2 Click on the row in the spreadsheet to be deleted or click Next in the Form section until the desired row is highlighted in the spreadsheet 3 Choose Delete from the Edit menu 4 When you are finished click Close To delete a module group from a rack Click the check box beside the module group to clear the X from it Then click Accept to save the change to the rack assignment To define communications for a DH or ControlNet application use these editors e Communication Setup Editor to specify the address of the PanelView terminal on the DH or ControlNet network If you are going to transfer the application to the PanelView terminal over the DH or ControlNet network instead of using a serial Upload Download cable you can also define the terminal s complete DH or ControlNet routing address and network download control tags e Scheduled File Editor to define the size of the scheduled read and write files The Scheduled read and write files are read by the PLC and are written from the PLC Scheduled files are for time critical data only Node Editor to identify the type and address of the programmable logic controllers the application will communicate with e Scan Class Editor to define the speed at which tags used in an application will be scanned for new values The other two editors in the PLC Communications folder the RIO Racks and RIO Block T
446. plication If you resize one or more of the copies a new bitmap is saved for each size of the image which can increase the size of your application significantly Where bitmaps must be used use monochrome rather than color bitmaps Where possible use a Symbol instead of a Multistate Indicator Avoid creating two or more tags for the same PLC address If you create two or more tags pointing to the same PLC address the terminal will scan that same address location more than once For objects that have more than one state Use state values that increment by one for each state Do not configure more states than you need If you need to minimize the size of the application file do not assign names to objects Names use one byte per character Avoid creating two or more node definitions for the same physical node Set the background scan rate as slow as possible Keep screens simple Minimize or avoid object overlap Try to ensure an object s State Values or Message Trigger Values can be accommodated by a byte or integer value as opposed to a long integer For more information about configuring objects see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual Using Worksheets to Help Plan Your Application Step 1 Document the Process Step 2 Design Application Screens and Objects Planning Applications 2 5 This manual comes with worksheets to guide you through planning your screens and ident
447. plication all open editors for that application close as well New Application Ctrl N Open Application Ctrl O To close an application Save Application Ctrl S Save Application As 1 Choose Close from the File menu or from the Control menu You E can also press Ctrl F4 or double click the control menu box on the Application Window Download Upload Alt F4 If you make any changes to the application since last saving it PanelBuilder prompts you to save the changes 2 Choose Yes or No Important If you choose No you lose changes you made in the configuration dialog boxes or editors However if you have a shared database those changes will already have been written to disk Deleting Applications Use the Windows Explorer to delete an application The application is stored in a file of the same name as the application with a pvc file extension For details on how to use the Windows Explorer see your Microsoft Windows User s Guide Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Dialog Box Editors Chapter 4 Working with Editors PanelBuilder has four types of editors dialog boxes form or spreadsheet editors tag database editor screen editor This chapter covers the dialog boxes and form or spreadsheet editors Instructions for using the tag database and screen editors are in Chapter 6 Defining Tags and Chapter 8 Creating Screens Five of the PanelBuilder editors are dialog boxes
448. porting Existing Message Files 10 11 Guidelines for Importing Message Files 10 11 Formatofthe Message File 10 12 Exporting Messages 10 13 Validating Messages 10 14 Updating 5 10 14 Closing the Messages Editor 10 15 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Table of Contents toc xi Configuring Alarms Chapter 11 What Are Alarms 11 1 How Are Alarms Triggered 11 2 Alarm 5 11 2 Displaying 11 3 Acknowledging 5 11 5 Individual AIBImB 11 5 Multiple Alarms 11 5 Clearing lt 11 6 Configuring Alarms aca deu corri enr added aor oe 11 7 Configuring Global ContiolS 11 8 Alarm Trigger Bit or Word 11 8 Alarm Acknowledge to PLC 11 10 CONTON 2462 3 Aresa ta pea ea 11 11 Alarmi JJe anae boe du oe E dus 11 11 Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control 11 17 Remote Acknowledge
449. pplication Note that PanelBuilder saves dxf images as wmf files once imported so dxf files appear as wmf files on the report PVD File Size and Used Tag Lists the pvd file size and the number of tags used in the Count application Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 14 Working with Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To select Report On options 1 Select the Report On options you want to document An X appears beside the options selected for the report To deselect an option click the field so the X disappears When you have selected all the options you want to document click Print to print the report When you are finished click Close to close the dialog box Report On Screens Options By default all the application screens are selected for printing If you do not want to print all the screens you can select a range of screens for printing You can also select from a range of screen print options These are described in detail in the table below To select a range of screens 1 With Screens selected select the From field in the Screens section Type the number of the first screen you want to print Select the To field and type the number of the last screen you want to print The options for Screen Reports are described in the following table This report option Does this Screen Images Shows the image of each screen and all its objects The
450. pplication and an RSView project you may want to share the tag database with more than one application When you convert a private database to a shared database the database is stored outside the application file This improves the speed of opening and saving a large tag database Communication and other information Tags Link to tag database The Shared Database Screens Another PanelBuilder 1400e Application Important The communication information for each application is still private However when you select another PanelBuilder 1400e application to share its database with your current application its communication information replaces the communications setup for your current application Changes you make to the communication information once an application is using a shared database will not affect the information in the other application When you create a new application its tag database is private If you want the database to be shared by other applications you must first convert the private database to a shared database Converting to a shared database creates an external database with links from the application to the database Note When you convert a private database to shared the application s private database is deleted from the pvc file Keep the following points in mind when sharing databases A PanelBuilder 1400e application can only select a database from another PanelBu
451. pplication must be defined If you change the node type the tags that use this node may have invalid addresses If you change the node name you can automatically update your tags at the same time Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 22 Defining Communications E PLC Communications L T Communication Setup IER Scan Classes l RIO Racks LE RIO Block Transfer Files IE Scheduled Files Data Entry Form Spreadsheet Viewer Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To open the Node editor Open the PLC Communications folder Choose Nodes or in the toolbar The Node Editor opens p TETTE Paneles Terminal Ersabiler The Node Editor has two parts the data entry form on top where you define the node and the spreadsheet viewer on the bottom where you see all the nodes and select one for editing To configure the nodes 1 Fill in the following information for each node Use the information you recorded in the Communications Worksheet Node name Type a name of your choice up to 40 characters long This name represents a programmable controller on the network The only valid characters for a node name are a to z A to Z O to 9 dash and _ underscore The name is not case sensitive your characters will be displayed as you typed them Spaces are not permitted Note The node name Unsolicited_Msgs is reserved for system use in DH and ControlNet applications and cannot be assig
452. pression Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 24 Creating Expressions Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Example 5 Entering User Entry Characters in Expressions In this example the user can regulate the speed of a conveyor belt by entering a value using for instance a Numeric Entry Keypad A latched push button defines the value as feet or meters per second One state of the latched push button corresponds to feet per second the other to meters per second The tag is feet or meters and the PLC address is N7 0 If the user enters the value in feet per second the value is passed to the PLC without conversion If the user enters the value in meters per second the write expression converts the value to feet per second before passing it to the PLC If input speed is entered in m sec convert to ft sec DIM input speed AS INTEGER input speed If feet or meters 1 convert input speed from ft sec to m sec IF feet or meters 0 THEN input speed ELSE input speed 3 281 END IF The character is the placeholder for the value the operator enters at the terminal To assign a write expression 1 In the object s configuration dialog box in our example the Numeric Entry Keypad s configuration dialog box for a touch screen application or the Numeric Keypad Enable Button s configuration dialog box for a keypad application select the Optional Keypad Write Exprn control Ceafiqgure Emi
453. pression s value will be unreliable but no minor fault message will appear A major fault message is displayed if the PanelView terminal runs out of memory while evaluating the expression Important If an expression uses division and the denominator is a tag then a minor fault message is displayed when the application starts up under these conditions only ifthe expression is assigned to an object on the Application Startup screen ifthe expression is assigned to any of the alarm or Global PLC I O controls Expression Data Types Expressions perform mathematical and logical calculations on numerical and Boolean values Expressions can work with values that use these data types Data Type Description Range Boolean A 32 bit value Truezl False 0 Byte An unsigned 8 bit value 0 to 255 Integer A signed 16 bit value 32 768 to 32 767 Long A signed 32 bit value 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Single An IEEE 32 bitfloating 3 402823x1038 to 1 401298x10 3 for float point value negative values zero 1 401298x10 7 to 3 402823x10 8 for positive values Variant A special 32 bit value that See above Has full range of all the other data can contain any one of types the Boolean Byte Integer Long or Single data types It adjusts its data type to accommodate the value assigned to it Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 4 Creating Expressions Expression Language Publication 2711E 6 14
454. propriate Word and Byte circle Read or Write and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary 2 Ifthe Block Transfer File is on a Listen Only rack the file can only have Listen Only access 3 The Pass Through Block Transfer File must be defined on a Full Access rack 4 Foreach block transfer file mark off the byte in the output image on the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Block Transfer File Assignments Block Transfer File Size Rack Word Byte Number Pass Through 64 01234567 01234567 01234567 Pul Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only 01734507 Full Listen Only 01234567 Ful Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only 01234507 01 234507 01234507 Full Listen Only 01223242507 Full Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only 01234567 Full Listen Only 01 234507 Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only Full Listen Only 01234507 01234567 01234567 Application File Name Remote I O Tags Worksheet Screen Number Object Tag Address Ref Initial Analog Tag only Initial R Start No of Bits End Address Tag T Name T iti ange s ype State ype Off or string tag only Start set Data Type No Value Sedis Value of Values Addres No of characters Value Address formats Discrete I O rrw bb Iis input O is output rr is rack number w is start word bb
455. ps Assign each module group only once for any given rack that has multiple assignments Ensure module group assignments are contiguous for each rack assignment For example you can assign modules 0 2 and 4 but not modules 0 2 and 6 Last Chassis Enabling Last Chassis signals to the programmable controller that it does not need to scan further module groups for the racks past those defined in the rack assignment If you are using partial rack assignments you can enable Last Chassis for any one of module groups 0 1 or 2 3 or 4 5 Module group 6 7 if used in a rack assignment will always have last chassis enabled automatically To assign racks 1 In the Rack Number field select the rack number you want to use 2 Select the contiguous module groups you want to assign for that rack number An X appears in the check box beside each module group you select gt Note For any rack number there can be only one rack assignment with Last Chassis enabled When you define multiple assignments for a rack any Last Chassis enabled for those with lower module groups will be disabled when rack assignments with higher module group numbers are defined 3 When you have finished click Accept to save the rack assignment 4 If desired assign further racks and related module groups Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Setting Up Block Transfer Files PLC Communications v Communication Setup eee Nodes 1 Scan Classe
456. pter 1 Introduction to PanelBuilder An overview of PanelBuilder its editors and required and optional equipment Chapter 2 Planning Applications An outline of what you need to do before you create an application including an overview of the steps for building an application and how to plan for safety and optimal runtime performance This chapter also explains in detail the planning steps which include documenting the process your application will control or monitor designing your screens and planning communications Chapter 3 Working with Applications Instructions for working with applications such as creating opening saving and closing applications Chapter 4 Working with Editors Instructions for working with dialog boxes and the form spreadsheet style editors used to configure an application Chapter 5 Defining Communications Instructions for defining PLC communications for Remote I O applications including selecting the controller and baud rate assigning racks and block transfer files and setting Pass Through communication parameters For DH and ControlNet applications the instructions include selecting the controller and baud rate bridging and defining nodes scan classes and Scheduled files Chapter 6 Defining Tags Information about using the Tag Database editor to define tags Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Information about using the Expression editor to define expressions Preface P 7 C
457. quirements Record the information on the Rack Assignments and Block Transfer File worksheets Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 32 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Rack Assignments Worksheet Once you know how much I O your application requires use the Rack Assignments Worksheet to keep track of your rack assignments Rack Assignments Worksheet Application File Name PLC Scanner Type 115 2K 5 000 Ft Baud Rate 57 6K 10 000 Ft 2304K 2 500 Ft Note You must make at least one rack assignment Additional rack assignments are optional Record the Rack Number and circle the Module Groups Last Chassis designation and Access used Use additional worksheets if necessary Rack Assignments Last Chassis 23 45 67 1 23 4 5 67 1 23 45 67 1 23 45 67 sl 23 45 67 23 45 67 23 45 67 1_ 23 4 5 67 23 45 67 23 45 67 J 23 245 67 23 45 67 1 23 45 67 23 245 67 23 45 67 23 45 67 1 23 45 67 Access lt Listen On cols Listen On T Listen On Listen On Listen On Listen On ole Listen T Listen Listen Listen On Listen Listen On gt l gt le Listen On Listen On Listen On lt 41616 IK IK IK IK IK IK Listen On 2 2 2 Z 2 2 2 Z Z 2 2 2 z z z z gt i Listen On lt
458. r or press Ctrl C 3 Open the text editor to which you want to copy the messages 4 Paste the messages into the text editor Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 10 14 Creating Messages Validating Messages You can validate your messages anytime in any of the views to ensure that you have followed all the guidelines for creating and editing messages To validate your messages Undo Ctrl4 Z Redo Ctri Y 1 Choose Validate in the Edit menu Cut A Validation Results for Alarm Messages window appears If Copy Ctrl C your message list contains errors such as duplicate trigger values Paste Ctrl V you will see them listed in the window If there are no errors in the message list a check mark appears Duplicate Message Ctrl D Delete Message Del Insert Message Select All Ctrl A S mTHIEU Ii Fill Forward Ctrl F Sort Messages Amm Mee bris of argia serm iind Bree The tigger value campi ba 4 2 If there are errors listed go back to the screen or the message editor and correct the errors gt Tip You can leave the Validation Results window open on your desktop while you are making the necessary changes to the message list You may want to resize the window and move it slightly off screen When you have made a correction click Update in the Validation Results window This will check the changes you have made You c
459. r to move to a previous level of indent press the Backspace key until the cursor is at the position of the previous level of indent All subsequent lines will be indented at this position until you next change the indent position You can copy cut and paste text in expressions First highlight the text you want to copy or cut or position the cursor at the position you want to paste text then To do this Press this Copy Ctrl C Cut Ctrl X Paste Ctrl V This also works for copying cutting and pasting text between the Expression Editor and other Windows applications Checking Syntax You can check the syntax of an expression at any time by choosing Check Syntax If there are no errors in the syntax of the expression the message No syntax errors found in expression is displayed in the Results message box If there are syntax errors the message A total of x syntax errors were found in the expression is displayed where x is the number of errors found The errors together with the line number on which they were found are displayed beneath the first message in the Results message box To locate and correct a syntax error double click the message of the error you want to correct or select the error message and choose Go To Saving Expressions You can save all expressions for the current object or function To save changes to expressions To save the expressions click OK To discard all changes cl
460. r 2711E 6 16 ControlNet DH Defining Communications 5 19 Specifying the Panel View Location Routing Address For ControlNet applications because no ControlNet bridge devices are available the Panel View Location Routing Address can only be a local network address If you are going to transfer the application to the Panel View terminal over DH directly rather than using a serial Upload Download cable you must specify the Panel View Location Routing Address so that PanelBuilder can locate the Panel View terminal By default the Panel View Location Routing Address defined in the Network File Transfer tab is used If the Panel View terminal and the development computer are on the same DH network the Panel View Location Routing Address will be the terminal s DH station number It will be an octal number between 0 and 77 If they are on different but connected DH networks you must also specify a local and remote bridge address The following table shows the syntax for a remote station address bridged by a 1785 KA Station Address Valid Entries ll rrr ss I local bridge address 0 77 octal rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal 55 station address on remote 0 77 octal or You can shorten the offlink address by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote stati
461. r File is on a Listen Only rack the file can only have Listen Only access The Pass Through Block Transfer File must be defined on a Full Access rack For each block transfer file mark off the byte in the output image on the Discrete I O worksheet Beso Block Transfer File Assignments Block Transfer File Size Rack Word Byte Usage Access Number 12 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 36 Planning Applications Carrying Out Your Plan Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Using the Remote I O Tags and Rack Assignments worksheets as a reference define the following Block Transfer File Number Specify the file number B1 to B64 e Size Specify the number of words required 1 to 64 e Rack Specify a rack number Word Assign the word that will contain the block transfer control byte Byte Choose Hi for high control byte or Lo for low control byte Usage Specify whether the control address is for a block transfer read or block transfer write Access Specify Full or Listen Only access as determined by the rack definition Assigning Pass Through The Pass Through option provides a way to transfer applications remotely to and from the PanelView terminal using the DH and Remote I O ControlNet and Remote I O or Ethernet and Remote I O networks You can assign the Pass Through address using PanelBuilder enabling you to transfer an application file without taking the Pa
462. r the analog input from the probe DIM temperature AS SINGLE Temperature is the variable name for the temperature in degrees Celsius The Single data type yields a floating point decimal result Creating Expressions 7 15 analog input Tag For Temperature Probe The analog input variable is assigned to the tag that reads the analog input The conditional expression wraps to the next line Note the use of the line continuation character SELECTCASE analog input CASE 0 TO 1000 temperature analog input 100 1000 100 Use this calculation if analog value is between O0 and 1000 CASE 1001 TO 4000 temperature analog input 1000 200 3000 200 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 1000 amp 4000 CASE 4001 TO 4095 temperature analog input 4000 100 95 400 Use this calculation if analog value is betw 4000 amp 4095 CASEELSE temperature 1 The probe should not be returning values outside the range of 0 to 4095 If the PanelView terminal displays 1 then the operator will know something is wrong ENDSELECT Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 16 Creating Expressions Logical Operations Some logical operations take precedence over others Operations with the highest precedence are evaluated first Operands can include any combination of keywords variables tags constants and operator
463. ransfer Files editors are used exclusively for defining Remote I O communications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 16 Defining Communications Communication Setup E PLC Communications Communication Setup amp Nodes 1 Scan Classes l RIO Racks L RIO Block Transfer Files lS Scheduled Files Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Configure Communication Setup dialog box has two tabs Terminal Communications and Network File Transfer In the Terminal Communications tab you specify the address of the Panel View terminal on the DH or ControlNet network If you are going to transfer the application between the development computer and the Panel View terminal using a serial Upload Download cable you do not have to specify anything in the Network File Transfer tab If you are going to transfer the application via the DH or ControlNet network you can specify the complete address for the Panel View terminal This address is used as the default terminal location when the application is downloaded over the network You should also assign network download control tags to facilitate the transfer of the application file Do this in the Network File Transfer tab To open the Configure Communication Setup dialog box Open the PLC Communications folder Choose Communication Setup or in the toolbar Configure Communication Setup x Network Type Address Driver Baud Rate
464. ransfer Utility 32 Version 5 or later must be installed These utilities are included with your PanelBuilder software kit and are also available separately in the PanelView Transfer Utility software kit A B Catalog Number 2711E ND7 For information about installing the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility or PanelView e Transfer Utility 32 and transferring application files see the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 For specific information about transferring Modbus application files see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 12 There are two ways to transfer an application from Panelbuilder to a PanelView terminal from within PanelBuilder if you have opened the application file and are working on it or using the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility or PanelView e Transfer Utility 32 if you have already created a pvd PanelView terminal file Whichever method you choose the process of configuring the communication parameters and upload or download options is the same Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 15 2 Transferring Applications To transfer an application from within PanelBuilder PanelBuilder transfers applications using the Transfer Utility However for your convenience you can configure and initiate the upload or download without leaving PanelBuilder 1 Prepare the PanelView termin
465. ransition will trigger an alarm whose trigger value is equal to the tag s bit position added to the starting trigger value If more than one alarm is triggered at the same time the alarms are logged to the Alarm History file in ascending numerical order according to their trigger value If the alarms span multiple tags the alarms will be logged according to the order in which they were configured in the Configure Alarms dialog box Simultaneous alarms will be stamped with the same time and date regardless of whether they were triggered from a single tag or multiple tags Starting Trigger Each block tag must be assigned a starting trigger value from 1 to 65 535 you can assign a maximum of 50 tags The starting trigger is the trigger value of the alarm that is to be triggered by the first bit of the block tag For example if a block tag is configured for 10 bits and a Starting Trigger value of 1 it can be used to trigger alarms with trigger values 1 to 10 If that same block tag has a Starting Trigger value of 3 it can be used to trigger alarms with trigger values 3 to 12 Important For Bit triggered alarms each message must be uniquely triggered by a single block tag That is different block tags cannot trigger the same alarm Example 2 Using Multiple Alarm Tags for Bit Trigger Operation on Remote I O Assume the following alarm messages and block tags are defined in the application Trigger Value Message Text essage 1
466. rder Note When the maximum value of 2 147 483 647 is reached the next state value will wrap around to the minimum value 2 147 483 648 The sequential state value begins increasing back to the maximum value Creating Objects 9 61 Error States If an object has more than one state these two conditions can cause an error state The value of the object s control does not match any of the state values defined for the object The control for the object has not been assigned For button objects if an error state occurs the highest state is displayed without its label for Interlocked Push Buttons no button is highlighted For list objects if an error state occurs the highlight bar disappears Configuring List Object States You can configure these types of list objects ist Indicators Control List Selectors Screen List Selectors e Scrolling Lists At the Panel View terminal the operator moves through the items in the list and makes selections Each item in the list is a different object state You can define the number of states in the list by resizing the list component Note You can also define the number of states for all but the Control List Selector in the objects configuration dialog boxes Note For the Scrolling List object the number of states in its Object Lists depends on the number of visible states defined for its Cursor List Once you have assigned tags to visible states in the
467. rdless of the tag s data type Extensive use of floating point values can slow a terminal s performance Important If the descaled value to be written to the tag address is a fraction but the tag is not configured to deal with floating point data that is Float data type or Default data type with a tag address in the Float section of the programmable controller the value will be truncated to the nearest whole number before it is written to the tag address Note You can also use expressions to perform calculations on the values of analog and digital tags that read information from the PLC See Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Units This field is present to maintain compatibility with RSView databases You cannot enter anything in the Units field Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 16 Defining Tags Remote I O DH and ControlNet Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Data Type Select the data type that matches the format of the data stored in the programmable controller The default data type is Default In DH and ControlNet applications Default will let the tag address dictate the tag s data type for example N7 integer H3 0 long Unless special data is expected Default should be acceptable For Remote I O and ControlNet Scheduled applications Default means Unsigned Integer You will need to set the data type to the format of the data expected in the I O tables For Remote I O and Scheduled tags the
468. re must be a space or tab between the previous executable code and the line continuation character You can use the line continuation character on consecutive lines Parentheses Use parentheses to override operation precedence in your expressions and to add clarity For samples of how to use parentheses see Examples 1 through 3 later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 7 6 Creating Expressions Component Symbol Description Spaces tabs and blank lines You can use spaces tabs and blank lines wherever you like to make your expressions clear and readable The only place where a space is not permitted is between the negation operator and its operand In some cases spaces are required For example between the line continuation character and the previous executable code If in doubt see the section that describes the expression component you are using Extra spaces tabs and blank lines are removed when the expression is compiled Tags Tagname You can use any analog or digital read tag in your expressions You must use the full tag name including any tag folder names You can use the same tag multiple times in an expression However you may then wish to assign the tag to a local variable You can use up to 50 different tags in each expression See also Braces above User entry character You must use the user entry character in the optional write expressions if you assign t
469. re the application will validate successfully You may need to add the supporting racks and block transfer files for Remote I O tags or nodes and scan classes for DH or ControlNet tags Tip If copying objects across applications using the same tags make the tag database Shared and have both applications use it Or if you want to keep the tag databases Private export the source application s tags and import them into the destination application To choose whether or not to copy controls Choose with Controls in the Edit menu If the Copy with Controls menu item has a check mark beside it the option is zu selected If there is no check mark the option is deselected jun End ded Di To copy a screen s contents into the screen of another application Dex Al 1 Open up both applications 2 Open the screen you want to copy 3 Choose the objects you want to copy If you want to copy the entire screen contents choose Select All from the Edit menu or Vineis E wart press Ctrl A 4 Choose Copy from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press Ctrl C 5 Create a new application screen in the application you want to copy the screen to Click anywhere on the new screen window or within the screen Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 8 6 Creating Screens 7 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the toolbar or press Ctrl V The objects copied from the orig
470. ready for downloading to a PanelView 1200 terminal e all files Converting Applications Created in PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder for DOS Working with Applications 3 5 3 Choose the application you want to open 4 Click OK The Application Window for the application you just selected appears on your screen If you are opening a cfg pbw or apl application PanelBuilder automatically converts the application A status window appears while the application is being converted To run your PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder for DOS applications on a PanelView 1000e 1200e or 1400e terminal you must convert the application You can convert any cfg pbw or apl files To convert a PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder for DOS application 1 Open the application as described in the previous section The following message appears Import Application ix Po The version compatibility of this application will be set to 1 PanelView 1400e terminal firmware version 1 00 00 and above The application size may be increased as a result Convert application Cancel Help 2 Click OK A progress window appears during the time it takes to convert the application Once the application is open you can edit it This application is now compatible with PanelBuilder 1400e only and will run on PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e terminals only However the original file remains unchanged on the computer s disk W
471. ress is the DH station number configure in the current application The Station Address can be changed in the Panel View Terminal Network Setup screen Note For more node definitions use additional copies of this worksheet Scan Class Definitions Note The default foreground and background rates are 1 000 seconds and 86 400 seconds respectively Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Node Name PLC Type Station Address Timeout sec Unsolicited Msgs PLC 2 0 3 000 DH and ControlNet gt DH ControlNet Planning Applications 2 39 Defining Nodes A node is a programmable controller that your application will be communicating with on a network For each node you must identify the type of programmable controller its station address and the timeout value Recording Node Information For each node fill in Node Name Name assigned to the node The name can be up to 40 characters long and can include letters numbers the dash and the underscore character _ Spaces are not permitted Tip Use a name that will help you to identify your programmable controllers when you are assigning tags later in your application For example you could name your programmable controllers according to their locations or the machine or part of the process they will be controlling or monitoring Note In DH and ControlNet applications the node name Unsolicited Msgs is reserved for system use It
472. ribing 12 4 determining size 3 11 downloading 2 1 15 1 file formats 3 4 opening 3 4 optimizing 2 4 planning 2 1 2 2 ControlNet 2 5 DH 2 5 Remote 1 0 2 5 renaming 3 10 resolution high resolution 12 3 low resolution 12 3 running 1 3 saving 3 7 3 8 in another file format 3 9 testing 2 1 transferring 15 1 from within PanelBuilder 15 2 using the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility 15 3 uploading 15 1 validating 3 10 Applying filters in Tag Usage Viewer 6 28 Arcs 9 5 9 12 9 21 9 34 Arithmetic operations in expressions 7 9 Arranging inner text 9 48 ASCII display 9 5 9 7 9 21 ASCII input 9 5 9 7 9 21 Assigning device type 5 8 racks 5 8 5 9 write expressions 7 24 Auto repeat functions rate 12 8 start delay 12 8 Background alarms 11 30 Background color screens 8 8 Bar graph 9 5 9 7 9 21 Baud rate for remote 1 0 5 3 selecting on worksheets 2 34 BCD data type 2 26 2 52 Binary Coded Decimal data type See BCD data type inary data type 2 24 2 51 it position data type 2 25 2 51 it triggered alarms 11 8 about 11 9 itmap image 9 21 inking objects 9 51 ock tags 6 2 configuring 6 19 UJ UJ UJ UJ UJ vs Index 1 3 ock Transfer File 1 0 Usage Worksheet A 1 using 2 30 ock Transfer File Worksheet A 1 using 2 35 ock transfer files about 5 11 access 5 13 addresses 2 16 changing file assignments 5 14
473. rolled PLC I O Control options The background scan period applies to all other data packets in the system The valid range of values is 1 to 86 400 seconds 24 hours To specify a period type a number You can use fractions of a second For example 0 6 means scan every six tenths of a second Keep the background rate slow so as not to slow down network traffic Tip For more information about optimizing DH or ControlNet highway traffic refer to your network user documentation Also see Guidelines for Configuring Scan Classes in Chapter 2 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 26 Defining Communications gt Note If a tag is being used by both a foreground and background component the tag will be scanned at the foreground rate 2 To save the information you have configured click OK gt Note If you change the name of a scan class used by tags you have the option of automatically updating the tags with the new name Configuring Scheduled ControlNet Scheduled Files transfer information to and from the Files PLC Scheduled files can be defined as either Read or Write files You can also specify the size of the Scheduled file ControlNet Scheduled Files use the scheduled portion of the ControlNet bandwidth for time critical data To communicate in Scheduled or Unscheduled Mode on a ControlNet network you will require 1784 KTCX card for Unscheduled mode only e 1784 KTCS card
474. roller before it sees the button tag trigger The delay controls the flow of alarm messages and acknowledgements to the PLC If the Alarm Message to PLC is enabled it also determines the interval between the time a message is sent to the PLC and the time the Message Control tag is set To set the Alarm Control Delay p Inthe Alarm Control Delay list choose the time you want to assign Note For more information on alarms see Chapter 11 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 12 8 Configuring Terminal Setup Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Setting the Enter Key Parameters Many objects such as the Control List Selector and the Numeric Input Keypad have an Enter Key Handshake control tag or expression The following settings apply to those controls The Enter Key Handshake Time determines how long the terminal will wait for a handshake from the PLC controller To set the Enter Key Handshake Time Inthe Handshake Time list choose the time you want to assign The Enter Key Control Delay determines how long the terminal will wait after the Enter key is pressed to send a control value to the programmable controller and the time the Enter Key Control tag is set to 1 The delay ensures that the new value is recorded in the programmable controller before it sees the button tag trigger To set the Enter Key Control Delay In the Control Delay list choose the time you want to assign
475. roller linked directly to the PanelView terminal through the I O rack If you are using discrete addresses you must configure the Remote I O racks before you can assign an address to a tag If you are using block transfer files you must configure these in addition to the racks before you can assign an address to a tag Scheduled Data Source A tag with Scheduled as its data source receives and sends its data from a programmable logic controller on a ControlNet network Before you can assign an address to a scheduled tag you must define the Scheduled read and write file size If you are going to define the file size after the tag is created make sure the Address field is blank This allows PanelBuilder to validate the tag and expect a valid tag record when you choose Accept See Relaxed Validation below Relaxed Validation When you configure the data source for a tag if you leave any of the fields in the Data Source form section blank the tag definition will be saved but not validated If all the fields are filled in the tag will be validated when you choose Accept and any errors must be corrected before the tag definition will be saved Validation ensures that any node scan class rack Scheduled file and block transfer file definitions needed by the tag exist Specifying Device as the Data Source Use the information on the Device Tags Worksheets to fill in the tag addresses 1 Choose Device Data Source Type Device
476. rom 0 to 65535 Integer A signed integer occupies one 16 bit word stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 32 768 to 432 767 Long Integer A long integer occupies two 16 bit words stored in two s complement format The range of raw data values is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Floating Point Single precision 32 bit floating point The range of data values is 3 402823E 38 to 1 175494E 37 0 and 1 175494E 37 to 3 402823E 38 For Remote I O applications the tag must use a Block Transfer File address Byte The byte data type occupies 8 bits of unsigned data The range of raw data values is from 0 to 255 e Binary When this data type is assigned the object s PLC address will be a contiguous bit string 1 to 16 bits long The number of bits you assign determines the range of values you can access The range of values is 0 to 27 1 where n is the number of bits For example the range of values for 16 bits is 0 to 65535 You can position a binary data address anywhere within a PLC word The binary data address can extend into the next word but cannot extend past the end of a rack assignment or block transfer file Planning Applications 2 25 The remaining bits in that word on either side of the binary data address can be used for other tags with other data types The following table shows the relationship between binary states and bits
477. rrange them in a number of ways using tools in the toolbar or menu commands from the Arrange menu You can combine several objects into a group that behaves as a single object e divide a grouped object into its component objects layer objects align objects with each other horizontally or vertically space objects horizontally or vertically flip objects horizontally or vertically Grouping and Ungrouping Objects You can group several objects so they can be moved or edited as a single unit You can also group an existing group with another object or with another group These kinds of groups are called nested groups All groups can be ungrouped If you ungroup nested groups they are ungrouped in their nesting sequence Arrange Group Ctrl G Ungroup Send to Back Bring to Front Align Left Align Center Align Bight Align Top Align Middle Align Bottom Align Center Points Align to Grid Space Vertical Space Horizontal Flip Vertical Flip Horizontal Creating Objects 9 43 Note Too many levels of nested groups can slow down PanelBuilder For faster performance keep groups to 10 or less nesting levels To group objects 1 Choose the objects you want to group Handles appear on all objects to show they are chosen The status bar tells you how many objects are chosen 2 Choose Group from the Arrange menu or choose from the toolbar Select the objects Group them One s
478. rsion is Version 1 or Version 1 03 block tags used in the application are reported as errors when you validate the application Block tags are supported in DH and ControlNet applications that use Target Firmware Version 2 or later Note If you convert shared tags this may make them invalid for the other applications that are using them Also unused tags are not converted and remain as Remote I O tags Note If you convert an application from Remote I O to DH or ControlNet or vice versa the tag addresses may be invalid for the network to which you are converting Change the tag addresses to match the network type Change Network Type Current Network Remote 1 0 Target Network DH Cancel IX Convert Tags Node Scan Class 4 Specify a node name and scan class You can specify a node name and scan class when you do the conversion or you can leave them blank If you enter a node name and scan class they will be used in all the tags that are converted In addition the node and scan class will be created for you with the default settings You can change the settings to suit your application later Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 5 30 Defining Communications Converting from Remote I O to ControlNet Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 If you leave the Node Name and Scan Class fields blank the converted tags will have a blank node and scan class name You will have to create the nod
479. s Tag Types Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 PanelBuilder uses the following types of tags This tag Stores this type of data type Analog Range of values depends on the data type integer or floating point selected These tags can represent complex states such as temperature or the position of rotary controls Digital 1 These tags can represent devices that can only be 1 or off 0 such as push buttons String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters These tags are used only when defining ASCII Input and ASCII Display objects and for sending alarm messages to the PLC Block A contiguous bit stream of up to 1024 bits A block tag is used strictly for defining the Alarm Triggers tag and Acknowledge to PLC tag when multiple simultaneous alarms need to be monitored Use Block Tags when using bit triggered alarms Note that PanelBuilder Version 2 supports Device block tags as well as Remote 1 0 block tags Read and Write Tags At runtime PanelBuilder objects and control functions can read from or write to PLC addresses assigned to any of the tag types The terms read tag and write tag will sometimes be used A read tag is a tag with a PLC address that only needs to be read by PanelBuilder objects and functions A write tag is a tag with a PLC address that can be written to by PanelBuilder objects and functions For a Remote I O application a read ta
480. s construct operations logical operations Order of Precedence Arithmetic operations take precedence over comparison operations and comparison operations take precedence over logical operations Use parentheses to override the order of precedence Operations within parentheses are performed before operations outside the parentheses Operations within parentheses are performed according to the precedence rules Component Symbol Creating Expressions 7 5 The following list shows the order of precedence in descending order for all operators negation and floating point division integer division Mod and subtraction and lt gt and lt and gt and lt and gt Not And Or Xor See the section for each type of operation for more information For an example and more information about the order of precedence of individual arithmetic operators see Arithmetic Operations later in this chapter Other Expression Components You can also use these components in your expressions Description Braces Use braces to enclose tag names Use of braces is optional but required when tag names contain these ambiguous characters backslash period hyphen and underscore C If you do not use braces the ambiguous characters will be treated as expression language syntax rather than as part of the tag name For example there are tags called PUMP and PUMP 1 PU
481. s 10 3 objects 9 36 selections in spreadsheets 4 13 tags 6 12 text 9 25 Editors about 1 1 alarms 11 7 Communication Setup 5 2 5 15 dialog box 4 1 Expression 7 20 form spreadsheet 4 3 Nodes ControlNet 5 15 5 21 DH 5 15 5 21 Remote 1 0 Block Transfer Files 5 2 5 11 Racks 5 2 5 8 Scan Class 5 25 5 26 Scan classes ControlNet 5 15 DH 5 15 Scheduled Files 5 15 5 27 Tag Database 6 5 types 4 1 working in multiple 6 13 Ellipse 9 5 9 12 9 21 Enabling nodes 5 23 Enhancing PanelView terminals Series F and G 1 3 Enter key parameters 12 8 control delay 12 8 handshake time 12 8 Equipment optional 1 7 required 1 3 Errors communication time before reporting 5 23 syntax in expressions 7 22 Ethernet Pass Through assigning 2 36 block transfer control byte 5 13 setting up 5 5 Evaluation of expressions 7 18 of local variables 7 7 Examples expressions 7 26 Exporting graphic images 9 31 messages 10 11 10 13 symbols 9 29 tag database 6 37 to MODSOFT database 6 37 to Taylor ProWORXPLUS database 6 37 Expressions about 7 2 checking syntax 7 22 compilation of 7 19 components 7 5 7 21 maximum number of 7 8 creating 7 1 cutting copying and pasting 7 22 data types 7 3 defined 7 1 editing 7 20 after compilation 7 19 elements removed from during compilation 7 19 errors syntax 7 22 examples 7 26 floating point accuracy 7 4 formatting 7 21
482. s I RIO Racks P AIO Block Transfer Files L e Scheduled Files Defining Communications 5 11 A tag with a block transfer file address can be used anywhere in place of a tag with a discrete I O address Discrete addressing provides better performance and requires less PLC programming However if you do not have enough discrete address space or need more contiguous address space use block transfer files A block transfer file can be either a read or a write file with Full or Listen Only access depending on the access of the assigned control byte A byte is used in the output space of the rack regardless of file type However a read and a write file can share the same byte in the output table Important Some scanners the 1771 SN and 1747 SN Series A modules for example do not support block transfers to a Remote I O device Block transfer file assignments apply only if you are using another remote 1771 I O or 1747 SN Series B scanner device To determine whether your scanner supports the use of block transfers refer to your scanner s user documentation Each block transfer file must be assigned a control byte This control byte occupies space on an already defined rack In other words before you can assign block transfer files you must define the rack assignments See the previous section for more information Use the Block Transfer File Assignments worksheet you created in Chapter 2 Planning Applications To open th
483. s Explorer in Microsoft Windows to copy the application The application is stored in a file of the same name as the application with a pvc file extension See your Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details on how to use Windows Explorer P Tip To make a copy of an application with a shared tag database to move to another machine first convert the database from Shared to Private then copy the application Then only a single pvc file will need to be moved Renaming Applications You can use the Save As option described previously to rename an existing application or you can use the Windows Explorer For details on using the Windows Explorer see the Microsoft Windows User s Guide Validating Applications As you create your application periodically validate it to ensure there are no problems The Validate option searches for application errors in Terminal Setup Alarms PLC I O Control Information Message Window the message editors screens tags and expressions The Validate Option locates errors such as overlapped input screen objects offscreen objects conflicting tag initial values invalid messages invalid expression syntax and version control violations Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Validate Change Network Type Application Size Replace Tag Name Tag Usage Viewer Transfer Utility Determining the Application Size Working with Applications 3 11 To validate your application 1 Choose
484. s abs 9 54 Cong ODJET neue se ex ded Er RIP ee cer 9 55 Assigning Function Keys Keypad Applications Only 9 56 Configuring Object 9 57 Configuring Number of States 9 58 Assigning Values 9 59 EMOS TES a CORR ER CORR d 9 61 Configuring List Object States 9 61 Adding Text to List 5 9 62 Configuring 9 63 Assigning Tags and Expressions to Objects 9 63 Viewing Assigned Tags 9 65 Creating Messages Chapter 10 What Are 5 10 1 Kinds Of MeSSBUB vato 10 1 How Messages Are 10 2 Creating and Editing 10 3 Guidelines for Creating and Editing Messages 10 3 Using Formatting Codes in Your Messages 10 4 Version 2 or Later Applications 10 5 Creating New Message 10 6 Adding Audio Print Display Alarm Relay and Message to PLC Options to Alarm Messages 10 8 Importing Messages 10 9 Importing Messages Using the 10 10 Im
485. s on the numeric keypad to select the number of pixels you wish to move the object by The available vertical increment values are 1 2 5 10 20 and 40 with the default equal to 20 The available horizontal increment values are 1 2 5 10 and 20 with the default equal to 20 The increment value varies according to how many times you press the or key 4 Press Ctrl arrow to move the object the configured number of pixels To move an object with the Position dialog box To move selected screen objects grouped objects and line objects to specific x y coordinates use the Position dialog box Any object with a snap to cell behavior cannot be moved 1 Choose an on screen object and press Ctrl O or choose Position from the Edit menu The Position dialog box appears Note The top text line Position of the Position dialog box shows the current x y coordinates of the object or grouped object The bottom text line Size shows the current size of the object or grouped object You can resize the object or grouped object by changing the width and height Some objects have a minimum or fixed size and cannot be changed 2 Enter the desired x y coordinates 3 Enter the desired resize changes if required 4 Click OK For information on using the Position dialog box with line objects see Sizing Objects earlier in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 42 Creating Objects Undo Ctrl Z Redo
486. s that result in a number or Boolean value The logical operation differs depending on the data type of the operand Data Type of Operand Logic Operation Type If both are Byte Integer Long Variant or any Bit wise combination of these If one or both are Boolean or Single Boolean 1 True 0 False In either case the result is considered reliable if both operands are reliable This table describes the types of logical operations you can use expressions to perform Operators are listed in order of precedence Operator Data Type of Description Syntax If Operandi Is And Operand2 Then Result Operands Is Is Not Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise Not Operand1 0 1 negation on the operand 1 2 Boolean or Single Performs a logical negation True False on the operand False True And Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise And 0 0 0 conjunction on the Operand2 0 1 0 operands 1 0 0 1 1 1 Boolean or Single Performs a logical True True True conjunction on the True False False operands False True False False False False Or Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise Or 0 0 0 disjunction on the Operand2 0 1 1 operands 1 0 1 1 1 1 Boolean or Single Performs a logical True True True disjunction on the True False True operands False True True False False False Xor Byte Integer Long Performs a bit wise Operand1 Xor 0 0 0 exclusion on the operands 2 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Boolean or Single Performs a logical
487. s the current time It can be displayed anywhere on the screen Depending on the settings configured in the PanelView terminal a variety of formats can be displayed Trends Trend allows the operator to track process variables over a period of time It is a dynamic graphical display object with time on the horizontal axis and the value range of the process variable on the vertical axis Up to four process variables can be plotted using the same Trend object Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 14 Creating Objects Working with Objects Knowing how to perform several basic actions and techniques will save you time as you create objects and screens Using the Toolbox and Color Palette PanelBuilder 1400e provides a toolbox for creating objects and a color palette for coloring them The toolbox differs slightly between touch screen and keypad applications The toolbox and color palette are optional and flexible You can move them anywhere on the screen by dragging and placing them with the pointer or by using the Move command in the Control menu Next State AIt N Previous State Alt P Grid Settings hide or show them using the commands on the View menu or on their Control menus Zoom In Zoom Out resize the toolbox by dragging a side or corner or by using the Size command in the Control menu Y Show Color Palette Show Toolbox Touch Screen Toolbox
488. s you made to your screen are updated automatically Important Updating your screen saves the screen only temporarily To save your changes permanently you must also save the application When you have finished working in a screen you can close it To close a screen Choose Close from the Screen menu double click the screen s Control menu box or press Ctrl F4 Any changes you made are updated automatically You can remove application screens from an application Note If you delete a screen that contains objects with defined initial state values the tag s initial value will be used However if an object with the defined initial state value in another screen has the same tag assigned its initial state value will be used To delete a screen 1 Open the Screens folder in the Application Window 2 Select the screen you want to delete 3 Choose Delete from Screen menu press the Delete key on your keyboard or from the toolbar The Delete dialog box asks you to confirm that you want to delete the screen 4 Click OK The screen is deleted from the application Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 8 8 Creating Screens Setting a New Screen Background Color Screen New Ctrl N Close Ctrl F4 Screen Settings Screen Security Screen Yalidate F9 Screen Tag Usage Viewer F5 Assigning Security Access to Screens Screen New Ctrl N Close Ctrl F4 S
489. sage It is right justified if you choose After Message Number of Digits Choose how many digits of the trigger value to display The range is 1 to 11 Note If a trigger value requires more digits than the number you choose when that value s message is displayed the trigger value field is filled with asterisks on the PanelView terminal Underline Click the checkbox to choose Yes if you want the trigger value to be underlined Leave it unchecked to choose No Blink Click the checkbox to choose Yes if you want the trigger value to blink Leave it unchecked to choose No Foreground Color Choose the foreground color of the trigger value Background Color Choose the background color of the trigger value 5 Assign controls in the Control field About the Alarm Status Screen Configuring Alarms 11 41 This control Does this Clear Window to PLC The Clear Window to PLC control tells the PLC that the Alarm Message Window is no longer displayed on the PanelView terminal s screen When the user clears the Single line Multi line or Alarm Message Panel the terminal sets the Clear Window to PLC control to 1 for the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time After the Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time the control is reset to 0 The user can clear the Single line Multi line or Alarm Message Panel by acknowledging all alarms The user can also press Exit on the Multi line Alarm Message Window to clear it Assign a tag to enable
490. sage to PLC option for Alarm Messages is set to No the Retain Last List State and Skip State options for Cursor Lists are set to No in Scrolling List objects if the application uses an Enhanced SLC device the Slot Number field in the Network File Transfer tab of the Configure Communication Setup dialog box is set to 0 if the application has a block tag assigned to the Alarm Triggers control the tag uses the Bit Alarm Trigger Type with a Starting Trigger of 1 if the Alarm Triggers control is an analog or digital tag it uses the Word Alarm Trigger Type if the application has a block tag assigned to the Acknowledge to PLC control the tag uses the Bit Acknowledge to PLC Type with a Starting Trigger of 1 if the Acknowledge to PLC control is an analog or digital tag it uses the Word Acknowledge to PLC Type if the application has messages that contain the character sequence the sequence is converted to n to prevent a validation error The sequence will appear as n when you download the application to the PanelView terminal For a list of features that make applications incompatible with earlier versions of the PanelView firmware see Appendix E Version Control Specifying Target Firmware Version f System 2 Terminal Setup 4 Tag Database Alarms PLC 1 0 Control e Information Message Window Working with Applications 3 7 You can select the version of PanelView firmware that you plan to use when
491. screens that you open in the future will default to the new grid settings Next State Alt N Previous State Alt P Grid Settings Zoom In Zoom Out Show Color Palette Show Toolbox Creating Screens 8 13 To change the default screen grid settings 1 Choose Grid Settings from the View menu The Grid Settings dialog box appears You can choose not to show the grid or you can change the grid sizes of the x horizontal and y vertical axes You can also change the grid color Grid Settings Ed OK i Show Grid Ee Horizontal vertical 0 4 Help 1200e Touch Cell Grid 2 To hide the grid clear the Show Grid box 3 To hide the 1200e Touch Cell Grid clear its box 4 To increase or decrease the spacing of the grid lines on either axis click the up or down arrow next to the appropriate field or type a number in the box For example a value of 8 creates a grid line every 8 pixels 5 To change the color of the grid click the Grid Color button The Color dialog box appears showing the colors you can choose for your grid You can select one of the Basic Colors or you can choose the Define Custom Colors button and choose an area of the palette you want to use It will appear in the Custom Colors section You can then select it Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 8 14 Creating Screens Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Basic colors Def
492. se this all the tags in the current database whether it is private or shared are deleted If the application has a shared database that no longer exists a new shared database is created Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 What Are Expressions Chapter 7 Creating Expressions This chapter describes types of expressions expression syntax using the Expression Editor adding copying editing and deleting expressions assigning write expressions validating expressions Expressions perform mathematical or logical calculations to manipulate the display of tag values in the PanelView terminal Expressions can reduce the complexity of PLC ladder logic by allowing the application in the PanelView terminal to make calculations and perform indicator logic normally done in the PLC For example a temperature probe used to monitor the temperature of an oven is connected to a 12 bit analog input card in the PLC but you want the PanelView terminal to display the temperature in degrees Celsius You can create an expression to convert the temperature at the PanelView terminal instead of creating a ladder rung in the PLC to perform the calculation see Example 3 later in this chapter for more information Note If you assign expressions that contain any component other than tag names and comments the application will be compatible with PanelView Firmware Version 2 or later It will not be compatible with earlier versi
493. sending it to a write tag For information on how to create write expressions for these objects see Assigning Write Expressions later in this chapter Note The Numeric Input Cursor Point s Raise and Lower keys are disabled if it is assigned a write expression PanelView evaluates an expression whenever the value of a tag that is referenced in the expression changes Multiple references to the same tag will have the same value Tag values are updated in a DH or ControlNet application based on the tag s assigned scan classes which will affect when PanelView evaluates its expressions PanelView evaluates the expression until it encounters an Exit statement or until it has evaluated the last statement of the expression Evaluation also stops if an Unreliable expression result or tag value is encountered After PanelView has finished evaluating the expression if the result is Reliable Panel View returns the evaluation result This result is displayed on screen Creating Expressions 7 3 If one of these conditions causes the result to be Unreliable a minor fault message is displayed division by 0 e a value in the expression is out of range of the expression s Long or Single data type the expression calculation results in an out of range value atag value is out of range the tag s address does not exist If the expression is assigned to a pen in the Trend object and the PLC communications are lost the ex
494. ssages Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Format of the Message File Before you begin importing existing message files using the Import Message File option ensure that the file is an ASCII text file Your messages must be in this format FFF nnnn ttt ttt CR this is a comment FFF alarm option alarm messages only audio P print R relay Include A P or R only if you want the option to be Yes Display is automatically set to Yes and Message to PLC is set to No but you can edit these options once the file is imported nnnnnnnnnn trigger value any signed long integer between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 excluding 0 You can use 1 to 10 digits for the trigger value won start and end of message ttt message text 0 to 80 characters for alarm messages 1 to 144 characters for information messages 1 to 256 for local messages Messages that are longer than the maximum are still imported however they are detected as errors when the application is validated You will have to change them to the required length CR Carriage return record delimiter Press Return or Enter on your keyboard comment character Note The message components such as trigger values and message text must be separated by spaces Do not use csv Comma Separated Variable files as PanelBuilder does not yet support them for importing message text Creating Messages 10 13 The following illustratio
495. st part of a rack you can assign is 1 4 you must assign module groups in pairs 0 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 7 Each pair supports 32 input bits and 32 output bits Programmable Controller PLC 5 15 Rack 3 Planning Applications 2 15 The following figure expands the previous illustration with the module groups for rack 3 It shows that module group 7 is made up of input word 7 and output word 7 The module group pair 6 7 uses the fourth quarter of the rack PLC Racks Input Output Rack Local Rack 1 Rack 2 Remote Rack 3 Input Output 1 module group 0123 45 67 3 45 67 K Pies 1 Word 16 Bits 14 2 4 3 4 4 4 14 2 4 3 4 4 4 Rack Fractions TT Important Each separate or partial rack assignment adds 5 to 7 milliseconds to the Remote I O scan time To maximize speed assign the PanelView terminal to as few PLC racks as possible Understanding Shared Racks If the PanelView terminal does not occupy a full rack on the programmable controller another PanelView terminal can share the same rack by occupying the unused partial Remote I O rack Each PanelView terminal with full access must occupy a unique section of the rack The following table is an example of how two Remote I O racks can occupy the same PLC rack Parameter First Remote I O Second Remote I O Rack Rack Rack Number 1 1 Starting Module Group 0 6 Rack Size 3 4 1 4 Last Chassis No Yes Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2
496. t Page 1 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Enter a number between 1 and 64 Number of Words _ Enter a number between 1 and 64 READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out Circle One FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Circle One PLC Bit Numbers 15 14 13 12 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 T T T T T T 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 L T 1 Planning Applications 2 31 Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Page 2 of 2 Application File Name Block Transfer File Number Enter a number between 1 and 64 Number of Words Enter a number between 1 and 64 READ PLC In or WRITE PLC Out Circle One FULL or LISTEN ONLY Access Circle One PLC Bit Numbers 15 14 13 2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 T L T 1 i L T 1 T 47 1 7 7 7 7 T 63 i When you have assigned addresses to all the tags used for each object window and PLC I O Control option determine the I O re
497. t Unscheduled ControlNet will refer to both To register your software mail the registration card from the front of this manual to this address Rockwell Software Software Services 6680 Beta Drive Mayfield Village Ohio 44143 or fax the card to 1 440 646 7801 Available Documentation Preface P 5 Your PanelBuilder software comes with several types of documentation to meet your different needs The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Getting Started Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 13 guides you through setting up PanelBuilder 1400e and introduces you to the basics It includes a tutorial to give you hands on experience in working with a PanelBuilder application The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 14 explains PanelBuilder in more detail and provides step by step instructions for planning creating and working with applications The PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Reference Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 15 provides detailed reference information for application screen objects The PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 provides detailed instructions for transferring application files using the PanelView e Transfer Utility 32 Version 5 that comes with PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 The PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual A B Publi
498. t Windows Use PanelBuilder 1400e to develop operator interface applications for PanelView 1000e 1200e and 1400e operator terminals or PanelView 1200 Enhanced Series F or later terminals that have been enhanced to MC catalog numbers The Windows platform offers many advantages including a superior graphical interface the ability to work within several applications at once and easy information transfer between applications PanelBuilder is easy to learn and use and helps you develop complex applications quickly and efficiently PanelBuilder Components PanelBuilder contains the following editors and dialog boxes to help you build and configure your applications 1200e Keypad 640 480 Remote 1 0 Private Tags E PLC Communications Communication Setup SE Nodes 1 Scan Classes L RIO Racks RIO Block Transfer Files S Scheduled Files E System B Terminal Setup Tag Database Alarms BY PLC 1 0 Control Information Messages Bi Local Messages C3 Screens Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 1 2 Introduction to PanelBuilder RIO ControlNet e Communications Setup dialog box for configuring communications baud rate and network type between the terminal and programmable controller and for defining control for downloading applications over the communications network Node and Scan Class editors for specifying programmable controllers and the scan rates at which the applicat
499. t for 1400e Terminals 640 by 480 Application File Name Screen Number Screen Name 15 65 95 145 175 225 255 305 335 385 415 465 495 545 575 625 20 65 85 130 150 195 215 260 280 325 345 390 410 455 475 F9 F10 Fil F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 Notes 1 You can use this worksheet to align buttons you draw on the screen to keypad terminal function keys 2 The PanelView 1400e touch screen terminals use analog resistive touch screens This allows input objects to be any size minimum 40 by 40 pixels and to be placed anywhere on the screen The analog resistive touch screen provides greater flexibility in screen design compared to PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals PanelView 1200 and 1200e terminals use a touch matrix which requires that all input objects align with a touch grid pe Note Only the Screen Worksheet for 1400e Terminals 640 by 480 is shown For further examples of screen worksheets refer to Appendix A Sample Worksheets in this manual To complete each PanelView 1000e or 1400e screen worksheet 1 Draw all objects that will be displayed on each screen Most objects can be any size gt Note The smallest size for a touch object is 40 by 40 pixels This is the same for both 640 by 480 and 800 by 600 resolutions 2 Make a note of the button labels on the worksheet This will help you remember where you are locating common objects such as GoTo Screen buttons and Exit buttons Pu
500. t triggered alarms the Quantity is the number of times the bit was switched from 0 to 1 and the Acc Time is the amount of time the bit was set as 1 For word triggered alarms the Quantity is the number of times the tag was set to the alarm s trigger value and the Acc Time is the amount of time the tag was set to the alarm s trigger value Because you cannot monitor multiple alarms with word triggered alarms unless you have one tag for each alarm the Acc Time is not necessarily the amount of time a particular alarm has been active it is the amount of time the tag was set to the alarm s trigger value If multiple alarms are writing to the same tag multiple alarms will increase their Quantity value but only the most recent alarm will continue to increase its Acc Time value HERE Configuring Alarms 11 47 Using the Alarm Status Screen Buttons The Alarm Status screen has several buttons the operator can use to get information This button Does this Display Mode Allows the operator to choose one of three viewing modes all alarms All active alarms only Active or previous alarms Past Silence Alarms Silences the beeper and unlatches the alarm relay if either was triggered by an alarm message It performs the same function as the Silence button in the Alarm Message Window Home Scrolls to the first page of alarms End Scrolls to the last page of alarms Reset Qty Time if enabled A
501. tate value if one exists Planning Applications 2 29 The Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Complete the Discrete I O Usage Worksheet at the same time as you complete the Remote I O Tags Worksheet so you can keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses The Discrete I O Usage Worksheet shows the PLC I O image table Use one Discrete I O Usage Worksheet for each full or partial rack assignment marking the PLC control bit s used in the tags assigned to each object window or PLC I O Control option Discrete I O Usage Worksheet Application File Name Rack Number Fullor Listen Only Access Circle One PLC Output Bit Numbers 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 i i i PLC Input Bit Numbers 17 16 15 14 13 12 dH 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 30 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The Block Transfer File I O Usage Worksheet Complete the Block Transfer I O Usage Worksheet at the same time as you complete the Remote I O Tags Worksheet so you can keep track of free and allocated PLC I O addresses Complete both sheets for each block transfer file you use marking the PLC control bit s used in the tags assigned to each object window or PLC I O Control option Block Transfer File I O Usage Workshee
502. teger data type 2 24 2 51 Silence alarms to PLC 11 23 Single line alarm message window 11 31 choosing 11 38 Sizing list objects 9 61 objects 9 38 SLC 5 addressing syntax 2 39 SLC 5 Enhanced addressing syntax binary files optional syntax C 10 binary integer float ASCII and string files C 8 I O files C 7 status files C 8 timer counter and control files C 10 analog member addressing optional syntax C 12 bit member addressing optional syntax C 11 Software registration P 4 Index 1 15 Sorting entries in a spreadsheet 4 10 Spacing objects 9 47 Specifying device type 5 9 Spreadsheets changing column width 4 13 ow height 4 13 copying selections 4 9 cutting selections 4 9 deleting data 4 12 duplicating rows 4 11 editing 4 13 filling with identical data 4 11 inserting rows 4 12 pasting selections 4 9 selecting a block of cells 4 8 a cell 4 7 a row 4 7 a single column 4 8 more than one column 4 8 more than one row 4 8 the entire spreadsheet 4 8 sorting entries 4 10 using 4 3 using Undo and Redo 4 7 working in 4 6 Stacking See Overlapping Start address 2 28 Startup screen See Application startup screen Static objects 9 2 converting to wallpaper 9 42 Station address 2 40 5 23 local 2 40 2 41 remote 2 41 Station number ControlNet 5 17 converting from ControlNet to DH 5 38 converting from DH to ControlNet 5 34 DH 5 17 String tags 6 2
503. ter To change a symbol 1 Double click or right click the symbol The Configure Symbol dialog box appears 2 Click the Select Graphic Image button The Select Symbol dialog box appears 3 Select a new symbol Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 28 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To import new symbols 1 In the Select Symbol dialog box choose Import Select one or more graphic images to import File name Folders bmpl c ab pb1400e images isa agitatr bmp exc Cancel ae CX pb1400e blowerl bmp comprsr bmp comprsrl bmp conveyr bmp conveyrl bmp EJ images List files of type Drives Windows Bitmaps bm Sc Y 2 Select one or more files to import Click a file name to choose it Use Shift click to select a range of images and Ctrl click to select additional images 3 Click OK The files are listed in the Select Image dialog box Imported graphic images are stored with the PanelBuilder 1400e file If you do not use them in any screens remove them to keep your pvc file to a manageable size and to conserve disk space To remove unused symbols 1 In the Select Symbol dialog box choose any unused files and click Remove A warning message appears 2 Click Yes to remove the image If you remove an image that is used in a screen the screen will display a white box marking the spot where the image was When you se
504. ter _ Variable names are not case sensitive and cannot be reserved keywords For a list of reserved keywords see Appendix F Reserved Keywords Creating Expressions 7 7 Note Assigning a data type to the variable is optional If you do not assign a specific data type the variable will be the Variant data type You can assign these data types to variables Boolean Byte Integer Long Single and Variant For more information about data types see Expression Data Types earlier in this chapter For example DIM variablel variable2 AS INTEGER declares variable as a variable of type Variant variable2 is declared as type Integer You can assign a value to a local variable The value can include any combination of keywords variables tags constants and operators that result in a number Use this syntax to assign a value to a local variable Variablename Value You can assign different values to the same variable at different places in the expression Panel View always uses the most recent assignment which supersedes earlier assignments THEE Important You also use the equal sign to perform the equality operation To avoid confusion between the two operations always place parentheses around the operands when you wish to perform the equality operation on a variable Otherwise PanelView may treat the operation as an assignment to the variable For samples of how to declare and assign values to v
505. terminal the application and firmware both reside on the 4 MB PCMCIA memory card that comes with the PanelView 1200 Enhancement Kit A B Catalog Number 2711E U1B12C There will be approximately 2 2 MB available for the application Ona PanelView 1200e or 1400e terminal the application can reside in either Flash memory if the application is less than 256K or on the PCMCIA memory card if the application is more than 256K Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 12 Working with Applications Ona PanelView 1000e terminal the application can reside in either Flash memory if the application is less than 2 256K or on the PCMCIA memory card if the application is up to 15 75 MB To determine the application size Choose Application Size from the Tools menu After processing a message appears indicating the size of the application Application Size x G Application size 967 bytes Creating Application Application reports help you document and track the screens Reports objects tags expressions and messages You can print these reports or save them as ASCII text files Before you create an application report save the application file Then make the report selections To open the Report Selection dialog box 1 Open the application you want to document 2 Choose Reports from the Tools menu Heperi zeeleutinn x cT I PLC Cummusicstiurs B deformetiun Mica sequ Wiehie E Terminal Setup E Alarm
506. the alarm displayed in the Single line Alarm Message Window becomes inactive it still remains in the window If the screen changes the alarm display remains on the new screen unless it is cleared by the PLC or the alarm is acknowledged by the operator or PLC Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Alarm messages Alarm screen buttons Configuring Alarms 11 33 Multi line Alarm Message Window The Multi line Alarm Message Window can display up to 20 single height or 10 double height alarm messages with the time and date of occurrence The window has a set of buttons with which to respond to alarms The window always appears at the bottom of the screen When the Multi line Alarm Message Window appears on a keypad terminal the function keys F1 through F16 are disabled for the application screen until the operator responds to the alarm On a touch screen terminal only those touch cells that are covered by the window are disabled for the application screen Whether the Multi line Alarm Message Window covers all or only some of the existing screen depends on how many messages are displayed The number of messages can be configured Bas BET If the programmable controller triggers more alarm messages before the window is cleared the existing messages shift down and the new messages are added to the top of the list Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 34 Configuring Alarms Pu
507. the next acknowledged alarm trigger value will be written to the PLC immediately It will not wait for the Alarm Control Delay It is therefore recommended that you use the Acknowledge Control tag to control the flow of alarms and acknowledgments Only one alarm acknowledgment can be processed at a time alarm acknowledgments are not queued An acknowledge request is ignored and discarded the alarm will not be removed from the Multi line Alarm Window and the acknowledged time will not be recorded in the Alarm History screen if it arrives when the terminal is sending a previous acknowledge to the PLC or waiting for the Alarm Control Delay time or waiting for the Ack Control Hold Time Remote Acknowledge With Remote Acknowledge the PLC is used to acknowledge the alarm rather than the operator acknowledging it from the terminal This is useful for background alarming when there is no acknowledge button available when using the Single line Alarm Message Window or Alarm Message Panel or when the operator is acknowledging the alarm from a remote location The Remote Acknowledge control is optional However in order to remotely acknowledge an alarm a digital or analog tag or expression must be assigned to this control Whenever the value of this tag or expression matches an alarm trigger value the alarm with that trigger value is acknowledged All unacknowledged instances of the same alarm are acknowledged at the same time with
508. the same time stamp If the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC function is enabled the Acknowledge to PLC tag is assigned and the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option is set to Operator and Remote it will be activated when a remote acknowledge occurs even if the operator or the PLC has already acknowledged the alarm For more information see Alarm Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge to PLC and Acknowledge Control earlier in this chapter Remote Acknowledge allows only one alarm to be acknowledged at a time Since alarm acknowledges are not queued it is recommended that if you are using remote acknowledge you also enable the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC function set the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC to Operator and Remote and use the Acknowledge Control bit to control the flow of remote alarm acknowledges as follows Waiting for Configuring Alarms 11 21 Remote Ack Expression to A change Receive Remote Ack Value from Yes PLC 15 a previous Acknowledge still active Does Remote Ack Value match an ACTIVE alarm Yes Y Ack Time Stamp same for ALL ACTIVE instances of alarm in Alarm History file Is Alarm Window active Yes Y Update Alarms in Alarm Window Is Alarm History Screen active Yes y Update Alarms in Alarm History Screen Does Ack Alarm have Audio Flag Yes Y Disable Beeper if PLC contro
509. this option Important Only the Multi line Alarm Message Window contains an Acknowledge or Exit button PLC Controlled Clear Clears the Alarm Message Window as well as the alarm Window beeper and relay when a 0 to non zero transition is detected on the assigned control Assign a tag or expression to enable this option For information about expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions Note Subsequent alarm triggers are processed even if the tag or expression remains at non zero 6 Click OK to save the Message Window configuration When the application is running the operator can call up the Alarm Status screen to view a list of alarms The Alarm Status screen displays active and inactive alarm states from the programmable controller the number of times a point has gone into alarm and the total amount of time a point has been in alarm The operator can choose to view all the alarm messages that were created in the Alarm Messages editor or only the active alarms or only the past alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 42 Configuring Alarms Working with the Alarm Status Screen in the Terminal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The following sections explain how the operator can work with the Alarm Status screen when the application is running UT AM 2N V98 A Lie Lasi hine Here LIBI AM TAB Puit The Alarm Status Screen provides the following information about each
510. thout regard to the tag s address Additionally keeping the address tag relationship unique lets you change all references to an address by simply editing the tag Naming Tags Tag names can be up to 40 characters long If you create a folder the folder name becomes part of the tag name The tag name can contain the following characters AtoZ e 0to9 underscore and dash To separate the folder name from the rest of the tag name use a backslash V For example tags in the folder called Pump would start with Pump The folder name and separator character count in the 40 character tag name limit You can use mixed case Tag names preserve upper and lower case for readability but are not case sensitive For example the tag name MixerValvel is the same as mixervalvel but is displayed as MixerValvel Using Folders to Group Tags To organize tags create a folder and include tags that are related For greater organization you can nest folders For example you can organize the tag database first by area then by machines in the area and finally by devices in each machine nesting the folders at each step Tag names in the last folder might begin with something like this Areal Machine1 Pump The Tag Database Editor f System H T Terminal Setup Tag Database EA Alarms e PLC 1 0 Control 6 Information Message Window Defining Tags 6 5 Use the Tag Database editor to create or edit tags and
511. to a double arrow drag the border to the desired size Tip Before you begin defining tags consult your Device Tags or Remote I O Tags Worksheets and check whether you want to change or add to the folder hierarchy you planned in the worksheets Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 6 8 Defining Tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Creating a Folder 1 Choose New Folder from the Edit menu New Folder x Name Screen_50 2 Type the folder name 3 Click OK The new folder appears in the hierarchy window AlarmGlobal C AlarmStatus C3 Screen_10 C3 Screen 40 C3 Screen 50 Nesting Folders There are two ways to nest a folder within another Open the containing folder Then add a new folder by specifying the folder name The path of the containing folder will already be placed in the New Folder Name field e With all folders closed add a new folder by typing its full path For example Screen_10 Push_Buttons Normally_Open would add the folder highlighted in the illustration below E Alarms gt Screen 10 L E gt Push Buttons C3 Normally Closed iH Normally Open Defining Tags 6 9 Important The maximum number of characters allowed in the folder path and tag name is 40 The backslash in the folder path counts as a character Be aware of this when you are nesting folders In the example above the folder path takes up 36 characters This leaves only 4 for the tag name inclu
512. trol it You must choose which byte in the PLC word will support each block transfer Once you have assigned a block transfer file to a byte you cannot assign a discrete address or the Pass Through file to that output byte A single control byte can control both a block transfer read and a block transfer write Use block transfer file addresses for objects windows and PLC I O Control options Note If you are using floating point data in your application you need to define one or more block transfer files The PanelView terminal references these addresses according to block transfer file number B1 to B64 word number 0 to 63 bit number 0 to 15 Important The SLC 5 02 and some other PLCs do not support block transfer file addressing For more information see the applicable programmable controller manuals Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 2 18 Planning Applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Determining Rack Size and Block Transfer File Requirements Rack size and block transfer requirements depend on the number of objects windows and PLC I O Control options that must interact with the PLC The smallest rack size you can assign is two module groups or 1 4 rack If this size is not enough to support your application features do any or all of the following increase the rack size to 1 2 3 4 or FULL assign additional rack numbers assign block transfer files To determine the ra
513. trol tag type is this It does this when the alarm is acknowledged Block Only the bit corresponding to the acknowledged alarm s trigger value will be set For example if an alarm with a trigger value of 14 is acknowledged and the starting trigger is set to 1 then the fourteenth bit in that block tag will be set to 1 The bit will remain set to 1 until that alarm is triggered again when the bit will be reset to 0 Digital The tag will be set to 1 Analog The terminal will write the trigger value of the acknowledged alarm to the tag Note If you press the Ack button on the Alarm History screen when no alarms are waiting to be acknowledged all bits in the Acknowledge to PLC control tag are reset to 0 This lets you reset the digital and analog tags Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 18 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 You can use the Acknowledge to PLC control tag to clear alarms as follows Example 3 Logic for Clearing Alarms when Using Bit Acknowledge to PLC Type with Block Tags Rung 1 i Ack to Alarm Alarm PLC Ack Trigger Tag One Shot Tag f 1 010 B3 0 010 El ONS _ _ U 00 0 00 i Rung 2 i Alarm Alarm Alarm i Condition Condition Trigger One Shot Tag 1 000 B3 0 010 R _ 005 R _________ L 00 1 00 Comments Rung 1 When the Acknowledged alarm is received by the PLC the alarm is cleared Rung 2 The alarm trigger
514. u can assign different line styles foreground and background colors and fill styles See Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter Adding Labels Creating Objects 9 35 You can add a graphic image or descriptive text to a button to inform operators of its function For example you could add text labels to the two states of a push button to inform the operator whether the button is On or Off or graphic images such as up and down arrows to show the button s purpose When you type text or place a graphic image inside a screen object that supports labels the text automatically becomes a label If you have an existing text object or a graphic image that you want to move into a screen object as a label use the Make Label command Note You cannot use PanelBuilder drawing objects for example arcs lines and ellipses as labels To change a background text object or graphic image into an object label 1 Select the background text object or graphic image 2 Move the text or graphic image inside the screen object s borders 3 Choose Make Label from the Edit menu or choose from the toolbar Note Text or graphics must be placed fully inside the object to be a label If text or graphics overlap the object s borders they cannot be a label Note If Make Label is dimmed PanelBuilder automatically made the text or graphic image into a label when you placed it The text or graphic image is now part of the
515. u will be using to create this application Choose one of e Remote I O e DH ControlNet gt Note For information about creating Modbus Application see the PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Modbus User Manual A B Catalog Number 2711E UMOD p Note You can convert an application from one communication network type to another If you do change network types you may lose node scan class rack or block transfer definitions See Changing the Network Type in Chapter 5 Defining Communications for more information 4 Click OK The Application Window opens inside the PanelBuilder window Note that the application is still untitled and the PanelView terminal and network types are listed You must assign a name when you save the application 9 PanelBuilder 1400e AEE File Screen Database Tools Window Help neal Seer ai Application Title Application Untitled Terminal Network and Tag Type 1200e Keypad 640x480 Remote 1 0 Private Tags G PLC Communications E System Messages Screens Application Window Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 3 4 Working with Applications Opening Applications New Application Ctrl N Open Application Ctrl O Download Upload Exit Alt F4 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 You can open an application created in PanelBuilder for DOS PanelBuilder 1200 or PanelBuilder 1400e For information on converting
516. ublication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To define the baud rate 1 In the Configure Communication Setup dialog box choose the Terminal Communications tab 2 In the Baud Rate drop down list choose the desired baud rate This is the baud rate you noted on the Rack Assignments worksheet Note Not all PLCs support all baud rates For a list of supported baud rates refer to your PLC s user documentation Setting Up Network File Transfers To set up network file transfers specify the Pass Through network type establish the PanelView Location Routing Address and define Network Download controls in the Network File Transfer tab Lomiiqenn Communication Setup Temas conmunis Network Elle Tranpe Enais Thmiugh Hetemi Typa nn Laconia autr i i mbi Tranter Argani negra Transier Sinton mnga Asan Taa Specifying the Pass Through Network Type Remote I O Pass Through allows you to download the Remote I O application file without connecting the serial cable between the PanelView terminal and the development computer This means you do not have to bring the development computer from terminal to terminal to perform network downloading You also do not have to switch the terminal to Configure mode See Chapter 15 Transferring Applications for more information about performing Remote I O Pass Throughs Defining Communications 5 5 To define the
517. uction Type AD Asynchronous Done Digital AE Asynchronous Error Digital CO Continuous Digital DLEN Done Length Analog DN Done Digital EC Error Code Analog ELEM Element Number Analog EN Enable Digital ER Error Digital EW Enable Waiting Digital FILE File Number Analog IDX File Index Analog NR No Response Digital PLEN Program Length Analog Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 16 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Block Transfer Mnemonics continued Mnemonic Instruction Type RGS Rack Group Slot Analog RLEN Requested Length Analog RW Read Writes Digital ST Start Digital TO Time Out Digital TOUT Time Out Analog Token Data Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type HI High Analog LO Low Analog SFC Status Mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type DN Done Digital ER Step Error Digital FS Forced Scan Digital LS Last Scan Digital OV Timer Overflow Digital PRE Preset Analog SA Scan Active Digital TIM Active Time Analog Addressing Syntax C 17 Remote 1 0 The following section provides addressing syntax for Discrete and Block Transfer Remote I O Discrete PLC Address F rrw bb F File type I Input O Output IT Rack number PLC 2 20 1 7 octal PLC 2 30 1 7 octal PLC 3 0 76 octal PLC 3 10 0 17 octal PLC 5 11 3 octal PLC 5 15 1 3 octal PLC 5 20 1 3 octal PLC 5 25 1 7 octal PLC 5 30 1 7 octal PLC 5 40 1 17
518. und color for the Information Message Window Working with the Information Message Window 14 5 3 Assign the Information Window Control and if appropriate the Acknowledge to PLC control These two controls are explained in more detail in the following table This control Does this PLC Controlled Information Window Directs the terminal to display a message The programmable controller places a trigger value at this control s address and the terminal displays the message with the corresponding trigger value You must assign this control for the Information Message Window to function Acknowledge to PLC Notifies the PLC when the ACK button is pressed This enables the programmable controller to control the window display until the operator acknowledges it You must assign this control if you have specified Operator Acknowledged as the window removal method For more information about assigning and creating tags see Chapter 6 Defining Tags For more information about assigning and creating expressions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions 4 When you are finished configuring the Information Message Window click OK to accept the changes and close the dialog box Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 About Transferring Applications Chapter 1 5 Transferring Applications To transfer application files to or from PanelView terminals the PanelView 1200 1400e Transfer Utility Version 3 or PanelView e T
519. urn OFF and there are no higher alarm numbers ON the display scrolls to the previous page of alarms Working in Display All Alarms Mode The Display All Alarms Mode lists all alarms whether they are in alarm or not This includes the alarms that have not been in alarm since the last reset When the operator switches modes from Display Active Alarms or Display Past Alarms to Display All Alarms the alarm at the top of the screen stays in place and the next 14 alarms are displayed EIL Working in Past Alarms Mode The Past Alarms Mode shows all alarms that are active or have been active since the last reset The Alarm State column shows ON or OFF to indicate the current active alarms The first alarm displayed is the first in the current or subsequent pages with a quantity or accumulated time of greater than 0 The first alarm in the Past Alarms screen acts as an anchor to the screen of alarm messages When a new alarm an alarm that has not been active since the last reset is entered on the screen the alarms below the new entry shift downwards If a past alarm with a trigger value below the anchor alarm trigger value becomes active it will not be displayed Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 46 Configuring Alarms Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 About Alarm Quantity and Accumulated Time The Qty and Acc Time fields are calculated differently for bit triggered and word triggered alarms For bi
520. ushed If the button is held down the programmable controller input value continues to increase until it reaches a preassigned limit The object can be configured to display the numeric value contained in the tag Numeric Data Display shows the current value of the Displayed Value control tag or expression The display can show polarity and decimal points Numeric Entry Keypad allows the operator to enter a value which is then sent to the programmable controller at the address specified by the Numeric Keypad Input control The keypad is available in large and small sizes for touch screen applications only Use the touch screen an external keyboard or bar code reader to enter and send the value to the PLC Numeric Input Cursor Point consists of a numeric display and a cursor character The operator can enter numbers into an array of numeric fields similar to an array of thumb wheel switches on a control panel This object sends its control value to the programmable controller It is available only for keypad applications Use an external keyboard a bar code reader or the terminal keypad to change the Numeric Input Cursor Point and to enter values Note By default when the Cancel button is pressed at the terminal the Numeric Input Cursor Point Character becomes invisible To keep the character visible even after the Cancel key is pressed enable the Retain Cursor On Cancel checkbox in the Object Setup tab of the Terminal Setup dialog
521. using the mouse hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to draw the object If you are using the keyboard press Ctrl arrow to draw the object 4 When the object is as you want it release the mouse button or the keys To join line ends 1 Turn on the Join Line Ends option in the Edit menu 2 Drag a line object or the end point of an object to the other end point of another object until the two end points join in a snap to effect For information about changing the object s formatting elements see Changing Object Appearance later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 9 34 Creating Objects Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 To draw an arc or wedge 1 2 3 Choose the Arc or Wedge tool from the Objects menu or toolbox Position the pointer where you want to begin drawing If you are using the mouse hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to draw the object If you are using the keyboard press Ctrl arrow to draw the object When the object is the right size release the mouse button or the keys The object will have four handles When you point to one of the four handles the pointer changes to a cross Choose one of the handles and drag the pointer around the circumference of the object to create the arc or wedge If you are using the keyboard press Ctrl arrow When the object is as you want it release the mouse button or the keys Yo
522. utton It will only clear alarms present when the button is pressed Any new alarms generated after the button is pressed will not be cleared This button can be enabled or disabled in the Terminal Response screen while in Configure mode Home Scrolls to the first page of alarms End Scrolls to the last page of alarms Page Up Page Down Displays the previous or following page of alarms Cursor Up Cursor Down Moves the highlight bar up or down one line through the list of unacknowledged alarms so the operator can acknowledge the appropriate alarm When the highlight bar gets to the bottom or top of the screen the next press will scroll the highlight bar up or down to the next alarm if there is one Print Sends the Alarm History information to a printer through the terminal s RS 232 port New Alarm Flashes when a new alarm is triggered while in the Alarm History screen Pressing the button will sortthe alarms by time and will display the last page Alarm Status Opens the Alarm Status screen Sort by Value Pressing the button sorts messages by trigger value and displays sorting method in title bar The Sort by Time button will then appear Sort by Time Pressing the button sorts messages by time and displays sorting method in title bar The Sort by Value button will then appear Exit Returns you to the screen from which you entered the Alarm History screen When th
523. value is sentto the PanelView terminal on a false to true transition of an alarm condition Note The alarm condition must make another false to true transition to trigger another alarm message in the PanelView terminal The Ack Control Tag ONS one shot instruction in the first rung is used because the Ack to PLC tag remains on until that same alarm is triggered again It is important to place the unlatch rung before the latch rung to ensure proper alarm message triggering if both the alarm acknowledgment and new alarm condition occur in the same PLC program scan Using Multiple Acknowledge to PLC Tags for Bit Trigger Operation If you use the Bit Acknowledge to PLC type you can assign up to 50 block tags to this control Each tag must be assigned a starting trigger value from 1 to 65 535 The PanelView terminal uses the starting triggers to determine which block tag to send the alarm acknowledgment to and sets the appropriate bit position of the tag to 1 where bit position alarm trigger value starting trigger Configuring Alarms 11 19 For more information about Bit trigger and starting trigger operation see the previous section Alarm Triggers Bit or Word To enable the Acknowledge Control assign a digital or analog tag When an alarm is acknowledged and after the trigger value is written to the Acknowledge to PLC tag the terminal sets the Acknowledge Control tag to 1 after the Alarm Control Delay interval The Acknowle
524. vc or pvd applications Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 P 4 Preface Terminology Registering Your Copy of PanelBuilder 1400e Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 The term PanelBuilder refers to PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows Where confusion may arise between the current and previous versions of the software the current release of the software is called PanelBuilder 1400e Version 5 Similarly the terms terminal and PanelView terminal refer to a PanelView 1000e 1200e or 1400e terminal or an enhanced Panel View Series F or G terminal Where confusion may arise between the 1000e 1200e and 1400e terminals and previous revisions specific series and revision names are used The terms PLC and programmable controllers refer to the Allen Bradley line of PLC Programmable Controllers The term control is a generic term that refers to the PLC addresses that dynamic objects write to or read from Some controls use tags only while others can use tags or expressions All dynamic objects use one or more controls In this manual the configuration table for each object lists the controls for the object and specifies which controls use tags only and which can use expressions For more information about expresssions see Chapter 7 Creating Expressions in this manual The term ControlNet can include both Scheduled and Unscheduled communications Unless specified as ControlNet Scheduled or ControlNe
525. w 1000e 1200e and 1400e Operator Terminals User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 17 If an error is detected in the data received from any of the assigned controls while the application is running the data is discarded and a minor fault message is displayed Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 13 6 Configuring PLC I O Control Options Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Notify PLC Options Options that are passed from the terminal to the programmable controller include these controls Screen Number to PLC e Screen Print Active to PLC e Date amp Time to PLC Screen Number to PLC Assign the Screen Number to PLC control to transfer the current screen number from the terminal to the programmable controller This option is useful for multiplexing display data from programmable controller output addresses based on screen number Important Ensure your tag address is large enough to accommodate the largest screen number including the screen numbers of the Alarm History and Alarm Status screens Screen Print Active to PLC If you try to make screen prints while running an application on the terminal but the printer is busy it will ignore your screen print request If you assign the Screen Print Active to PLC control the terminal informs the programmable controller that a screen print is in progress A tag value of 1 indicates the Screen Print Active condition a tag value of 0 indicates the non active
526. which data type the value is evaluated as See above resulting value depends on which data type the value is evaluated as See above resulting value depends on which data type the value is evaluated Value unchanged as Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Expression Maximums The number of components in each expression must not exceed these maximums Component Maximum Tags 50 Local variables 30 Comments 100 There are no limits on the other types of components However the size of an expression s text cannot exceed 2048 characters The size of the compiled expression in the pvd file cannot exceed 1 Kb The Percent Full indicator in the Expression editor alerts you when you are approaching the size limit for an expression Arithmetic Operations Creating Expressions 7 9 This table describes the types of arithmetic operations you can use expressions to perform Operators are listed in order of precedence and exceptions are noted below Operator Symbol Syntax Description of Result Data Type of Result Negation Operand If the operand is data type Single the result is Single Otherwise the result is Long ultiplication Operand1 Operand2 If either operand is data type Single the result is Single If neither operand is Single the result is Long Division I Operand1 Operand2 Floating point contains Single decimal places nteger division Operand1 Operand
527. ws you to use the deterministic portion of Allen Bradley s ControlNet 1 5 network where Scheduled time critical data is given a higher priority over the non time critical Unscheduled data ControlNet applications have been enhanced to allow communications in Unscheduled mode and Scheduled mode Using RSNetworx you can configure the rate at which Scheduled information is broadcast over ControlNet and which stations are to listen to this information Keyboard and Bar Code Reader Support With PanelView Firmware Version 5 you can enter values using an external keyboard and or bar code reader connected to the PanelView s keyboard port The keyboard and or bar code reader can also be used with the PanelView touch screen or keypad terminal RS232 Alarm Message Output to Dataliners PanelView Firmware Version 5 allows you to display alarm messages to Allen Bradley s Dataliner message display devices PanelView terminals support Dataliner models DL10 A B Catalog Number 2706 A41J DL20 A B Catalog Number 2706 B21J and DL50 A B Catalog Number 2706 F11J connected to the PanelView s RS 232 port Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 P 2 Preface Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 VGA and SVGA Applications PanelView Firmware Version 5 supports a PanelView 1400e application with a screen resolution of 800 by 600 or 640 by 480 PanelBuilder 1400e can convert an application screen from a higher to a lower resolution or vice versa
528. x Bit number 0 15 decimal Only applies to analog word members Example T57 38 ACC Addressing Syntax C 5 PLC 5 Enhanced I O and Status Files F eee bb F eee bb optional File type I Input O Output S Status Element number For input and output files PLC 5 11 0 037 octal PLC 5 20 0 037 octal PLC 5 30 0 077 octal PLC 5 40 0 177 octal PLC 5 60 0 277 octal PLC 5 80 0 277 octal For status files 0 127 decimal Bit offset within word For input and output files 0 17 octal For status files 0 15 decimal Example O 167 11 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Integer BCD ASCII Float and String Files Fnnn eee bb F nnn eee File type B Binary D Decimal BCD N Integer F Floating point ASCII ST String File number 3 999 decimal Binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Element number 0 999 decimal Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 C 6 Addressing Syntax Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Bit offset is not supported for floating point and string file types Example B84 113 13 PLC 5 Enhanced Binary Files Optional Syntax Fnnn bbbbb F File type B Binary nnn optional File number 3 999 decimal
529. y bar number Hoter 12 is mr circu The Alarm History screen lists the last 128 alarms that have occurred and is maintained between power cycles on the PanelView terminal The user can silence and acknowledge alarms from this screen You can upload the alarm history file from the PanelView terminal to a development computer using the PanelView e Transfer Utility 32 For more information see the PanelView e Transfer Utility User Manual A B Publication Number 2711E 6 16 Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 11 4 Configuring Alarms ans tiome EE tot ote omen stem re The Alarm Status screen lists all the alarm messages in the application indicating whether they are active or inactive The information in the Alarm Status screen is retained across power cycles of the PanelView terminal Alarm Saia OTZAN 1271 Alm Trigger Oey AccTime n HM O Aawe Lent Oh Time Aort W250 12 13 08 Past Home Alarm Alarm Hinsary tr oun oom Detailed information about configuring each method of displaying alarms is provided later in this chapter Publication 2711E 6 14 November 1998 Acknowledging Alarms Configuring Alarms 11 5 Alarms can be acknowledged by an operator pressing the Acknowledge button provided in the multi line Alarm Message Window or in the Alarm History screen or the Acknowledge All
530. you can choose an existing tag by double clicking it or create a new one by choosing New Tag If you choose New Tag the Tag Editor dialog box appears For more information about using the Tag editor see Other Methods of Creating Tags in Chapter 6 Defining Tags 4 In the Bit Position Triggered Alarming dialog box assign a Starting Trigger value from 1 to 65 535 for each tag For more information see the previous section Starting Trigger 5 Toassign multiple tags up to 50 click on the next available row and enter the new tag repeating steps 3 and 4 If additional rows are needed choose Insert Row To delete a row choose Delete Row 6 Click OK to return to the Global Controls dialog box Word Trigger Operation For a digital tag when the tag value changes from 0 to 1 the alarm is triggered For an analog tag any non zero value will trigger an alarm with the corresponding trigger value When an expression is used it will be evaluated any time a tag in the expression changes Any non zero expression result will trigger the alarm with the corresponding trigger value Expressions allow the PanelView terminal to perform calculations on control values and determine internally whether an alarm state has occurred and then trigger the alarm This reduces ladder logic required in the PLC In the following expression example the alarm tag Alrm is used to monitor temperature If the temperature falls below 1

2711E-6.14, PanelBuilder 1400e Software for Windows User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents